RAi

IS - CARRUTH

•■^^it.'^": ^f^sKtWcsa^ie^ia 'V

J. Henry Senger

§-4?

0'^%
e

^^m

ELEMENTARY

GERMAN GRAMMAR

CHARLES P. OTIS

EIGHTH EDITION
DROUGHLY revised and PRQyiDliD,^/^!^!!
NEW EXERCISES * ' ' '

WILLIAM HERBERT CARRUTH, Ph.D.

PROFESSOR OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES IN THE UNIVERSITY
OF KANSAS

NEW YORK
HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY

1905

IN MEMORIAM

Copyright

By CHARLES P. OTIS

1881, 1883, 1888

Copyright, 1889, 1893, 1904

BY

HENRY HOLT & CO.

EDITOR'S PREFACE.

Professor Otis's Elementary German has proved
to be on the whole such a serviceable book for beginners
in German, that it has seemed to me better to revise it
thoroughly than to add to the already great number of
such handbooks on the market.

The chief features of the revision are a new set of
Exercises and the fusion of the two parts into one con-
tinuous series of thirty lessons, while in addition some
subjects receive a fuller treatment in the book as it now
appears. The reasons for the changes will appeal to all
friends of Professor Otis's work. The best of exercises
grow hackneyed and wear out. The new exercises are
fuller and have a certain continuity. The practical ob-
jection to the two parts is, that teachers are tempted to
slight or to omit the second part, whereas it contains
some of the most important features of the subject.

The handbook as it now stands will meet all the needs
of high-school students, while the advanced college
student will, of course, need a more complete grammar
for reference.

W. H. C.

University of Kansas, January, 1904.

926706

Digitized by tine Internet Archive

in 2008 with funding from

IVIicrosoft Corporation

http://www.archive.org/details/elementarygermanOOotisrich

AUTHOR'S PREFACE.

This manual is intended to serve as a general intro-
duction to German, and consists of a brief outline of
the main essentials of the grammar, with exercises and
material for practice and illustration. It is therefore no
new method, and whatever merit it may have consists
in the manner of presentation. It is based on the con-
viction, that, while a systematic though brief study of
the structure of the language should form the ground-
work, there should be as much practice as possible with
the actual language both as talked and as written. Ac-
cordingly, each lesson treats of some essential of the
grammar, and provides material for practice both
written and oral.

In the grammar outline, the aim has been to present
the more essential facts as briefly and simply as pos-
sible, and in the order best favoring the early practical
use of the language. The usual order of presentation
has accordingly been deviated from in introducing the
verb earlier, and also in postponing the subjunctive
mood to the end. Less essential facts of grammar are
given in notes scattered through the lessons, which do
not, however, in every case refer to the topic under con-
sideration in the particular lesson.

VI AUTHOR S PREFACE.

In the conversations^ the arrangement is such that the
question suggests the answer. As indicated, they can
be still further extended at pleasure, what is given being
rather suggestions for treatment by question and answer
than any attempt at exhaustion of the theme. Actual
communication in the new language is thus secured
from the first, and the pupil enabled to realize that life
which the oral use of it inspires, and to gain an impres-
sion of its spirit and character.

At the end of each lesson is a short and simple read-
ing exercise. This is so arranged with translation or
notes, that the pupil will at once see the meaning, though
he may not understand the grammatical construction.
Indeed, the object of these readings is not grammar-
drill, but to furnish material for practice and memorizing,
and to gratify the natural eagerness of the beginner to
see the language itself. A considerable number of these
selections are popular German songs. Pupils should be
encouraged, if not required, to sing these. They will thus
be memorized in the surest and most agreeable manner,
and will prove to be a great assistance to further work
and in the cultivation of enthusiasm for the study.

C. P. O.

NOTE TO THE TEACHER.

It is recommended that the teacher go over the les-
son with the class in advance, explaining the grammar
topic, pronouncing and remarking upon the exercises
and conversations, and giving especial attention to the
vocabularies. The English exercises should be written
at home, and handed in for correction. When corrected
they should be copied into a book kept for the purpose
and memorized for recitation the following day.

The class may then be called upon to recite the pre-
vious German and English exercises, the latter with
books closed, the sentences in each at the same time
being varied so as to introduce other forms and words.

Blackboard-exercises are very useful, and may consist
of the writing of the English exercise for the day, to be
corrected by the teacher with the help of the class while
the pupils at their seats correct their own or their fel-
lows^ work ; in the writing of declensions, forms of the
verb, or other grammar facts, German sentences from
dictation, or English to be put into German on dictation ;
also the writing from memory of proverbs, or a reading
piece (the title being given).

The conversation exercise concludes ; here not only
the topic for the day is to be gone over, but previous

Vlll NOTE TO THE TEACHER.

ones brought up, and variations and additions introduced
as the pupil advances in vocabulary and facility.

The conversation exercise may be greatly extended
by means of questions and answers based upon the
reading pieces.

In large classes it will be found necessary, if liberal
use is made of drill and dictation and conversation, to
devote two recitations to each lesson, at least for the
first fourteen lessons. In this case the division may be
made between the German and the English exercises,
or including the correction of the latter if done in class.

With regard to the pronunciation at the beginning,
after learning the alphabet with the name and approxi-
mate sounds of the letters, the class may be directed to
turn at once to p. ii. The teacher himself will first
pronounce the words illustrative of the vowel a, then
let the pupil do the same, and so on. In practising the
lesson at home, the pupil can refer to the exposition
that precedes.

After the first nine lessons, when the pupil has ob-
tained a general view of the verb, translation may be
taken up, and alternated with the lessons. At first it
would be well for the teacher to translate beforehand to
the pupils. At each lesson in translation some part of
speech might form a special subject of study ; at first
the verb, the pupil being directed to look out and study
each one.

CONTENTS.

Lesson ' Pack

I. Alphabet and Pronunciation.

Reading. — Ende gut alles gut. Lerne recht ... 14

II. Definite Article der. Rules for Gender. Present

tense of sein.
Note i. — Sie^ " you." Note 2. — "I speak," " I do speak,"

" I am speaking " 19

Conversation. — Sprechen Sie Deutsch? .... 20
Reading. — Eile mit Weile. Das Gliick .... 20

III. " Der " Words. Present of haben.

Note 3. — " Some " not translated. Note 4. — Article for

possessive .23

Note 5. — Use oi man 25

Conversation. — Sprechen Sie Deutsch ? ... 26

Reading. — Ach, wie ist's moglich dann ? . . . .26

Ratsel 27

IV. Indefinite Article ein and ** ein " Words. Pre-

terit of sein, haben, werden.

Note 6. — " They have." Note 7. — Es gibt ... 30

Conversation. — Die Hand 33

Note 8. — Declension of ein T^^i

Reading. — tjbung macht den Meister. Der rechte Le-

benslauf. Der Esel und der Wolf 34

V. Verbs. New Conjugation.

Note 9. — "I lived," " I was living," " I did live " . . 39

Note 10. — Prepositions with the Accusative • • • 39

Conversation. — Zahlen 41

Reading . — Gleich und gleich gesellt sich gern. Was sind

das fiir Sachen ! Der Esel in der Lowenhaut . . 42

VI. Verbs. Old Conjugation.

Note II. — Prepositions governing the dative . . . 45

Conversation. — Buchstabieren 48

Reading. — Sprichwort 48

Spruch. Die wilde Taube und die Biene . 49

X CONTENTS.

Lesson Page

VII. Verbs. Old Conjugation; Classes and Ir-
regularities.
Note 12. — Prepositions with dative or accusative . . e^

Conversation. — Wort und Laut 55

Reading.— Sprich wort. Der gute Kamerad . . 56

VTII. Verbs. Compound Tenses. Haben and sein as
auxiliaries.
Note 13. — Infinitive and participle at end of sentence . 61
Conversation. — Die Redeteile. Sprichwort . . 64
Reading. — Spruch. Das Wasser 65

IX. Compound Tenses, Correspondence of Tenses.

Compound tenses of sein^ haben, werden.
Note 14. — Use oi du. Note 15. — Inversion of verb

and subject 70

Conversation. — Die Woche 72

Reading. — Sprichwort. Die Wacht am Rhein . . ^t^

X. Nouns. First Declension. Class I.

Note 16. — Transposition of the verb. Note 17. —

Endings -cheft and -lem 78

Conversation. — Der Monat. Sprichwort ... 81

Reading. — Der Tannenbaum 82

XL Nouns. First Declension. Class II.

Note 18. — Worin for m was, darin for in dem, etc. . 84
Note 19. — Time when ? and how long ? .... 86

Conversation. — Das Jahr 87

Reading. — Sprichwort 87

Die Jahreszeiten. Deutschland . . . 2>2>
XII. Nouns. First Declension. Class III. Inter-
rogative and relative pronouns.
Note 20. — Declension of compound nouns. Note
21. — Order when a dative and accusative depend upon

the same verb 91

Note 22 — Verbs followed by a dative instead of an ac-
cusative 94

Conversation. — Das Zimmer 94

Reading. — Sprichwort Zufriedenheit . , , 94> 95

CONTENTS.

XI

Lesson
XIII.

Page

XIV.

XV.

XVI.

Nouns. Second Declension. Demonstrative
and possessive pronouns.

A Table of Declensions 98

Note 23. — Mensch and Mann. Note 24. — Forma-
tion of feminine nouns in -in. Note 25. — Transla-
tion of " a cup of," " a pair of," etc 99

Conversation. — Das Zimmer loi

Reading. — Reiter's Morgenlied .... 102
Adjectives. First Declension.

Conversation. — Die Wohnung .... 108
Reading. — Wenn die Schwalben heimwarts ziehn . 109
Adjectives. Second Declension.

Conversation. — Das Haus 116

Reading. — Sprichworter. Du bist wie eine Blume 117^

Tischgebete 118

Adjectives, Comparison of.

Note 26. — Adjectives irregularly compared. . . 121
Conversation. — Die Beleuchtung .... 123
Reading. — Es ist bestimmt in Gottes Rat . . 124

XVII. Verbs, Inseparable.

Note 27. — Plural of Mantt in compounds . . 129

Conversation. — Die Stadt 132

Reading. — Die Lorelei 133

XVIII. Verbs, Separable.

Note 28. — Separable prefixes used inseparably. Note
29. — Expressions for the time of day . . . 136

Conversation. — Die Zeit 139

Reading. — Sprichwort. Der Storch. Der Araber

in der Wiiste 140

Subjunctive Mode, Conjugation.
Note 30. — Use of the conjunction w<?«;? . . . 144
Note 31. — Order in subordinate clause . . . 146
Conversation. — Der Spaziergang .... 147
Reading. — Andreas Hofer 148

Modal Auxiliaries. Ko.vnen and Durfen.
Conversation. — Messer und Bleistift . . .156
Reading, — Die seqhs Wortlein . , , . -157

XIX.

XX.

xu

CONTENTS.

Lesson Page

XXI. Modal Auxiliaries : Mogen, wollen.

Conversation. — Bei Tische .... 164

Reading. — Abschied 164

XXII. Modal Auxiliaries : Miissen, sollen.

Conversation. — Der Tramwagen . . . 170
Reading. — Die kluge Maus 171

XXIII. Verbs. Passive Voice.

Conversation. — Romane 177

Reading. — Die Frau and die Henrie. Gute Lehre 178

XXIV. Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs.

Note 32. — Government of reflexive verbs . . 182
Conversation. — Gesundheit und Wetter . . 184
Reading. — Freut euch des Lebens . . . 185

XXV. Order of the German Sentence: Princi-

pal Clauses.
Conversation. — Die Bootfahrt .... 194
Reading. — Der Lowe und der Hase . . . 194

XXVI. Order of the Sentence: Inverted and

Transposed.
Conversation. — Der Lesestoff .... 200
Reading. — Der Star 201

XXVII. The Infinitive.

Conversation. — Die Reise 208-

Reading. — Lebewohl 209

XXVIII. The Participles.

Conversation. — Der Brieftrager . . . . 216
Reading. — Das zerbrochene Ringlein . . . 217

XXIX. The Subjunctive: Details.

Conversation. — Der Spaziergang. . . . 222
Reading. — Ein Brief 223

XXX. The Indeclinables.

Conversation. — Vom Studium der Sprache . 233
Reading. — An den Mond 234

CONTENTS.

XIU

APPENDIX.

Page

Gender, Rules for

237

Double, Double Plural

238

Article, Use of

240

Declension, Exceptions to I, Class i ...

241

« (( « "2

242

" " « 3 . . .

. 242

Cases, Uses of Genitive

. 243

" " " Dative

243

" " " Accusative

• 244

Government of Verbs, Genitive ....

245

" " " Dative

246

" " Adjectives, Genitive . .

. 246

" " " Dative ....

246

" '' " Accusative . . .

• 247

Prepositions governing the Genitive

. 247

" " " Dative ....

. 248

" " '* Accusative

. 248

" " " Dative or Accusative

. 249

" Discriminated

. 249

Prefixes, Separable

. 252

Prefixes, Separable or Inseparable ....

. 253

Conjunctions, Coordinating

264

" ** Subordinating

• 255

Strong, or Irregular Verbs, List of .

. 259

German Script

. 271

Vocabulary, German-English

277

Vocabulary, English-German ....

• 319

Index

343

ELEMENTARY GERMAN..

LESSON

I.

ALPHABET.

LETTER.

NAME.

LETTER.

NAME.

St a

a

d

9J n

n

en

93b

b

bd

D 0

0

0

6 c

c

tsd

5P|)

P

pd

S) b

d

dd

a q

q

ku

(£ e

e

d

$R r

r

er

gf

f

ef

® f§

s

es

®S

g

g^

2: t

t

td

§£)

h

hd

U u

u

u ipo)

3 t

i

e

33 t)

V

fow^

Si

J

ybt

aSto

w

vd

S^ f

k

kd

X I

X

tx

S I

1

el

?) tJ

y

ipsilon

3Km

m

em

Umlauts,

3 a

z

tset

t

a

D 6

ii

it

a

6

ix

Remarks on the Alphabet.
2. The German Printed Character. — The Ger-
man character is used in newspapers and the ordi-
nary works of Hterature. In scientific books and

* ow as in cow.

2 ALPHABET. [Les. I.

periodicals it has, however, been almost entirely
. superceded by the Roman type, and will probably
"'yield sJt ill 'further to the latter, which is simpler and
p^ervaijs -.geh'erally elsewhere. The German type,
'as the* sfyle in common use in literary journals and
books, is employed both in our Exercises and in the
Vocabulary.

As the German printed character closely re-
sembles our "Old English" style, the individual
letters will be readily recognized ; yet it requires
much practice to become familiar with them in
the connected text. Special attention should be
given to letters which resemble each other. These
are :

Capitals,'' S&.SS^) ©,(£; S),D,Q; ®,@; %%'Si.
Small letters, 6, b, f) ; f, f ; !, t ; r, j.
Combined forms, ^ {ch), d {ck)\ ^ {sz), ^ {tz),
(For Alphabet in German script see Appendix.)

3, The Umlauts are simple sounds like the other vowels.
They are of later origin than these, and this name is given
them with reference to their being modifications of other
vowel sounds. As capitals, they are written 5(e, De, Ue, or
at present preferably ^, £), U.

4. The letters c, i and i), borrowed from the Roman
alphabet, rarely»occur in any words originally German, and
c only in the combinations c^, c! and fc^.

* Capitals / and / are identical in form : the first may be known by
its being followed by consonants chiefly ; the latter is followed by vowels
only.

Les. I.] PRONUNCIATIOM. 5

5. The German uses capital initial letters for the first
word in a sentence, for all nouns (and words used as nouns),
for adjectives, pronouns, and ordinals used in royal titles,
for pronouns employed in address, especially in correspon-
dence, for adjectives derived from names of persons, and
adjectives ending in -er derived from names of places.
Usage varies considerably however in this matter. Small
initials are used for adjectives of nationality, as englifc^,
" English "; also for the pronoun id), " I."

Pronunciation.*

6. The German language as written is much
more nearly phonetic than is English or French,
and in so far the difficulty of learning its pronun-
ciation is much less.

* In a variety of points there is no one single and only correct German
pronunciation, any more than this would be true of English. There was
a time when the pronunciation of the province of Hanover was regarded
as the standard, but that time is past. However, in German the pro-
vincial variations are greater than in English. In general there are two
divisions : stage and every-day pronunciation, illustrated in the difference
of final g, SB eg in the one = veck, in the other = vech. Again there are
certain marked differences between the North and South German, and
while the former is apt to prevail owing to the national capital being in
North German territory, it is itself a mark of provincialism to charac-
terize the pronunciation of any large number of educated South Germans
as inelegant or incorrect, ©te like English see and ©oet^e like English
Kd-te (almost) are South German, while the North German pronounces
the words zee and Go-td.

But it would be a serious error for the student to assume, on account
of this diversity, that it is a matter of indifference how he pronounces, or
that he cannot acquire a good German pronunciation. In fact it is easy
for a flexible American youth to learn to pronounce like a German. In
the main the following notes will be a safe guide to the average German
pronunciation, though they must be interpreted with the aid of imitation
of the living voice. These notes must overlook a vast deal of precise

4 " PRONUNCIATION. [Les. I.

7. The greatest difficulty in learning to pro-
nounce German is presented by the new sounds ;
that is, those which are unfamiliar in English.
These are principally the Umlaut vowels i3 and ii,
the gutteral g (c^), the rolled r, and initial 5.

8. As these sounds are unfamiliar, much prac-
tice is necessary in order to train the organs of
speech to make them with accuracy and readiness.
The following descriptions and directions will aid
the beginner, in addition to the assistance by im-
itation from the teacher.

0 long = i (father) : ^abe.

a short = nearly o in hot^ as spoken in the Middle West :
^at.

at = ei = I in mile : 33aiern.

an = ou in out^ as spoken in the Middle West : au§,

a^ == at ^= I ; ^al)ern.

a (called a-umlaut or modified a) has nearly the same
sound as e. In fact, ci, when short, is identical with short
e ; when long it has properly a somewhat more open somid
than e, like the French e inpere, and resembles the English
sound in wkere : $8dter, ^dtte.

an = zvi^oi in oil : §aute.

details and of exceptions. For more minute information, as well as for
most lucid and impartial exposition of the whole subject of speech, pupils
as well as teachers are referred to Hempl's German Orthography and
Phonology^ Ginn & Company, Boston. For a precise description of the
method of forming EngUsh and German sounds, see Grandgent's Ger^
man and English Sounds^ D. C. Heath & Co., Boston.

One general direction should be taken to heart by all learners : Open
the mouth wider than is your wont, make the long vowels a, 0, u full
and prolonged and do not fear to exaggerate the peculiar German sounds
and tone.

Les. I.] PRONUNCIATION. ^ 5

h initial and medial between vowels = 5y final and be-
fore unvoiced consonants =p (unvoiced but usually less
explosive) : S3ube, §(6t, Sob.

C (occurs independently only in foreign words), before e,
i, tj, a, o^/i-/ (Cicero, ©afar; before a, o, u and consonants
= ^/ S^acao, 5lccorb.

djf initial before a, o, u and consonants = ^, (but in
French loan-words, like S^ef = sh) ; initial before e, i, d, and
final d) is the guttural spirant which has no familiar corre-
spondent in English (g when final has usually the same
sound, though less explosive) : S^ina, (5^^ara!ter.

The German guttural spirant is of two varieties.
It is softer and made farther forward in the mouth
after e and t, than after a, o and u. As a rule it
will be found that this distinction is made involun-
tarily ; if not, the teacher must insist upon it.

For the Jirst variety of the guttural approximate
the middle of the tongue to, but not touching, the
roof of the mouth, and then expel the breath, being
careful to keep the tip of the tongue down, and
not to make the English s/i sound. The tongue
position is the same as for English k in key except
that there must be no complete closure of the oral
passage. A prolonged whispered kej/ ending with
a quick push of the breath without closure of the
oral passage will give the sound closely. If then
the initial f be gradually eliminated the result will
be a fair pronunciation of German id^.

Examples : id^, rld^tig, re^t, !i(^crtt.

6 PRONUNCIATION [Les. I

For the second variety of the guttural, approxi-
mate the back of the tongue to but not touching
the back part of the mouth. Be careful not to
make the English k sound, though the position,
saving the closure, is the same. Whispering the
syllable ko with the same directions as in the preced-
ing paragraph will result in a fair pronunciation of
German SJod^.

Examples : %^^\,tx, i8ud^»

^^ (in one syllable) = ;r, as £)d^§.

i^ = k: baden.

b initial and medial between vowels = d; final = / (un-
voiced but somewhat less explosive) : ba, ttjarb,

c long == ay short = e rcibet^ be§ ; in unaccented syllables
especially final, e has an obscure sound, like the a in English
cojnma, which leads to its frequent elision, beffen, ^abe.
Note that this unaccented e is the only German vowel that
is commonly slighted or represented by an apostrophe.

ci = I in bite^ tnein*

eu = oi in oil^ T^eute.

f=/frei.

g initial in native words and before consonants in the
same syllable =^ in ^^^, ge^en ; initial in French loan-
words = 2" in azure^ ®ente ; medial and final g is a guttural
spirant, usually voiced when between vowels or voiced con-
onants. For the method of formation see c^ ante. When
final, though unvoiced, the spirant is usually less violent
than d), Xag, ^age.

^ initial ==-^, l^eute; final or after t in the same syllable I)
is silent ; Xo^. Note the frequent combination t^ = simple
/, English th being one of the sounds not found in German,
^I)eorie.

Les. I.] PRONUNCIATION. 7

{ long (printed always i:^ or ie) = e in mete; short =2 in
bit^ i^n, (ntte.

ic = e in mete^ fie ; but in unaccented syllables of Latin
loan-words =e-e\ or je, as in ^ragobte, ©lorie,

\=y in you J but aspirated, ja: in French words = 2-^.

f ==y^, !ein.

( = / (the lip-opening wider and narrower than in Eng-
lish), lieben, ^etl ; H after t and followed by a vowel in French
loan-words == ly-^ as in S3inef .

m = m^ mein.

n==n, nein.

ng = ng in singer^ ©inger ; but not = ng+g as in finger
(except in some proper nouns, as Qngo),

0 long = o in fiote^ loben; short, the same sound but
uttered very quickly without any shade of a following oo as
in English, as in New England pronunciation of 'stone.'
Avoid pronouncing C^ott like either goat or got; distinguish
between ®ot^e {Goth) and (556tte (dative of God).

ii Umlaut. — To pronounce o, round the lips as when oo
in boot is uttered, and then pronounce a, or vice versa. Des-
cribed phonetically this is the rounded mid-front vowel. It
is not a diphthong, and differs only by the rounding from
English a. Many Germans so pronounce it, and o and e
are recognized as more or less permissible rhymes. Avoid
giving it the sound of u in fur, as often erroneously directed.
Do not pronounce ' Goethe * Gurty,

Examples: (long) O, ^onig, @ot!^c, jd^on, (short) bffnen,
fonncn,

oi (in French loan-words) == wcij as Xotle'tte.
p =pj' pt) (in Greek loan-words) =/; as Zdt^xap^.
q (only in the combination qu) == ^iv or kv with the v
quite weak, iQuefle.

8 PRONUNCIATION. [Les. I.

X = r, but usually trilled either with the tip of the tongue,
or, more commonly, with the uvula or even with the vocal
chords, rot, fret» The uvular r sounds like a more forcible
and prolonged d) after a. Note that r is never silent, as in
parts of New England when final, nor a mere vocalic glide
as in many other parts of the United States.

f (§ final) = s initial, WaS ; f initial varies from initial s to
z, depending on the stress and force of adjacent syllables
and the part of the country, (5ie jagen. Either sound is in
accord with good usage, but a medium between the extremes
is advisable. Initial before t and p, j = s/i, but is also heard
as simple s, fte^en, fpre(i)en.

^ = i" initial, §a^»

f(i^ = s/i, fc^eu.

t == /fy but remember that t^ never = /A, the f) being
silent, though a sign of length for the preceding vowel ;
t before i -f- another vowel, in Latin loan-words = /s, portion.

tt long = do in dooty u short = the same sound pronounced
briefly, but not far from do in good.

it Umlaut. — To pronounce ii, round the lips as when oo in
doof is uttered, and then pronounce e, or vice versa. It is
the rounded high-front vowel. It differs only by the round-
ing from English e or German t, and many Germans so
pronounce it. Like o, it is a simple vowel, and not a diph-
thong. It is the same as the sound of the French u as in tu.

Examples : (long) Ubel, ®^iilcr; (short) %\M, fiittcn.

ttt = oo'-^-i^ with slight preponderance of accent on the
first vowel. Occurs only in §ui and ^fui.

tto = u'-f-o, the 0 much slighted, in Swiss names, as
^uoni.

t) =/, t)on ; save in some foreign loan-words, such as
iStoIlne, ^enu§, where it ■= z/.

Les. I.] PRONUNCIATION. 9

to =Vf but often made with the two lips instead of with
the lower lip and upper teeth. The voicing is less obvious
and the spirant less forcible than in English v, tvtlj, Some.

^=x, eixraieren.

t| = e, many words formerly written with t) have now
substituted i, as in ©ilbe, ©til ; there is a pedantic tendency
to pronounce t) in Greek loan-words = il, ^tjljfif.

5 = fs. Medial and final this combination is common in
English ; initial also it is common colloquially and should
cause no difficulty For instance, W /// (= // ts in) =
3inn perfectly, Ws on (= it is on) = Qaljn nearly. ^ = ts.

g. Quantity. — Vowels, even when not varying in
quality, are in quantity either long or short. Each
vowel has thus two sounds and no more. How-
ever, e in an unaccented syllable usually has a
lighter shade than elsewhere, corresponding nearly
to the sound of a in the English " comma."

IP. The following general rules determine the
quantity in a great number of cases : —

1. A vowel doubled or foUovt^ed by another vowel or
^ is long.

2. A vowel is also long in an open syllable, i. e. in a
syllable ending with a vowel, but this does not apply
to final -c. (See rules for syllabification, p. 10, §15.)

3. A vow^el is short before a doubled consonant, and
generally before a group of two different consonants.

II. Vowels are doubled for the purpose of indi-
cating quantity, and are not therefore to be pro-
nounced as diphthongs. The vowel t is never
doubled, but the sign of ie is used instead, which

lO PRONUNCIATION [Les. I.

accordingly has the sound of the EngUsh e ; u
never occurs double.

12. So far as the quantity is not determined by
these rules, it must be ascertained from the dic-
tionary. It is not desirable, however, to direct the
attention of the beginner too minutely to the sub-
ject of quantity at first. It is best learned by
practice and observation.

13. Accent. — The accent in original German words is
in general the same as in English, i. e. on the root syllable,
usually the first, unless the word begins with one of the
prefixes : be:=, etn)3=, t\i\-, tx^, ge=, tier=, itx^, which are never
accented. But verbs in -ieren always have the accent on
the ie of this ending.

14. Foreign Words. — These vary greatly in their accent,
according as they have become more or less fully naturalized,
being sometimes accented as in the foreign tongue, some-
times as in German, and sometimes partly in one way and
partly in the other. Most loan-words from the Latin and
French have the accent on the last syllable. A standard
Fremdworterbuch is the best guide.

Examples : ©otbat', ©tubent', patient', tultur', ©eticrd', 9^c*
giment', but ^rofef for, S)o!'tor.

15. Division into Syllables. — The syllabification of Ger-
man words follows the English rather than the American
usage. A consonant between two vowels generally goes
with the latter vowel, except in compounds. For this pur-
pose d), frf}, '\^^, tl), and |)f after m and r, are considered as
representing one sound. Of several medial consonants,
the last alone goes with the second syllable.

Les. I.] EXERCISES. II

Examples : %mt^xi4a, tre^eii, 2Jlo=ri^, !Do=ro4^e=a, iBre-men,
Xd'AicAmxt, barium, !^ang=fam:=!eit, aitf^er^te^^^en, Ia=c^en, Io=fc^en,
Or4t)o=gra:=|3^te, ^cir^er, 2BaHer, !(o^=fen, §e=^e, ^ar|)=fen, em^:'
finben, ginger, giig-e (ii long), gluj=fe (ii short).

i6. In learning to pronounce German (as any new lan-
guage), the attention of the beginner should be called to a
distinct and forcible utterance. In this way the various or-
gans and means of speech are brought into more energetic
action than in pronouncing English, to which he has become
accustomed, and the sounds of which he has been trained to
make. Raising the voice and speaking loud will tend to
produce this greater energy of action. Practice in reading
aloud and committing to memory are fruitful aids in accom-
plishing the desired object of training the organs of speech.

Exercise i. (a.)

VOWELS.

Longo — I. 93a jel Slal gar. SBagner. ja^m.
§aar. ©aale. Ial)m, 3l6enb.

2. geber. §erbe, geben. @c^li:)ert @eele. (See.
9?e^. gef)t ©pree. ^affee,

3. Siebe. t)ter, grtebrid^. S)te6. fteben. 3Bten.
Sier. SBte^baben, Dter, SKelobte' (te = ^).

4. 3iofe. fo. 9to^r. Dber. aJioor. So^. Soot
.^anno't)er. 9Kenbetefot)n. Sorelei'.

5. Slut. gut. U^Ianb. U^r. lM)t. ©eburt.
©ruber, nun. bu.

6. Safe. Saber. S)auemarf. fpat.

7. SRomer. preu. §i)f)Ie. ®otl^e. Sontg. fc^on.
Dfeu. totter. DI.

8. libel iiber. fiir. ©riiber. !uf)I.

12 EXERCISES. [Les. I.

Short. — I. bann. alt Hamburg. SKagbeburg,
tail fiatte. ^ant Warn, all an. Sl6t S3alL
^anh, §anb.

2. beffer. ©nbe. Setten. effen. ©Ibe. SKo'fel.
SInberfen. S^e&r. ©onne.

3. in. Sip))e. tnilb. ajfori^. ^i^mavd,

4. tDoIIen. fomnten. !often. {)offen. ®ott. offen.
95onn. torn. foil, moltk,

5. bumm. ajfntter. unter. SKunb. Ulm. |)U§.
mnU, S^ruft. SBnrft.

6. §anbe. {)atte. talte. §anbel.

7. ®otter. ofter. fonnen. totn.

8. ^iitte. SWiitter. fiillen. ^Jurnberg.

Exercise i. (b.)

DIPHTHONGS.

1. Wal tdfer. Wain. §a^ben. Satj'ern (or
S^aiern).

2. 9ieim. mein. greif)ett. retten. 9lt)etn. fetn
(archaic fe^n). gret)tag. SRe^erbeer. .^e^fe.

3. §au^. 93aum. an§. Man§, S)onau. Sluer-
bad). gau[t. §anff. grau. fanl

4. §en. treu. greunb. S)entfd^Ianb. ^Prenfeen.
Seufel. t)eute. Seute. neu.

5. 9Jaume. §anfer. graulein.

Exercise i. (c.)

CONSONANTS.

I. (h) Soa. 6rett. (Sbbe. ®Ibe. ®ra6. @taO.
gef)abt. ^ab^Surg. Berlin'.

Les. I.] EXERCISES. 1 3

2. (c) S^ato. Eoncert, spelled also S[!onJert^ ©icero.

3. (c^ = f) e^rifi e^aral'ter. Sf)or, (= rf)) 6£)emie.
ef)ilt. e^tna. ^^// e^amtffo (c^ = sh),

4. (t^^) gu^^. Dd)^. SBad^^, ®a^^.

5. (b) bit. Xrobbel ©onau. Sob, ©tabt. Sarfe:=
6ab, tnilb, bid. bret.

6. (g) ®ip^. ®arten. General', ©^tnna'fium.
S)og9e. 9tegtment^ S^agge.

7. (guttural g, (i^) ^onig. giittg. id^. SBeg. Stag,
fodjen. Sud) aKiinc^en. ^etbelberg. S^ad^t. SteHg.
SDZagb.

8. (§) §eu. if)n. rol^. 3:^eorte^ ruf)en. 2Bt(f)eIm.

9. (i) ja. jung. Sube. Sungfrau. Sournal (pr.
zho5r-naF).

10. (I) Stebe. toa. Staef (pr. bil-yet^. ^poftiaon'
(pr. pos-tel-yong).

^^' (wfl) Si^'9^^» ftngert. lange. bringen. Stngen.
©ottingen. Siffingen.

12. {^^) ^pojopt)ie'. ©eograp^ie'. 2rbo()3^. ^^0:^
togral^t)'. ^ro))I)ef.

13. (q«) Ciuarj. Ouelle. Duafer.

14. (r) 9ftab. @rbe. 93urg. §err. S)re§ben. Sremen.
©rtmm. ^prinj 9tu|)red^t. frt[d^. fret. fro^.

15. (f) @of)n. ®ta^. §au^. ©tegfrieb.

16. (f)>^ ft = shp, sht), fpre^en. ©tall. ©tein.
©trot), ©traufe. ©tuttgart. ©tubenf. ©trapurg.

17. (f^) ©d)iff. 5Ifc^e. finbtfc^. ©djtCer. ©^tDe^^
ben. englifd^. ©d^ubert

14 EXERCISES. [Les. I.

^8. (ft) §a^. ©c£)Iofe. baf3.

19. (t) portion'. 9^ation^ ©tatton'. Sor.

20. (t^) Stjea'ter. ®ot{)a. 2;f)iVrtn9en. greifc
gratt). SDorotfie'a. 8)a^reutt)'. Sutf)er.

21. (ti) SSater. t)oII. fret)eln. In the following
^=v: @!Iat)e. S^ene'big. SSe'nu^. Unteerfttaf. SStrgir.

22. (to) SBetn. 3Beber, 2Befer. aBtIf)etm.

24. (5) jefin. ju. 3eii Sans, jegt Sett)sig.

A few connected phrases introducing delicate shades of dis-
tinction: 2)er ^nab' l)at !nci)3pe §ofen (The boy has close-fit-
ting trousers). 2JJein ^ate bat um ein '^h^ (My god-father asked
for a bath). S)ag S)ad^ Icigt ben jlag herein (The roof lets in
the daylight). Sin bixnter iBiinb (A motley club). S)cr 2:ob tft
tot (Death is dead). Sag nta^t bie 2)^agb ? (What is the maid
doing), (gr tt)irft ben Setg in ben %t\^ (He throws the dough
into the pond). @ie nirft ni(^t (She does not nod).

Reading i.

®|)rt^it}0tt {'' Saw'' = saying)

(£nbe gut aEe^ gut.

End good all good.

"All's well that ends well."

fietne tCftt {Learn rightly),

SBa§ bu leruft, ba§ lerne red)t,

What thou learnest, that learn rightly,

aSa^ bu mad)ft, ba^ mact)' ui^t fd^tei^t.

What thou makest, that make not badly.

Les. II.] THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 1 5

LESSON II.

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

Rules for Gender — Present Tense of fern.

1. In the use of the article ^ as in other matters
assume that German is like English until the con-
trary has been remarked.

2. 3^ 6in bcr So^n be^ aJZannc^ in '^txa ©atten

I am the son of the man in the garden

unb bic %x^vi im ^aufc tft bc^^ 9Jfannci§ SKuttcr.

and the woman in the house is the man's mother.

3. Learn this sentence, and derive from it the
principles involved in the exercises of this lesson,
viz., the case of the predicate noun and the position
of the genitive or possessive relative to the noun it
limits.

4. Gender. There are three genders, masculine,
feminine, and neuter. In German nouns without
sex may be masculine or feminine as well as neuter,
and aside from such rules as those given below this
arbitrary gender must be learned by memory alone.

5. Rules for Gender. Natural gender deter-
mines grammatical gender, with but few exceptions,
i. e. names of male living beings are masculine (ber),
names of female living beings are feminine (bte).
The noun agent, formed from nearly every verb-
stem with the ending -er, is masculine, but may
be made feminine by adding -in: ber Setjrer, the

1 6 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. [Les. II.

{man-)teackery bie £e^rertn, {woman-)teacher. For
detailed rules see Appendix.

6. Cases. There are four cases : nominative^
genitive, dative, and accusative. The nominative,
genitive, and accusative correspond in general to
the English nominative, possessive (or "of" case),
and objective, respectively. The dative is the case
of the indirect object, the English "to" or "for*'
case.

7- The following facts of declension in general
are to be noted : —

1. ^ is not the ending of the plural, but of the
genitive singular of most neuter and masculine
nouns.

2. The dative plural always ends in n ; the other
three cases are alike.

3. In the feminine and neuter singular, and in
the plural, the nominative and accusative are the
same.

4. Feminine nouns do not change form in the
singular ; the article alone shows the case.

8. Declension of the Definite Article bcr, the.

Singular.

Plural.

M.

F.

N.

M.F.N.

Nom.

ber,

bie,

tsta^,

^Xt,

the.

Gen.

be§,

ber,

be^,

bcr,

of the.

Dat.

bcm,

ber,

bcm,

bctt,

to the.

Ace.

ben,

bie,

"fs^^,

bie,

the.

(When stressed the word also means this or that^

Les. II.]

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

17

Vocabulary

MASCULINE.

htX WldXtUf the man, husband.

bcr Garten, the garden.

ber S5ater, the father.

bcr So^U, the son.

ber ^MXCiS^ the dog.

be)§ ^lannc^, of the man.

bC!^ So^nCig, ^//5/f son.

be§ ^atcr;3, of the father.

FEMININE.

btC fJtftU, ^>^^ woman, wife.
bic SD'Jutter, //^^ mother.
bte ^Or^tcr, //^^ daughter.
'^Xt '^i^^sX^ the city.

bte ^ame, //^^ lady.

NEUTER.

ba)§ $aU)§, //^^ house.
'tSXt ^ittber, the children.

ttJO, where?

Unb, ^?2^. flein, small, short.

ttier, w/5^ .? ittttfi/ young.

UX^tf not. W^^f handsome, pretty y fine.

aud^, «/j^, ^f?^. Utt'arttg, ill-behaved.^

^\i, old. griltt, ^r<?^«.

grtl^, great, tall, W^^tf^lf homely. ^

Remark. — In learning German nouns, care should be taken
always to prefix the article, as the best way of fixing in mind the
proper gender; as ber 2)^ann, bie grau, \i^^ §aii«.
For idiomatic uses of the Article see Appendix.
The forms bctn, "^0^%, bcr coalesce frequently with certain pre-
positions, as im, for in bent, ans for an \iQ<^, ^ur for gn ber.
Inflection of the Present Tense of fettt, to be,
X^ bin, / am. ttjit fittb, we are.

( btt bift, thou art. j t^t fcib, ye are.

\ @ie fittb, you are. \ ^te fittb, you are.

er (fie, t^) \% he {she, it) is fie fittb, they are.

Exercise II.

I. S)er Warm tft nii^t jung. 2. ®r ift ber S8ater ber
Stnber. 3. 3Bo finb bie tinber ? 4. ©inb fie im ^aufe ?
5. ®ag §au^ ift grofe unb pfetid^, fie finb in bem

1 8 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. [Les. IL

®arteiL 6. S)er §unb ift and) im ®arten. 7. 3[t ber
©arten fc£)on ? 8. ®r ift gro^ unb fdjon. 9. 9Bo ift bte
aWutter ber ^tnber? 10. Sft fie and) im ®arten?

11. @ie ift (e^i) nid}t, fie ift im §aufe. 12. (Sie ift jimg
unb fd^on. 13. S)ie Sinber fittb and) ]d)on. 14. ©inb
fie and) bie Stinber ber grau? 15. @ie finb (e^5).
16. aSer ift bag Sinb? 17. S^ ift bie Sod^ter beg JDJanneg.
18. ©ie ift jung unb Hetn. 19. S)er ©o^n ift aud) fiein.
20. S)er §unb ift ber §unb beg @ol)neg unb nid^t ber
%od)kx, 21. S)ag §aug ift bag |)aug beg SJJanneg unb
and) ber ^^^au. 22. ©ie finb in ber ©tabt 23. 9Bo
ftnb©ie? 24. SBir finb im ^aufe. 25. ^art, bu bift un=
artig. 26. Sd^ bin (eg) md)t 27. 9Ber ift bag?
28. "i^a^ ift ber 95ater ber SJinber.

. * Words in parentheses are not to be rendered in translation ;
e8 refers to im ©artcu. German cannot leave the predicate noun
or adjective or verb understood, as in English, but expresses it by
e§,— not by fo.

Exercise 2.

I. The man is old. 2. He is old and gray. 3. Is he
the father of the woman ? 4. He is not the father;
he is the husband of the woman. 5. And the woman
is young and handsome. 6. She is the mother of
the son. 7. Where is the child ? 8. It is naughty, it
is in the house. 9. The daughter is in the garden.
10. Is she the daughter of the man ? n. She is [it].'

12. She is good and pretty. 13. The father is in the
city. 14. The city is gray and old. 15. The garden

Les. II.] THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. I9

is green and pretty. i6. Who are you.? 17. We are
the children of the man. 18. I am the son, she is the
daughter. 19. And who is the man .? 20. He is the
father of the children. 21. We are in [the] father's
garden.

^German cannot leave an adjective or substantive implied or
understood, but always represents it, when repetition is desired,
by ba§ or c^. Words in brackets are not needed in the original
language, but must be rendered in translation.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

f^rCti^Ctt Sic, do you speak, are bcr O'iuffe, the Russian.

you speaking? bCt ^ftttC, the Dane.

tC^I f^tcr^C, / speak, I do speak, bCt Sc^ttJCbc, the Swede.

I am speaking, bci* ^'^^ -WX-tX, the Spaniard.

>^tx\)^X\^i^ who speaks? "^^CUtft^l,* German {the Ger-

tX f^ttd^t, he speaks. man language)^

ja, yes. nciu, no. ©Uglifrf), English.

vX^i^^ nothing. fjratt=50'=fif(^, French.

bcr XiCUtfr^e, the German. ^M\t'\\\\6), Italian.

bcr ©nglanbcr, the English- D^Juffift^, Russian.

man. '^m\\^, Danish.

bcr grait^ofc, the Frendunan. <Sj^nJCbif(ift, Swedish.

bcr ^-'i^XV'^'XitX, the Italian. ©pailtft^, Spanish.

* This and the following words are capitalized only when used substantively
= the German language, etc.

Note i. — In German, @tc (with capital (S) is "you," whether
one or more persons are addressed, and the verb is always in the
plural. This is the general "you." 2)u is used only to relatives,
children and servants, and i^r is its plural.

Note 2. — 3c^ fprec^e expresses the three EngHsh forms, " I
speak," " I do speak," " I am speaking." German has no sep-
arate emphatic, interrogative and progressive verb-forms.

20 THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. [Les. II.

Conversation i. — Spred?en Ste Deutfd??

i\ ©l^rec^en ©ie ©eutfc^?

2. 3a, ic^ f^red)e 'Deutfd^.
I. (Spxt^m ©ie (Sngtijclj?

2. 3^/ i^ f^recf)e ©ngltfd).

Etc., etc.

I. aSer fpri^t ®eutj^ ?

2. 2)er Seutfc^e f))ric^t S^eutfc^.
I. aBer fpridjt ©nglifd;?

2. 2)er ©ngldnber f))rirf)t Snglifd^.

Etc., etc.
Reading 2.

eife mit SScite.

Hasten with delay.

**Make haste slowly."
aBillft bu immer tDciter f^tpeifen'?

Willt thou always farther roam?

©ief), ba^ ®ute liegt fo nal)\

See, the good lies so near,

Serne nur ba^ ®Iucf ergreifen,

Learn only happiness to seize.

S)enn ba^ ©liid ift immer ba.

For happiness is always here.

' Note the order of the German words, which is here normal
and in many respects rigid. For rules, see Lessons XXV and
XXVL

Les. III.] ^^bcr" WORDS. 21

LESSON III.

liefer and other words declined like bcr»

^,bcr" WORDS. — PRESENT OF ^alJCtt*

1. Depend upon resemblajices in sound m learn-
ing the Germmi vocabulary^ as in 93ater, 3}Jiitter,
©ruber, but remark the exceptions : tDcr is not * where,'
tPO is not * who/ U)ie is not * we.'

2. ^cr ® chiller itt jenem ©arteit \^^i getui^ biefc

The scholar in yonder garden has certainly this

SBIumc ; ftc tft f^on Blau.

flower; it is beautiful(ly) blue.

3. Learn this sentence, analyze it and derive from
it the case after * in ', the case of the object of a
transitive verb, and the agreement of the pronoun.

4. biefer is decHned hke ber, except that it has
in the neuter singular nominative and accusative -e^
instead of -a^, and in the plural and feminine singu-
lar nominative and accusative -e instead of -ie.

5. Declension of biefer, this.

Singular.

M. F. N.

Norn, bicfcr, bicfc, bicfci^,

Gen. bicfe^, bicfcr, bicfe^,

Dat. biefcm, bicfer, biefcm,

Ace. bicfctt, biefc, bicfei^,

6. Like btefer are declined : jencr, **that," '* yon-
der " : luelc^cr^ " which " ; jeber^ '' every " ; ntanc^cr,

Plural.

M.F.N.

this.

bicfC, these.

of this.

biefer, of these.

to this.

btCfCtt, to these.

this.

biefc, these.

22 „bcr" WORDS. [Les. III.

"many," "many a"; folc^cr, "such/' ''such a"
and a few others. It will be convenient to call
these ^,ber'^ words. They are both pronouns and
adjectives.

7. ®iefcr and jencr are used especially in contrast ;
when only one object is pointed out biefer is often
used for Enghsh tJiat. In sequence biefer means
the lattery jener the former.

8. The contracted neuter singular pronoun bie^,
or ba^, is commonly used as subject in first calling
attention to an object without regard to the gender
or number of the predicate noun = this or these.
®ie^ tft inein ^ater, ba^ finb metne Stnber, the verb
here agreeing with the predicate noun.

9. S)er also serves, when stressed, as a demon-
strative, this, that, or an emphatic he, the genitive
forms in this case being lengthened to beffen, bcren,
beffen, beren and the dative plural to bencn.

10. For the oblique cases of the demonstrative
or the personal pronoun governed by a preposition,
when the reference is not to a person, German uses
a compound of "ho, with the preposition, instead
of Don \^zvi\ (biefcm), bal)on, etc. Note that while
this substitute is archaic in English {thereof) it is
colloquial in German ; tnir fpredjen bat)on, zve are
speaking of it (or that).

Les. III.] ,,bcr" WORDS. 23

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE. NEUTER.

ber <S(^tt(er, the scholar, pupil. "^^^ 23urf|, the book,

t^tt ^vnttXf the df^other. ba§ ^apicv', the paper,

bcr ??reu«b, the friend. ^.^^^ ^^^^^ ^^_

be§ ©diulerl, ./ //5. ../,./ar, ^^^^ ^,^^^, ^j^^ ^^,,

//.. seholar's. ^. ^^^^_

bc8 SBruberS, of the brother, !^^^^ ^^^_

the brother's. jj^^J^ ^^^^

ItUM, now ; well (colloquial at
FEMININE. beginning of sentence).

biC 8ti)ttieftcr, the sister. baUOtl, of it {thai).

bic greUttbttt, the {lady) friend. gCttJt^, certainly.
bie S3Ul1tte, the flower, fel)r, 2^^?:^, z^^O' w^^^/5.

Remark. — For words not given here, see general vocabulary
at the end of the book. So hereafter.

Inflection of the Present Tense of I)aBeit, to have.

\6) ^aBc, I have. tOXX i^aBCH, we have.

btt ^aft, thou hast. ii|r (^abct) ^(i% ye have.

Sie ^abctt, you have. ©ie Ijabctt, you have.

tX (fie, t^) ^aif he {she, it) has. fie ^abett, they have.

Note 3. — " Some " in the English expressions, " some paper,"
*' some water," etc., unstressed, should not be translated in Ger-
man. " Some " standing alone is ettt)a^, also etnige (pi.).

Note 4. — The definite article in German serves instead of a
possessive adjective when the possessive relation is evident, as,
9lei(^eu ®ie mtr bie §anb, Give me your hand.

Exercise III.

I. aSer ift btefer maim? 2. (£r t[t be^ ©rubers
greunb. 3. S)iejer grcunb be^3 93riiber^ ift ber SSatcr
jene§ ©djitler^. 4. Sft cr nicljt audj ber greunb bcr

24 „bcr" WORDS. [Les. hi.

©c^iucftcr ? 5- 3a, cr ift (e^). 6. aSelc^e^ Sud^ i)ahcn
©ic ha ? 7- Sci^ ift be^^ Sruber^ 93uc^. 8. Seber ©cpler
Ijat biefe^ 85u(^. 9. 9Sir Ijabm e^ ^ nitf)t. 10. SJiun,
@ie finb nic^t @d)u(er. n. Seber @if)uler ^at autf)
^papier. 12. S)tefer SJfann i)at S3ud) unb ^a|)ter. 13. S)te
©c^iifer [inb tm ©arten be^ TOmmc^. 14. S)er S)?ann
ift ber 95ater btefe^ @c£)u(er^. 15. S)ie grau unb bie
@(i)tt)efter be^ 9Kanne§ [inb and) im ®arten. 16. aSa^
Ijaben bie 3 ba ? 17. @ie ()aben ba^ S3uc^ be^ 93rnber^.
18. Unb tDO ift nun 4 biefer ©arten ? 19. S)er @o[)n be^
SKanne^ fpric^t bat)on, 20. Ser ®arten ber a}futter ift
griin unb fd)ijn. 21. Sft jeber ®arten fcf)on ? 22. 9?ein,
getpi^ nic^t, mandjer ©arten ift f)d^lic^. 2^. 3(6er, ift
nidjt jebe Slume fdjon ? 24. S)iefe 93(ume ift flein unb
bian, 25. S)a^ ift SSergi^meinnic^t.

^ If referring to the brother of the speaker, render my. * Note
the order. German has no contraction corresponding to ' haven't/
but may contract !^aben C§ to 'ijahtlV^. ^ Refer to paragraph 9,
Lesson 3. *nnn = we/ly may stand thus in the predicate.

Exercise 3.

I. Who is that lady? 2. She is the sister of the
pupil. 3. The sister of which pupil is she ? 4. Of that
pupil there in the house. 5. This pupil is the friend
of my J sister. 6. Have you not a flower.? 7. Yes,
the flower is pretty (and) blue. 8. Where do you
keep 2- the flower ? 9. We have it now in the garden.
10. [The] father and [the] mother are in the garden.

Les. III.] ^^ber" WORDS. 25

II. Which flower have you in the house .? 12. We have
this flower in the house also. 13. Every pupil has
this flower. 14. It is the forget-me-not. 15. Well, the
flower is certainly very pretty. 16. Have they (some) 3
paper ? 17. Yes, they have this in the house also.
18. Which book has the man ? 19. Every man has this
book now. 20. This man has'nt it. 4 21. He is speak-
ing 5 of it. 22. It is new and very pretty.

^ Render by definite article. ^ do you keep, Ijobett @ie. ^ Words
in parentheses are needed in English but not to be rendered in
German, ^tr. Has it not. ^ See Lesson 2, note 2, p. 19.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

hJO f^rid^t man, where speaks gat vX^if not at all.

one, where do they speak ? nlc, Utemal^, never.

ntan f^rtC^t, one speaks, they titi)(i^f some, somewhat.

speak. 'I)eutfc^(aub, Germany.

nur, only. ©ttgfanb, England.

eitt ttJeutnr ^ liM^* Sratifretti), Fran.e.

w litest rjClaufig, not fluently. ^=ta'=li=eit, Italy.

fc^r gut, very well. JHupattb, Russia.

§iemU(i^ gelaufig, pretty flu- ^aucmar!, Denmark.

ently. SrfjitJCbCtt, Sweden.

^temUfi^ gitt, tolerably well. S|Ja' tti=cn, Spain.

Note 5. — The expression with the indefinite man (French on)
corresponds to the English one with "one," "they," "people,"
and to the passive form : e. g., man f!plid)t, " one speaks, they
speak, people speak " ; mail fprid)t S)eiltfc^ {)ier, " German is
spoken here." The oblique cases for ntail are supplied from
einer (see L. IV), the possessive is join.

26 ,,bcr" WORDS. [Les. III.

Conversation 2. — 5pred?en Ste Deutfd??

I. aSo [priest man S)eut1c^ ?

2. SKan f^ric^t 2)eutf^ in ©eutf^Ianb.
I. aSo fprirf)t man Snglifd^ ?

2. 5Kan fjjrid^t ©nglifc^ in (gnglanb.

Etc., etc.

I. 3Bie ypred^en @te ©eutfd) ?

2. 3<^ f^rec^e nur ein iDenig ©eutfd^.
I. SSie fpred^en @te 3)entf(^ ?

2. 3d^ f|)red^e nicf)t geldufig ©eutfd^.

Etc., etc.

Reading 3.
3lft, tolc ift's; mbfittdi baittt!*

Sid), tvk ift'^ mogltd) bann,

Ah how is it possible then

S)a^ t(^ bt(^ taffen fann?

That I thee leave can

^aV b\6) t)on ^erjen Iteb,

Hold thee at heart dear

S)a^ glanbe mtr.

This believe me.

S)u ^a[t ba^ ^crje mein

Thou hast the heart of me

@o ganj genommen ein,

So wholly taken in

* The melody of this and all the following songs can be had in ©cut:
\ii)ex Siebevjd^a^, 33anb I, costing about $1 bound, or in l^cutid^e^ Sieber;
bud) by Tonger, cost about 25 cents. Teachers are advised to procure
the latter book for their classes. They can be had through any music
dealer, or of G. Schirmer, New York City.

Les. III.] ,,bcr" WORDS. 2^

^^\l id) fcin' aitbre lieb',

That I no other love

2lte bt^ allein.

Than thee alone.

SBIau ift etn 95Iumetein,

is called

S)ie^ S3tumtein leg' aii'^ ijerj

flowret lay on thy heart

Unb benf' an tuii^.

think of me.

©tirbt Slum' unb ^offnung gleirf),

(If) Dies hope alike

S3ir finb an Siebe reidE),

in love rich

Unb bie ftirbt nie bei mtr,

in me

SDa^ glaube mir. -ssoitgueb.

@§ !am ein SSogel feberlo^^

There ^ came bird featherless,

@a^ auf ben 93aum blattlo^,

Seated (itself) on the tree leafless,

S)a fam bie Sungfer munblo^

maiden mouthless

Unb afe ben 95ogel feberlo^

ate

SSon bem 93aume b(att(o§.

[Ans. — The snow and the sun.]
*The expletive 'there' is in German e^. In this meaning the
following verb does not agree in number with eg, but wath the
logical subject.

28 INDEFINITE ARTICLE ,,cim" [Les. IV.

LESSON IV.

Indefinite Article tin ; Possessive Adjectives ;
Preterit of fcitt, ^abeit, ttJetbett,

1 4 When a distinctly German idiom has been in-
troduced, do not avoid it, but use it at all possible
opportunities.

2. ®er 9?rubcr biefe^ Saufmanrii^ \^^i cinen ©artcn :

The brother of this merchant has a garden;

c^ ^M fcinc 93fixtmc bartn, Qkr bie 9iofen luaren bicfc^

there are no trees in it but the roses were this
year very pretty.

3. Learn this sentence, analyze it, and note the
idiom for * there are,' the contraction for *in it,' and
the order after the coordinate conjunction aber.

4. Declension of the indefinite article ein, "a,"
"an," used only in the singular number: —

Nom.

cut,

cittc,

citt,

a.

Gen.

tmt^,

cittcr,

CtttCi^,

of a.

Dat.

cittern,

cittcr,

cittcm,

to a.

Ace.

eittctt,

cittc,

citt,

a.

5. Like ein are declined fein, no, mein, my, and
the remaining possessive adjectives, as follows: —

'^t\% thy, your. ^\\Xf your.

fcttt, his, its. CttCr, your.

i^t, her. Hr, their.
ttllfcr, our.

It will be convenient to call these ,,ciu^' words.
They form the plural like that of biejcr.

Les. IV.] ,^ettt" WORDS. 29

Declension of mcin, "my," "mine."

Singular. Plural.

M. F. N. M.F.N.

Nom. mciit, meittc, wciii, f^iy- nieittc, my.

Gen. meine^, mciner, mctnc^, of my. metuer, of my.
Dat. mciucm, mciuer, nicincm, to my. meitiett, to my.
Ace. mchtcit, mciue, mein, my. metue, my.

6. In this form these words are adjectives only ;
with full nominative endings, like those of btejer,
they are also pronouns, S()r ^atcr unb meiner, your
father and mi7ie.

Note that the -cr of unjcr and euer is not an
ending, but part of the stem ; thus, the genitives
are unfere^, euere^.

7» Inflection of the Preterit Tense of fcitt, to be,
AND !^abcn, to have.
X^ ttiav, I was. ict) l)attC, I had.

'^Vi ttiarft, thou wast. bU ^atteft, thou hadst.

©ie ttiarcu, you were. ©tc fatten, you had.

er ttiar, he was. et ^attc, he had.

ttlir tUarCtt, we were. iuit \^<\iit^f we had.

\%X ttiart, ye were. i^tr ^Ottct, ye had.

8ic ttiavcu, you were. (Bie ^ttctt, jj^^^^ /^«^.

fie tuarcn, they were. ftc l)attctt, ^/^<r h<^d.

8, Inflection of the Present and Preterit Tenses
OF tuerben^ to become.
irfftticrbe, I become. tt^ UHtrbC, ttJarb,* I became.

btt ttlirft, ///^z^ becomest. "tSW lUUtbcft, ttjatbft, M^// ^^•

®tC ttJCrbcn, you become. earnest.

er Wirb, he becomes. ©tC tUUrbCtt, JJ^^« became.

er ttiurbe, luarb, /^<? became.

* The second form is less used than the first.

30 INDEFINITE ARTICLE ,,etm" [Les. IV.

tpir ttierbCtt, we become. 'mx tUUrbcn, we became.

Hr tUCrbet, ye become. t^r itmrbet, ye became.

Sic ttlCrbett, JI^^^^ become. Sic ttJUtbCtt, jK^z^ became.

ftC ttlCrbCtt, i^/^O' become. fic ttiurbcit, //z<?r became.

Note 6. — "They have" should be rendered mott l^at, when-
ever " they " is general or indefinite, i. e. has no definite antece-
dent, as ' they have no good music in this city,' tnatl lf)at feine
gute 9}iuft! in biefer (2)tabt

Note 7. — "There is," "there are," are rendered e§ x\i, e§
fiub, when the scope of the afiirmation is definite and limited in
time or place, but when general and sweeping, especially stating
facts of nature, both are rendered eg gibt (fit. it gives) with the
predicate noun in the accusative. Thus one may say, @g gibt
feine 2^iger in ^anfa§ (tigers are not found in Kansas), and at
the same time, ©§ finb bicfe 2Bo(i)e jtrei S^iger in ^anfag (i. e. with
a menagerie), both statements being true. But the line between
general and particular statements is faint and must be learned by
experience. In many cases either expression may be used.

Vocabulary.
MASCULINE. J)te S5(ttmCU, the flowers.

bet S5anm, the tree. btC ^tttbc, the color.

bic ^ftumc, the trees. bic XiutC, the i7ik.

bcr ^aufmann, the merchant. biC JJcbcr, the feather, pen.

bc^ ^aMfmann^, of the mer- bic (SJabct, the fork.

chant. bic ©abcttt, the forks.

\st^ %Xtmi\st§f of the friend. neuter.

bic |rCUttbC the friends. ^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^

^'' ?;l*; '^[ '^^^'- ^^^ 3Jlcffer, the knife.

bcr ^^fcl, the apple. ^^^ ^^^. ^^^^ ^^ .^,^^^

Wm^\ the apples. U^<^^{x! the year.

FEMININE. |0^ SO.

bic O^iofC, the rose. )t>ot)(^ well, not ill.

bic §attb, the hand. tattlOl)(, yes, indeed.

Les. IV.] ^^Citt" WORDS. 31

franf, illy sick. t§ fillb, C§ ^iht, there are.

in, in (with dative) in answer I)Ubf(^f pretty.

to * where ? ' accusative in miibc, tired.

answer to whither ? fii^, sweet.

nuf, upon (with dat.). o!^, oh I

UicI, much. ad^, ah ! oh !

tSXtltf many. rctf, ripe.

abcr, but. CtttirjC, some (pi.).
Exercise IV.

I. S)tc Stiumc in unferem ®arten finb griin. 2. ®t()t €<§
93aume in 3t)re^ 93ruber^ ©arten? 3- Stein, cr tjat nnr
S3(nmen in feinem ®arten. 4. ©r t)at au6) fcine Stpfet
in feinem ®arten. 5- 9^ein, man Ijat Stpfet nnr anf
Sanmen. 6. Of), tuir l)atten SIpfel anf einem 2^ifrf) in
bem ®arten be^ ^anfmann^. 7- Sa, aber fie tDnrben
anf bem Slifc^e nid)t reif. 8. ®ett)i^ md)t, fie n:)nrben
anf ben Sdnmen reif. 9. 2l6er St)r grennb, ber ^^anf-
mann, Ijat !eine Saimie. 10. 3fnn, man tjat aber 83dume
in ber ©tabt n. @^ gibt (or finb) feine 5(pfel anf
meinen Sdnmen. 12. fatten @ie nie SInmen in Sfjrem
®arten ? 13. Sid) ja, aber nnr nidjt biefe^ Sal)r. 14. 3So
gibt e^ biefec^ Sal)r 93Inmen ? 15. G^ gibt feljr t)iele
in bem ®arten meine^ grennbe^. 16. Siefer ®arten
tuirb feljr fdjon. 17. ^(ni er anc^ %\\6)t nnb ©tnljle in
feinem ®arten ? 18. Sa, aber man ^at %\\\it nnb geber
nnr in bem §anfe. 19. 2Bir tnaren niemate in feinem
§anfe. 20. %\\ S^rem ®arten ift ^ e^ feljr fdjon.
21. ©inb @ie ni(^t miibe?

^ Note the order ; if part of the predicate begins the sentence
the verb must precede the subject.

32 INDEFINITE ARTICLE ,,eitt," [Les. IV.

Exercise 4.
I. Is this your garden? 2. Yes indeed, it is our
father's garden. 3. Is it not very pretty ? 4. Yes,
it I has so many trees. 5. And yonder is a rose.
6. Have you also many flowers ? 7. Yes, but the
flowers are not in this garden. 8. Our mother has
also a garden and this has the flowers. 9. There are
no apples this year in my brother's garden. 10. But
we had some, and they were very sweet, n. Well,
your friend, the merchant had them in his garden.
12. Were they on his trees ? 13. Oh no, they were
only on a table. 14. What was the color of those
apples ? 15. They were green, but they were ripe.
16. Our apples are becoming red and ripe. 17. The
flowers were on a table in my friend's garden.

18. They ^ had no knives and forks on the table.

19. But there 3 were paper and ink'and a pen. 20. My
sister had the pen in her hand. 21. She was not
very well. 22. They have no ink in the house.
23. We are becoming tired. 24. I too became tired,
but I was not sick.

^ Remember that the pronoun agrees in gender with its ante-
cedent. ^ Refer to Note 6. ^ Refer to Note 7.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

Wic ^Ciftt t>a§, how is that obct, or.

called? what is the name of jeberiUaitU, every one.

that ? what is that ? to'xt \S\tlt, how many.

brt^ %t\^if that if called^ that an, on (with dat.).

is, 5njifr^cn, between (with dat.).

Les. IV.] INDEFINITE ARTICLE „cijl.''

33

ttC^CU, by the side of (with dat.). 'tXt ^(tttbc, the hands.

jcma(§, JC, ever. bcr 5i«0Cl*f the finger.

tWX^ (Ciue§), 07te. btC 5i«9Cr, the fingers.

5ttlCt, two. bcr ^aumcit, the tluwib.

"hXtXf three. blc ^autlteu, the ihumbs.

\^\tXffiour. bcr SJlittclftnOCr, the middU-

f ilttf , five. finger.

\t^^f six. bcr 9littgftuncr, the ring finger.

ftcficn, sevc::. bcr !(CtttC ??iU0Cr, the liitle-

ar^t, eight. finger.

ttCttlt, nine. bic gauft, //^<?/j/.

5c^u, /^/7. bic ?Jauftc, the fists.

Note 8. — The neuter form ein§ is employed when the
numeral eill is used substantively in coimting ; with another nu-
meral, eiii alone is used (as in eiu \\\\\i gtuanjig); preceded by the
definite article ber, it is declined according to Class I of the
Second Declension of Adjectives (p. iii).

Conversation 3. — Die fjanb»

I. SBie ^eifet ba^?

2. 2)a§ ^ei^t eine §anb.
I. 9Bie IieiBt ba^ ?

2. S)ag ^ei^t eiu ginger.
I. ^abeit ©ie eine §anb obcr jtnei §dnbe?

2. 3c^ ^abe 3tt)ei §dnbc.
I. §at jebermann jlnet §dnbe?

2. ^a, jjebermann l^at jtt)ei §dnbe.

Etc., etc.

I. SBie Ijei^t biefer ginger?

2. S)a§ ^ei^t ber S)aumen.
I. 2Bie f)ei^t biefer ginger?

2, J)a§ ^ei^t ber 3^ig^fi^g^^»

Etc., etc.

34 INDEFINITE ARTICLE ,,ettt»" [Les. IV.

I. 3Bte inele ginger finb ha^ ?

2. ®a§ finb brei g^inger.
I. 2Bie Diele ^eigefingcr Ijat man an jeber §anb ?

2. SRan l)at nur einen ^^ig^finger an jeber §anb.

Etc., etc.
Reading 4.

ftbung mac^t beit 9Jfeiftcr.

Practice makes the master.

"Practice makes perfect."
^cr re^te fielcuKnuf.

9»tt ®ott fang^ an, mit ®ott l}6r' auf !

With begin, end.

S)a§ ift bcr red}te Seben^Ianf.

That right course of life.

2)et ©fell uttb bet SBorf,^

Sin ©jet kgegnete3 einem ^ungrigen 3Botfe. „§abe
9}Meib4 mit mir,^' fctgte^ ber jitternbe^ Sfel; .,,icl) bin
ein armec^, tmnfeg Stier; fief) 7 mir, tua^-fiir- einen ^
S)orrt9 id) mir in ben gnfe getreten^° t)a6e." ,,3[8at)r^
Ijaftig,^' bn banerft^^ mid),'^ Derfe^ten ber 9BoIf; „mtb
ic^ finbe mic^ in meinem ©etDiffen^ Derbunben,^5 bid)
Don biefen (5d)merjen^^ jn befreien.'' '7 Kaum^^ tvav
ba^ SBort gejagt/9 fo tnarb^^ ber @fel jerriffen.^°

Seffing.
* donkey. ^trembling. "really. ^^ pains,

^wolf. ^see. ^^ cause pity. ^^free.

3 met. * what a. ^^ replied. ^^ scarcely,

•♦pity. 9 thorn. ^^^ conscience. ^^ spoken.

*said. ^° trodden. ^^ bound. 2° was torn to pieces.

Les. v.] verbs. NEW CONJUGATION. 35

LESSON V.

Verbs. — New Conjugation. — Prepositions with
THE Accusative.

Conjugation of Verbs.

1. The first and third persons plural of all verbs
are alike^ and also the first and third singular
preterit.

2. 2)cr Setter Io6t bcu ©djiilcr, aficr bcr ©driller

The teacher praises the pupil but the pupil

is not playing very well.

3. Examine the construction of the sentence.
Note the case of subject and object of lobt, also
that the simple form fpielt represents the English
* is playing ' between which comes the ' not ' in
English.

4. All German verbs are conjugated according
to one of two forms, called the New and the Old
Conjugations. The verbs of the New or weak Con-
jugation comprise the great majority of German
verbs. The verbs of the Old or strong Conjugation,
though few in number, are mostly in common use.

5. The mode of forming the preterit and past
participle is the distinguishing feature between
these two conjugations. In the New Conjugation
the preterit is formed by an addition to the stem ;
in the Old Conjugation there is no addition, but a
change in the vowel of the stem, called Ablaut.

36 VERBS. NEW CONJUGATION. [Les. V.

6. The stem of a verb is that part which remains
after dropping the infinitive ending -ett or-n.

7. The pri7icipal parts of a verb are three : in-
finitive, preterit, and past participle. Thus the
principal parts of lieben (a verb of the New Conju-
gation) are Iteben, Itebte, gelie6t, " to love," " (I) loved,"
"loved."

The New Conjugation will be taken up first, as
simpler, since the verbs belonging to it are more
nearly regular in their form -changes.

New Conjugation.

8. T\\^ past participle is formed by prefixing ge-
to the stem (so also in the Old Conjugation), and
by adding -(e)t. cje- is not prefixed to verbs end-
ing in -teren, as marfdjieren, *^to march," past parti-
ciple marfdjiert, nor to verbs having an unaccented
prefix. (See Lesson XVII.)

9. T\\.^ present participle is formed in both con-
jugations by adding -enb to the stem.

Personal Endings.

10. The following endings are added in both
conjugations to the stem to form the present t^nsQy
as follows with the stem lob-, praise :

Singular.

Plural.

I. lo6-e.

I. lo6-en.

2. " -(c)ft.

2. "-(e)t.

3- "-(e)t.

3. "-eiu

Les. v.] verbs. NEW CONJUGATION. 3/

11. The c in parentheses is omitted unless there
would result thereby such a combination of conso-
nants as would be difficult to pronounce

12. The following forms show the endings of the
preterit tense.

Singular. Plural.

1. tob-tc» I. lob-tctt*

2. «-teft» 2. "-tct»

3. "-tc» 3- "-tern

13- Before it of the preterit ending, c is inserted,
when the root ends in a letter that cannot easily be
pronounced before te^ as bet-ete, prayed,

14. While the form @te Iteben is historically of
the third person plural, in practical use it is second
person both singular and plural, and should be re-
cited as an alternative form. ®u is used to children
and relatives.

i5» In the Imperative, the singular is formed by
adding c to the stem, and the plural is the second
person plural of the Present Indicative inverted.

16. Simple Tenses (Indicative Mood) of a Verb of
THE New Conjugation.

PRINCIPAI. PARTS.

lieBett^ lie^te, gcHcl^t

Present. Preterit.

X^ Uebc, / love. \^ licbtC, / loved.

bU (ielDft, thou lovest. btt Hebtcft, thou lovedst.

(5ic (icBcti, you love. @ie (iebteu, you loved,

Cr Hcfit, he loves. tX liefitC, he loved.

38

VERBS. NEW CONJUGATION.

[Les. V.

toiv UcBen, we love.

i^r Uc6t, ye love.

8tc UeBen, you love.

fie liebcn, they love.

ttiir licBten, we loved.
tl)r Uebtet, ji^^r /^tv/.
(Sic (iebtcii, ^^^^ /^^^.

fie Xxt^itW^ they loved.

Imperative.

SINGULAR.

liebe (bu), (iedeu ©ie, love {thou), love.

PLURAL.

Xxt^i (i^r), Hefictt ©ie, /^Z'-^ (j<?), /^z^^.

InfinitiTe.

XxthtW, to love.

Participles.

Ucbenb, iovi7tg. geliefit, loved.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE.

ber Dn!e(, the ujtcle.

ber S^ad^iinr^ />5<? neighbor.
bev Secret, //^^ teacher.

(ber) SSil^elm, ^////^w.
bie (5tf)ii(er, ^/^^ scholars.

\s\t g'reUttbe, the friends.

FEMININE.

bie 5lufgaBe, the lesson.
\yit Strafje, the street.
"tsxt SJlufif ', the music.
'^Xt D'i|Jer, the opera.
'^Xt ^'ioteit^ the notes {score).

NEUTER.

\>(i^ ©tiltf, the piece,
i^^^) 5lmerifa, America.
i:pi\^) Berlin', i^^r//;^

(ba§) SottbOll, London.

itiantm, w//^.?

bamal^, {at) that time.
t^tt (ace), him.
tttorgett, to-morrow.

eittft, ^i^^^.

tei5ettb, charming.

beitlt, ///^« (argumentative).

immev, always.

felBft, himself.

el6ett, yW/; jcijt, Wf^^^'.

faufen, 3^/^.
(enieii, /^^^^-/z.

ttl0l|tten, /zVr, reside.
(ebeit, live, be alive.

Idfi^en, laugh.

(O0en, praise.

pven, /5^«r.
facjen, j-^jk, /^//.
f^ie(en, play.

glauBeu, believe, think.

Les. v.] verbs. NEW CONJUGATION. 39

Note 9. — [^ (cbte expresses alone the three English forms,
** I lived," " I did live," " I was living." So in the case of other
verbs.

Note 10. — Prepositions with the Accusative. The follow-
ing prepositions govern the accusative case : bnxd), through^ by
means of, \\\x, for, gegeit, against^ ot)ne, withouty Utlt, around,
about, at (time).

Exercise V.

I. S)te ©c^iiler Iteben (bie) 9Wu[t!. 2. ©iefe 9Ku[if
tft fiir bie greunbe eine^ ©c^iiler^, 3. ©agert ©ie
mtr : n:)0 leBt St)r greunb ? 4. ®r Ie6t \t%i in Sertin.
5. Sc^ ^o^te i()n einft eine D)3er fpielen.^ 6. (So,
I)orten @ie tl)n fpielen ? 7. Sa)t)o^t, er fpielt fet)r
gut. 8. Sc^ faufte einft in Serlin ein ©tiid SRufi!.*
9. ajfein Slinb t)orte ba^ ©tiic! unb ladjte. 10. 2Sarum
fauften @ie e§ benn? n. 2lc^, ein greunb meine^
95ruber^ tobte e^ [0 fe^r. 12. ©piett bcr Setjrer feI6[t
bicfc Dper? 13. S)a^ jagt man, aber er lernts fie
nur3 eben. 14. 9^icl)t U)al)r4, biefir Seljrer lebte einft
in Sonbon ? 15. Sc§ glaube, er tDar bort unfer 9lac^-
bar. 16. aSir tt)of)nten bama^3 in (bcr) 93on)==@tra^e.

17. §oren @ie, mein Dnfel fpicit "^(x^ ©tiid fiir un§.

18. @r fpiett ja 5 o^ne Stolen. 19. SBir lernen bie[e§
Stitcf morgen; ^oS> i[t nnfere Slufgabe. 20. 2Ba!^
jagten ©ie.ba^, mein greunb? 21. %^ jagte nnr,
)t)ir t)aben morgen biefes^ ©titc! jn lernen. 22. §aben
©ie benn ettna^ Qcgen ba^^ StiidE? 23. D nein, gett)i^
nid)t; es^ ift reijenb.

^ Note the German order; the infinitive always stands at the
end of the clause. ^ After words indicating measure the noun

40 VERBS. NEW CONJUGATION. [Le?, V.

representing the thing measured is in apposition in German, un-
less preceded by an adjective. ^ /j. only just learning. -^Lit. not
true; tr. didnH he^ at end. ^z^'y^j^, at beginning. ^\i^ is often
then^ as well as there.

Exercise 5.

I. Who is playing the opera } 2. They say, it is
our friends in [the] WilHam-street. 3. Why,i this
piece is charming ! 4. Did you not^ hear it that-time
in Berhn } 4. Yes, I beUeve (so), but I did not^
Hke it then. 3 6. Our teacher* ^always ^praised ^it
3though.4 7. Yes, he himself plays it charmingly.
8. Our teacher's uncle plays 2very jWell itoo. 9. Are
your friends now livmg in Berlin 1 10. O no, it is
the William-street in this city. n. And 5 does the
teacher live on that street too .? 12. I thought I
heard him playing ^, 13. Yes, he is playing the les-
son for the pupils. 14. He is playing, but the pupils
are laughing. 15. They say he plays very well.
16. Yes, and the pupils are learning (to) 3 play
J without 2 notes. 17. Tell me, is that good for them }
18. Well, all my friends praise the teacher. 19. Do
you buy your music through the teacher 1 20. Then7
buy for me too. 21. He bought this piece (of)
music in America. 22. When do you play to-mor-
row.? 23. I believe we play at seven o'clock.^

' 5lber after tft. ^ 9?id^t when it limits the verb, as here, is
usually at the end of the clause in simple tenses. ^ bauialS,
'* aber. ^ benn, after verb. ^ infinitive. ^ @o. ® Ul^r.

* Numbers before and below the words indicate the German order so
far as the numbered words are concerned.

Les. v.] verbs. — NEW CONJUGATION.

41

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

auf "i^cutfci^ or tm 1)eutfrf)ett,

in German.
ttJotten ®ic, will you ?
t)On, from; ftt^, to.
\^a§ ©tttmokiu^, t/ie one time

one, the multiplication table.
\^^^ SDIat, the time, as in '' not

this tiine^
ntai^eu, make, do, constitute,

amotuit to.

njietiiel tttarfjt "^^^ ? how much

makes that? how much is
that.

Clf, eleven.
JtuiJlf, twelve.
brei^e^ll, thirteen.
tlicr^e^U, fourteen.

fedl^C^tt, sixteen.
ficb(cn)5Cl)U^ seventeen.
ad^tSC^n, eighteen.
licmtse^tt, nineteen.
anjail^ig, twenty.
eiuUltbSttiaJt^ig, twenty one.
bl'Ci^tflf thirty.
Ctttttttbbrei^ig, thirtyofte.

fitttfatg,//^.

ficB(Ctt)5tg, seventy,

ar^t^tg, eighty.

nCttUSig, ^linety.
^ttttbcrt, hundred.
^ttttbcrtUttbcitt^, hundred and

one.
tHUfCUb, a thousand.
cittC 9JlitttOtt', a million.

neuttsc^n ^ttttbert vcv^ t»icr»

nineteen hundred and four.

Conversation 4. — 3^^^^ii»

I. aSte ^ctfet " count " auf S)eutf^ ?

2. "Count" f^ei^t auf ©eutfc^> rrjci^len,'^
I. SBoIteu ©ie t)Ou eiu^ biig fuuf ja^Ien.

2. (Sin§, jlDei, brei, bier, fiinf.
I. aSolIeu @ie t)Ou stDaujig bte funfuubjtuaujig 5at)Ieu ?

2. 3^<^^S^9/ eiuunb^tDaujig, ^njeiunb^tDanjig, :c.

Etc., etc.

42 VERBS. NEW CONJUGATION. [Les. V.

I. 2Btel)ieI ift breimal fiinf ?
2. S)reimal fiinf ift fiinfje^n.

Etc., etc.

I. a[Biet)iel mad^t fiinf unb a^t ?
2. giinf unb ad)t mad^t breijeljin.

Etc., etc.
Reading 5.

&k\iS) unb gleid) gefcUt fid^ gern.

Like and like associate themselves gladly.
" Birds of a feather flock together.'*

SBa§ fittb ba§ fib ^at^ml

9SogeI, bie nid^t fingen,

Birds that not sing,

©toden, bie nic^t flingen,

Bells that not ring,

5pferbe, bie nid^t fpringen,

Horses that not jump,

^pifto'Ien, bie md]t fra(i)en,

Pistols that not crack,

Stinber, bie nid^t lad^en,

Children that not laugh,

2Ba^ finb ba^ fiir ©ad^en !

What are that for things !
2)er efet ^ in ber fiomen^aut.^

(Sin entlaufeners ®fel fanb int 9Ba{be4 jufaHigs
bie §aut eine^ SotDen. gr ftedEte fic^ in biefetbe, unb
[e^te 3Kenfdjen unb Stiere in ©d^recten.^ ©ein ^err

Les/ VI.] VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. 43

fu(i)te 7 it)n uberalL^ S)er S[el, feinen |)errn crbttd enb,9
fin(}^° an^° fitri^tGrlidj 311 britUen;" er tDoIIte au(^
biefen taufdjeit.^^ 5(6er fein ,g)err padte^s t()n an ben
Df)ren imb jprac^: „3lnbere magft bu taufc^en, bet
mir Unrb e^ bir nidjt gclingen,^^ icf) fenne bicf) an
beinen langeit D{)ren." @r Qab it)m mit biejeu SBorten
cine tiidjtige^s %xa^t^^ ®d}tage,^7 unb trieb ^^ it)n
tpieber na(^ |)aufc.

^ donkey.

s by chance.

9 perceiving. ^^ seized.

^ lion's skin.

6 fright.

^° began. ^♦be successful.

3 runaway.

^sought.

"bray. ^^ heavy.

♦forest.

^ everywhere.

^^ deceive. ^^ volley.

*^ blows.

^8 drove.

1/

LESSON VI.

Verbs. — Old Conjugation. — Prepositions Govern-
ing THE Dative Case.

I- If a strong verb-stem is found in both Ian-
guageSy the principal parts have the same vowel
changes, as a rule.

2. 2)er Srteftriigcr gafi nttr 't^tw. SBricf unb gtng

The letter-carrier gave me the letter and went

itJiebcr nac^ bcr Stabt*

again to the city.

3« Notice the case of the direct and of the indirect
object, also the case after the preposition.

4. In the Old Conjugation, the Preterit tense
is formed by changing the vowel of the stem ; as,
id) gab, " I gave," from geben, *'to give."

44 VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VI

5. The past participle is formed by prefixing gc-
and adding -(e)n, with a change in the vowel of the
stem.

6. The present participle is formed in the same
manner as in the New Conjugation.

7. The endings of the present tense are the same
as in the New Conjugation.

8. The Preterit of the Old Conjugation has no
ending in the first and third persons singular ; else-
where it takes the same endings as the present.

9. The changes of vowel in the preterit and past
participle are given in the list of all the verbs of
the Old Conjugation (see Appendix). These verbs
are to be thoroughly mastered on account of their
constant use and prominence in the language.

10. Simple Tenses (Indicative Mood) of a Verb of

THE Old Conjugation.

PRINCIPAI. PA»TS.

Present.

tr^ gc6c, /^'w, ttiir gefictt, we give.

btt gibft^ thou givesi. t^r rjcbt, ye give.

@ic ne^eit, you give. ©ie gcBcn, you give.

Ct (ji^t, he gives. ftc gcBcit, they give.

Preterit.
\^ gab, I gave. 'mx ntlBeit, we gave.

bu (jabft, thougavest. \\^x {jabt, ye gave.

Sie onBcai, you gave. (»ie nnbcn, you gave.

er nab, he gave. |tC gabeit, they gave.

Les. VI.] VERBS. ■ — OLD CONJUGATION.

45

Tmijerative.

SINGULAR.

geBctt Sie, giB (bu),

give^ give thou.

Infinitive. •

gcBCtt, to give.

Oebctt @tc, gcBt (i^t),

give, give ye.

Participles.

PRESENT.

gcBcnb, giving.

gcgcbett, ^/W;^

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE.

letter-

bcr SBrieftrdgcr, //^-?

carrier.

bcr S3rtef, //^^ /^/'^'<?r.
bcr ^ugcl, />^^ <^/?'^.

bcm ^ifti)(c), the table (dative).

btC SJlamiCr, the men.

bem greUttbC, the friend {daX).

FEMININE.

btC Xitr^ //5<f door.

bte 3ci^ttttg, //^^ newspaper.

bcm Sicbc, //^^ j^;z^ (dative).

ttirf)t me^V, no longer.

friiljer, formerly.

ttJteber, again.

ttloUett, w/7/, ^^ willing (see

p. 159).
lauter, louder.
banfCtt, //^^«i (new).
CbCtt, just.

Icfctt,
gcbcit,
Hcgctt,
flc^ett,

ftC^Ctt,

tun,

fittgcn,

finbeit,

ftfirctbctt,

fe^en,

Note ii.
are some of

speak ^
read^
give,
lie,

go.

stand,
do,
sing,
find,
write.

gab,
tag,

ftanb,
tat,

faitb,
ft^ticb,

PAST, PART.

gcf^ro(i^ctt,

gelefeit,

gcgcbctt,

gelegcit,

gcgangeu,

geftanben,

gctatt,

gcfungcii,

gefttubcit,

gefrt)ticbctt,

gefcftett.

Prepositions with the Dative. — Th

the common prepositions that govern

f^rtriftt.

lieft,

gibt.

Hegt,

ge^t*

ftc^t.

int

fittgt-

fiubct*

fd^rcibt.

fie^t.

e following
the Dative

46 VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VI.

Case only : aii^, out of, frojn ; bei, at the house of; tnit, 2vith ;
Don, by (agency), /r^?;;/, about, of; ^u, to ; nac^, after (time and
rank), to, tozvard.

Exercise VI.

I. S)er Sricftrdgcr gab mir biefen Srief fur @te.
2. Sc^ banfc fd)i3n^ ; iuo i[t benn ber 3)?ann? 3. Sd)
glau6e, er ging nac^ ber @tabt. 4. S)a tiegt ber 93rief
ntit ber 3^itit^9 ^^^f ^^^"^ Sifc^e. 5. 3Bof(en ©ie nicf)t
bte 3^iti^^9 ■f^f^tt ? ^- ^^^^ ^^1^ SSater Ite[t fie eben.
7. 9^un, fo fpred^en @te t)on bem Siebe, tr)et(f)e^ tt)ir
morgen fingen. 8. S)ie TOdnner bort fprecf)en fa ^ ba-
t)on. 9. ©agten ©ie nic^t, ber 95rteftrager ging mit
feinem S3ruber nad) ber ©tabt? 10. 9^etn, tneins §err,
\)a^ fagte id) nid)t n. 3d} fa^ hm Sruber nid^t.
12. 3Sann gefjt ber 93rieftrager JDieber DorBei ? 13. Sc^
fdjreiOe je^t einen Srief au^ Stjrem ®arten. 14. 2Ber
fd)rieb ben Srief, tt)eld)en @ie ^aben ? 15. S)a^ tt)ar
Don meinem Seljrer ; er fd)rieb aii^ Serlin. 16. 9Bo
finbet man eine S^i^^^S i^^ ^'^[^^ ©tabt ? 17. Sc^ fanb
fie immer bet meinem greunbe, 33raun. 18. 3lber
fanfen @ie bie 3^ttung t)on S^irem greunbe? 19. 3Barum
nic^t? (£r gibt fie mir nic^t 20. SBasi \aim bie
9}?dnner im ®arten? 21. ©ie fangen nnb fpradjen
bort. 22. SBir ge()en t)on ^ier nad^ ber ©tabt. 23. D,
fo geben @ie meinen Srief bem Srieftrager. 24. ©e-
Vo\^, ba^3 tun 4 voxx gerne.

^ thank prettily, the common phrase for English " thank you."
Why, at beginning. ^ Thus always for Sir. * Note the German
order : if an element of the predicate precedes, the verb precedes
the subject.

Les. VI.] VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. 47

Exercise 6.

I. What is-lying ^ there on the table .? 2. I see only
a newspaper. 3. I was- not -speaking of the news-
paper. 4. Was- (there) not 2a 3 letter -lying ^ there

1 also ? 5. O yes, I believe (so) ; I find ^3, 3 letter
, now. 6. The letter-carrier gave the letter (to) my
friend. ^ 7. Who is ^ your 3 friend, ^ then ? 8. Is- he
just -speaking ? 9. He was-speaking of a song which
we sing. 10. Does- 3 the bird in the garden -sing
also ? II. Yes, this bird sings and speaks. 12. The
men are-learning the song which the teacher sang.

13. And I am-writing the song for my father.

14. Does- he -sing too ? 15. No, he sings no longer ;
he sang formerly very finely. 16. ^Then ^ why

2 are- 3 you -writing the song.? 17. My sister sings
it for my father. 18. Do- you -hear the bird sing ?
19. We will speak ^ of -that ^ again ^ after ^ the

3 song. 20. Do- you -find the newspaper where it was
lying.? 21. No, my brother was-reading the news-
paper. 22. I found nothing on the table. 23. Go
with me to the city; we will ^buy ^a 3 newspaper
, there. 24. There stands the letter-carrier by the
door! 25. He is-standing where he 2 stood 4 ^ yes-
terday.

^ Remember that German has no progressive form ; use the
corresponding simple tense; hyphens indicate words which in
German are expressed by one. ^ Dative. ^ Remember that
German has no interrogative or emphatic form ; use the simple
form, "Sings he." '♦In the subordinate clause the personal
verb stands last.

48 VERBS OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VI.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
MASCULINE. hud^^iahicvtvif spell.

bcr 23urf|fta6e, the letter. fonttClt, ca7u See p. 1 52.

bic S3ttr^ftabcil, the letters. |(^ j^,j,j^ j^an.

FEMININE. fp^ so^ thus.

bie (BilbC, the syllable. ^y^^^ also.

bic (StlBen, the syllables. l^cr'fagCll, say, recite.

NEUTER. (llt^ on^ onwards.

ba§3«^I|alienK^,^^^^^,,,
ba^5lk, i

Conversation 5. — ^ud?ftabteren.

I. Sonnen ©ie bud^ftabieren ?

2. ^a, i($ !ann bud^ftabieren*
I. 2BciIlen@ie ba^ 3Bort ,,|)anb^' budjftabiereit ?
2. SDZan buc^ftabiert ba^ SBort „§anb" fo, F)a=ai
en^be.
I. SBoCen @ie auc^ ba^ SSort ,,S)ogge^^ bud)[ta-
bieren ?
2. ajian bud^ftabiert ba§ SBort „®oggc" fo, be^o^ges

Etc., etc.
Reading 6.

9Ber 51 fagt, mufe^ o.\x^ S [agcit

Who A says, must B say.

'from tniiffen.

" If you begin, you must go on."
•^'It is the first step that costs."

Les. yil.] VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. 49

3Ber ^ ben ^Pfennig ^ ntd)t ef)rt,3
3ft beg 2:a(erg4 ntc£)t it)ert.5

'whoever. ^ penny. ^ honors. "* thaler. ^worthy.

" Take care of the pence, and the
pounds will take care of themselves."

Sic tDtlH %(inht ^ mx^ hit SJicnc^

@ine iDtlbe Staube, tx)eIdE)e auf einer Sries am 93acE)e
jafe,4 erbltcfte 5 cine S5iene, bie in bag 9Saffer gefaKen
tvav nnb mit ben 2BeIIen ^ beg Sadjeg fam|)fte,7 tDe(d)e
brol^ten^ fie fort5nreifeen.9 ,,2Barte,^° armeg SSogelein,''
rief" bie Sanbe, „id) ii:)tll bir ein ©c^tffdjen fcE)iden,'^
anf Jnetdiem bn bid^ retten^3 !annft.'' @ie picftei4
ein Sanmblatt^s ab,Hunb njarf^^ eg il)r Ijinnnter.^^
S)ie 93iene rettete fid) nnb banfte iljrer SBo^Itaterin. '7

' dove. ^ perceived.

9 carry a\^

ray.

" rescue.

2 bee. ^ waves.

'°wait.

''^ picked off.

3 alder. ^ struggled.

" cried.

'' leaf.

-♦was sitting. « threatened.

^^send.
^^benefactress.

\

^^ threw down.

LESSON VII.

Verbs. — Old Conjugation. — Classes and Irregu-
larities. — Prepositions with Dative
AND Accusative.

I. T/ie principal parts of the commonest strong
verbs should be memorized and reviewed constantly.

50 VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VII.

2. ^cr Sd^uler nimmt ben ^nt ntt^t qnt in bic

The pupil takes his hat not wellinto his

^ani unb IS^t if)n fatten.

hand and lets it fall.

3. Memorize this sentence after examining it
carefully. Note the forms nimmt and lafet ; also the
use of the definite article instead of a possessive
adjective.

4» The Strong Verbs are the backbone of the
vocabulary in the German. It is important that they
be mastered as soon as possible. Those given in
Lessons VI, VII and VIII, being among the most
common, should be thoroughly memorized at once.

$• There are but 188 Strong Verbs in modern
German, including many which may also be used
Weak, or which have but one part Strong.

6. Marks of Weak Verbs. A verb ending in
-etn, -ern, -terert, or having more than one syllable
in its stem, is weak. Also, with few exceptions, a
verb whose stem-vowel is 0, u, eu, or any Um-
laut. In a word, most Strong Verbs are known by
the vowels a, e, i, ci, and ie ; but of course not all
verbs with these vowels are Strong.

7- Classes of Strong Verbs. In historical gram-
mars Strong Verbs are grouped in accordance with
their primitive community of SIHaut. Some of
these groups have remained intact, or fairly so, and
the learner may save much time by taking advantage
of this fact.

Les.,VII.] verbs. — OLD CONJUGATION. 51

a. Class I, stem-vowel ei, comprises 43 verbs,
all changing ei to t or ie in both preterit and past
participle. Whether the change is i or ie, de-
pends on whether the vowel is short or long by po-
sition, thus fc^retben, fc^rieb, ge[c^rte6en, but reiten, ritt,
geritten. However, the sound-change is essentially
the same, and the learner should acquire the cadence
of ei, ie, ie. There is but one exception to this
rule, Ijei^ett, f)ie§, getjei^en.

b. Class II, stem-vowel ie, comprises 25 verbs,
all changing ie to 0 in both preterit and past
participle ; thus fttegen, f(og, geflogen. Siegen, lag, ge-
legen, is the one exception to this rule. Three verbs
in ii also belong here.

c. Class III, group i, stem vowel in i -f n + any
other consonant, comprises 18 verbs, all changing
i to a, preterit, and it, past participle, as [ingen,
fang, gefungen. 6 verbs in i + double nasal, change
i to a and 0, as beginnen, begann, begonnen, and 2
change i to 0 and 0. Aside from these the only
Strong Verbs in i are fit^en, [a^, gefeffen, and bitten,
\)oX, gebeten.

d. Class III, group 2, stem vowel in e + I or
r + any other consonant, comprises 10 verbs chang-
ing e to a and 0, as fterben, ftarb, geftorben. Sim-
ilarly change most Strong Verbs in e + d), cf, or
% as brei^en, brad), gebro^en. The learner should

52 VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VII.

hunt out the verbs of these classes and recite them
one after another. It will be seen that they com-
prise in all about lOO of the total of i88.

8. Small Irregularities. Most Strong Verbs in
e, except ge'^ert and [tef)en, change this vowel to ie
or (if short) t, in the 2d and 3d persons of the
singular indicative and imperative. Strong Verbs
in a, except fc^affeu and fc^aUen, umlaut the a in
the same forms.

In the above cases, if the verb stem ends in -t, the 3d person
singular does not add the regular ending. If the stem ends in
an 8 sound the 2d person singular may add either -eft, or simply
-t, as licfcft or Ucft, from (efen.

Vocabulary.

Masculine. Neuter.

bet '^nltf the desk. ba§ f^Cttftcr, the window.

bcr 8ttt^I, the chair, %^^ gcbettttcffer, the penknife.

bet SBlciftift the lead-pencil. \st!i^ ^JJoti^ 'Bttrf), the notebook.

Cbctt, just now.

Feminine. ftatf, strong.

bie gcbcr, the feather. S^^^f ^^^^(idy.

bic (8djrcib-)fcbcr, the pen. ^0(^, indeed, nevertheless, still,
bic etoljlfcbcr, the steel pen. '^h •' (the last always in ex-

bte ScftiOtt, the lesson (division postulation or objection or

of a text-book). ^eutC, to-day. [surprise).

bie %a\^t, the pocket. borgeftern, day before yesterday.

(egett, lay, put (weak).

Strong Verbs.

^\t^t%fly.^n, flcflogett*
sicken, draw, pull, 509, gesogeit.
fi^en, sit, take a seat, fa§, gcfcffett.
laffen, let, make {to do), Uefe, gelaffen, (agt

Les. VII.] VERBS. — OLD CONJUGATION. 53

f aHctt, fall, ftel, gcf aHcit, f aWt,
Brcti^ctt, break, firac^, gcBrori^eit, Brt^t.
ncftmctt, ^^^^, ttd^m, gettontmctt, nimmt
fci^ttcibctt, cut, f^ttitt, gcfr^nittciu

Irregular Weak Verbs.

ttiiffctt, >^/^^w {a fact), ttjugte, getnu^t, ttieij^

Note 12. — Prepositions with Dative or Accusative : — The

following common prepositions govern the dative case when indi-
cating position, the accusative when indicating motion toward :
in, /«, into ; an, by, at, to, on (with dates), up to ; auf, 07t, upon,
for (anticipated date) ; t)Or, before ; iiber, above, over, about; Ulttcr,
below, under.

Exercise VII.

I. S)er 9?ogeI flog burd^ ba^ 3^^^^^ ^^b fa§' auf
meinen ©tul^l 2. Sd) fa^ ben SSoget aud), aber e^
trar be^ Sef)rer^ ©tutjl, auf iretd^en er fa^. 3. S)er
SSogel Ite^ eine ^eber fallen. 4. S)er Se^^rer fd^nitt
au^ bie[er geber eine ©c^retbfeber. 5. (Sr fc^netbet mtt
etnem gebermeffer. 6. ©d^rteb bie geber gut ? 7. 9?etn,
bie geber tuar nid)t ftar! genug; fie brad^. 8. S)er
Seljter aber^ jog eine @tat)Ifeber au^ ber3 Safd^e.
9. S^reiben @ie ba^ in %\)x 9?otijbu^ ? 10. 9Ba^ ftei)t
nid)t al[e^4 in meinem S^otijbud^ ? n. SBei^ ber Seljrer,
tr)a§ @ie fc^reiben ? 12. 9?id^t immer; id^ fd^rieb bod^ 5
t)orgeftern iiber ben Sel)rer felbft. 13. 93ringen @ie
Sf)r Syfotijbud^ an ben 5pult. 14. Slun @ie ba^ pa-
pier in bie %<x\i)t. 15. Sd^ tpu^te nid^t, toa^ @ie
fagten. 16. 2)er ©d^uler liefe ba^ S3u^ auf bem Sifc^e

54 VERBS. — OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. Vll.

be^ Sef)rer^. 17. 3c^ legte ha§ papier auf ben ©tu^I.

18. aSa^ ift bie Seftion auf^ £)eute? 19. 2)ag tt)ei§
id) nid^t ; @ie tDtffen boc^ ! 20. SBir ftanben an bent
Stifd^e, auf n)elct)em bie Siti^er lagen.

' ®i^en with auf -4- accusative = \id) fe^en, which would be more
common ; tr. ' perched.' ^ 5lber may take any place where * however'
may stand. ^ See par. 3, this Lesson. *Tr. with 2Ba8. ^ Tr.
' why,' at beginning. ^ auf = *for' with future time fixing duties.

Exercise 7.
I. Who is sitting there in the chair by the door.?

2. Why, I I do not know; I ^did ^not ,see 2the jChain

3. The brother of the pupil was sitting by the table.

4. This man cut a pen for the teacher. 5. He drew
a penknife out-of his pocket. 6. But ^ the teacher
writes with a steel-pen. 7. His pen is lying ^on
3 the ^table ^ already. 8. His lead-pencil broke
day before yesterday. 9. The pencil fell upon the
chair before the table. 10. Those chairs stood be-
fore the window, n. Bring your chair to 3 the win-
dow. 12. We laid our notebooks upon the table.
13. J We 2 are ^ already ^ learning the lesson for to-
morrow. 14. Does the teacher let you sing ? 15. Yes,
indeed, he lets us do what we please. 4 16. That is
indeed 5 a teacher ! 17. Well, I don't know ; do you
learn much .? 18. He did not know that I sing.

19. The bird sings too, but it is not-a ^ pupil. 20. The
bird 2 just , flew through the room. 21. Your pen
is lying under my note-book. 22. Thank you ; we

Les. VII.] VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. 55

leave you here in the room with the teacher. 23. He
will find (finds) 7 his hat on the chair before the
door. 24. He takes his hat and goes. 25. We are
going after the teacher.

* bod) after verb. * Place somewhere else than at beginning.
3 an with ace. or gu with dat. ; use contraction with article.
*Tr. tDoUeit 'will.' ^ aber bod^. ^ Trans, 'no,' feiii. "^ The present
is often used for the future.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

Masculine. Neuter.

bcr (5a^, the sentence. btt)^ @ttbe, the end.

bC^ Sa^eig (genitive). btti^ gtaQC^etri^Cn, the interro-

ber 5lnfang, the beginning. gatio7i -point.

ber 'imi the sound. 0tt§f».rC(DeH, pronounce.

Feminine. CigCtttUti^, really.

W SJctomtltg, the accent. geWP^ltUri^, usually.

t>Xt SSlxiit, the middle.

bie SJorfilbe, the prefix.

Conversation 6. — It)ort unb £aut

I. aSa^ i[t ba^ SBort am Slnfang be^ ©a|e^?

2. S)a§ SBort am 3lnfang biefeg ©a^e§ tft „h:)a§\
I. aSie bud^ftabieren @ie ba^ SBort ,,@a^^' ?

2. ^d^ bu^ftabiere e§ fo : e^, a^, te, i\z\,
I. Sttc^tig; aber tt)a^ tft ber Saut am Slnfattg?

2. %ij glaube ber Saut am 2lnfang tft mef)r tDte
ba§ z auf (gnglifd^.
I. SBo fadt bie 93etonung auf bem aSort ^^Infaug"?

2. SDie SSetonung fdKt auf bie SSorfilbe,

56 VERBS. OLD CONJUGATION. [Les. VII.

I. SBte t)eifet ber Su^ftabe in ber SKitte be^ 28orte^?

2. S)a§ ift eigentU(^ jti:)ei 33uc^[ta6en.
I. ^onnen @te biefe 95u(f)ftaben au^fpretf)en ?

2. 3<^ ^^^^ f^^ nennen ; fie ^ei^en te4fet.
I. 3Bag fur ein 5pun!t ftef)t gelx)of)nItd^ am @nbe be^
©a|e^ ?

2. 2)a§ nennt man nur einen ^un!t.

Etc., etc.
Reading 7.

SDer SDtenfc^ benft'S, ®ott tenft'g.

thinks it guides it

" Man proposes, God disposes."

S^ t)atf einen Sameraben,
©inen beffern finbft bu nit ' ;
S)ie Xrommel feeing jum ©treite,

drum beat for battle

(£r ging an meiner ©eite,

side

Sn gteid^em @d)ritt unb Stritt (Repeat).

equal pace step

©ine ^uget fam geftogen;

bullet flying

@ilt '^ mir ober gilt e§ bir?

Is it for me

* dialect form of nl^t.

Les. VIII.] VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. 5/

Sl)n f)at e^ tDeggeriffen,

snatched away

©r liegt mtr t)or ben '^ix'^tn,

at my

211^ wax' '§ ein Stiid t)on mtr. (Repeat.)

As were it

SBtH ntir bie §anb nod^ reid^en,

(He) wants give

S)tett)eit id) eben lab'.

While I am just loading

„Sann btr bie §anb nid^t geben;
SBIetb' bu tm ett)'gen Seben,

eternal life

9Ketn guter ^amerab.'^ (Repeat).

comrade. Subtoig U^lonb.

LESSON VIII.

Verbs. — Compound Tenses. — ^ahtn and fcin.

1. Memorize the commonest verbs that take fetn
as auxiliary^ and learn the principle that determines
this ; the great majority take ^aben.

2. 2)ct SBatcr ift gefomttieti uub ^tA iittiS cin Suc^

Father has come and has us a book

gctrari^t

brought.

3. Learn this sentence ; notice the auxiliary
which represents * has ' in each case, and the kind
of verb with which each is used, also the position
of the past participle.

4. The compound tenses are formed by uniting

S8 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. VTII.

one of the auxiliaries of tense (f)aben, feitt, iDerben)
with participle or infinitive of the verb in question.

5. The auxiliary hahm (or fein) with the past
participle of the verb forms the perfect and pluper-
fect tenses and perfect infinitive : as ic^ i)abc ge=
liebt, * I have loved ' ; ic^ l^atk geltebt, ' I had loved ' ;
gettebt i)abm, * to have loved.*

6. The auxiliary Itierben with the infinitives of the
principal verb forms the future tenses : as 16) tDerbe
tieben, 'I shall love'; x^ tt)erbe geltebt ijobtn, *I
shall have loved.'

7. Thus li:)erben as an auxiliary must be distin-
guished from tt)erben as an independent verb. As
an auxiliary the word means * shall ' in the first per-
son, but ' wilt/ * will,' in the second and third. In
the future of the independent verb tuerben the two
occur together, id) iDcrbe tDcrben, ' I shall become.'

8. fein is used instead of f)dbtn as tense auxiliary
in the case of a small number of verbs, mostly of
frequent occurrence. The following general rule
will aid the memory :

Transitive verbs always take J^aficn ; but some
intransitives (those denoting change of place or
conditio}!) take fcitt, or either fcttt or ^a6cn^ the latter
when the mode or the duration of motion is em-
phasized, for example : (£r ift nad) ber ©tabt geritten,
he has ridden to the city ; but @r l^at JtDet (^tlUlben
geritten, he rode two miles (or hours).

Les/VIII.] verbs. COMPOUND TENSES. 59

9. The following are the most common of those
that usually take fcin :

feitt only : feitt or f^dbtn :

fcin, <5<f. fasten, go, fare. fliegeit, fly.

tticrben, become, reiten, ride. ^\t\t\\^ flow.

ge^eit, go. laufeit, run. ftcigcn, rise.

fommeii, come. fotgen, >//^w. 5tcl)ett, move.

ftcrBctt, die. fatten, fall. ibegegncn, meet.

gefc^e^cn, happen. f^nngen, y«w/.

B(ei(en, remain.

10. Inflection of the Compound Tenses, Indicative

Mood.

Perfect.

i^ ^aBe gcItcBt, I have loved {I have been loving).
'^Xi ^aft ncUefit, thou hast loved {thou hast been loving).
@ic l^dBen geticBt, you have loved (you have been loving).
tX l^at gelieBt, he has loved {he has bee7i loving^.

'mx ^aBcn gcliebt, we have loved.
t^r \\tx\si gelicBt, ye have loved.
Sic ^aBcn gclicBt, you have loved.
fie l^aBcn gcHcBt, they have loved.

Pluperfect.

\^ ftattC gelicBt, / had loved.

'^Vi ^attcft gclick, thou hadst loved.

Sic fatten gelicBt, you had loved.
cr I)attc gcIicBt, /^<? /^^^ loved.

'mx l^tiiitW gcUcBt, ^^ had loved.
t^r ^attet OCliefit, ye had loved.

Sic l^attcn oeltcbt, you had loved.
fie fatten gclicBt, they had loved^

60 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les, VIII.

Future.
x^ tticrbc litUn, I shall love,
*^Xi ttJirft licbett, thou wilt love.

(Sic merben licbcn, you will love.
er ttihb Hcbctt, /^<f w/7/ love.

ttJir ttierbctt licbcit, w^ shall love.
i^r ttierbet licbcit, ye will love.
@ie mcrbcit (icbcn, you willlove.
fte tticrben Uebeit, they will love.

Future Perfect.
i(^ tticrbc gcttcbt ^abCIt, /shall have loved.

bu toitft geliebt ^abcn, ^/5^« «//// /^^z/^ loved.

(Sic ttlCrbCtt gcUcbt JabCU, you will have loved.
tX ttJirb gcHcbt ^abcn, he will have loved.

ttJir tticrben gcUcfit ^abett, we shall have loved.
S^X ttlCrbct gcticbt ^Obcu, ye will have loved.
®ic mcrbCtt gelicbt ^abcn^ you will have loz>ed.
fie tticrben gelicbt ^^ahtXif they will have loved.

Infinitive.
gcHebt ^aben, to have loved.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE. NEUTER.

ber JBa^n^of, the station. ba!^ ©(a^, the glass.

bcr 3w9r ^^^ train. '^^^ 5lbCttbbrot (evening bread),

bcr %ttf the tea. the supper^ tea.

ber ^nobe, the boy. ba§ XtjCa'tcr, the theatre.

ber 9^adftmittag, the afternoon. 'tit SBiUete, the tickets.

bie^naben, //5^%^. ^ente nat^mittag, this after-

FEMININE. n007l.

bic 2^0ffe, the cup. \)t\\it a^t\\\>f this evening.

bic 2^ante, the aunt. ba(b^ soon. [ously.

bie SWeile (-n), ^>^<f w//^, miles. flciHitJ, industrious, industri-

Les/VIII.] verbs. COMPOUND TENSES. 6 1

mel)r, more, '^^x\^tx^ previously, first,

no^ ntcfit, not yet. ttiann, when ?

StieitbBrot cjfcn (or nt^mtxi), focictt, Just now.

take tea, \^^t\^^ i?nmediately.

Strong Verbs with fcin:
fowmett, come, !aw, gcfommen*
reiten, ride (horseback), rttt, gcnttctt*
blciBctt, remain, BUcB, gebtic^ett*
ftcigctt, mount {ox descend), ftieg, gefttegett*
(aufctt, r«« (the gait), (icf, gclaufctt, (auft*
faljten, r/V/^ (in vehicle), ftt|ir, gefa^rcn, fri^rt
fterien, ^^>, ftarb, gcftorbcn, fttrbt.
gcfd^e^ctt, /5^/a«, geftifta^, gcfdic^ctt, geft^ie^t

With l^aBcn:
trinfen, drink, ttanf, getrmifett*
Httett, «jv^ {request), M\f gcBcteti {for, um).

Declension of i(j^, /.
Singular. Plural.

Norn, ic^, /. ttjir, «^<f.

Gen. nteittcr (mcitt), of me, unfcr, of us,
Dat. mir, /^ w<f. tttti^, to us.

Ace. mirift, me. tttt)^, wj.

Note 13. — The English order in " I have bought a house,"
" I will buy a house," becomes in German, " I have a house
bought," " I will a house buy " ; that is, in compound forms of
the verb, th.e part, or inf. comes at the end of the clause. For par-
ticular statement of the order of the German sentence, see
Lessons XXV and XXVI.

Exercise VIII.

1. SBa^ ^aben bie ^aben t)eute nad^mtttag getan
(or gemac^t) ? 2. @ie t)tiben fteifetg gefptett iinb getai^t ;
fie tperben aber ^eute abenb meljr tadjen. 3. 28a^

62 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. VIII.

tt)erben tvxx benn I)eute abenb madden ? 4. 3Bir tDerben
aUe in^ Sweater ge^en. 5. 9tber irerben tuir ntd)t
t)orf)er 2Ibenb6rot ne{)men ? 6. S(^ ^abe f(f)on etnc
Xaffe ^ 2;ee getrunfen. 7. S(^ bitte @ie : 6tet6en @te
jum 3l6enbbrot. 8. S(f) bebaure,^ \6) gef)e fogleic^
jum S3aI)nf)of. 9. SIber ber 3ug ift nod) nid^t gcfom-
men. 10. ©ie ^naben iDoCen aud^ jum 33a{)n{)of gei)en,
II. 3f)re Slante tt)trb mtt biefem 3uge fommen. 12. @te
[inb f(i)on t)on bem 3i^9^ ge!ommen. 13. 3(^ glaube,
e^ ift etoa^ gefc^eljen. 14. Sa, fie f)aben e^ mir ge*
fagt. 15. §aben @ie e^ f^on get)6rt? 16. St)re SCante
n)irb nidEjt fommen ; fie ift Dorgeftern geftorben, 17. SBir
fjatten biefe STante fet)r geliebt. 18. 28ir h^erben alfo
fjeute abenb md)t in§ Sl{)eater get)en. 19. Unb tvxx
bleiben bodE) bei Sf)nen 3, 20. "^d^ bitte ©ie um ein
®Ia§ SBaffer. 21. @ie I)aben ein ®tM 9J?ufi! gelernt
unb tDerben e^ fiir un^ fingen. 22. Sc^ gtaube, tDir
f)aben e^ fd^on get)6rt. 23. Slber iDir tDoIIen e^ tt)ieber
f)6ren.

* See German Exercise V, note 2. ®Th\is, without object ex-
pressed, implied ' that I cannot.* ^ jyou (dat. of @ie).

Exercise 8.
I. My aunt has ^always 3 loved ,me. 2. But have
you not heard ? She has just died. 3. No, I had
not yet heard it. 4. Is (stands) it in the newspaper ?
5. Ido not know ; the newspaper has not come this
afternoon, 6. Yes, here ^it , stands: *< She had just

Les/VIII.] verbs. — COMPOUND TENSES. 63

drunk a cup (of) tea." 7. Will you not stay 3 to ^tea
I with I 2 us .? 8. Have you not already eaten supper.?
9. ,We jhave ^ driven ^twenty ^ miles 3 this ^ after-
noon. 10. We have ^ drunk 3 nothing ,this ^after-
noon. ii.jThen^jWe ^will stay with you. 12. Have
you brought the friends from the station .? 13. Our
friends have just come from the train. 14. They
had just descended from the train. 15. Have they
already supped (taken supper) } 16. They have only
drunk a cup (of) tea. 17. That is nothing, they will
surely take supper with us. 18. What has happened ?
What have you done ? 19. The cup has fallen ; I
have broken it. 20. We shall soon find my brother^s
cup. 21. I have already found it. 3 22. Our friends
wish to go to the theater. 23. They have asked me
for three tickets. 24. Will you give us your tickets ?

'bet. *3l(fo. ^ See Exercise 4, note i.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

MASCULINE. dn^ bCUtfc^, <« German.

bet ©d^r ^^^ sentence. ttlOtlOtt, of ox about what?

bet DflebctetJ, the part of speech. I)0ttbeltt {handle), treat.
bic O^icbctetle, the parts of tt>a§ fiir {what for), what kind
speech. of?

FEMININE. Cttt^al'tCtt, contain.

bic (^ramma'tif, the grammar, Ctttplt, contains.

NEUTER.

\stk^ Scttwott (SSerbum), the verb.

'^^^ ^aulJttnort (®ubftantit)'), the noun.

btt)^ f^iirttiort (^rono'men), the pronoun.

64 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. VIII.

t>a§ (Jifleufrfiafti^ttlOrt (^tbjeftiJj')/ the adjective.
\s^^ %t\^it^im^xi (ber 2lrti'!el), the article.
\st{^ S'lft^ttlDrt (D^umera'Ie), the numeral.
^ta^ ^JicbcUttlOrt (5lbt)er'bium), the adverb.

ba)§ ^orttJort (bie ^re))ofttionO, the preposition.

\sii^ 23ittbcttiort, (bie ^onjiinftionO,

\s^% 5tit!§nifmigi§ttiort (bie Snterjeftion'), ^//^ i?iterjection.

Conversation 7. — Die Hebcteile.
I. Wit I)etfet "verb" auf beutfi^?

2. "Verb" ^ei^t auf beutfd; ,,ba^ ^eittDort."

Etc., etc.

I. SBie t)iele 3^it^t)rter ^at biefer @a^?
2. 3)iefer ©a$ ^at nur ein S^ittDort.

Etc., etc.

I. 3Bot)on l^anbelt bie ©rantmati!?

2. ®te ©rammatil ^anbelt t)on ben Slebeteilen.
I. aSa^ fiir ein ^Rebeteit ift ,,§au^'' ?

2. „§aug" ift ein §am)ttt)ort.

Etc., etc.

I. SBie l^ei^t ba^ @pric^tt)ort in biefer Slufgabe?
2. ®a§ ©^)rid^h)ort in biefer Slufgabe ^ei^t, „®IudE
unb ©(a§/' :c.

Etc., etc.

1. 3Bie t)iele §aupttt)6rter entplt e^ ?
2. (S§ ent^cilt jtt)ei §au))ttt)orter.

Etc., etc.
Reading 8.
^tttii!^ too tt*

OIM unb ®Ia§, tnie balb bri^t' ba^.

Happiness how soon breaks that,

^from bred^en,
"Fortune hath wings."

Les. IX.] VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. 6$

2Ba§ hn nt^t tDtllft, baB man bir tu\^

What wilt, that to-thee do,

S)a^ fiig'^ auc^ leinem anbern ju.

That do also no other to.
^fortUC. ^forfugc,

9Som ^ttntnel !ommt e^,
3um ^tmmet ftetgt^ e^,
Unb tDieber^ ntebers
3ur (Srbe mu^ e^,
(Str)t9 4 tt)ec£)fetnb.5

©oet^c.
'rises. * again. 'down. * eternally. * changing.

LESSON IX.

Compound Tenses. — Correspondence of Tenses.

I • Do not translate tenses literally, but seek and
use the corresponding tense in the other language,

2. 2)cr 65to|ftiatcr ift gcftetn in bcr S^ule geitiefctt

Grandfather was yesterday in (the) school [been]

ttiib f ommt ntorgcn toicber*

and (will) come to-morrow again.

3. Learn this sentence. Notice the use of the
article before ®rofet3ater ; notice especially the per-
fect tense (ift getDefen) for the English past, and
the present for the future.

4. German like English uses the present tense
for the future, but still more freely, as SdE) gefje mor^

66 VERBS. — COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. IX.

gen nad) ber ©tabt, I go {am going, shall go) to the
city to-morrow ; %^ fage e^ ntd^t, / shall not say it
(as well as, / do not say it).

5. German uses the present tense for the English
perfect, where the latter represents a past condi-
tion continuing in the present, as 9Bir tDof)nen fdjort
jtDet Sci^re ^ter, We have been living here two years,

6. The German preterit corresponds to the
English past progressive and to the simple past in
consecutive narrative (the historical tense), as, (£r
fc^rieb in bem ©arten, He was writing in the garden;
Scf) fam, tc^ fat), id) ftegte, / came, I saw, I conquered,

7. But the German uses the perfect for the Eng-
lish past in colloquial and disconnected sentences,
as Sd) t)abe i^ren Sruber geftern gefet)en, I saw your
brother yesterday ; (Jolumbu^ t)at Slmerifa entbedt,
Columbus discovered America,

8. The idioms in 5, 6, 7, above are among the
most characteristic in German and should be care-
fully observed and practiced. In the exercises
hitherto they have been avoided, but this and the
following lessons will use them freely.

9. The verbs I)aben, fein, ii:)erben, being so common,
should be thoroughly memorized, hence a synopsis
of them is given herewith. The form with the pro-
noun @ie, being the only one used in polite con-
versation, should be given regularly in reciting
paradigms.

Les. ix.] VERBS. COMt'OUND TENSES. 6j

10. Compound Tenses of l^aBett, in the Indicative Mood.

Perfect,
t^ l^afic gc^afit, / have had.

btt ^aft gc^aBt, ///^^^ >^^x/ /^^^.
@ic l^aBeit ge^a^t, jk^^^ /^^z'^r had.

tX ^ttt gel^afit, /^^ has had.
Etc., etc.

Pluperfect.

\^ ^atte ge^a^t, i had had.

@ic l^attctt gc^afit, jj^^^/ //^^^ had.
cr Hatte gc^aBt, /^<f had had.

Etc., etc.
Future.
\^ ttierbc ^abcn, I shall have.
Etc., etc.

Future Perfect.

ir^ merbc gc^afit ^abeti, / ^/^^// /^az/^ had.

Etc., etc.
Compound Infinitive.
gC^Obt ^^tlX^ to have had.

11. Compound Tenses of fcitt, in the Indicative Mood.

PKINCIPAI. PARTS.

feitt, taat, gemefen.

Perfect,
td^ 1m, gctUCf en, / have been.
bu bift geitiefCtt, thou hast been.
Sic flttb gcttJCfCtt, you have been.
cr ift gCtOCfcn, he has been.
Etc., etc.

68 VERBS. — COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. IX.

Pluperfect.

X^ mat gCttiefCtt, I had been.

"^Vi tuarft gcmcfen, thou hadst been,

@ie tuareu gcwefcn, you had been.
tx mar gemefcn, /^^ /4^</ ^^^«.
Etc., etc.

Future.

xi&i ttierbc fern, I shall be,
btt mirft f ettt, thou wilt be.
(3ic tticrbctt fcin, ^^« w/7/ ^/.
er 'mx'ts fctu, /^<? w/7/ ^<f.

Etc., etc.
Future Perfect.
\^ ttlCrbe gctticfett f Citt, / shall have been.
'^yX Xm\i gCttlCfCtt fcitt, thou wilt have been.
@ic ttlCrbCtt gcmefCU \mXf you will have been

er mirb gcniefctt fcin, /^<r w/// have been.

Etc., etc.
Compound Infinitive.

gemefctt fein, ^^ /^^z^^ been.
12. Compound Tenses of ttJerbcit, in the Indicative Mood.

PRINCIPAI. PARTS.

xotx'btn, taurbe or f^at'b, gemotbett.

Perfect.

ir^ Bin gemorbCtt, I have become.

Etc., etc.

Pluperfect.

iii^ mar gemorben, I had become.
Etc., etc.

Future.

i^ merbc mcrbctt, I shall become.

Etc., etc.

Les. iX.] VERBS. • — COMPOUND TENSES.

69

Futnre Perfect.
idi tnerbC gCtUOrbcn \t\\i, I shall have become.
Etc., etc.

Compound Infinitive.

getnorbctt fcin,

to have become.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE,

tttfen, call^ summon.

ber ©ropatcr, the grand-

frfjirfen, send.

father.

f^a^ieren ge^en, go walking.

bcr gorft, the forest.

tjetlieren, lose.

bcr [Hegeii, /^^ r^/?/.

tietberben, spoil.

bcr $immc(, M^ heaven, sky.

batum, on that account.

(ber) (Sbuavb, Edward.

gefterit, yesterday.

(bcr)^citttritift, i%«Or.

§tt, /^^ (excessively), to (with

bie ^^fe(, ^/5<f ^///^j.

inf.)

FEMININE.

6ei, at the house of

bie aWiilje, M<f ^«/.

bi§ ie^t, //// w^w.

bic 993i(^ermftrage, William

Street.

bic St^lttlc, ^/^<f school.

(atige, /^«^.

ft^lerfft, ^^^.

NEUTER.

fait ^^/^.

ba§ JRcit^f Crb, //^^ saddle-horse.

i^r^ (dat.), her.

bai^ ^anbtticrf, //5<? /^^^^.

feit, (dat.),>^ (time).

'^^^ SBcttcr, ^z^^- weather.

einige, some.

meg, rt-w^^/.

attri^l, /r///5/?r (after negative).

^offen, >^^A.

f ri^ott recftt, «// ri;f/^/.

Declension

OF "^Vif thou.

Singrular.

Plural.

Nom. '^Vi, thou.

ifiv, ye, you. (Bit,

Gen. beiner (bein), of thee, euer, e/^j^t?^. 3[^ter,

Dat. \Ax^ to thee.

cttti^, /i?;j/^w. Sftnem

Ace. bic^l, thee.

eurift, you. (Bic.

70 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. IX.

Note. 14. — Do not use bu unless relationship or intimacy is
indicated, for instance, to one who is addressed by his Christian
name.

Note. 15. — When the sentence begins with a part of the pred-
icate the verb must precede the subject. The verb precedes the
subject in questions as in a command or a wish. If the verb begins
a sentence which is not a question, a command or a wish, it prob-
ably expresses a condition^ tt)cnn being understood. But see Les-
sons XXV and XXVI.

Exercise IX.

I. 3)a^ SBetter t[t gefterrt je^r fd^Ied^t getuefen. »

2. (Sbuarb tft barum nid)t jur Sd^ute gegangen.

3. ^emricf) i[t a6er gegangen. 4. S)er 9iegen ^^i jeine
5D?u^e t)erborben. 5- Slber ba^ 2Better tft ^eute 6t^
je^t fc^on. 6. SBotlen^ tt)ir boc^3 fpajieren ge^en!
7. 3a, ttJoIIen rt)ir ju nnfern grennben in ber 2Bitf)e(m^
ftra^e ge^en! 8. Sc^ f)abe meine 3Ku^e t)erIoren.
9. 3c^ !aufe mir barum etnen §ut. 10. ®et)en bie S'na-
ben l^eute nicfjt 5ur4 ©c^ute? n. §etnric^ rt)irb ntd^t
get)en, aber ©buarb ge{)t. 12. SBie lange gel)en btc
^naben jc^on in bie ©d^ule ? 13. D, fie ge^en fdjon
t)ier Sat)re. 14. ©buarb rt)irb balb ein ^anbtDerf lernen,
15- ^einrii^ ift nicEjt ftar!, er ift fef)r Iran! getcefen.
16. @inb @ie auc^ fran! getDefen? 17. SJiein, unb id)
^offe, icf) ttjerbe nii^t fran! ttjerben. 18. $D?an fagt, ber
Se£)rer ift aud^ !ranf getDorben. 19. Sd^ tt)ei^, er ift
geftern nid)t in ber ©(^ute geit)efen. 20. 3Ber \)Qi\.
\iz\m gete{)rt? 21. (Sinb bie ©driller in ber ©d^ute
geblieben ? 22. Satpot)!, man {)at ben Sruber unfer^

Les/IX.] verbs. COMPOUND TENSES. /I

Sel)rer§ gerufen. 23. gbuarb, i)at er bir gefagt, ido
bte Seftton ift ? 24. Sa, unb t(^ {)abe meine Slufgabe
f(^on geternt

^ See the remark at the head of this lesson. *Z<f/ «j, a mild
sort of imperative used in the first person plural. ^Xr. comg or
O at beginning. * B^V @(i)ule gcl^en, ^o ^o to school {on any occa-
sion) ; in tie @(!)ule ge^en, to go to school (to attend school).

Exercise 9.

I. Henry, your grandfather has been here.
2. So .? what did he say .? 3. Why has he stayed away
so long .? 4. Has he then been sick ? 5. He has ^only
5 had 2 very ^much ^to ^do. 6. I have just come
from [the] school. 7. Did you learn your lesson
well 1 8. I had learned it well, but I forgot. 9. Ah,

1 have heard that so often ! 10. I ^ have ^ grown

2 very ^ tired (of)' ^it. n. I shall not forget it
again. 12. When did Edward lose his cap ? 13. He
has had this cap (for) 2- a year. 14. Who told you
so "^ 15. I heard it at school 16. What has become
of Henry } 17. Henry, I have been calling you
(for) five minutes. 18. Shall we see you to-morrow
at our house > 19. I hope the weather will not be
bad. 20. We shall ride to the forest. 21. How long
have you had this horse .? 22. Not very long ; but
we had one horse ten years. 23. We do not ride,
we shall go walking. 24. We shall not ride either ;
it will be too cold. 25. We shall send some apples

72 VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. [Les. IX.

to our aunt. 26. Edward saw her yesterday; he
says she has been sick. 27. ,Then ^we ^ shall
7 go 5^0 6 her ^ourselves. 28. Call the boys; they
will go with you. 29. Edward will be here immedi-
ately, but Henry had already gone. 30. That will
be all right.

^ miibe may govern a direct accusative. * Add lattg after 3cit)VV
though not required. ^ ^((Jq or baiin.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

ber SBerftag, the workday. bcr JJcicrtag, the holiday.

bcr SUtttttag, Sunday. bCt crftC %^% the first day.

bet SJlOtttag, Monday. bCt bOrlC^tC ^ag, the last day
bet ^ieui^tag, Tuesday. hit one.

bet aUittttlOti^, Wednesday. \s\t 2Bo(i^e, //^<f w/f^>&.

bet ^onneti^tag, Thursday. bet SBorfje, of the week.

bet gteitag, Friday. bie 2; age, ^>^<? ^^yj.

bet Suttttabenb (Sami^tag), nennett, «^w^.

Saturday.

Conversation 8. — Die XX)od?e,

I. 2Btet)ieIe Sage f)at bie SBoc^e?

2. 2)ie 9Sod^e l^at fieben Stage.
I. 3Bte ^et^t ber erfte Sag ber SBo^e?

2. S)er erfte Sag ber 2Boc^e ^eifet ©onntag.
I. aSte f)eifet ber t)orIe^te Sag ber SBo^e?

2. S)er t)orIe^te Sag ber 9Bod^e ^et^t 3=reitag.

Etc., etc.

I. aSoHen @te bie Sage ber 2Boci)e nennen?

2. ©onntag, SUlontag, K.
I. aSie f)etfet ber Sag jtDtfdien 9Wxtttood) unb ^ret:*
tag?

Les. IX.] VERBS. COMPOUND TENSES. 73

2. ®er Stag jtt)if^en WxttWod) unb g^reitag l^ei^t
Sonnergtag,
I. SBie {)ei^t ber Stag nad^ ©onntag?
2. 3)er Stag nad^ ©onntag ^ei^t SWontag.

Etc., etc.
Reading 9.

SKii^tggang tft aller Safter Slnfang.
"Idleness is the mother of all vices."

Xit fHQam am 9)^ein.

©^ Brauft etn 9iuf tt)ie ©onnerliall,

There roars cry like thunder-call

28ie @d)tDertge!ltrr unb SSogenprall,

sword-clash wave-dash

3um Si^etn, jum 9i^ein, jum beutfd^en 3it)etn,
9Ber totE be^ ©trome^ filter fein?

the stream's guard

C/ior. I : Sieb $BaterIanb, magft ru^tg fein, : )

(thou) mayst calm

I : geft ftet)t unb treu | : bie aSa^t : \ am 9{t)ein ! : |

Fast true

©urd) §unberttaufenb judt e^ fdEjneH

hundred thousand darts swiftly

Unb aHer 2lugen bli^en 1)611:

(of) all flash brightly

S)er S)eutfdE)e, bteber, fromm unb ftarf,

upright pious strong

SBefd^iilt bie i)eirge Sanbe^marf. C-^^n

(Will) guard holy land-borders.

74 NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. X.

S)er ©cljtuur erfc^allt, bie SBoge rtnnt,

vow resounds wave runs

S)ie gat)neu flatterit ^06) im 3Sinb :

flags flutter

Sim 9i^etn, am SRt)etn, am beutfc^en "di^dn
SSir alle tvoUm filter fein ! C^^^r.

LESSON X.

Nouns. — First Declension. Class I.

1. It pays to learn thoroughly the classes of de-
clension; these are based on gender, endings and
number of syllables. Note carefully the things com-
mon to all.

2. 2)er SBatcr bc^ ©ci^iiler)^ ^^i ja^ jltJei Stilbcr in

pupil [has]

bcm 2)iJrf^cn gc^alit*

village had.

"^Why^ at beginning.

3» Learn this sentence. Note the common
characteristics of the first three nouns, and their
forms.

4. German nouns are commonly divided into two
declensions :

5. To the First or strong Declension belong all
of the neuter and most of the masculine nouns,
with quite a number of feminines.

Les/X.] nouns. FIRST DECLENSION. 75

6. To the Second or weak Declension belong
most feminine nouns with some masculines, but no
neuters.

7. In the First Declension the genitive singular
adds (e)^ ; in the Second Declension (e)n to mascu-
line nouns.

8. In the First Declension the plural nominative
is formed in three different ways ; in the Second
Declension the plural ends throughout in -n (-cn).

9. Feminine nouns, whether belonging to the
First or Second Declension, do not vary in the
singular.

10. In order to decline a noun, it is necessary to
know the genitive singular and the nominative
plural, which, together with the gender and the
nominative singular, are to be found in the diction-
ary.

11. Compound nouns receive gender and classi-
fication from the last element of the compound.
The classification in this and the following lessons
is based on simple nouns.

First Declension.

12. The First Declension may be divided into
three classes, according to the form of the nomi-
native plural : In Class I, to form the nominative
plural, nothing is added to the nominative singular;
in Class II, -e is added ; in Class III, -er.

y6 NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. X.

13. Tables of Case-Endings of the First Declension.

Singular. Plural.

Class I. Class II. Class III. Class I. Class II. Class III.

Norn. — l^e " tV

Gen. § (e)^ (e)§ -^t — ii-cr

Dat. (e) (e) tt — i^ett — ii-ertt

Ace. — ^11— c — ^^er

14. The e in parenthesis is purely euphonic. It
is a good general rule to retain it with monosylla-
bles, and in the dative of polysyllables which have
e^ in the genitive.

i5« Note, a. Most monosyllables modify the
stem-vowel in the plural.

d. The dative plural always ends in -n.

c. The change to the Umlaut in the plural
takes place in Class I sometimes, in Class II gener-
ally, in Class III always.

There are many exceptions to any scheme of
declension, and these must be learned from the
dictionary little by little. But for some common
cases see the Appendix.

A tabular view of the declensions is given on p. 98.

Class I.

16, This class comprises masculine and neuter
polysyllables ending in -el, -er, -en, and the dimin-
utives in -c^en and -lein.

The feminines SOlutter and Xoci^tcr follow the model of this
class in the plural. Latin derivatives in -or follow this class in
the singular, but are weak in the plural.

Les. X.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION.

n

17, Declension of bet St^itler, the scholar.

Singular.

Nom.

ber @(f|U(cr, the scholar.

Gen.

bC^ Sf^iilcr^, of the scholar.

Dat.

bem Sd^Ulcr, to the scholar.

Ace.

bCtt ©critter, the scholar.

Plural.

Nora.

btC (Stiller, the scholars.

Gen.

ber @dS|ii(cr, ^ //^^ scholars.

Dat.

ben Sr^itlcnt, /<? ^/^^ scholars.

Ace.

bic 6ti^ttlcr, //^^ scholars.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE.

(ba)§) SittCi^ett, diminutive of

X, the teacher. ^aroUtte.

ber Sri^liiffel, the key.

ber Ofen, the stove,

ber Xetter, the plate.

ber ©tiefel, M<f <^^^^.

ber Partner, the gardener.

ber Ottfel, the uncle.

ber JJuPobeit, the floor.

ber @(i^eme(, the footstool.

FEMININE.

bie Iji^itXf the daughters.
bte aJliitter, the mothers.

'^^^ genftcr, the window.
'^^^ Saumri^ett, the little tree.
'^^^ fjrauleitt, the young lady,
Miss.

bo^ Xiic^tcrti^ett, M^ ///^/^

daughter.

ttebejt, beside, by (with dative).
tjietteiti^t, perhaps, possibly.
Uor etlter ©tunbe (before an
hour), ^« y^<72/r ago.

raur^eit^ /^ jw^/^^.

boti^l, though, nevertheless ; O
yes, surely.

naturlit^, of course.

5tt ^aufe, at home.

m^i ttia^r, /> it not true ? is
it not so?

tt)0!^l^ to be sure; probably;
certainly.

ja, indeed, you know, why.

ffi^Olt, already, surely, doubt-
less, even, betim.es.

betttt^ then, in that case, now,
indeed.

UO(f|^ besides, as yet, still (tem-
poral).

eilWtal', once, only.

yS NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. X-

Remark. — The adverb boc^ means commonly " though " ;
but a variety of expressions are necessary to give its precise force
or particular shade of meaning in different connections. Usually
the sentence with bod^ expresses surprise, remonstrance, or ob-
jection, and the equivalent of bocf) is Why ! or O 1 or Come ! at
the beginning of the English sentence, as, @ib tnir boc^ belt §ut,
Come, give me my hat ; (Sr l)at bod^ liid^t^ getOU I Why, he has
done nothing ! Only long practice and observation will enable one
to appreciate its exact signification. Much the same may be
said of ja, tt)o^(, andj and fd)on.

Declension of cr, /^<f, fie, s/ie, c^, if.

M. F. N. M.F.N.

Nom. cr fie C^ ^^, s/ie, it. fic they.

Gen. fcitt(er) y^XtX fcitt(cr) of him, her, it. \^xtX of them

Dat. \\(IX x\c t^m to him, her, it. if^nttt to them.

Ace. i^tt fic t^ him, her, it. fic them.

e6 is also the expletive " there."

Note i6. — In sentences introduced by ba§, " that," batnlt,
"in order that," etc., and by relatives, the verb is transposed to
the end. For a detailed statement of the order of the German
sentence, see Lesson XXV.

Note 17. — The endings -d^cn and -(ein are extensively used
to form diminutives, or words expressing endearment, which are
then always neuter, and have the Umlaut on the stem-vowel.

Exercise X.

I. SDer £ef)rer unferer ^^od^ter tft ^ter gettJefen. 2. §at
er ti\QQi^ liber fie gefagt ? 3. (£r fagt, fie I)at geftern 2(benb
fel)r f(J)on gefungen. 4. S)a^ ti:)erben tr)ir boi^ i(jrem Cnfel
fagen. 5. Satt)o!)t, i^r Dn!el trtrb e^ gern l)oren. 6. @ie
fingt aud) t)eute tt)ieber bet bem 2el)rer. 7. SSoHen tt)ir
benn mtt it)r gum Set)rer fasten? 8. 3Sir (aben bem

Les. X.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION, 79

£e{)rer etn 95uc^ gegeben. 9. (£^ tvax tDof)t etn 9}?uft!6udj ?
10. aSerben bie ^tiitter ber 9Jidbc^en aud) bei bem Secret
fein? II. Sc^ glaube tt)oI)l; meine SJMter nimnit tijr
%bd)kxd)m nut. 12. S)ie TOabi^en finb fc^on gegangcn.
13. S)er 85ater biefe^ SDfabd^en^ rettet gern. 14. ©r tinrb
tDo^l retten. 15. graulein S8raun ift nod^ titdjt Ijicr.
16. Sft t)telletd)t ettDa^ gef(^et)en ? 17. ^Idn, fie ift bei iljrev
abutter geblieben. 18. S()re SlZutter ift !ran! get^orben.
19. S)er SSater ^at ben 9Kabd)en ben @d)Iuff el be^ 3^^^^^'^
gelaffen. 20. S)ie 3)?abc^en ftaben im 3'^^^^ 9^fW^I^-

21. §at ha§> 3^^^^^ ^^^^^ gn^boben jnm Slanjen?

22. J)ie Dfen in bem 3^^^^^ ^aben aUt gerauc^t

23. Sindjen I)at barnm nid)t gefungen.

Exercise io.

I. Our uncle has lived in this house ten years.

2. The uncle's gardener lives in the house with him.

3. We have often been in uncle's room. 4. How
many windows has the room ? 5. ^That ^I do ^not
^know, but the windows of the room are all large.
6. I believe the room has no stove. 7. O yes, it
has a stove. 8. They are just coming out of the
room. 9. Did you see my uncle ? 10. I think I
saw him. n. He was sitting by the stove. 12. His
boots were lying on the footstool beside him.
13. He was eating from a plate. 14. I think , I
jjust 2 heard ^a ^ plate ^fall. 15. ^Why, ^the ^plate
jfell upon the stove. 16. ^ Of -course ^it ^ broke.

80 NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. X.

17. What broke, the plate or the stove } 18. I hope
it did not fall upon the floor. 19. Uncle*s floors are
always very clean. 20. Uncle has given each of us
a plate. 21. I think we will give him one. 22. We
shall send the plate by ^ the gardener. 23. The gar-
dener's little daughter is just going to uncle's. ^
24. Will she not stay in the house ? 25. Her father
jj stays 3 there ^ you-know. 26. The gardener has
lost the key of the room. 27. Why, 3 the key was
lying on the floor beside the stove. 28. I thank you
very (much) ; we have found it. 29. From this win-
dow 2 we I see the windows of the theater. 30. Yes,
the gardener ^ often ^ goes with uncle to the theater,

' bnxd), ^ Dative case. ^ ^q^ after verb.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
MASCULINE. CtttigC, som^.

bet 'Mo'nai, the month, gUttJCiJctt, sometimes.

ber Satmar', ttiic ttcnnt tnait, {how names

ber 5'C^^*ttar', one ?) how do they call?

bet SDlar^, bcr erftc Syionat (Nom.),

bcr 5lprir, ben erftett SJlonat (Ace),

ber '^^Xf the first month.

ber Su'tti, ttiie miirbctt <Sie, how would

ber 3>tt'iif you ?

ber 5lu9uft', batie'reti, date.

ber Se^temBcr, x^ ttiiirbc, /would.

ber OftuBer, neutt^el^tt ^unbert uier, w;V/<r-

ber Wot»ember, teen hundred and four.

ber ^e^em^er,

ber 2Btttter, winter. neuter.

ber ©omtner, summer, bai^ Saturn, M^ ^^^^r-

Les. X.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 8 1

Conversation 9. — Dcr HTo'nat.

I. 2Bte t)iele SCage i^at ber Ttomi SlprK?
2. 2)er 3Dtonat 2l^)ri[ ^at brei^ig 3:age,

Etc., etc.

I. ^ai jeber Wtonai bret^tg Slage?

2. ©inige 3Konate ^aben einunbbrei^ig 2^age.
I. SBie t)te(e Xage ^at ber gebruar jutpeilen?

2- 2)er g^ebruar i)at ^nmikn neununbjtDanjig STage.
I. SBoUen @ie bie SJfonate auf 3)eutjclj (jcr')agen?

2. Sie lauten fo : ^anuar, g^ebruar, 2c.
I. 9!Bie nertnt man ben erften Womt be^^ 3a()re^?

2. ®en erften 9Jionat be^ ^af^re^ nennt man Qanuar.

Etc., etc.

I. SBoHen @ie ha§ 2Bort TOarj bud^ftabteren ?

2. 5!Jlar^ bud^ftabiert man fo : ,,em-d (giving the sound
of the Umlaut) -er-tfet.''
Etc., etc.

I. aKa^ filr etn Stag ift ijtnk?

2. §eute ift ber gtoangigfte.
I. 2Kie tDurben @ie einen Srtef ^ente batie'ren?

2. 3d^ tDiirbe einen Srief ^eute fo batieren: „93erKn/
ben (am) 20^«« SKcirj, 1904.''
I. SBoHen @ie bie aSintermonate nennen ?

Etc., etc.
Reading io.

Sin ben gebern erfennt man ben SSogel.

By feathers recognizes bird.

"By their dress we know them."

82 NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. X.

3)er Xanntnhanm,

SSolBUeb.

D 2^annen6aum, o Slannenbaum,

fir-tree

3Sie treu finb beine SIdtter!

leaves

S)u griinft ntdjt nur sur ©ommerjeit,

greenst

9?ein, and) tm 3[Stnter, tDenn e^ fdineit

snows

D Stannenbaum, o Sannenbaum,
9Bie treu finb beine 93latter!

D areagbelein, o 3)?agbelein,

maiden

SBie falfd) i[t bein (Semitte!

spirit

S)n f(^n)urft mir Sreu' in meinem ®lucf,

vowedst success

9?un arm id) bin, gef)ft bu jnriid!

poor goest back

D 3)fagbelein, o SWagbelein,
2Bie fdfd^ ift bein ©emiite!

SDer ^a6) m Zd, ber Sad^ im Stat,

brook vale

Sft beiner galfdj^eit ©piegel!

of thy falseness mirror

@r ftriimt alfein tDenn 9tegen flie^t,

streams rain flows

93ei Surf er balb ben QueU Derfd^tie^t;

drouth spring closes

S)er 93a(^ im %al, ber 93a^ im Slal,
Sft beiner galfc^f)eit Spiegel!

Les. XL] NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. 83

LESSON XI.

Nouns. — First Declension. Class IL
I. Declension in the singular is simple ^ feminine s
having no change at all and most masculines and
neuters adding only (e)^ in the genitive,

for

5C^tt ^fcnnige ticrfauft unb ^aficn bamit Sl^fel gcfauft.

therewith

3. Learn the sentence. Observe the declensional
forms, the place of the past participle, and the
peculiar bamit instead of mtt i^m (bent ®elbe).

4. Nouns in other classes are easily designated
by gender, ending and number of syllables; to
Class II belong most of those not thus clearly as-
signed to one of the other classes.

Class II.

5. To Class II belong : of masculines, most mono-
syllables, all polysyllables in -tg, Ai) and -ing,
foreign derivations in -al, -an, -aft, -ar and -ter ; of
f eminines, one-third of all monosyllables ; of neuters
a few monosyllables in -r and a few polysyllables
in -nt^ and -fal

Declension of ber Sol^tt*

Singular. Plural.

Norn, bcr So^tt bic ©o^itc

Gen. bC)^ So^ncig bcr Sii^nc

Dat. bcm So^ttc bctt ©ij^ttctt

Ace. \stxi ©ol^tt bic 8o^ttc

84

NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XI.

Singpalar,
Nom. btC ^anh, the hand.
Gen. bcr ^attb, of the hand.
Dat. bet ^anb, to the hand.
Ace. btC ^anb, the hand.

Plural,
bic ^iittbc the hands.
'^tX ^anbC of the hands.
bett ^ftttben to the hands.
bic ^fittbc the hands.

Vocabulary.

(Nouns starred have not Umlaut in the Plural.)
WX\% cheap.

MASCULINE.

* bet 8ti^tt^, the shoe.

* bcr %xm^ the arm.
bcr ^U^f, the head.
bcr gu§^ the foot.

bcr OfJorf, //^^r ^^^/.

(bcr) X^c'obor, Theodore.

(bcr) ¥aul, Z'^^/.

NEUTER.

ba§ Scttt, //^/f /^^.

* ts^^ ^aar, the pair.
'h^^ %\tX^ the animal.

"^^^ there, burt, yonder.
6ci Dlot^^ ^^ the store or house
of Roth ^ at Roth''s.

Note i8. — Instead of a preposition with an interrogative or
demonstrative pronoun, a pronominal adverb is often employed
in German: as, tt)01Ttit, "with what," "wherewith"; tDoriu, "in
what," " wherein " ; bartu, " in that," " therein " ; barauf, " upon
that," " thereupon."

Exercise XI.

I. SSo tft ber 2;{)eobor getoefen? 2.(£r tft mit bem
@oI)ne be§ ©enerafe in ber Stabt getDefen. 3- SBir I)orten
fie t)on ©tiefeln unb ®d^uf)en fpred)en. 4. S(i^ tt)erbe ben

ticrfaufcit, sell.
fragcn, ask.

biirfcn, be permitted (See Les-
son XXI).

^offCtttltr^, / hope, it is to be

hoped.
t^ gaB, there was, there were.
rcr^t ^abctt^ to be right.
ttltrcri^t ^afiCtt, to be wrong.
Bet aJlittter, at Mailer's.
man fagt, one says, they say,

people say.
ttiaig fitr Citt, what sort of a

(" what for a ") ?

Les. XL] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 85

St^eobor fragen. s- @te i)abm bet $Rot() ein ^aar ©c^ii^c
gelauft. 6. 2Btr faufeit an6) uttfere ©tiefd iinb ©c£)uf)e
bei 9totf). 7. 9)fan ^ao^t, ber 9{ot^ t)ertauft fie fef)r billig.

8. ©iefe @(^uf)e |:)affen nic^t gut an metne ^iifee. 9. Ser
(General (}at fiir [einen @o^n ©ttefel gefauft. 10. ®er
9io(i be^ ©eneral^ pa^t (or fi|t) fet)r gut. u. Seine Slrme
finb nic^t ju lang. 12. S)er ^aul Ijat ben 9?orf auf bem
SIrme ge^abt. 13. 3[Bar ber 9Jod fiir tf)n ober fitr f einen
SSater ? 14. Slt)eobor fagt, er f)at it)n bem Skater gegeben.
15. ^^aul f)at bamit jtnei SKeilen gelaufen. 16. ®r ift tnoljl '
jiemtid^ miibe. 17. Satnot)!, er fi^t bort auf bem ©tu^Ie ;
ber Sopf liegt it)m auf ben 2lrmen, unb bte Slrme auf bem
Sifi^e. 18. Sf)m ^ finb ^opf unb S3eine miibe. 19. @r tjat
boc^ nur e t n ^jSaar Seine. 20. 3Jf an^e %kvc i)aben
i£)rer3 jtnei

^ ' probably.* * Note and learn to use this Dative of possession.
3 ' two of them,' thus when the relation is not partitive in that case
gtrei t)On i^ncn is permissible.

Exercise ii.

I. [The] chairs and [the] animals have four legs.
2. But some animals have only two legs. 3. And
some chairs have only [of them] three. 4. The child
goes on (its) hands and feet. 5. That child has no
shoes on its ^ feet. 6. Who is that boy yonder without
(a) coat ? 7. I believe it is Theodore, the general's
son. 8. Cannot the general buy a coat for his son ?

9. Why certainly, but the boy has three coats already.

86 NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XI.

lo. Did you see him yesterday.? u. What did he
have on his ^ head ? 12. I beheve he had a cap.
Why, you are right ! 13. His uncle will buy him a
pair of shoes. 14. , I-hope 3 the ^ shoes ^ will ^ fit
^ him. 15. Do you think we can sell them to [the]
Paul ? 16. Did you find the shoes at Miiller's. 17. No,
we buy our shoes and boots at Roth's. 18. Why,^
his hands are very small. 19. They say he has his
hands from his mother. 20. Are then his mother's
hands so small ? 21. Of-that I cannot say any thing ;
I have never seen her. 22. The legs of that animal
were very short. 23. But the animal ran very fast.
24. What sort of an animal was it ? 25. Do not ask
me ; I do not know [the] animals.

^Definite article, ^ja, after verb. ^See Note 18.
Vocabulary for the Conversation.

MASCULINE. NEUTER.

ber grueling, spring-. ha§ ^a^xf^nnhtVi, the century,

bcr SommCt, sum??ter.

ber |er6fc autumn. .^^^^ ^^^^^ every year.

ber mmtX, winter. ^^^ ^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^^

FEMININE. present year.

'hXZ %^Xt^^t\if the season of '^ty^ fotttlttettbe ^alftr, the com-
the year. ingyear, next year.

bic Sal^rei^seitctt, the seasons of \s^^ tiergattgcitc Sa^r, the past

the year. year.

Note 19. — Expressions of time answering to the questions,
"when?" "how long?" are put in the Accusative ; ev fommt
jcben SJ^orgen, " he comes every morning" ; er arbeitete ben gaugen
Xag, " he worked the whole day." See Appendix, Uses of Cases.

Les. XI.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. Sy

Conversation io. — Pas 3^^^^*

I. 2Bte t)iele 9Ko'nate Ijat ha§ Sa^r?

2. 3)a§ 3a^r i)at ^tDolf ^Dtonate.
I. 2Bie t)tele Sa^rei^jeitert {)at ba^ 3at)r?

2. ®a§ ^a^r f)at i;)ter "^a^xt^^xUn,
I. §at }ebe^ Sa^r einen grii^Itng ?

2.'! 3ci, jebe^ 3^^^ ^<^^ ^w^^ 3^rul;Ung.
I. SBoHen @ie bte bret 3Konate be^ ©ommer^ nennen?

2. ®te btei SKonate be§ ©orntner^ finb Su'ni, 3^'^^/
Stuguft'.

Etc., etc.

I. SBeld^e^ Sa{)r I)aben tvix nun?

2. 5Run ^aben tt)ir ba§ ga^r neunjeljn {)unbert \)kx
(fiinf, 2c).
I. 3Bte f)ei^t biefe^ 3af)rl)unbert ?

2. 5Diefeg Sa^r^unbert l^et^t ba§ jtDanjigfte.
I. SBoHen ®ie ba^ 2Bort ,,Sa^r'' beflmieren ?

2. ®ag SBort „'^di)x" befliniert man fo : Norn., ba§

Etc., etc.

Reading ii.
<Bpx\tiitooxU

@me ®d)tDat6e tnad)t no(^ fetnen Sommer.

One swallow makes as yet no summer.

"One swallow does not make a summer."

3[Ba§ man nic^t tn bem Sopf i)at, mnf^ man in ben
93einen l)aben.

What one hasn't in his head he must have in
his legs.

88 NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XI.

grii^Itng, ©ommer, |)erbft unb 3[3inter,
©inb be^ lieben @otte^ Sinber,
®e6en lut^ bes^ ©iiten Diel,

Give to us of the good much,

33(umen, gTiid)te, frof)e^ ©piel

Flowers, fruits, happy play.

aSott ^of.fmann i)on f5«IIcrglebcn.

1. S)eut)(^(anb, S)eutf(^Ianb liber alle^,
Uber alle^ in ber 3BeIt,

SBenn eso ftet^ ju ©d}u^ unb %x\x^t ^
SBriiberlitf) jufamtnentialt,^
SSon ber Woia^ 3 bi^ an bte 9)? emel,4
SSon ber et)(^5 big an ben Sielt!^
S)eutlcf)Ianb, S)eutjd)Ianb itber alle^,
liber alle^ in ber 3Bett!

2. ©eutjc^e grauen, bentjcf)e Sireue,
S)eut)rf)er 3Bein unb beutfc^er ©ang
©oUen in ber 9KeIt befallen 7
S^ren alten, fc^onen ^tang,^

Un^ ju eb'ler %ai begeiftern9
Unfer ganje^ Seben lang !
$)eutfrf)e grauen, beutfc^e 2^reue,
S)eutfd}er 3Bein unb beutjc^er Sang !

*' For defence and offence'. ^' holds together.' ^ 4 German
rivers. ^ Adige, an Italian river on which is Venice. ^ the Baltic.
' ' retain.' ® ' sound,* reputation. ^ ' inspire.'

Les. XII.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 89

LESSON XI L

Nouns. — First Declension. Class III. — Inter-
rogative AND Relative Pronouns.

1. Learn the definite article with every noun as
it is introduced^ and always learn forms and read
vocabidaries aloud.

2. aSer ^<ii bic SBIftttcr be;^ SBu^c^ jerriffcn, aox^

torn from

tticlc^em (or ttiorau^) ttiir ftngcn?

3- Learn this sentence ; observe the forms of
the nouns and give of each the nominative and
genitive singular and the nominative plural.

Class III.
4. Most neuter monosyllables, neuter derivatives
in -turn, and a few very common masculine mono-
syllables are in this class (See Appendix for list.)

5. Declension of bai^ Stt^, the book.
Sing^ular. Plural.

Nom. btt)^ Suri^, the book. bte SJiid^Cr, the books.

Gen. be^ S3tt(^e^, of the book. ber ^ii^Cr, of the books.
Dat. bem SBudfte, to the book. ben SBiit^cnt, to the books.
Ace. '^^^ S3ttCi^, the book. btC JBiit^et, the books.

Interrogative Pronouns.

Singular only, as in English.

aScr, who. S93a§, what.

ttlCffcn, whose. (ttlCig),

ttiem, to whom, (ma!^),

tt^eit, whom* tpa^^ what.

90 NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XII.

6. These words serve also as compound relative
pronouns, tvcx = whoever^ tca^ = whaty whatever.
The genitive and dative of tt)a^ rarely occur, the
former only in compounds, tDC^l^alb, etc., the latter
colloquially, ju lt)a^?/<?r what? etc.

Relative Pronouns.

7. German has two relative pronouns, tt)eld^er,
who or which (declension Lesson III), and ber,
who or which, the same forms as the definite article
except in the genitive cases and the dative plural.

Singrular.

Plural.

bcr Me

U^

bte

who, which.

beffen berett

beffett

beteit

of whom, 0/ which.

bent bcr

betn

benen

to whom, to which.

^tn W

U^

\sxt

whom, which.

8. No principle but euphony or brevity controls
the choice between ber and tt)eld)er, though the latter
only is used as a relative adjective, as grau ©raun,
tt)elc^er ©ante, U. f. tt)., Mrs, Brown, to which lady, etc.

9. For the genitive case of the relative pronoun,
whether tDeli^er or ber, the forms beffen, etc., alone
are used.

10. Note that there is no distinction in the rela-
tives between persons and things.

11. Note that, unlike English, German never
omits the relative ; the man I love^ ber SRann, ben id)

Les. XII.] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 9 1

12. Note that the verb after a relative is at the
end of its clause (see Lesson XXV).

Vocabulary.
MASCULINE. ^a§ ^OXff the village.

ber fiattbi^ntatttt, the fellow- ha§(^t^an^hn^fthe hymn-doo^

countryman. bdi^ (St, the egg,

ber fiattbmanit, the farmer. ©rtCtliCttlanb, Greece,

NEUTER. aU^etOrbeitt(t(^, extraordina-

b(l§ 25((ltt, the leaf. rily, extremely.

'^ti^ %ti\\^^ the land. jcbctt 5tBcnb, every evening.

bai3 ^(cib, the dress, ( pi.) gar- ttlttttbcrf(^OU, wonderfully beau-

ments. tiful.

^a^ S3ilb, the picture. tttC^tcre, several,

^a^ ^'MtX^M6)f the diction- ticrtaffcit, leave.

ary, ttJa^rfrffCittUtf), probably.

't^^ SJatcrlmtb, the fatherland, auf betU SailbC, ^V/ the country.

native country. geftCttt tttOrfiCtt, geftettt fril^,

'^ti^ 25atcr(attb!^(ieb, patriotic yesterday m-orning.

song. ttlttttft^Clt, wish.

Note 20. — In compound nouns the declension of the last
member suffices for the whole, the first member not being declined.
The gender is also that of the last member.

Note 21. — When a dative and accusative depend upon the
same verb, the dative generally follows the accusative ; but per-
sonal pronouns precede nouns irrespective of case. For details
see Lesson XXV.

Exercise XII.

I. SSer 1:j(xi mtr bod) ba^ Slid) gebrad^t? 2. ©pred^en
@ie benn t)on biefem 93tlberbud)e ? 3. Sanjof)!, Voa^ fiir
anbere 33ud)er finben @ie in biefem Qii^tner ? 4. Sdj

92 NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XII.

t)abe gebacfjt, @ie fprec^en t)om SBorterbud^e. 5. 3ld),
ge^en ©te ! ' @ie lad^en iiber tnic^ ! 6. 2lber tDem
^abe t(f) fiir ba^ 93u(i) ju banfen? 7. S)a^ fann 16)
nid^t fagen; ba^ S8u(^ lag fd^on ba auf bem Stfd^e.
8. 2)ie 93ttber barin ftnb boc^* tt)unberf(f)on ! 9.®^
ftnb ia3 Sttber t)on ©riec^enlanb. 10. 9?ein boc^,
ha§ Sud) :^at 83tlber Don alien Sanbern. n. 3lnf
einem Slatte ftel)t etn Silb Don unferem ©orfe. 12. !5ie
Sorfer nnfere^ SSaterlanbe^ ftnb aber4 aud^ f(^6n.

13. S)a^ finbe5 id^ aud^; td^ l)abe fie immer geliebt.

14. S)a^ ift etn 93ndE), ha§> id^ immer getr)iinfd^t l)a6e.6

15. aSer ^ai e^ gefi^rieben? 16. 3ld), idE) fel^e Sitber
Don SSogeln unb ©iern. 17. @§ [inb bie 3S()get biefe^
Sanbe^ unb bie ©ier, loeld^e fie legen. 18. ©in £anb=
mann ^at geftern frii^ ba^ 93ud^ gebrad^t. 19. 6^
tt)irb7 toolil Don meiner S^ante auf bem Sanbe fommen.

^ * Go off.* * ' Why ' or * Really ' at beginning ; do not trans-
late * yet ' or ' though.* ^ < why ' at beginning. * * Ah but/ or
* Well, but * at beginning. ^ ' think.* ^ Note position of personal
verb; thus always in subordinate clause. ^The future here is
called future of conjecture, and may be rendered ' I suppose.'

Exercise 12.
I. The children are singing patriotic-songs. 2. The
songs which they sing are (stand) in this hymn-book.
3. Those songs are indeed extraordinarily good for
the children. 4. The children wish very-(much)
a book with pictures of birds. 5. Well,' there are
several pictures of birds and eggs in this book.
6. Who gave you ^the ^book ^ anyway ^ ? 7. Oh,3

Les. XIL] NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. 93

one buys such books in Germany. 8. A countryman
of ours brought this book from Greece. 9. Was
that the man [whom] we saw yesterday morning ?
10. Whom do you mean anyway.? n. For 4 there
were two men with me yesterday. 12. He was with
you in the country. 13. Well, that was a farmer
who sells eggs. 14. Let-us5 come back to the
book. 15. Two leaves of this book are already lost.
16. The book of -which we were speaking is a dic-
tionary. 17. One cannot ^ buy dictionaries in this
village. 18. You are right, but I wish no dictionary
in the country. 19. We shall probably leave the
village to-morrow. 20. Then 7 you do not live in the
village.

^9^un, or ja after verb, or both. ^benn. ^^a, after verb.
*3a, after verb. s^goUen tt)ir. ^Tr. 'can buy no.' ^^(fo, at
beginning with inversion of verb, or just after verb.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

MASCULINE.

bcr 3^wmcrmatttt, f/ie carpen- vi. f. hi, (uttb fo tocitet), etc.

ter, beflittiereit, decline.

bcr %t^'^\^f the carpet. (clbct, unfortunately^ I am

sorry to say.

FEMININE. . «■ <. « //x;-- X

s.' «w w ./: 7/ ^^ ^^Wfc (S^ttCtt,) means, no,

btc 293attb, the wall. 'r , % ;/ , r

^ . ^ ^ ' thank you, I thank you for

%\t %tdt, the ceilins:. ^. ^ , ,

r. Z.,. . ,. your offer, etc., but must de-

bte glugcltur, the folding-door. ^^.^^

^\tnUist,tke.oalls. »ieV (Bielett) ®anf, ^nany

^XtlyXXtX^, the doors. ^^^^^^^_

NEUTBR. Il9<)fen, knock.

JloS <Sl^Io^, the lock. herein, come in !

94 NOUNS. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XII.

Note 22. — Some verbs which take the direct object in Eng-
lish take a dative in German. The most common are: begegncn,
*' meet " ; baiifen, " thank " ; folgen, " follow " ; gef alien, " please " ;
ge^or(^en, "obey"; l)elfen, "help"; fd)aben, "harm"; for fuller
list see Appendix.

Conversation ii. — Das ^tmmer.

I. aSte ijd^t "room" auf beutjc^?

2. "Room" ^ei^t auf beutfd^ „ba§ 3i^i^^i^*"

Etc., etc.

I. 2Bie t)tele SBanbe i)at biefe^ 3^^^^^^ ?

2. ®iefe^ 3^^^^^ ^^^ ^i^^ SBcinbe.
I. §at ein 3i^Jner tmmer t)ier SBanbe?

2. 3^/ ^i^ 3i^^^^ ^<^^ getD5{)nlic^ )okx 2Bdnbe.

Etc., etc.

I. ^ai ba^ 3^^^^^ ^^^^ !einen 2^eppt(^ ?

2. 5JJein, leiber l^at ba§ 3^^^^^/ ^' f» ^-
I. SBoHen ©ie ba^ 2Bort ,,3^^^^^'' beMinteren?

2. ®a§ SBort „3i^^^^" befliniert man fo: „Noni., ba^
3itnmer/' k.

Etc., etc.

^ Reading 12.

9Ser glaferne 93eine i)at, mit^ ntc^t auf^ @i§ geljcn.

Whoever glass legs has, must not on to the ice go.

" People in glass houses must not throw stones,'*

Les. XII.] NOUNS. — FIRST DECLENSION. 95

3ttfttebettficlt.

Contentment,
g^o^ann aJiartin aJllHcr.

SBag frag' ic^ uiet nad^ ®elb unb ®ut,

why care property

^enn ic^ jufrieben bin!

®t6t ®ott mir nur gefunbe^ Slut,

sound blood (good health)

@o ^aV id) frozen ©inn,

merry mind

Unb ftug' mit banfbarem ®emut'

grateful spirit

9Jtein SOZorgem unb mein Slbenblieb.
@o mancf)er j(i)tt)immt im U6erf(u^,

abundance

§at §au^ unb §of unb ®elb,

farm

Unb ift bo(^ immer DoEt S^erbru^,

(of) vexation

Unb freut fid) ntd^t ber 2Se(t:

enjoys

Se me^r er i)at, je mef)r er tDiH,

The the

9iie fc^tDcigen feine Slagen ftill.

stop complaints

S)o(^ |)reif' id^ laut unb toBe &ottf

praise

Unb f^tDeb' in ^oI)em Tint,

swim high spirit

Unb benf: t§> ift ein lieber ®ott,
Unb meint'^ mit 9Kenfd)en gut!

means it well

S)rum tDill iif) immer banfbar fein,
Unb mii^ ber ®ute @otte^ freun!

goodness

96 NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XIII.

LESSON XIII.

Nouns — Second Declension — Demonstrative and
Possessive Pronouns.

1. Cultivate the use of \a, botf) and Voo{)\, introdu-
cing them at every opportunity,

2. 2)iefe ^erren finb Stubcntcn ; berjcntgc (or bet),

the one

tt>cld)cr f^Jtiri^t^ ftubicrt bte S^rac^cn mit mcincm

who is studying [the] languages

$»cffcti.

3. Learn this sentence ; note the forms of the
nouns and learn the principal forms of each; put
in ja, bocE) and tDO^t, being sure to understand the
effect.

4. The Second Declension comprises most fem-
inine polysyllables, about half of all feminine mono-
syllables, masculines ending in -e, denoting living
beings, masculine nouns from foreign languages
accented on the last syllable, but not ending in -al,
-an, -aft and -r, and a few very common masculine
monosyllables (see Appendix for list).

5. Table of Case-Endings of the Second Declension.

Sing^ular. Plural.

M. F.

Nom. (C)it

Gen. (e)tt (C)tt

Dat. (e)tt (C)tt

Ace. (c)tt (C)tt

Les. XIII.] NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION. 97

6. Declension of a Masculine Noun of the Second
Declension.

Singular,

Plural.

Nom.

bet: StttbCttt', the student

bic Stttbcn'tCtt^ the students.

Gen.

bCi3@tubCtt'tCtt, ^/" "

bcr ©tubctt'tcit, of " "

Dat.

bcm Stuben'tett, /^ " "

ben <^iVi\^tX(!it% to " "

Ace.

ben Stttbctt'ten, " "

bie Stnben'ten, " "

7. Declension of a Feminine Noun of the Second

Declension.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. bie 8<JraiJ^e, the language. '^\t S^rad^en, the languages.

Gen. ber S^rac^e, of " " ber S^trarfjen, e/^ " "

Dat. ber S^rati^e, /^ " " tstn S^Jta^en, /<; "
Ace. bie S^ra^c, " " bie S^jrati^en, " "

Demonstrative Pronouns.

8. S)tefer is either ////i- or that, unless two objects
are contrasted; then biefer is this, jener that ; btefer
is also ///^ /<2/^^r, jener the former, S)er (same de-
clension as the relative ber except gen. pi. berer or
berert) is also this or that, or an emphatic he. In
the correlative, he or the one is berienige, or ber.

Possessive Pronouns.

9. It is necessary to discriminate between the
possessive adjectives and the possessive pronouns
(Lesson IV, 3). For the latter German has three
forms : meiner, ber tneine, ber meintge, in the latter
two the second word declined as a weak adjective
(Lesson XV). Thus one may say : %^x §ut unb
meiner, or ber tneine, or ber metnige, for your hat and
mine.

98

TABLE OF DECLENSIONS. [Les. XIIL

<

r «^ «^ «^ «^

;tand ;
e e in
com-
ral.

wj- 4, 3

vj

^^■5 a

M

^ 'UH <U

?;

- ^^^

n

y '

(U to 1> P

•J -^

-dTS^ >

>;

fi fl W OJ

»

(/3

o

3 <Uj5^

I

fl^

a ^--^

rtlS s °

0) o S

^-g^s

!^-l^

5

'i.>J'S^

S
s -

M

»

> ^

i "i

3 rt oj S

f=^
J

x-SEs

J
^

k4

1

t

±

^

t

W

2 w o 6

w

> .

-^ OJ fi'S

H

<»

J IT)

«

.> <

i <

> <i

>

rtr^ ^ M

Z

0 w

fl,'2'55

13

'^ o

^^

|:5§::.

^

Hi <:

- ^ ©--J

u

M h)

S S5 c^S

£d

::§e°

:^

o^

glcSl

Q
<

^

'aoj -iS*

f

11 «

Z "'-^ J

.S !2 c-^

H
H

t

£:

£

rt R D »3

:3

--5 Ri ** rt

r yj ju j_> j-> %^

-^-S fa s^

h3

>> Q>

^|ao

<:

^ *5 1

i^

-

rt:l

I

sir.

u5

(/5

i ° is "

6 a ^ 3

mi

•<

O 0) Oj O

<

O <u rt u

o

iz

0

Q

<

o

5^

^ L

5 Q

:^ <

^

£.t$.

Les. XIII.] NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION. QQ

10. While the stem of the possessive differs in
the third person with the gender of the word from
which it is derived, in declension it must agree
with the word for which it stands ; thus fcin is Jiis,
possessive from Jie, but it is feminine in meine
3Jf utter unb feine, my mother and his.

Note 23. — SJJenfd) is "human being" in distinction from
animals; also " man," " fellow," in a disparaging sense. 9)?ann
is " man," the iisual word in distinction from " woman."

Note 24. — Most nouns primitively masculine add -in and
modify the stem-vowel to form the corresponding feminine : as,
!OeI}rer, teacher, lOe^^rertn, woman teacher ; ®raf, count, ©rcifin
countess; ^q6), cook, ^ocf)in, woman cook; @angcr, singer,
©angerin, woman singer; bte grau 3)o!toriti, the doctor's wife.
Such feminines double the final it before the -ett of the plural.

Note 25. — After words of measure ("a cup of," "glass of,"
" pair of," "pound of"), the noun is not\pitt in the genitive, but
treated as indeclinable; as, eiu ®(a§ SBeilT, If, however, the
tioun expressing the substance measured be limited by an ad-
jective, it is generally in the genitive ; as, eitt-®ta§ guten SBelue^.

Vocabulary.
(Words not starred are in the Second Declension.)
MASCULINE. ^le U^Xf the watch, clock.

*bcr ^Cttner, the waiter. ^|g ^g|^^ i}ig time.

bcr ®taf, the count.
tcr ^Ctt, the gentleman, sir (in neuter.

address, always in the form '^'^^^ ^ticfti^cn (little letter),
tncin §err), the note.

\^tX "^t^tf the nephew.

ber @olbat' the soldier. ^'"^^^'^f "^'^^^y-

bet SJlcnfc^, {the) man, human ^^^^^^' unfortunately.

leing. ftttbicren, study.

FEMININE. jc^t, now.

bic ®rfe, the corner. iDcfti^dftigt, occupied, busy,

bic StmtbC, the hour, the red- fiefUf^Ctt, visit.

tation. fc^Idfctt^ sleep, be asleep.

lOO NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XIII.

Exercise XIII.

I. S)te ©olbaten unb bte ©tubenten ftnb nic^t immet
greunbe. 2. S)a^ tft letber tdai)x, aba fie follten e^ fein.

3. @te [tnb bo(^ atle 2Jf enfd)cn unb Sinber be^ SSaterlanb^.

4. S)tefer ©tubent i)at nid^t 3^it 9^iti^9 3^ ftubieren.

5. 2Ste !ommt benn ba^? Sft er fei)r befd^aftigt?

6. 5td^ nein, er ift nur etn Snabe; er fptelt mtt ben anbern
Snaben. 7. S[t er nic^t ber $Jieffe be^ |)errn, ber bort
ftef)t? 8. aSer tft benn be:; 9Kenf^? 9. ©r fi|t f^on
nteljr aU etne ©tunbe bort. 10. Sd) tt)ei^ tt)irlltd^ ni^t ;
aber ift e^ nid^t ber 93ruber jene^ ©olbaten, tr)el(f)er fo
gern fingt? n. S(^ fe^e it)n oft mit jenem ©olbaten.
12. gragen ©ie einmal SI)ren 9?effen. 13. SKein 9?effe
f ennt it)n nun ^ gar nic^t ; f ennt it)n ber St)rige ?
14. Sfinnen ©ie S^re U^r fe^en ? Sft e^ nid^t fd)on
3eit ju get)en ? 15. 3Ba^ madden bie ©tubenten ju biefer
©tunbe ? 16. ©ie befud^en getDo^nlid^ it)re greunbinnen
in ber Qtaht

* intensive ; tr. simply after nephew.

Exercise 13.

I. What is the name of that boy whom we see
yonder ? 2. The one studying ' is Henry ; he is my
nephew. 3. ,1 ^am ^not ^ speaking ^of (,yowx
7 nephew ^ now. 4. Well, lyou asurely aare eiiot aspeak-
ing^of s yours? 5. 1 was speaking of that student in
the corner of the room. 6. O, that person ! He is
only a boy , who ^ writes ^ notes ^ for 3 the ^wait-

Les. XIII.] NOUNS. SECOND DECLENSION. lOI

ers. 7. Then 2- he is not-a 3 student after-all 4 ? 8. Yess,
he is the son of a soldier and studies the languages.

9. Is that his book from which he is reading?

10. 2 Why 5 ,no, I believe it is mine. n. Where
did you find that book, sir ? 12. I have it from that
gentleman who is writing the note. 13. , Are 3 all
2 those 6 students ? 14. These here are students,
but that man is a soldier, the son of a count. 15. 1
believe the soldier is-sleeping.

^ Tr. who is studying. * Also after verb. ^ fcin. * bO(^ after
Vocabulary for the Conversation.

MASCULINE.

'?

ber %xWtX (table-maker), the f"""^' '>«tf^'"'t'r

cabinet-maker. '«f*«^«" "««' ""'"* "f ("'*

dative).

FEMININE. bclCUti^tCtt, lig^it up, ilhitninate.

"tXZ £e^ne, the back (of a chair). ettt^altCtt, contain.

Conversation 12. — Pas §tmmer.

I. 9Bte t)iele genfter l^at ein 3i^wier?

2. ®in 3^^^^^ ^^^ jutDeiten ein genfter .unb ji^ir^eilen
itie^r. ," *>•''. r., : i' \, •*'/ '

I. 2Ba^ !ontmt burc^ ba^ genfter?

2. 2)a§ Sid^t lommt burd^ ba§ g^enfter.
I. (Sntpit ein 3ii^n^^i^ tmmer ©tiitjle?

2. 3^/ ^i^ 3^^^^^ ent^dlt geti:)ol)nlici^ ©tii^le.
I. aSorau^ be[tel)t ein @tut)l ?

-. ©in ©tu^l befte^t au§ ber Se^ne, bem 6i^e, iinb ben
93einen.

102 NOUNS. — SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XlII.

I. 3Bie 6eleud)tet man ein 3inimer in ber 9?adjt ?
2. Man beleuc^tet ein 3iww^^^ i^ ^^^ 3lad)t mit ©as^:
licbt.
I. 3Bie t)ei^t ber Wlann, indd^er bie @tiit)te unb Sijc^e
mad)t ?
2. 2)er 3Dlann, ti;)eld£)er bie ©tii^le unb 2^ifd^e ntad^t,
l^ei^t ein Stif(i)ler. Etc., etc.

Reading 13.
betters 9«ot8ettUeb.

Dragoon's morning-song.
aSon sffiill^eltn ^auff.

ajJorgenrot, SRorgenrot !

morning-red

Seud^teft mir gum frii^en Xoh?

Shinest for me early

Salb tDirb bie Slrontpete blafen,

trumpet blow

„ SJalb inerb' ic^ mein Seben laffen,
> Sd£j imb nxandjer Samerab. (Repeat).

v'" " ' •' "^ciitn: gebadjt, faunt gebad)!,

Hardly

2Sarb ber Suft ein (^nV gentad^t.

to the joy

®eftern nod^ auf ftoljen Sioffen,

proud steeds

^eute burd^ bie Sruft gefc^offen

breast shot

SOJorgen in ba§ fii^te ®rab. (Repeat).

Les. XIV.] ADJECTIVES.. FIRST DECLENSION. 1 03

S)arum ftill, barum ftill

gilg' id) mid) tvk ®ott e^ tviU;

yield as

Unb fo tt)il( id) Wadtx ftreiten,

valiantly

Unb foUt' id) ben %oh erleiben,

suffer

©tirbt ein brat)er 3teiter^mann. (Repeat)»

LESSON XIV.

Adjectives. — First Declension.

1. grifd^ci^ Srot unb gcHc SButtcr mit jutem ^affcc
ma^cn cin ^^^^ii^ftutf fiir ^ungrigc 9icifcnbc.

2. Learn this sentence ; compare the endings of
the adjectives with those of biefer in the same places.

3. Attributive Adjective. — When a descriptive
adjective is placed before a noun, agreeing with it
in gender and case, it is said to be used attribu-
tively ; as, ein gnter Tlann, " a good man."

4. Predicate Adjective. — When an adjective is
used in connection with a verb to assert something
of an object, and stands without any case-ending
after the verb, it is said to be used predicatively ;
as, fein §au^ Wax fd)on, "his house was handsome."

5. Adjective as Noun. — An adjective is some-
times used independently, the noun with which it
agrees being understood. In this case it has the
value of a noun, and is written with a capital. It

I04 ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XIV.

is declined witli or without an article, as if the noun
with which it agrees were expressed : ber ®ute
rdumt ben ^(al^ bem 93i3len, '' the good (man) gives
place to the wicked (one)."

6. Adjective as Adverb. — Any adjective in the
stem form (/. e., without any ending of declension)
may be used as an adverb : as, er ))ai flei^ig ftubiert,
" he has studied diligently." This is true only of
the positive and comparative : for the superlative
a phrase formed with an, auf or jii is substituted ;
as, Voa^ am meiften in bte Slngen fiel, "what most
struck the eye " ; man mn^ fie auf^ befte erjiefien,
"they must be brought up in the best manner " ;
\>a traf er jnm erften S^rt}m, " then he smote Thrym
first." (See Lesson XVI.)

Declension of Adjectives.
?• An attributive adjective is regularly declined,
one used predicatively in the positive and compar-
ative degrees is not declined. Participles when
used as adjectives are declined like other adjectives.

8. There are two declensions of adjectives, which
may be called the First and Second Declensions.
The latter has two varieties, which we will call
Class I and Class II.

First Declension.

9. The First or strong Declension is the form
used for the attributive adjective when it is pre-

Les. XIV.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. 10$

ceded by no limiting word (as an article, possessive,
etc.) having itself the endings of the strong de-
clension; as, guter Wtann, "good man." The ad-
jective is in this case declined like btefer.

10. Adjectives declined according to the First
Declension.

Declension of gutcr SBcilt, S'ood wine.
Singular. Plural.

Norn, gutcr 2Bcitt ^yxit SScinc

Gen. gutc^ 3Seine^ gutcr SSeittc

Dal. gutcm SBeinc gutcn SBcttten

Ace. gutcn "^tm gutc 9®ciuc

11. Declension of gutc Su^jJC, good soup.

Singular. Plural.

Norn, gutc 8u^^c gutc @u^))Ctt

Gen. gutcr „ gutcr „

Dat. guter „ gutctt „

Ace. gutc „ gtttc „

12. Declension of gutc^ %'WS^, good cloth.

Singular. Plural.

Norn, gutc^ Xu(^ gutc Xu(f)cr

Gen. gutc§ %yx^t^ gutcr Xiitficr

Dat. gutcm %Vi^t gutcn 2:tt^cttt

Ace. gutc§ Xurfi gutc ^urfjcr

Remark. — Except in the nominative of address, as gutcr
9J2ann ! the singular of this form of declension is practically limited
to use with abstract and mass nouns and names of materials.

The strong forms are used when the adjective and its noun are
preceded by a limiting genitive or a cardinal number, as beS

I06 ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XIV.

3^aterg neuer ^wi, father's new hat ; brei neue ^iic^er ; also after
etnja§ and ni^tg, as tiVoa^ ®Uteg, something good; nic^ts i8ofe8,
nothing bad.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE.

bcr ^affCC^ the coffee.

ber S3ud)pttb(cr, ^//^ bookseller.

bet ^anbfr^tt^, ^/^^ ^/^z/^.

ber S^erftanb, understanding,
sense.

FEMININE.

^At @Otte, the sort, kind.

bie S^jeifefarte, the bill of fare.
bic greube, 7>i^.

bie ^tt^e, repose, rest.
bie 9Wil^f the milk,

NEUTER.

baig Sriitri^eit, the roll.

\s^^ lift^tUti^, ^//^ table-cloth.

"tsti^ ^attbtu(5^, //^-? /^^^/.

^ier 5tt Saitbe (here to land),
/■;/ this country.

angene^m, pleasant.

gutett SJlorgeit, ^<?^^ morning!

ttiie ge^t c;^ S^neu (how goes

it to you), how are you ? how
do you do?
"i^a^yXf in addition.

tua^rettb, while.

J^Wftigr g(^y^ merry.

befteHen, order.

Mt^tttf spread.
htVtXt, ready.

fleitt {lUxnt§) (V$e(b (small

money), change.

mix ift lieber, I prefer.

Exercise XIV.

I. %i) tDiinjc^e 3f)nen gutett SKorgeit; tt)te ge^t
e^ Sf)nen? 2. Sd) bante f^on; e^ ge{)t tttir gut.
3.' 2(n tDddjem %\\^t fi^en ©ie betm grut)ftu(i? 4. |)a^
ben @te bie ©peifelarte ge:^a6t? 5- SatDO^I, ba Itegt
fie unter Sf)rem Seller. 6. Set) fiube eine S^affe guten
Saffeeg genug jutn grui)ftu(J. 7. %^ tDunfd^e au(^
uic£)t Diel, aber tnir ift eine Slaffe frifdjer WM^ lieber.
8. aSa^ fpred)en @ie ba t)on gutettt ^affee ? 9. 3Kan

Les. XIV.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. lO/

faun guten ^affee nt(^t immer ^ahm, lo. ajfeine
§erren, ba^ tft mir ju toentg ; i^ ttiiinfc^e frtfd^e^
Srot imb gelbe Sutter, unb baju eine gtaf^e guten
SSeiu^. II. S)ie ©tubeuten an jenem 2^ifd)e fiugen
hofS) fe^r f(^ou. 12. Sa, bag fiub lufttge 2ieber, tDeli^e
[ie fiugen. 13. @te fiugen 'oon fu^er 9tul)e unb t)oEer
greube. 14. 2)ag ift aber ein 9J?auu t)ou gutem 95er==
ftanbe. 15. aBaruut fagen @te ha§> mit fo tauter
©timme ? 16. (£r tuiinfc^t fc^one Xifd^tiic^er unb auc^
reine |)anbtud}er. 17. SBer bejap ben SeUuer?

18. Seiber Ijabe i^ !ein !tein ®elb (or ^leingelb).

19. ^ahm ©ie uid)tg ®uteg t)on ben ©tubenten ju
fagen ? 20. 3(^ metue, tl)r ©ingen ift boi) ettua^ ®uteg.

Exercise 14.
I. Gay students are singing beautiful songs.
2. A band of gay students ^ always ^ sings of ** sweet
repose." 3. ,But 2 they 3 do ^not ^ always 3 bring
g sweet g repose (to) ^ weary ^men. 4. Yes, but
the boys must all be gay. 5. I think the bookseller
has good sense. 6. He says he drinks strong coffee
when the students sing. 7. What has that ^to ^ do
J with 2 good 3 sense .f* 8. Let-us-eat ' while they
are singing. 9. I spread my rolls with yellow butter.
10. The Germans have very good bread, but [they]
eat little butter, n. I found ^ good butter in Ger-
many. 12. But the breakfast consists 3 usually of
fresh rolls and good coffee. 13. Can one not also

I08 ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XIV.

MASCULINE.

have good milk ? 14. O yes, the milk is usually very
good. 15. I ate my rolls with sour wine. 16. It is
easy to order sour wine. 17. Here is the breakfast
which you ordered. 18. Ah, here we have something
good. 19. You have spoken of nothing else but 4 of
[the] eating. 20. And you have drunk the bottle
of sour wine.

^ (Sffcn ttJir, or iCagt un8 cffcn. * perfect tense. ^ 1 consists of,'
befte^t au«. *al«.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

t>a^ Sefttti^'jimmer, (A^ recep-
tion-room,

\s^^ SiiUot^cf'aimmcr, the

library.

'h^^ S3abC5tmmcr, the bath-room.

'^ti^ ^ittbcrjimmcr, the nursery.

'^^^ S^tclaimmcr, the play-
room.

tierffi^ieben, different^ various,

^wcyxmJf why?

tUCtl, because.
Cm|jfattgCtt, receive,
%t\yt% heat.

inittetft^ by means ^(with geni-
tive).
Baben, bathe.

ber 8ao(, the parlor.
bctr ^aft, the guest.

FEMININE,

bic 99Sof)nung^ the apartment.
'tXt ^ivi^Zf the sitting-room.
'tXt ^ol^fol^len (wood coals),

the charcoal.
bic ©tcinfolftlett (stone coals),

the hard coal.
bic 9Jlc!jrjal^I, the plural.
bic ©ittjal^l, />5^ singular.

NEUTER.

ba^ G^cBaubc, />4<f building,
'tS^^ SSo^tt^aU)^, />5<f dwelling-
house.

Conversation 13. — Die rDot?nung.

aSte nennt man ba^ ©ebaube, rt)ortn man tt)oI)nt ?
2. 3Kan nennt bag ®e6aube,in tt)elci^em man tpo^nt,
etn SBo^nf^aug.

Les. XIV.] ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. IO9

I. 2Ba^ finb bte 9?amen ber tierjd^tebenen 3intmer etner
aSof)nung?
2. ©ie ^ei^en ber Baal, bie ©tube, bag ©d^lafjimmer,
ba§ ©^gimmer, bie ^ud£)e, u, f. tt).
I. aBarum nennt man etn 3^^^^^ ^<^^ Smpfang^^
jtmmer ?
2. SBeil e§ bag 3^^^^^^ ift/ ^^ ^<i^ bie ©dfte etrH^fcingt.

Etc., etc.

I. 2Sie {)et3t man bie ©tube?

2. Man ^eijt bie 6tu6e mittelft beg Dfeng.
I. 28ag brennt man in bem Dfen?

2. 'Man brennt in bem Dfen ^olj, audE) ^ol^fo^ten obex
©teinfol^Ien.
I. SBa^ tut man in bem ©d^Iafjimmer ?

2. 5Ran fc^Idft in htm ©d^Iafjimmer.

Etc., etc.

I. aSte ^eiJBt bie 2)Zel)rsa^l t)on 2[8oI)n^aug?

2. ®ie 9Jle{)rjaf)I i)on 3Bo{)n{)aug ^ei^t 2Bo^ttf)dufer.

Etc., etc.
Reading 14.

§unger ift ber befte Sod^.

cook

" Hunger is the best sauce.'*
^tnn bie St^matBen ^eimtttiittS aiei^n.

swallows homeward go.
Son Staxl ^erlo^fol^n.

aSenn bie @d^tt)al6en f)eimn)drt§ 5iet)n,
aSenn bie 9to]en nicljt metjr bliilju,

bloom

I lO ADJECTIVES. FIRST DECLENSION. [Les. XIV.

2Senn ber DIadjtigall ©efang

nightingale's song

9Jtit ber 91a(^tigall tierflang,

has past

1 : gragt ha^ ^erj in bangem ©darners,: \

anxious grief

l:Db t(f) Ui) and) mieber fe^'?:|

whether

©d^eiben, ad) ©i^etben, ©dE)etben tut tvd).

parting makes woe

SBenn bte ©c£)tr)ane fiiblti^ jtet)n,

swans southward

2)ort^m, tvo 3toonen blul)n,

Thither lemons

3[Benn ba^ Slbenbrot t)er[in!t,

dies

S)urd) bte griitten 3[BaIber blinft,

gleams

gragt ba§ ^erj, u. ^. tD.

5lrmeg ^erj, tt)a§ Hageft bu!
D aud) bu ge^ft etnft jur 9tuf)M
2Sa^ auf @rben tnu^ t)erge^n,

pass away

®ibt e§ tDo^^t em SBteberfet^n ?

indeed meeting again

I : gragt ba^ ^erj in bangem (Sd^merj, : |

®Iaub' ba^ id) bid) tt)ieber fel}',
I : Slut aud^ l^euf @d)eiben, @d)eiben fo tr)ef)!:|

Les. XV.] ADJECTIVES. — SECOND DECLENSION. Ill

LESSONXV.

Adjectives. — Second Declension.

1. 2)cr 3Wtc i)at bem juugcn Wannt ha§ SRiitigc

old man the necessary

gefagt unb xt)m cine gliitfli^e 9Jcifc geltiilnft^t

wished.

2. Learn this sentence ; note the case of the
various adjectives and compare the forms with
those of the strong declension. Observe the ini-
tial letters of the adjectives used as nouns.

3« The Second or weak Declension is used
when the adjective is preceded by certain words,
which have themselves the full endings, so that
those of the adjective are reduced to a simpler
form : —

4« Class I is the form of the Second Declen-
sion after ,,bcr'^ words ; Class II that used after

^,cin^' words.

Class I.

5. The ffitx^* words include, in addition to those
given in Lesson III, p. 21 (ber, btef- jen- Wddj-,
|eb-, mandj- fold)-), the following indefinite numeral
adjectives used only in the plural : alk, anbere,
eintge, etlidje, jegltc^e, mefirere, \)idt, tDenige.

6. After these words the ending of the adjec-
tive is ett, excepting in the nominative singular
throughout, and in the feminine and neuter accusa-

112 ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XV.

tive singular, where it is t* It will be observed
that these are the forms learned for masculine
nouns as the Weak Declension. The present
paradigms merely extend these forms to feminines
and neuters also.

7. The adjective may be used substantively
merely by capitalizing it, so that ber ®ute means
tke good many bie ®ute, the good womafty and h(x^
®ute, the good (whatever is good).

8. Declension of bcr 0UtC SJlamt, the good man.

Singular. Plural.

Nom. bcr gutc SJiautt bic gutcn SJlanner

Gen. bci^ rjuteit Wdwxt^ bet gutcn Wmrxtx

Dat. bcm guten SJlannc ben gutcn Wmwtxxx

Ace. '^trt gutctt SJlatttt bic gutcn Whxntx

9. Declension of bic gutC ^xaUf the good woman.

Sing^ular. Plural.

Nom. bic gntc %xavL bic gutcn ^xantn

Gen. bcr gutcn fjrau bcr gutcn fjraucn

Dat. ber gutcn IJrau ben gutcn fjrauen

Ace. bie gutc fjrau bic guten f^rauen

10. Declension of btt!^ gutc ^M^f the good book.
Singular. Plural.

Nom. t^^^ gutc S3u^ bie guten JBiic^cr

Gen. bcig guten Suti^ci^ bcr gutcn SSit^cr

Dat. bent gutcn S3udftc ben gutcn ^iX^ttn

Ace. ^a^ gute S3u^ bie gutcn SJilri^er

Les. XV.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. II 3

Class II.

11. The ,,ettt^' words in the three places under-
scored in the scheme below {i. e, nominative mas-
culine and nominative and accusative neuter in the
singular) do not have the endings, so that the ad-
jective in these cases returns again to the form of
the First Declension.

12

. An Adjective declined according to Class II.

Singular.

Norn.

mcttt gutcr

mcinc gutc

tttein gute|

Gen.

titctttC!^ ^itn

mciner giitcn

mtxnt^ guten

Dat.

meinem ^vdtn

mcincr guten

nteinem guten

Ace.

meinen guten

mcittc gutc

Plural.

ntein gutc£

Norn.

mcittc gutcn

Gen.

mciuer gutcn

Dat.

meinen guten

Ace.

metnc guten

13 • Thus " the good man " and " my good man '*
differ in declension only in the nominative singular,
ber gutc 3Kann, but metn guter SKanrt. One may say :
the strong ending must appear at least once ; where
the limiting word lacks such ending the descriptive
adjective takes it up.

14. The student should decline the complete
paradigms in paragraphs 8, 9 and 10, substituting
mein or fein for ber throughout.

114 ADJECTIVES. — SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XV.

Vocabulary.
MASCULINE. gent i^abtn^ like.

bcr SBiitJier, the citizen. gefatten, please (with dative).

ber StrU^^Ut, the straw hat. augCttC^m, pleasant, agreeable.

bcr ^(r^t, the physician. gcffittigft (adverb), // you

ber ©Cfd^matf, taste. please.

ttdgcn^ wear, carry.
^^^'^'^^' ^oUtn, shall.

btC QJcft^marf^fari^C, the matter attber, ^//^^r, different,
of taste. ^on^tV^av, peculiar.

BcfOttber, especial.

NEUTER. ^i ^^ t ■ 7 ^ 7

^ nCU, bright, clear.

l.o§ SBanb, /^. rMon. weuiflftens, «^ /..rf.

tUOlIen^ woolen.

Exercise XV.

I. 2)tefer junge Strjt tragt einen neuen §ut. 2. SBa^
ift ba^ aber fiir ein |)ut? 3. |)a6en @ie benn fetnen
neuen .f)ut noc^ ntc^t gefefien ? 4. Ser neue |)ut be^
jungen Strjte^ i[t ein ©trof)t)ut 5. ©ein neuer ^ut gefdllt
mir nic^t fe()r, 6. (£r \)^i boc^ ein I)ell blaue^ Sianb.

7. §aben @ie benn bie blauen ©anber nic[)t gem ?

8. 2Ic^ nein, ic^ ^abe nid^t^ Sefonbere^ gegen bie blauen
93anber. 9. Slber ein blaue^ S3anb (xx\. bem neuen
§ute eine^ Slrjte^ gefallt mir ja' nid)t.i 10. Stber ber
^rjt trdgt ben neuen §ut ji^on eine ganje SBoc^e.
II. @r gefdllt bod^ tpenigften^ ben guten greunben be^
5lrjte^. 12. Slber fagen @ie einmal: rt)arum foil ein
junger Slrjt fein blaue^ 93anb tragen ? 13. S(^ tjabe
ja nur t)on bem blauen 93anb an einem (Strot)l)ut ge^

Les. XV.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. II5

[proc^cn. 14. Sltfo i[t ba^ bei einem tDoIIenen §ute
anber^? 15. 2ld) ja, bie iDoIIenen |)itte fittb etlDQg ganj
Slnbere^. 16. Sclj l)abe nte baran gebai^t. 17. 9?un,
e^ i[t }a nur eine ®efd)mac!<3facf)e. 18. (gie l^aben ge=^
iDi^ etnen [onberbaren ®ejd)mad. 19. S)ie blauen
Scinber gefallen S^nen dfo tDO^I?

^not at all.

Exercise 15.

I. The old citizens here wear straw hats. 2. Yes,

1 know I one old citizen who wears a straw hat in
the cold winter. 3, Well, the cold winter is some-
thing different. 4. I have never seen such a citi-
zen. 5, In the warm summer, at least, ^that ^ is

2 nothing ^new. 6. I have given my young son a
new hat. 7. Was it a woolen hat or a straw hat ?
8. O, it was of-course a straw hat. 9. We wear what
the other citizens wear. 10. But is not your son a
small child.? n. To-be-surCj^- but even 3 small chil-
dren are good citizens. 12. So-then,4 your small
child is a good citizen ? 13. I hope he will become
a good citizen. 14. Which do you call the good
citizen, the new hat or the small child ? 15. My
dear friend, that is a matter of taste. 16. 3lf-you-
please, Jet ^us ^speak ^of ^something 5di£ferent.
17. We have heard enough of new hats and good
citizens. 18. Yes, but ,we jUever ^have too many
good citizens.

Il6 ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XV.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

MASCULINK.

bcr teller, the cellar.
bet §of, the courts yard.

bcr dottier' (pr. ^ort=ie^Or

the porter.

FEMININH.

W, ^atfe, the harp.
bic ^cigC, the violin.

ciltC ^rc^^C ^^^) (one stair-
way high), the second story.

5ttiel 2^re^^ctt ()0(i^ (two flights

up), the third story.
ber SBoben, the garret.
DBerft, uppermost^ highest.
gcfeOttCt, blessed.

"^^^ StOjfttlCr!, the story.
"^^^ ©rbgcft^O^, the first story.

Conversation 14. — Das ^aus.

I. 9Bie {)ei§t ba^ ©todtDcrf (or ®Gfc^of3) iiber bem
Seller?
2. S)a§ ©lodftDerf iiber bem Metier ^eij^t ba§ ©rbgefd^o^,
ba e§ gleicf) iiber ber (Srbe ift.
I. SBte ^ei^t ber jmette ©tod?

2. S)er 5it)eite ©tocE f)ei^t „etne 2^re^)(3e i^oc^."

Etc., etc.

I. 3Bot)on finb bte ^liufer gebaut?

2. ©te finb t)on 93atffteinen ober t>on §ot§ gebaut.
I. 9So tDot)nt ber ©d^u^mad^er ?

2. 2)er ©d[)u{)mad^er n;)o^nt im oberften ©todfiDerfe, ober
im §ofe.
I. 28o tDo^nt ber 5|3ortter' ?

2. ®er $ortier' tDol^nt neben ber §au§tur.
I. §aben @ie eincn ^au^^jcljliifjcl?

2. 9^ein, aber ber pettier tDtrb nir aufmad^en.

Les. XV.] ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. I I /

I. ©efciat Sfjuen Stjre SBo^nung?

2. 3a, fie f)at ad)t 3ttnmer, unb ift nur eine 3:^re^J)e

I. aSer fptelt tm §ofe?

2. @§ finb gtt)et "^taWntx mit §arfe unb ©etge.
I. 2Bte ^ei^t "good-bye" auf ©eutfi^?

2. "Good-bye'' ^ei^t auf 2)eutfc^, „Seben ©ie h)o^I/'
„3=af)r' tt)o^I/^ „2lbieu."
I. 3Ba§ fagt man naci) Xifd^e ?

2. 3la(i) SSifd^e fagt man, ^©efegnete SJJa^I^eit," ober
„3d^ tpxinfd^e ^fjnen eine gefegnele SWa^I^eit/'

Etc., etc.
Reading 15.

©igene Seine finb bie beften.

(One's) own legs are the best.

" Help yourself."
3tnifd)en Soffel nnb S)htnb geljt t)iel ©nppe ju ®rnnb.

Between spoon and mouth goes much soup to ground.

"There's many a slip 'twixt cup and lip."
aSte cine mumt,

S)n bift tDie eine Stume

©0 l^olb nnb fdjun nnb rein;

pure

Sd) fdjan' bid) an, nnb 2Sef)mnt

gaze sadness

Il8 ADJECTIVES. SECOND DECLENSION. [Les. XV.

©djletdjt mir in^ ^erj ^inetn.

steals

W\v \]i, ate oh id) bie §anbe
2luf§ §aupt bir legen \oUt\
Setenb, ba^ ®ott bic^ erl^dte

preserve

@o rein unb fc^on unb ^olb. ^etne.
^omtn\ §err Sefu, fei unfer ®aft,

guest

©egne aEe^, n)a^ bu un^ bejd^eret ^aft. Slmen!

Bless granted

|)err ®ott, I)tmmUfc^er SSater, fegne un^ unb bieje

heavenly

betne ®a6en, tvd6)t tDtr t)on beiner milben ®ute gu

gifts gracious kindness

un<3 ne{)men. 3lmen.

A prayer after table.

3Bir loben bi(^ unb jagen' SDanf,^

praise

S)u gabfl ^ un^ iDieber ©petj' 3 unb 3;rant

to us again food and drink.

21^, lieber ®ott, bu tDon[t4 and) geben

01

?Ja^ biefer SBelt ba^ elDige Seben! 9Imen.

After the eternal lif e 1

* give thanks. ^hast given.

' for ®))eifc. ** mayst thou be willing, pleased

Les. XVI.] COMPARISON. II 9

LESSON XVI.

Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs.

1. 2)cr tueifeftc 9Mcnfc^ ift ni^t tmmcr bcr Bcfte,

the wisest

abtx tx ift am ficftcn itienn er am itieifcftett

[at the] best [at the] wisest (most wisely)

^anbelt

acts.

2. Learn this sentence ; note the precise render-
ing of the various superlatives, also which are adjec-
tives and which adverbs.

3» Adjectives and adverbs, regardless of the
number of syllables, form their comparative by add-
ing -er to the stem ; monosyllables in a, 0, U, usually
* umlaut ' the vowel in addition ; furj, fiirjer ; Ijdl,
feller. The comparative when used attributively
adds to the new stem the endings of declension like
any other adjective, though in some places the -e-
of the comparative ending is elided, as I^ellrer, geni-
tive plural strong, for fjellerer.

4. The superlative is formed by adding to the
positive stem — (c)[t. But as the superlative stem
never occurs undeclined, it is usually given pre-
ceded by the article: furj, fiirjer, bcr (bie ha^)
fiirjefte ; ber (bie, haS) fjellfte. Of course, if strong,
the forms are I)eIIfter, Ijellfte, Ijellfte^.

5. In the predicate, where the positive and com-
parative forms occur undeclined, the superlative

I20 COMPARISON. [Les. XVI.

appears either as ber (bte, ha§>) fiirjefte, or as am
fiirjeften, the latter a dative neuter phrase meaning
literally *at the shortest.'

a.) The latter form is used when an object is
compared with itself, and, usually, when compared"
with things of different kind and gender : 3m SBiri'
ter fiitb bie Sage am fiirjeften, ''In winter the days
are shortest " ; S)a§ Setn ift furj, ber 9lrm i[t fiirjer,
ader bie §anb ift am fiirjeften, " The leg is short, the
arm is shorter, but the hand is shortest."

d.) The form with ber (bie, ha0) is used usually
when an object is compared with others of its own
kind and gender, and always when the noun is
clearly understood : 2SeIcf)er Don biefert gingern ift
ber liirjefte? "Which of these fingers is the
shortest .? "

6. The superlative of the adverb uses only the
am — ften form, and this for true comparison :
tDeldjer S^ogel fliegt am fdjttellften, '' which bird flies
fastest .? " For the absolute superlative another
phrase is used, auf^ — e, as @r fingt auf^ fdjonfte,
"He sings most (very) beautifully." Certain ad-
verbs appear also in the form — [ten^, as meiften^,
^mostly,' iDenigften^^ *at least,' etc.

7. After comparisons of equality the conjunction
*as ' is usually Wk ; Sr ift jo gro^ tt)te id), " He is as
tall as I." A comparison of inequality in the posi-
tive degree may be followed by either iDte or ah^ :
er ift nid)t fo grofj tDte (or alS) id).

Les. XVI.] COMPARISON. 121

After the comparative, *than' is ate: (£r i[t 9ri3^er
ate t^, '' He is taller than I."

8. Diminishing comparison is expressed by tneniger
or minber, 'less,' and am tDenigften, * least' : (£r t[t am
luenigften fd^ulbig, " He is least guilty."

Vocabulary.

bet ©C^irnt, the shade {shield) \sa^ 0\, the oil.

ber SDloub, the moon. !^ctt, bright, clear.

bet %^% the day, daylight. tttilb, mild, soft.

bet 5tbettb, the evening. bttttfel, dark, obscure.

bie SWetttttltg, the opinion. ftttfter, dark (without light).

'^Xt Sam|Je, the lamp. \^\\^f long.

"tXt ^^WXt^ the sun. uic^t ttia^t ? Isn't it ? Does'^it
'^Xt "^tXtXX^iWX^ the lighting, it? etc.

illumination. beUttOdj, still, nevertheless.

bo^ Stt^t, the light (@a§=, taenigftett)^, ^^ /^^j-/.

5D^onben=, @onneii4ic^t). griin, ^r^<f«.

bai^ 5(ttge (pi. -n), M<f ^f/^. meinett, Z/^/'/^/^, /z^^'^r ^« opinion^

'bti^ Srennga!^, illuminating
gas.
Note 26. — The following adjectives are compared irregularly
gut, bef[er, ber befte ; t)ic(, nieljr, \i^^ meifte ; l}od), f)i3l)er, bcr
l^od)fte ; na^e, nciljer, ber iiac^fte; grog, sup. ber grogte (i. e. only-tf
added to stem); lt>enig, minber, ber iniubefte (also regular forms).

Exercise XVI.

I. S)a^ Sidjt bcr Sonne ift t)tel IjeKer afe ba^ bc^
9Konbe^. 2. (£^ ift aber gar 511 I)cH fiir bie Slugen.
3. S)a§ bcfte Sic^t fiir bie Slngen ift aber bod^ \^o.%
cincr gnten Sampe. 4. S)a^ finbe id) and) ; \><x^ Dl
gibt ein mitbcre^ £id)t ate ba^ Srennga^. 5. S)te
meiften ©tnbenten tragen a6er einen Sdjirm. 6. ®a^

122 COMPARISON. [Les. XVI.

Si(^t ift am milbeften, tDcnn bie Sampe einen bunfeln
@{J)trm i)at 7. @^ ii^itb f)ier immer finfterer ; lefen
@ie ja mcf)! me()r. 8. S(^ metne, e^ ift am beften beim
Stage ju ftubieren. 9. 3)ie 93eleuc^tung biefeio ^intmer^
ift fd)Ied^ter ate id) meinte. 10. S)a^ ift bie f^Iedjlefte
Sampe, bie ic^ jemate gefel)en l)ab^, n. 9?ein, x6)
glaube, ic^ i^abc eine iioc^ fdjled^tere. 12. S)a^ t)ellfte
Sidjt ift nii^t immer ba^ kfte. 13. (£«§ ift am beften,
tt)ir faufen eine neue Sampe. 14. 2)er Tlonh gibt ba^
milbefte, freunbtic^fte Sid)t 15. Slber man tann nid)t
bei feinem Sid)te lefen. 16. 3Im Sage, tuenn bie Son-
ne nid)t fc^eint, ift ba^ Sidjt am beften.

Exercise i6.

I. The days are-growing ^ shorter, are they not ?

2. I beHeve (so), but they are not yet shortest.

3. The shortest days are to me the pleasant est. 4. We
read more in the longer evenings of the winter.

5. What sort-of ^ lighting do you have in your house ?

6. I find the lamp a better light than gas. 7. [The]
gaslight is too bright for the eyes. 8. [The] oil
makes the softest light. 9. The moon is indeed 3
softer, but one cannot read by moonlight. 10. One
reads best by a lamp with (a) dark shade, n. I
have found that the green shades are the best.
12. We-had-better 4 buy a green shade then. 5 13. I
will surely do that the next day [that] ^ I go to
town. 14. I have brought you the best shade
[that] they had. 15. [The] oil is not always as good

Les. XVI.] COMPARISON. I23

as [the] gas. i6. But still it is always pleasantest
to read by lamplight. 17. That is at least my opinion.

18. But is the pleasantest light always the best ?

19. The light is mildest when the sun is not shining.

20. The light of the moon is not so bright as that of
the sun.

^ it)erben» * fiin ^ ja, jtuar, freilirf). ^ Tr. * It is best we buy.*
^ otfo after ' buy.' ^ ace. case.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
1)tC ^ad)if night. tetttUr^, neat.

bic ©leftrtSitrit', electricity. tcuer, dear, costly.

ftittig, cheap. foKcn, is {are) said.

Conversation 15. — Die Belcuc^tung.

9Bann [inb bie S^age am langften ?
2. ^te 2^age jinb im ©ommer am Idngften.
Unb tDann ftnb bie 9Zddjte am langften ?
2. 3^ SSinter ftnb bie 5^dd[;te am langften.
33SeId)er 3)?onat ift ber fiirjefte ?
2. S)er 3^ebruar ift ber liir^efte 3[Ronat.

Etc., etc.

SBa^ fitr S3elend)tnng ift fiir bie 9Ingen am beften ?

2. 3c^ finbe, bag Dl ift beffer al^ bag ®ag.

Sft ba^ Dl ni^t biffiger ate bag ®ag ?

2. 3^ glaube tt)of)( ; aber bag ©ag ift rein(trf;er.

2Beld}eg ift tenrer, bag ®ag ober bie ©leltrtsttdt ?

2. 2)ie ©kftri^ttdt ift geiDt^ teurer.

Unb n)te ift bie Sleftrijitdt fiir bie 5Ingen ?

2. ©ie foil au(^ ntc^t fo gnt fiir bie Slngen fein.

Etc., etc.

124 COMPARISON. [Les. XVI,

Reading i6.
e§ ift beftimmt in @ottc§ mat

decreed counsel

85on @. toon ^eud&tergUben.

e^ ift kfttmmt in ®otte^ $Rat,
2)a^ man t)om Siebften toa^ man I)at,
SRu^ fc^eiben.

part

SBietDoI bod) nid^t^ im Sanf ber 2BeIt

Although course

S)em ^tx^m, a(tj, fo fauer fdllt,

hard falls (comes)

Site ©d^eiben, ja ©c^eiben.

parting

Unb I)at bir ®ott ein Sieb be[d^ert,
Unb I)altft bn fie rec^t innig tt)ert,

warmly dear

®ie Seine,
6^ tpirb iDoIjI tDenig Qdt nur fein
©0 Idf^t fie bid) fo gar alfein;

3)ann tvdncl |a tDeine!

9?un mnJ3t bn mic^ and) rei^t t)erfte^n,

Sa red)t t)erfte£)n:
28enn 9Kenfd)en an^einanberge^n,

part

©0 fagen fie: ?lnf 9Sieberfel)n !

to meet again

2tuf aSieberfe^n ! Stuf aSicbcrfcI)n !

Les. XVII.] VERBS. INSEPARABLE. 1 2 5

LESSON XVII.

Verbs. — Inseparable.

1 . The inseparable prefixes are few ; learn them ;
all others are separable.

2. 2)ie fri^lcc^tctt SHanner ticrfuri^tett intent Srubcr
ba)§ ©cine ju ent^alten, abcr cr ^at c^ cr^alten uitb
luirb c^ luo^l fie^altcn.

3« Learn this sentence ; observe the effect of the
prefixes with {)alten, also the i^e and place of the
signs of infinitive and past participle.

4. Verbs are sometimes compounded with pre-
fixes, which are (i) always inseparable, or (2) al-
ways separable, or (3) sometimes separable and
sometimes inseparable.

$• These cause no change in the inflection of the
verb, itself, and the only difficulty presented is in
the treatment of the prefix.

6. The Inseparable Prefix forms one word with
the main verb and is never separated from it. The
Separable Prefix is separated from the verb in the
present and preterit tenses, but only in principal
clauses, and is placed at the end of the clause.
(See page 135 : 5.)

7» This difference with regard to the separation
of the prefixes from the verb corresponds to a differ-
ence in their signification. The separable prefixes

1 26 VERBS. INSEPARABLE. [Les. XVII.

retain their sense and use as individual words, and
manifest this individuaUty in their independent posi-
tion with reference to the verb. The inseparable
prefixes, on the other hand, have lost their separate
use as individual words, only exerting a certain
force upon the verb with which they are com-
pounded, and failing to assert any independence in
their position.

8. This assertion of independence in significa-
tion, by the separable prefixes, is shown not only
by their position, but by the accent, which they
receive in those forms also where they retain their
place in composition with the verb. On the other
hand, the inseparable prefixes receive no accent, but
it falls on the verb-stem. This is indicated by the
written accent in the following paradigms.

Inseparable Verbs,

9. The following are the inseparable prefixes : —

be, ent(emp), er, ge, Der, jcr, mi^.

10. ^]i^ force which the inseparable prefix gives
to the signification of the verb varies considerably
in different cases. This will best be learned by
practice, but a few hints are here given. See also
the German-English vocabulary.

(a) SBe- makes intransitive verbs transitive, and
forms verbs from adjectives ; look up frei and be-
freien, fut)ten and kfiiljleu.

Les. XVII.] VERBS. INSEPARABLE. 127

(b) ®ttt- (emp-) adds the sense, " out of," '' away,"
"off," "in," and with adjectives " un-" or "dis-";
look up empfinben, entflieljcn, entel)ren (dishonor).

{c) @r- indicates origin of action or condition,
or acquisition by the action of the simple verb ;
look up erblinben, erl)alten, ertDerben.

{d ) @c- occurs with but few verbs and the force
is too vague and varied for definition.

{e) 2Jcr- adds to the simple verb the idea of com-
pletion (Eng. ' en-' with adjectives), of reversal, of
rejection or wrong purpose ; look up l)ertDerfen, t)er=
faufen, t)erebeln (ennoble), t)erbeffern.

(/) 3^^~ ^^^^ ^^^ i^^^ ^^ destruction, expressed
by * dis-' or " to pieces " ; look up jerbrec^en, jerftoren.

{g) JBlilf- equals English mis-. When mi^ has
not the accent it is inseparable ; thus in the com-
monest compounds. But even when it is accented
the prefix never leaves the stem, but merely admits
ge- in the past participle, sometimes before the mi§,
sometimes between it and the stem.

II. When the common meanings of these pre-
fixes are learned, the pupil will often find himself
able to construct compounds, without referring con-
stantly to the dictionary. But some of the com-
monest inseparable verbs cannot be brought under
these definitions, as Derfte^en, bef)alten.

128 VERBS INSEPARABLE [Les. XVII.

12. The inseparable prefixes do not take the sign
ge in the past participle. However, nti^ is some-
times an exception to this rule.

13. Inflection of an Inseparable Verb.

PRINCIPAI. PARTS.

tietgeffctt, tietgaft; tictgeffett*

Present.

id) tJcrgcffe, I forget.

Etc., etc.
Preterit.

\^ ticrga^, I forgot.

Etc., etc.

Perfect.

\^ ^al^C tiergeffett, I have forgotten.

Etc., etc.

Pluperfect.

t(^ :jattc ticrgeffen, / had forgotten.

Etc., etc.

Future.

\^ mcrbC Ucrgcffctt, I shall forget.

Etc., etc.

Future Perfect.

tt^ tticrbe tICrgcffcn \^{y\it% I shall have forgotten.

Etc., etc.

Imperative.

ticrgt^ (bu), forget {thou).

Etc., etc.

Les. XVIL] verbs. INSEPARABLE.

129

Infinitives.

(5u) ijcrgeffeit, to forget.

tJCrgcffen (^U) ftabCU, to have forgotten.
Participles.

UergeffCttb, forgetting,
iJCrgeffen, forgotten.

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE.

bcr @Ottnettf(i^irm (sun-screen),

the sunshade^ sun-umbrella.
bcr ©tiftirm, the shade.
bcr Coffer, the trunk.

FEMININE.

bie Sragc, ^/^^ question.

NEUTER.

baig fJriUftiirt, ^/^^ breakfast.
bfl!^ ©Clb, /^<? motley.
beanttDOrten, d!;/ja:/^r(a letter).
bel^alten, retain^ keep (posses-
sion of).

ein^fattgen, receive^ welcome,
Crl)rt licit, receive^ come in pos-
session of keep = maintain.
tViaxthtltf permit (w.)

bariiber, over this.

t»crftcl|ett, understand.
5Crbret^Cn, break to pieces.
Sttft 5 ab en, have pleasure y de-
sire^ be inclined.
bcbCtfCtt, cover (w.).
bettJUttbern, admire (w.).

um ttjicbicl U^r? at what

o'clock.

cr^dtett, crjiclt, tx^alitn.

em^fangctt, em^ftng, em^faitgctt,

(The other verbs have already appeared, but should be looked
up and recited.)

Note 27. — Compounds of SJlaiin substitute -leute for -matt-'
tier in the plural when speaking of the class : as, ^aitfmatttt,
" merchant," ^aufleute, " merchants ; §ailptmaitn, " captain,"
§ait|)tlettte, "captains;" but not with reference to a number of
individuals ; as, gtnei §aii))tntdntter, *' two captains."

1 30 VERBS. INSEPARABLE. [Les. XVII.

Exercise XVII.

I. Stjre greunbin betDunbert tneinen neuen ©onnen-
fd^irm fe^r. 2. Sa, [ie W'wb fe(6ft einen fold^en '
@d)trm !aufen. 3- S)er @(J)trm Ijat ii)x alfo fe^r gut
gefallen. 4. SBoHen ©ie t^r benjetben ni^t t)erfaufen ?
5. 9tein, ha§ geljt nic^t ; tc^ tx)erbe tljn bet)a(ten. 6. Sd)
t)er[tef)e nt(i)t ttjarum : ^abm @te ben ©c^irm aU ©e-
fc^enf erfjdten ? 7. S)a^ tft e^ eben ^ ; unb t(^ furd)te,
©ie (jabert i^n ba gerbroc^en. 8. 9Jein, nein ; er ift
gar nic^t jerbrodjen. 9. 9^un, t)erlieren ©ie ben teuren
©d)irnt ja 3 nic^t 10. §aben tt)ir bariiber ba^ S^ut)*
ftiid Dergeffen? n. 2l(^ nein, ba^ ift tttva^, tva^ id)
niemate t)ergeffe. 12. |)aben ©ie je|t Su[t jum griif)^
[tiid ju ge^en ? 13. Um ti:)iet)iel Utjr effen tt)ir benn
J)ier sum grutjftiid ? 14. Um [teben U^r, tDenn ic^ nid}t
tiergeffen ^abt, 15. S)a^ gefallt mir fef)r. 16. Sd^
^abe foeben einen langen Srief empfangen. 17. Unb
id) tnerbe if)n nac^ bem grit^ftud beanttoorten. 18. ?[ber
tca^ i[t benn mit bem fdjonen ©onnenld)irm ge)d)et)en ?

^ einen fo((^en or fold) einen, the former preferred, ^exactly.
3 Please, at beginning.

Exercise 17.

I. How does my new sunshade please you ? (Or :
How do you like my new sunshade ?) 2. O, I admire
it very (much) : it is exceedingly pretty. 3. I be-
lieve I admired ' the same shade at Miiller's. 4. Just-
so,^ Miiller sold ' it (to) me. 5. Permit me a ques-

Les. XVII.] VERBS. — INSEPARABLE. I3I

tion : Where do you keep your sunshade ? 6. I do
not understand how you keep it so well. 7. Well,

1 manage 3 thus : I keep the sunshade always in
my trunk, ^ covered ^ with ^ paper. 8. ^ That 3 1 2 do
5 not 2 understand ^either.4 9. The heavy books
in my trunk broke my sunshade. 10. But that , is

just 2- 2 it: I keep no books in my trunk, n. I
have just 5 received (some) money from my father.
12. The good father does not forget you. 13. He

2 probably ^ understands that you wish to buy a new
shade. 14. He has heard that I have broken my
old one. 15. Did ^ you break ^ it or lose it ? 16. Why,^
you know I broke ^ it. 17. Well, do not lose the
money you have received.

^Perfect tense. ^Sben. ^madje eg, ^andj, before nidjt
5 foebeu. * ja, after tt)iffen.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
MASCULINE. \^(i§ QJepgcl, the poultry.

bcr 9)lar!t, the market. btti^ DfJatfjaUi^ (council-house),

bcr SDlarft^Ia^, the market- the city hall.

plate^ square.
ber ^t^i, the pike (fish).

bcr SJiirgcrmciftcr (citizen

master), the mayor. v^^t ^^^^y-

bcr 5lb(cr, the eagle. attcrlct, all sorts of.

gar fcitt, none at all.

FEMININE. ;f ., '

. «i r / r foftCtt, cost.

/, fnce mg. iiffetttltji^, public.

NEUTER. Uortrcff' Ut^, excellent,

'tS^^ ©CmufC, the vegetables.

132 VERBS. INSEPARABLE. [Les. XVII.

Conversation 16. — I)ic Stabt.

I. 2Baren ©te ^mk morgen auf bent Waxtk?

2. 3^/ i<^ ^^^ W^ f^^^ bort.
I. 3Ba^ berfauft man auf bent Tlaxtk?

2. '^an Hxtau\t bort atterlei ©emiife, and) ©eflugel,
@ier unb Dbft.

I. ®tbt e^ Stiiinte auf bent maxtipla^ ?

2. 3Zein, gar feme. 2lber bie Sauer^teule ^6en tm
©ommer gro^e ©onnenfc^irme.

I. SSie t)tel foften btefe §edjte ?
2. ©ie foften bag ©tM eine 3!Jlarf.

I. SSetc^e i3ffentltc^e ©ebaube fe^en ©te auf bent 5D?arft*
plafe?
2. ^c^ feE)e bie ^irrfje, ba§ S^^eater, ein ©aft^au^ unb
ba§ SfJat^aug.

I. SBa§ tft tnt 9tatf)au^turnte ?
2. S)ie ©tabtul^r tft bartn*

I. 2Bag gtbt e^ tnt ^Ratfiau^feHer ?
2. @§ tft eine Sleftauration barin,

I. 3Bo l^at ber S3urgerntetfter fetn 33ureau'? (pr. bix^

2. 6r f^at e^ im Jlatf^aufe.
I. SBo ^alt ber ©tabtrat feiite a?erfamnt'lungen?

2. ®r ^dlt fie im Siatf^aufe,
I. 2Bie ^etfet ba§ ®aftt)aug ?

2. @§ ^ei^t „ber abler."

Les. XVII.] VERBS. INSEPARABLE. 1 33

Reading 17.

aSon ^einric^ ^eine.

Sc^ rt)ei§^ nidji, \va^^ foils e^^ kbeuten,4

S)a^ id) fo traurtg bin ;
©in SfJfardjen aii^ alten 3^iten,

S)a^ 5 fommt mir nic^t an§> beni ©inn.^

®ie Suft i[t fu^l unb e^ bunfelt,7

Uttb ruljig ^ flie^t ber 9if)ein ;
S)er ®ipfet be^ Sergei funlelt

Sm Slbenbfonnenfc^ein.

S)ie fd)onfte Sungfrau fi|et

Sort oben,9 tpunberbar,
S^r golb'ne^^o ®e]c^meibe bli|et,"

@ie !dmmt i^r golb'ne^ §aar.

©te Mmint e§ mit gotb'nem Samme,

Unb [ingt ein Sieb babei,^^
S)a^ l^at eine ti:)nnberyame,'3

(SetDattige SKelobei.

®en ©c£)iffer ^ int Heinen @d)iffe'5
(£rgreift'6 e^ mit tDilbem 2Bel);»7

6r fdjant^s nic^t bie gelfenriffe,
®r fdjant^^ nnr I)inanf in bie §fit)'.^9

Sdj gtanbe, bie SBelten t)er)d)lingen
?[m ®nbe^° ©djiffer nnb ^a^n;

Unb ha§> Ijat mit i()rem ©ingen
Sie Soretei getam

1 34 VERBS. SEPARABLE. [Les. XVIII.

^ A nixie on the Rhine, who by her singing so charmed the
boatmen that they let themselves be carried into the whirlpool,
near which she dwelt. ^triffen. ^is, is intended. * signify.
^ that. ^ mir au§ bent @iim, to me out of the thought, out of my
thoughts. ^e§ bunfelt, it is growing dark, ^quietly. ^ yonder
above, up there. ^°golbcue^. "glitters. ^^ at the same time.
^3 marvellous. ^* boatman. ^^ boat. ^^ seizes, lays hold of . ^^pang.
^^ see, look. ^^ [^i bie §i3^C, into the height, on high. ^° am Snbc,
at the end, at last.

LESSON XVIII.

Verbs. — Separable.

1 . Tke separate forms of the separable verbs are
among the most characteristic German idioms^ and
should be practiced thoroughly,

2. 2)cr Stubent labct attc fcine iJ^cunbe citt^

invites ( )

foklb fie antommtUf eincn 2lkttb 6ci i^m iu^n^

as soon (as) arrive to

firtngcn^

pass.

3- Learn the sentence ; note the tense and form
of each verb and the kind of clause in which it
occurs, also the place of the infinitive sign.

4. The number of the separable prefixes is so
large, that it is not practicable to learn the list as
we have done in the case of the inseparable ones.
It will suffice to bear in mind that all prefixes ex-
cept those mentioned in Lesson XVII are separ-

Les. XVIIL] VERBS. SEPARABLE. I35

able. The list would include most prepositions and
adverbs combined with prepositions, as all combina-
tions with I}in- and f)er-. See Appendix.

5. In the present and preterit tenses, in principal
clauses, the separable prefix comes at the end of the
clause. In dependent clauses the prefix precedes
the stem as part of one word. In the infinitive and
past participle it is separated from the stem by the
particle ge- or ju-.

A separable prefix before an inseparable, as au^^
Derfaufen, remains separable.

6. Paradigm of a Separable Verb.

PRINCIPAI. PARTS.

an'fan^cttf fittg an', an'^cfan^cn.

Present.
X^ faugC ait', /commence.

Preterit.
i(^ fittg an'f I commenced.

Perfect,
tt^ ^abc an^gcfaugCtt, / have commenced.

Pluperfect.
\^ ^attC an'gcfattgcn, / had comincfued.

Future.
\^ tticrbc Ott'fangcn, / shall co?fimence.

Future Perfect.
\^ tt»e?t>C an'gefangcn ^afien, / shall have commenced.

136 VERBS. SEPARABLE. [Les. XVIII.

Imperative,
fangc (bu) an, commence {thou).
fanget is\C) an, commence (ye).

Infinitive.

an'fangen, an'^ufangett, to commence.

att'gcfangCtt l^abCll, to have cofnmenced.

Participles,
att'faugcnb, co?nmencing.
an' gcfattgcit, comme^tced.

7« In reciting the paradigm of the separable verb
it is well to require the presence of an object, as
,jSc() fange ben 95rief an,'' in order to impress the
peculiarity of the order.

Note 28. — Certain prefixes normally separable are also in-
separable in some combinations : iiber, uiiter, burc^, um, ^iuter,
tDiber, tnlebor. When separable these words have their simple
literal meaning, and, of course, carry the accent. When insepar-
able the meaning of the prefix is usually figurative, or is fused
with the stem so as to be rendered by one word, usually a Latin
derivative, and the prefix, like other inseparables, is unaccented.
Thus u'berfeljeii, pret. fe^tc . . . \i^tx =^ set across ; iiberfe'^en, pret.
iiberte^'te = translate ; um'fi^retben, pret. fc^rieb ♦ . . um = turite
over (again) ; umfc^rei^ben, pret. umf(^rieb' = circumscribe. Obvi-
ously these features are cross-tests. If we know the accent we
know whether separable or inseparable and something of the
meaning ; and vice versa.

Note 29. — In expressions for the time of day, the Germans
often reckon forward to the next hour : as eill %\tx\.t\ auf fteben,
(or, ein 3>ierte( iiac^ fed)§), "a quarter past six"; ^alb fieben,
"half-past six"; bvei iBiertel auf fteben (or, eiii 5>iertett)or fieben)
" quarter before seven " ; also, jUiaiV^^ig SJlilUlteu nad^ fteben, or
fieben U^r jnian^tc^ ; and, ;^n)angig SO^innten Dor ac^t, or, fieben
mr t)icr3ig, like our railroad computation.

Lbs. XVIII.] VERBS. SEPARABLE.

137

MASCULINE.

bcr S^crfaffer, tJu author.

btC (5(tCtn, the parents.

FEMININE.

bic S5ttrg, the fortress.
btC (Stnlabung, the invitation.
bic 5luc!bo'te, //^^ anecdote,
story.

NEUTER.

ba§ Sd^auf^iel, the spectacle,

play.
"bd^ ^irrfjCttUcb, the hymn.
'^ti^ QJcbitiftt, thepoefn.

ab'fc^rctbcit, copy.
an'fommen, arrive.

UOr'ftcttctt, introducey present.

Vocabulary.

5u'mndjcn, j/^?^/, dose.

aitf ntrtcfjCll, open.

awi^nicubig lenteii, leam by

heart.
auf'fteI)Ctt, ^^/ up, rise.
Itm'fdjtcidCtt, remodel, write

over.
UOr'IcfCtt, read aloud.
au'uc^^mCtt, accept.
cin'lrtbCll, i7ivite.
Jtt'BvingeU, spend (time).
auf'()Oreu, cease, stop.
DCrf^JrCti^'ett, promise.

f^Ott, indeed, surely ; already.

bciua^e, almost.

Exercise XVIII.

I. Ser 93erfaffer be^ Siebe^ fi^reibt e^ foebert ab.
2. ®r fangt itjenigftei^o an, e§ abjufd^reiben. 3. @t
^atte fd)on angcfangeu, ate id) anfam. 4. 2Sami [tnb
Sie benu angefommcn ? 5- Sd) fam Dor einer Ijalbeit
©tunbc an. 6. Setjt ^brt bcr 93?ann [djon aiif, 311
fc^reibcn. 7. @r ^at lx)o()l \)o.^ ganje 2icb abgc)djric=
ben. 8. gr ift and) S?erfaffer Don mefjreren Slnefboten
nnb cinem ©djaujpicl. 9. ®v mad}t aber jel^t ba^
Suc^ jn. 10. 93itte, ftcllcn ®ie mid) bem S^erfaffer
Dor. II. Sc^ labe ©ie cin, Ijcutc 3[benb urn ^alb fie-
ben bet nn^ 3^ee jn neljmen. 12. ®er 95crfa[fer bringt
\^t\\ ganjen 2^ag bci un^o ju. 13. Gr loirb Ijcutc abenb
\)(x^ ©diaufpicl Dorlcfcn. 14. Sd) iuifl if)n bitten, bay

138 VERBS. SEPARABLE. [Les. XVIII.

Steb fiir mk'i) abjufd^retben. 15. 28ir getien je^t nacl)
§auie. 16. 2Bir ^aben einen fe^r angene()meit 2lbenb
gUQcbrad^t 17. S(^ I)ore, er l)at ba§ Sieb an§> bem
(guglifc^en iiberfegt 18. 3d) iiberfel^e ja auc^ engtifdje
©ebid^te.

Exercise i8.
I. They have invited us gto ^take ^tea ^with
6 them ,at (a) ^ quarter 3 after ^six.J 2. And^
shall you accept the invitation ? 3. Why,3 we ac-
cepted it immediately. 4. They say, the author of
the new play will be there. 5. So-then, 4 he has
really arrived ? 6. Yes indeed, and he has promised
to read his play aloud. 7. His daughter is copying
it this afternoon. 8. She began 5 right away after
dinner. 9. We shall probably pass a pleasant even-
ing. 10. J That 3 1 2 can ^ indeed ^ promise ^ you.
II. Let us arise ; they will introduce us to the
author's parents. 12. The people are ceasing to
talk. 13. Somebody just closed a door. 14. He
arises and opens his book. 15. , So ^ his young
daughter ^ has copied the whole play ? 16. , Now
3 he 2 has ceased to read. 17. Will they introduce
us to the author, do-you-think ? 7 18. I have almost
learned the play by heart. 19. The play has pleased
us very much. 20. I have certainly ^ spent a very
pleasant evening. 21. My friend will translate the
play into German. 22, But the author will first write
it entirely over,

Les. XVIII.] VERBS. SEPARABLE. 1 39

^ See Note 29. ^ beun, after @ie.# ^ 3a, after fie. * alfo.
5 Perfect tense. ^ alfo. ^ Wotjl, after img, or verb melneil or
glauben. ® bocf).

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

Urn iuicdicf lXi}V, at zvhat fcUcn, seldom.

o'clock^ when ? iDcfonttUCU^ get^ receive.

Crft, first, not until. laffcit, let.

Conversation 17. — Die ^eit.

I. SSann tjcljt bie Sonne tnt 5Dconat Sunt anf ?

2. 3^ 5Wonat %\xx(\ ge^t bie ©onne urn f)aI6 fiinf Uf)r
auf.

I. 3Bann geljt bie Sonne im SKonat Snni nnter?

2. 3m 5Jtoant ^uni ge^t bie ©onne urn !)alb ad;l Uf)r.
unter.

I. 2Bie lang [inb bie S^age nnb bie 9tad)te im 9[)?onat
©ejember ?
2. 3^ ^onat ^e^emBer finb bie 2^age neun ©tunben
lang unb bie ^^Zdc^te fiinfje^n ©tunben.

Etc., etc.

I. SBann get^en ©ie in bie ©djule ?

2. %i) geE)e um ac^t U^r in bie ©c^ule.
I. SBann fommen ©ie nad) ,g)anfe ?

2. SSir fommen ju SRittag nad^ §aufe.
I. (Steven @ie nm fiinf U()r anf ?

2. 9^ein, je^t fte^e i(^ erft um fieben U^r auf.
I. Um tnteDtel U^r geljen ®ie \t%i jn "S^tiit^

2. S^^t gel^e id^ fe{ten i;)or §ef)n U^r ju Sette,
Etc., etc.

140 VERBS. SEPARABLE. [Les. XVIII.

Reading 18.

9}forgenftunbe ijat ®oIb im 9}hinbe.

Morning-hour in the mouth.

"The early bird catches the worm."

S)er ©tord^ Uefj' an\ bcm "S^adj ftc^' nicber,'
Unb fprad): „!J)a, Stnber, bin i^ tpiebcr!
9?un faget mir, iDa^ ift^- gefdje^en,^
(Seit3 id) bag S)orf(^en4 nic^ts ge)et)en?^'^

^ fid) nieberlaffen, to let one's self down, to alight. * has
happened. ^ since. "^ little village. ^ not to be translated. ^ ge»
|e{)en (^abe), have seen, saw.

^et SltaBet^ in ber SBitfte.^

©in Slraber ^atte fid) 3 in ber SBiifte t)erirrt3 nnb tvav
in ®efa!)r,4 Dor |)nnger unb S)urft gu fterben. 91ac^
(angem Um^erirren 5 fanb er eine t)on ben Q^fternen ober
aSaffergrnben,^ aui3 tt)eld)cn bie piger7 i()re Samde
trdnfen,^ unb einen !leincn, lebernen ®ad, ber auf bent
©anbe lag. „&ott jei getobt!'' f|)rac-^ er, ate er i^n
auff)ob9 unb befiipe;^° ,,bag finb gelui^ ©atteln"
ober S^iiffe; tpie iDill id) mid) an i^nen erquiden^^ unb
Iaben!^^'3 Sn biefer jiifeen |)offnung fiffnete er fd^neH
hm ®ad, ]at) tva^ er entf)ielt,H unb rief'5 bann gang
traurig^^ au^'S: ,,3ld), eg finb nur ^erlen!'''7

^ Arab. ^ wandering about. ^ lifted up. ^^ ]ave, restore.

'^ desert. ^water-tanks. ^° felt of. ^* contained.

3 lost his way, 7 pilgrims. " dates. *s exclaimed,

-♦danger. .® water. ^^ refresh. ^^ sadly,

^^ pearls.

Les. XIX.] VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. I4I

LESSON XIX.

Subjunctive Mood. — Conjugation.

1. The Subjunctive Mood is the subjective mood,
implying doiibt^ tmcertaiiity ^ negation. It occurs
chiefly in subordinate clauses. For the rules of
the Subjunctive, see Lesson XXIX.

2. The forms of the Subjunctive Mood do not
differ greatly from those of the Indicative, yet in
most cases enough to be distinguished.

3. In the Present Tense, the personal endings of
the Subjunctive retain the parenthetical e and have
no t in the third person singular. The endings
are the same in both conjugations. In the Old
Conjugation the verbs in c and a do not change the
vowel in the second and third persons singular, as
in the Indicative.

4. In the Preterit, the Subjunctive and Indica-
tive are alike for the New Conjugation. The Old
Conjugation adds -c, -eft, -c, to the Preterit stem
in the Sing., and umlauts the stem-vowel in both
Singular and Plural. The Plural endings are the
same as in the Indicative.

$• The compound tenses of the Subjunctive are
formed in the same manner in both Old and New
Conjugations, by the use of the Subjunctive of the
auxiliaries Ijaden (or fetn) and tDcrben.

6. The Conditional, which is properly a Subjunc-

142 VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [Les. XIX.

tive used in the conclusion after conditions, is
formed with tpiirben, the Preterit Subjunctive of
tDerbcn, followed by the Infinitive, or the Perfect
Infinitive. For the Present Conditional the Preterit
Subjunctive is sometimes substituted : S(^ gSbe ti)m
ha^ ^nd), or tc^ iDiirbe il}m ba^ Sud) geben, " I would
give him the book." Similarly the Pluperfect Sub-
junctive is used for the Perfect Conditional, and
is even preferred Sd) ^^ti^ tt)n geliebt, " I would
have loved him," being shorter, is preferred to Sd)
iDiirbe i^n geltebt l^aben.

7. The Conditional, representing the tentative
conclusion from a condition (an if-clause), always
occurs in the principal clause.

8. Subjunctive of fciit and ^abeit. Simple Tenses.

Present.
i(^ fci, / {may) be. t(^ ^aBc, / {may) have.

btt feieft, thou {mayest) be. btt ^aBeft, thoti {mayest) have.

tX fci, he {may) be, tX !^al6c, he {may) have,

)mx fcien, we {may) be. tOXX ^abCJt, we {may) have.

i^r \t\tif ye {/nay) be. xi}X f^ahct, ye {may) have.

Sie fCtCtt, you {may) be. StC ^abctt, you {may) have.

flc feicn, they {may) be. ftC ^abcit, they {may) have.

Preterit.
i(^ Ware, I might be {were). \^ ^ftttC, I ffiight have {ox had).

bU ttJiircft, thou mightest be. "^Vi ^tittcft, thou mightest have.

tX ttiarc, he might be. tX ^^Ciiit^ he might have.

'mx tuarcu, we might be. ttJtt pttCll, we might have.

\^X tuarct, ye /night be. \\c IjClttCt, ye might have.

Sic itJarCU, you might be. (Sic ^iittCtt, you might have.

\\% tPttVCtt, they might be, fie fatten, they might have.

Les. XIX.] VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. I43

9. Subjunctive of a Verb of the New Conjugation.

Present.
Ic^ IxthCf I (may) love. ttJtr tieBctt, we {may) love.

btt licBcft^ thou (mayest) love. i^r (teBct, ye {may) love.

ZX lieBe, he {may) love. flc UebCtt, they {may) love.

Preterit.
i(^ Xxthitf I might love {loved).
btt licbteft, thoic mightest love {lovedst).
tX Itcbte, he might love {loved).

ttJit (iebtCtt, we might love {loved).
t^r Itefitct, ye might love "

fic UebtCtt, they might love "
Perfect,
ir^ ^aBe gClicBt, / {may) have loved.

btt l^aBeft (jdicbt, thou {mayest) have loved {havest loved).
Etc., etc.

Pluperfect.

X^ ^attC geliebt^ I might have loved {had loved).

Etc., etc.

Future.
X^ mcrbC (iebCtt, / shall love.

btt itierbeft UeBctt, //^^^^ ^/?^// /^^^<f.

Etc., etc.

Future Perfect.

i(^ ttlCrbe geUcftt ^afiett, I shall have loved.

Etc., etc.

Conditional.

t(i^ tuiirbe lieBctt or Ucfite, I would love.
Etc., etc.

Conditional Perfect.

irift tuitrbe geliebt ^bett or ^attc rjcncBt, I would have loved.
Etc., etc.

144 VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [Les. XIX.

Subjunctive Mood.
10. Inflection of a Verb of the Old Conjugation.

Present.
t(^ ^thCf I {may) give. UJtr geBctt, we {rnay) give,

bU gcBeft, thou {mayest) give. t^|t gcBet, ye {may) give.

Cr gcbC, /le {may) give. fic gcBctt, they {may) give.

Preterit,
id) gabC, / might give {gave), imx gftBctt, we 7nightgive {gave).

btt gaficft, thou mightest give i^V QfxMf ye might give "
{gavest). fie gcfiett, //^<r might give "

Ct gclBc, /^<f might give {gave).

Perfect.

icift l^afic gcgebctt, )»xx l^aBctt gcgcBcn.

cr /' " fie " "

Pluperfect.

x6) ^Uiz gegefieit, toir 1)aiit\x gcgefien.

Etc., etc.
Future.

x6) ttierbe geBen, tuir itJcrbett geBett,
erwerbe " fie " "

Future Perfect.

x6) mcrbe gegcBen ^afiett, ttiir tuerbcn gegebett ^abeii.
g|. /' // /^ «g /> /< /^

Conditional.

i^ ttjitrbe gcbcn or x^ gabc.

Conditional Perfect.

x^ tuitrbe gegeben \)ahtxx or id^ ptte gegebett.

Note 30. The conjunction * if/ njcntt, is usually followed
by the subjunctive. As in English, the conjunction is implied
by putting the verb at the beginning of the clause : SSetllt tx
fran! rodrc (or SScire er !ran!), fo iDitrbe er fd^reibcn, " If he were
sick (or " Were he sick "), he would write."

Les. XIX.] VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. I45

Vocabulary.

MASCULINE. Itittgft, long since.

bcr S^ettcr, the cousin. uBerneJ'mett, undertake.

FEMININE. ttOtttJCttbirj, necessary.

\At'^t\iXmi\^iX% the acquaint- XmlXx^, real ; really.

ance. tjjl %\ctX StcKc, in your place.

bie ^flegc, the care, attejtdance. |ttJ)er, certainly.

NEUTER. rateu, ^^wj^ (with dative).

'^^'^ S^CrgttitgCn^ the pleasure. \txix% ready, through {with).

ba!§ 23t§riftCtt (little bit), the bcUtt'rU^iOCtt^ make uneasy.

trifle. berfel^e, the same. (Declined
'^^^ ^Cif^icl, the example. like bcr gutc, Les. XV.)

l^cim, home (sep. prefix of iifiergc'^en, deliver.

direction). 5UrurfgcbCtt^ give back.

mitreifCIl, travel (with) ^/^«^, ^UriirffC^irfCU, send back.

go along. tlOraU^'fC^Ctt, foresee.

Exercise XIX.

I. 3)er ©tubent n^itrbe boc^ fjeimgetjen, tDenn er
franf mare 3'. 2. Sa, unb er !t)urbe aud) art feine
abutter f(^rei6en. 3. 3l&er ba;^ tDiirbe feine abutter
beunru^igen. 4. @r njiirbe ei3 tt)o^l faum tun, tDenn
e^ nic^t notmenbig iDare. 5. |)Stte fein SSater e^ nur
gemu^t, \xivt ber f)ier tear ! 6. SalDot)!, ber junge 2J?ann
iDare bann t)etmgegangen. 7- SBiirben @ie ba§ getan
^aben, tpenn ©ie o.\x jeiner ©telle gett)e[en tDaren?
8. ®ans gett)!^; id) gcibe meinen !(einen finger, iDenn
er mttgereift \mit. 9. 3Surbe ber Slrjt je^t raten, tt)n
{jeim^ufi^iden ? 10. Sefet tnol)! nid)t, aber er ^aiit eg
t)or einer 9Socf)e geraten. n. 3Benn er ntd)t ju fran!
ift, fo !ann er feine 2(ufgabe abfdireiben. 12. 3Iber

146 VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE. MOOD. [Les. XIX.

tDenn er Ijeimgegangeu tuare, jo JDiirbe er bod) gar
nic^t^ jii tun i}abm. 13. @^ tniirbe ti:)of)t kffer fiir
i()n fein, d\va§> ju tun. 14. SBie, tDenn er bicfcn tteinen
53rief in^ S)eut)c^e uOcrfel^te ? 15. Sc^ glaube, ba§ tDiirbe
itjm iDtrftic^e^ SSergniigen nmdjen. 16. 2Benn nur
feine SDhitter f)ier U)dre ! 17. ©ie tuiirbe bie ^pflege beso
Siranfen gleidj ilberne^nien.

Note 31. After the subordinative conjunction the persenal
part of the verb must be at the end of the clause.

Exercise 19.
I. I would read the letter through if I were in
your place. 2. Would you advise me to copy it ?

3. Yes, indeed, if the letter were to ^ my brother.

4. (What) if the man were sick, for ^ example ?

5. Yes, 1 1 2 would 7 certainly g do 3 it ^ in ^ that
6 case. 6. Had I only known that my brother would
not be here ! 7. Your brother would certainly wish
that you read it. 8. The man would himself have
nothing against-it.3 9. I would deliver the letter

^to) my brother's wife if she were in [the] town.

10. But she would know nothing of the matter.

11. I would have given the letter back, had I fore-
seen this. 12. But who would have thought that the
carrier would deliver the letter (to) you ? 13. If it
makes you so uneasy, I advise you to send the letter
back. 14. But what 4 if my brother came this even-
ing } 15. Why, you would have copied the letter.
16. You would simply 5 deliver the copied letter to

Les. XIX.] VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. I47

your brother. 17. Yes, I really believe that would
be the best way. 18. I would give something if I
only knew who the man is.

^an with accusative, ^gum ^eifpieL 3 See Lesson XI,
Note 18. ^rt)lc. ^nur.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bcr S^ajiergattg, the walk, mit^rinrjctt, bring along.

promenade. tatfam, advisable.

ber UBcr^ic^Cr, overcoat. fort, away, gone.

ab^olCtt, call for.

Conversation 18. — Der Spa3tergang.

I. SSiirbert ©ie I)eute gent einen ©pajiergang madjcn?
2. ^atDo^l, ic^ tDiirbe je&r gerne einen fleinen ©^a^ier^
gang ma^en.

I. Urn tt)tet)tel U{)r tDiirben ©ie lieber gef)en?

2. 3^ tt)iirbe lieber um ^(b met ge^en.
I. ®ut, id) ^ole ©ie bann ok ; foC id) ?

2. ^a, feien ©ie fo gut, mic^ ab^u^olen,

I. SBoIIen tt)ir auf ben 93erg t)inaufgef)en, ober iiber
bengiuB?
2. 3c^ ginge lieber iiber ben g^Iu^.

I. SBenn ©ie ni(^t^ bagegen I)aben, fo bringe id) einen
greunb mit.

2. %\xxi ©ie ba^ ja, ic^ Ijabe gar nid^t^ bagegen.
I. 3Ba§ nef)men U)ir mit ?

2. 2(d^, nel^men n)ir nur nid)t Diet mit.

148 VERBS. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. [Les. XIX.

I. SBdrc e^ bod) ni^t ratfam, einen Diegenfcljirm mitju^
iteljmen ?
2. S)a§ ift moglic^ ; ja, S^egenfd^trm unb iXberjieljev
ne^men tt)ir mit.

I. 2Bie lange rt)erben luir fort fein ?

2. $Ric^t fel)r knge, t)ieEeicf)t anbert^alb ©tunben.

I. 2Bann muffen @ie trieber 5U §au[e fein?
2. 3^ ^^^ f^^*^^ w^ ^i^^ 1-^^^ tDieber ba fein.

Etc., etc.

Reading 19.
3lttbrca§ QoUv*

aSon Suliug 3Kofen.

3n Tlanina in Sanben ber trene §ofer tDar,

bonds

Sn SJfantna jnm STobe fii^if i(jn ber geinbe @(^ar;
6^ bintete ber ©ruber §erj, troop

©anj S)eutf(^Ianb, ad), in ®ram unb @cl}mer3 !
3Kit it)m ba^ Sanb 3:t)roI, mit if)m ba^ Sanb Sterol
(Repeat).

J)ie §anbe auf bent ?HMcn Slnbrea^ §ofer ging,
SRit ruf)ig feften ©(^ritten, it)m fcf)ien ber Xob gering ;
3)er Xob, ben er fo ntand^e^ Tlal slight

3Som SfelBerg gefd)idt in^ %al,
Snx I)eirgen Sanb Ztjxoi, im ^eiPgen Sanb Sterol
(Repeat).

S)od^ al^ au^ ^erlergittern im feften SKantua

dungeon-bars walled

S)ie treuen ^Baffenbruber bie §dnb' er ftreden fat),

brothers in arms stretch

Les. XX.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 149

3)a rief er au^ : @ott fet mtt mdj,
Tlit bent liervat'nen beutfcljeit $Reid),

betrayed

Unb mit bem £anb Sterol, unb mit bem Sanb Sterol !
(Repeat).

LESSON XX.

The Modal Auxiliaries, ^onnen and biitfctt.

1. The ** modal auxiliaries " biirfen, fonnen, mogen,
muffen, follen and tnollen, which are of very frequent
occurrence, call for special attention in view of
peculiarities in form and usage.

2. Confusion in the use of the auxiliaries is due
chiefly to the defective forms of these words in
English. Thus, note that m7^st has only present
forms, while in German the forms of miiffen are
complete, as though we could say : " I musted,"
" I shall must," " I have musted." Instead we
must say in English, "I had to,'' "I shall be com-
pelled,'' " I have been obliged."

3. Like Ijelfen, feljen, and a few other verbs (see
Lesson XXVII), the ** modal auxiliaries " do not
take ju before a following infinitive. S(^ !cinrt ba^
tun, '* I can do that." In this respect they do not
differ from the same words in English.

4. Often the verb depending upon them is under-
stood. SBoKen @ie Ijinein ? " Will you (go) in } "
aSa^ tDtll er ? " What does he want (to do) t "

150 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XX.

5* In the compound tenses the infinitive (origin-
ally a participle form of the old conjugation) is used
instead of a participle, when the infinitive of an-
other verb depends upon it. 3)a^^ f)ahc id) nidjt
inn tonnm, "That I have not been able to do."
But, S(^ ^ak e^ gcfonnt, aba nxdji getDollt, '' I was
able, but did not want to do it." This is also true
of a few other verbs, as laffen, fjci^en, f)e(fen, (joren,
feljen, and sometimes tef)ren and lernen.

6. Often one and the same English word is to be
translated by a different auxiliary in German accord-
ing to the meaning. " I can not go " is, Set) tann
nid)t Qtljm, if the meaning is, '' I am unable to go " ;
but ScCj barf ntd)t gef^en, if the meaning is, " I am not
permitted to go " ; while, Set) mag nidjt ge^en means
" I do not care to go."

7« In German the negative modifies the personal
verb. Hence, Set) iniij] e^ nidjt tnn means "I do
not have to do it." " I must (dare) not do it,' 'is
Sdj barf t§ ntdjt tnn. But note the peculiar, Sdj
tvxU nidjt (joffen, "I hope not."

8. The English may often be expressed other-
wise in German than by the "modal auxiliaries."
" He was going to speak " is, @r tnoHte fpredjen, or,
Sr tvax tm Segriffe jn fpredjen. " I do not like him "
is, S(^ niag tijn ntd^t, or, Sc§ fjade i^n nidjt gern. " Let
him go " is @r mag geljen, or Sr geljc. " I can do it "
is Sdj !ann e^ tnn, or Sclj bin im. ©tanbe e^ jn tnn.

Les. XX.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 1 5 I

9. The "causative auxiliary" laffen, *' cause, let,
leave," resembles in its use the "modal auxiliaries,"
and will be treated in connection with them.

10. In the paradigm of the modal auxiliaries that
follows, it will be noticed that the endings of the
Present Indicative are those of the Preterit Indica-
tive of the Old conjugation. Otherwise the verbs
go according to the New conjugation.

11. ^iitfett, fottttett*

^iirfert and fortnen may be considered together
as related by their English equivalents. They both
mean can, may, but in the one case this expresses
permission granted, in the other one's own power.
3)urfen means be permitted or be at liberty (to do a
thing), fomien, be able. The English " I can do it "
is, id) barf e§ tim, if the meaning is, "I am at liberty
to do it," but, id) fann e^ tun, if the meaning is, " I
am able to do it."

12. ^iirfcn*

Siirfen expresses: i,to be permitted; 2./^j'5"/-
^^7^Vjj/ (especially in the subjunctive preterit); 3. need
(with negatives or privatives).

1. 3)arf id) je^t nad) S2)^yx\t gefien, " May I go home
now 1 "

2. G^ biirfte f)eute nod) regnen, "It may yet rain
to-day."

152 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XX.

3. Sd) barf uur rnfen unb er fommt gleid), '*I need
only call and he comes at once."

1. 2)urfen is translated by "may," "can," "be at liberty to,"
" be allowed or permitted to," " is or are to," " must," " need " (the
latter two only with negatives).

2. 3)urfen instead of ntiiffeu is the English " must," when it is
connected with a negative, as " you must not speak loud here."

3. S)urfen instead of tnogen is the English " may," when it is
used to express consent or permission, as " may I borrow your
pen } "

4. 2)urfen in the sense of " need "is to be distinguished from
braud^cn, " use, have need of."

5. !5)urfen is never exactly the English " dare," "risk," which
is iDagcn.

13. ^littttett,

Sonnen expresses: i. ability ; 2, possibility^ phy-
sical or logical.

I. Sc^ fann e^ tun, "I am able to do it.'*
2.®^ fonnte anber^ fomtnen, "it might happen
otherwise." @§ fann leti^t baljin fommen, '*It may
easily come to that." S)a^ !ann ntd)t \ooS)x fein, " that
cannot be true."

3. Instead of foutten, tmfta'nbc fein often represents the English
" can." 3d) bin ntc^t imftanbc, \iOi^ l^eute ju tun, " I can not do
that to-day."

14. In general the preterit (subjunctive) of the
auxiliary in Enghsh followed by the compound
infinitive of the principal verb is rendered into
German by the pluperfect subjunctive (conditional
perfect) of the auxiliary plus the simple infinitive of

Les. XX.]

MODAL AUXILIARIES.

153

the principal verb. Thus " I could have done it "
is Sc^ f)atte e^ tun fonneu (lit., I would have been
able to do it). It is well to remember as a formula :
"might have done," "could have done," "should
have done," all begin in German with (jcitte, while
the characteristic auxiliary comes at the end as in-
finitive.

15. Paradigm of the Modal Auxiliaries, biirfctt and
fijttttett.

Participles.
Infinitives. Present. Preterit.

biirfen, foiincit* (bitrfcnb) (foimcub). geburft, gcfoiuit.

(biirfett), (Uxtntn),

Perfect Infinitives.

geburft ^aben, gefomtt f^ahcxt

Present Indicative. Present Subjunctive.

s. I. barf

2. barfft

3. barf

fann

fannft

fann

biirfe

biirfeft

biirfe

fiinne

fiinneft

fiinne

P. I. biirfen

2. biirft

3. biirfen

fiinnen

fiinnt

f^nnen

biirfen
biirfet
biirfen

fiJnnen
fonnet
fiinnen

Indicative.

Preterit.

Subjunctive.

bnrfte fonnte

biirfte

fijnnte

Perfect Indicative.

id) ^abe gebttrft (biirfen), gefonnt (fiinnen)*

Perfect Subjunctive.

id) fjaht gebnrft (biirfen), id) fjaht gcfonnt (fiinnen)*
bn^abcft " " hnf)ahc^t " "

Etc, Etc,

154 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XX.

Pluperfect Indicative.

i^ f^aitt (jeburft (biirfeit), gefonut (fiinnctt).

Pluperfect Subjunctive.

i(^ fiattt gebiirft (biirfett), gefonnt (fonnctt)*

Future Indicative.

i^ tuerbc bilrfeu, fiimieu.

Future Subjunctive.

iti) tuerbe biirfeu, Unntn*
btt ttjcrbeft biirfcn, fijimen*

Future Perfect Indicative.

tc^ tticrbc geburft (bitrfen) f^aUxtf gefomit (fijuttcit) f^ahtn.

Future Perfect Subjunctive.

trf) mcrbc gcburft (bilrfeu), (^tUnnt (Ummt) i)aUn.
btttticrbcft " " " " "

Conditional.

i^ tuilrbc bilrfcii, Bnntn.
(biirfte, fottntc.)

Conditional Perfect.

irf| milrbe geburft, gcfount ^abtn,
mtU ♦ ♦ ♦ biivfeu, . . . Ummx).

Vocabulary.
MASCULINE. ^itteiltge^CU, £0 m, atter.

bcr SibltOt^ef at*', the librarian. raU(i^ett, smoke.
b:r gni^rer, the guide. ^^xWitw, forbid.

ertauBcU, permit,

FEMININE. ^ w(. r 7^

plfen, ^<?^.
bic »i6U0tI)ef', the library. j,„iirffommen, ../«. *«./•, «.

NEUTER. turn.

bo§ ©ebiiube, ^/^^ building. ttjartcii auf (ace), wait for.

irf| faun nirf)t§ baf ilr, / cannot help it.

id) faun tttd|t um^in (511), / cannot help (with pr. part.)

argcrlid^, angry.

Les. XX.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 155

Exercise XX.

I. Stonnen @ie mtr einige Don bic[eu 83Mjern kitjm ?
2. ©^ tut mir leib, abcr id) barf ha^^^ nidjt tun. 3. ®!^
ift t)er6oteu, bie 93udjer au^ bem ©cBiiube 5U fdjideu.
4. ?lf)er @ie biirfeu [te ja ()ier Ie[eu. 5- 9^uu ja, id) !aun
bod^ ntd^t alle ' Sage fommeu. 6. a)?eiu 95ater I)dttc
bic 93ud)er fc^ou 2- laufeu !ouneu. 7- 3)?ciue greunbe
ineiuen, fie ^abejt fd)ou3 {)ier bie 93ud)er geuug lefeu
fonnen. 8. ©iirfte i^ uur bie 93ud)er dtva§ ual)er an-
fe^en ? 9. Slc^ ja, ba^ t^erbeu @ie fd)on bitrfen.
10. TO an tt)irb in einer ©tunbe fo 4 ein f leine^ 99ud) lefen
fonnen. n. Sd) tuiirbe beffer fef)en fonnen, iDenn icf)
f)ineingef)en biirfte. 12. S)a§ bitrfen @ie ja ; @ie
fatten e^ gleic^ am 9lnfang tun biirfen. 13. Sc§ fonnte
ju §aufe aber Diet ruf)iger lefen. 14. 3<i^ faun ein fiir
atlemal nid^tg bafitr. 15. Sd) barf fein einjige^ 93u(^
au§ ber Sibliot^ef fd^iden. 16. Sd) fonnte hm Siblio^
t^efar nii^t betDegen. 17. S(^ glaube aber, ii) f)dtte e§
tun fonnen. 18. £)a^ fann n:)oI)t fein.

^atle S^Cige, or jeben ^ag. ^ of course, anyway. ^ right, even.
* fo ein !(eine§ 33uc^, « //V//d? ^^c?/^ like this. \o\6) ein !(cine8, such
a little.

Exercise 20.

I. Can you tell me where the librarian is.?
2. jThat 3I ^can : you need only go through the
door yonder. 3. But you must not smoke in the
library. 4. Can it be that smoking is forbidden ?

156 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XX.

5. ^It ^certainly ^can ^[that] ; you might have known
that. 6. Could we go in where the books are?

7. You will be permitted to do that with a guide.

8. You can wait for him here. 9. I might have
gone into the library if I had not been-smoking.
10. Some friends of ours were permitted (to) yester
day. II. But yesterday was a free day. 12. Every-
body was permitted to go in yesterday. 13. Can
you not permit me to take a book.? 14. I might
have read a whole book in this half hour. 15. You
will be able to do that when you come back.
16. Were you able to find the librarian ? 17. No,
the guide has not been able to find him. 18. Then
we shall not be permitted to see the books. 19. I
cannot help being angry.

(Introduce the particle ja into the above sentences wherever
possible and note the effect. See what changes can be made in
the English sentences to express this alteration. This can be
done only with the aid of the teacher in the class.)

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bte Wxtfjtf trouble, pains. f ^t^eit, sharpen.

ticrlci^cn, lend. Bcfd^mu^cn, soil.

Conversation 19. — ITTeffer unb Bleiftift,

I. SSer !ann mtr ein gebermeffer Ieil)en ?

2. ^c^ !ann ^l^nen etn^ letfjen.

I. §a6en ®te mit biefem 9)?effercf)en fd)neiben fi)nnen?

3. ^ah)o{;I, icf) {^abe red^t gut bamit fc^neibm fonnen.

Les. XX.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 157

I. S)arf x6) biefej^ SDfcffer mit nad) §au)e nei)men?
2. ®§ tut mir leib, a&er id; barf mein 3}{efferd^en nid^t
toerlei^en.
I. Sonnten @ie felber ben ®(eiftift fiir mid) fpitjen?

2. Sag fonnen (5ie mir gan§ ru^ig iiberlaffen.
I. Siirfte tc^ ©ie tpieber 6emuf)en, nod^ einen Sleiftift
Sufpilert?
2. @^ ift gar leine 3!Jlu^e ; barf id^ bamit an bie 2^ure
ge^en ?

I. S)a^ burfett @ie QtW\% @ie ptten 3f)ren Xx\i^
bamit befi^mu^en fonnen, nic^t tvaljx ?
2. ^a, unb id) ^dtte mir au(^ bie g^inger bef(f)mu^en
fonnen.
I. 3Bie fpdt it)irb e^ tnot)! fein?

2. ©^ fann fc^on fed^^ U^r fein. Etc., etc.

Reading 20.

©ed^^ SBortlein ne{)men ' mid^ in ' Slnf^^ru^ ^ jeben SCag :
^d) foil, id^ mu^, ic^ iann, id) tt)itt, ic^ barf, id^ ma^.
'^d) foil ift bag ®efe|, i:)on ©ott in§ ^erj gefd^rieben,
S)a§ 3i^l/^ ^^^ tDetc^em id^ bin t)on mir felbft getrieben.
3d^ mn^, bag ift bie ©d^ran!',^ in tt)eld^er mic^ bie SBelt
9Son einer, bie S^atur t)on anb'rer ©eite ^alt.
3d^ fann, bag ift bag 5!Ka^^ ber mir t)erliel)'nen ^raft,
®er 3:at, ber 3^ertigfeit,5 ber ^nnft^ unb 2Biffenfc^aft.7
'^d) tDilt, bie I)oc^fte ^ron' ift biefeg, bie mic^ fc^miidft/
2)ag ift ber ^xti^dt ©iegel,^ bem ©eifte '° aufgebriid^t,"

158 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XXI.

3d; barf, bag t[t ^ugleiif) '^ bie 3nfc{)rift '3 bei bem ©iegel,
Sei'm aufgetanen S'or ber g^rei^eit aud^ ein Stiegel.'^
Qrf) mag, bag enblic^ ift, tt)ag ^txjifc^en alien fd^iDimmt,
©in llnbeftimmteg,'^ bag ber Stugenblicf beftimmt.
3(^ foH, td^ ntu^, id^ fann, id) tt)i(I, ic^ barf, x6) maQ,
3)ie Serf)fe nef)men mid^ in 2lnf^ru(^ jeben 3:^ag.
5Rur Wmn 2)u '^ felbft mic^ Iel)rft, mei^ id^, lt)ag jeben 3:ag
Qd^ fott, ic^ mu^, id^ fann, ic^ tt)iff, id^ barf, id^ mag.

9fi u ct e r t.
^ claim. ^goal. ^ barrier. * measure. ■^ dexterity. ''art.
^science, ^adorns, ^geal. ^°mind. "impressed, "at the
same time. ^^inscription. ^*bolt. ^^ something indefinite.
»6Thou(0 God).

LESSON XXI.

Modal Auxiliaries: ^ogen^ modem

I. 5D?ogen and tDoIIen may be considered together
as being related in their fundamental significations.
The former means liking, desire, concession by the
speaker ; the latter, will or inclination. Sometimes
it is indifferent whether mogen or tuolleu be used, as
er tt)oIIte (or modjtcj nidjt Idnger 6let6en, He did not
wish (or care) to remain longer.

2. WH^^x.

3}Ji39en expresses : i . liking, taste, desire ; 2 .
possibility ; '^. pe7'mission, concession or i?tdiffeimce
on the part of the speaker ; 4. substitute for simple
subjunctive.

Les. XXI.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 1 59

1. Sc^ mag t^n nid^t [tetben], '' I do not like him."
@r moc^te tmmer gro^artig erfd)einen, " He is always
wanting to appear big." Wo6)itn ©ie "^a^^ ? " Would
you like (to have) that 1 "

2. S)a^ mag tt)a^r jein, "That may be true."

3. Sr mag gel)en, " He may go, let him go." S)co(^te
btc gange SBett un^ ^i3ren, '* Would that the whole
world might hear us." S)u magft ha^ 93ud) k^atten,
" You may keep the book."

4. Sd) befiirdjtete, ba^ er ge^en mod)te (or ginge), /
feared that he might go,

3BolIen expresses : i . willingness^ wish, choice ,
determifiation ; 2. impending action ; 3. claim.

1. Sc^ rt)t(l e^ ja gerne tun, *'I will gladly do it."
Sc^ tt)ill e^ fo f)aben, " I am determined to have it so."
3d^ tDilI»!ein S3rot, " I do not wish any bread."

2. @^ tt)tll regnen, " It is on the point of raining."
@r tt)ill ge^en, and especially with ekn, ' just,' @r tt)if[
ekn gef)en, "He starts to go," "is about to go,"
"is just going."

3. Sr tDiH bid) gefel^en ^aben, "He claims to have
seen you."

As equivalent of meaning 2, the phrase im 35egrtff
fein is often used, (£r ift imSegrtff 311 geljcit, " He is
on the point of going."

i6o

MODAL AUXILIARIES.

[Les. XXL

Paradigm of tyoHen and mogeil*
Participles.

Infinitives.

Present. •

Past.

mijgctt, tooUtxu

(miigcttb,

ttJoKcttb). gcmori^t, gcttioilt,

(1

tniigctt), (mottctt).

Perfect Infinitives.

gentof^t f^ahtn, gemollt ^aBen.

Present Indicative.

Present

Subjunctive.

S. I. mag

ttiitt

ittijgc

ttioKc

2. magft

ttJittft

mijgcft

ttiofleft

3- mag

tniK

mijge

ttioKe

P. I. tttiigcit

tuotteit

ntogeu

mottcn

2. mijgt

nioHt

moget

mottet

3. tttogcn

tnottctt

ntijgen

mottcit

Imperative,
ttiottc, {be pleased to).

Preterit Indicative. Subjunctive.

ntoti^tc, ttioKte. miirfitc, itiottte»

Perfect Indicative.

i(^ ^Be gcmoriftt (— miigctt), getuofit (— mottett),
btt^aft " '' " "

Etc.
Perfect Subjunctive.

t^ ^abc gcmo(i^t (— mogen), gemottt (— ttujUcn),
bttliabcft " " " "

Pluperfect Indicative.

\6) pttc gcmorf|t (— miJgett), gctuofit (— motten).

Future Indicative. Subjunctive.

i(^ iDcrbc mijgctt, mottcn, tucrbe ittiJgcit, tuottcn,

btt mirft " " ttjctbcft " "

Future Perfect Indicative.

t^ ttjcrbe gemoc^t, getuottt ^abem
bumirft " " "

Etc.

Les. XXL]

MODAL AUXILIARIES.

l6l

Future Perfect Subjunctive.

idj ttjcrbe gcmoc^t, gcttioUt ^aBcn,
btttticrbeft " " "

Etc.
Conditional.

i^ ttiittrbe mogcn, moHem
(miidjtc), (ttioHtc)*
Etc.
Perfect Conditional.

ifii ttiiirbe gemor^t, gcttJoUt i^ahtn.
rtiittc — mogett, tuoUcnO

Etc.

MASCULINE.

bcr ^xatcn, roast.

bcr ^MtXf baker.

bcr Jy^iKMlWCrfcr, gourmand.

bcr tenner, 7«^^<?, ^x/^r/.

bcr ^amcrab, comrade.
bcr ^Jlati^ttfd), dessert.
bcr ^um^critttfcl, (a kind of
black bread.)

FEMININE.

bic Su))^C, soup^ broth.

\s^^ ©c^tnarjbrot, <^/^^>^' <^r^«^

usually rye-bread.
b(l)§ (^cbdtf, baker's wares.

bai^ ^a(ftt)crf, <5r^^^, r^z/j, <:«/^^,

pies.

Vocabulary.

auftragctt, j^^r^<?.

l^CrcitCU, prepare.

gcttcn f iir, /^J-j/c^r, ^<r regarded

as.
Cr^cbCtt, raise.
I^CIfCtt, /5^//.
(flffcit, have^ cause.
rauBctt, deprive (person in

dative, thing in accusative).
rCtd^Ctt, pass, hand.

ftimmctt, vote.

trattti^icrctt (pr. tranfd)ieren),

carve.

ticrfuri^ctt, try.

tJCrfaumCtt, neglect, lose (by

neglect).
i(^ miirf)tc gcrtt, / should like.
\^ mijti^tc HcBcr, / should

prefer.
mag . ♦ . Ott(i^, -whatever.
ItOt^l citt, another, one more.

l62 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XXI.

nod) t)OU, more of. CtlbUt^, at last

l^Ci^, hot. ^ituftlic^, prompt.

td)tf genuine. gtcmltrf), tolerably, moderately.,

gar, well done. pretty.

bringCttb, urgent. ttar!)I)et, hereafter.

Exercise XXI.

I. 9BoI(cn @te fo ' gut ' fein, tnir ba^ 33rot ju retd}en ?

2. 5D?odjten @ie lieder SBeiprot obcr SdjtDarjbrot ?

3. Sd) tptll ba^ ©djiDarjbrot nodj einmal Uerjuc^en.

4. Sd} mag bie f)et§en 83rdtdjen nii^t. 5. Sd) tDoIlte,
JDtr {onnten t)on bem ed)ten beutfc^en ^umpermdel ^tc
fommen. 6. 3)a^ f)abe ic^ and) oft getDoIIt. 7. fatten
©ie aber barum nad) ber ©tabt gdjcn iDoden ? 8. 9}?ein
Samerab iDill eben nad^ ber ^i^xi^i reijen. 9- ©t: fi3nnte
im^ alfo beutfc^e^ %^'i^^ ftrtngen, iDcnn er bie ®ute
fjaben tDotlte. 10. Sa, unb er iDill in SadtDer! ein Senner
fein. II. (£r modjte fiir einen gemfdjmeder gelten, nidjt
li:)af)r ? 12. SBoIIen ©ie noi^ Don bem Sraten ? 13. Sdj
modjte nod^ ein bi^djen Don bem gar gefoc^ten, inenn
i4 bitten barf. 14. SBoIIen tnir je^t ben 9?adjttfd) anf^
ttagen laffen ? 15. ©eien ©ie fo gnt, benn ic^ iniU
gleid) nad^ SEifc^ anf bie Unioerfittit.^ 16. 9Sa^ mag
e^ bort fo S)ringenbe§ geben? 17. 3)a^ mMjtes idj
felbft gem iniffen. 18. 9^nn, id) tnid bod) meinen 9^ad)^
tifd) nid)t Derfdnmen, tna^ eso and) fein mag.

^ As before the following infinitive is not used in German.
^ supply geljeu, not needed in German. ^ Here tX)oUte would have
about the same shade of meaning.

Les. XXL] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 163

Exercise 21.
I. There you are at last ; we were just about to
sit down to (the) table. 2. I will be more prompt
hereafter. 3. But I wanted to finish my work.
4. Who cares-for ^ more ^ of the soup } 5. I would
like ^a ^little ^morej^- if you please. 6. I have often
wanted to ask how they (man) prepare this soup.

7. Well, I do 3 not care-for 3 [the] soups, anyway.

8. Let us have the roast served ! 4 9. Who will be
willing to carve the roast ? 10. I would have liked
to do it, but I would not wish to deprive you of the
pleasure, n. How would you like your roast, pretty
well-done 1 12. I would prefer it moderately well-
done, if you please. 13. Will (would) you be so kind
as to pass me the bread } 14. Will you have the
white bread or the black bread? 15. I would have
liked to try the black bread, but it is all 5 (gone).
16. This gentleman claims to have seen pumper-
nickel at the baker's. 17. Who may he ^ be then?
18. Whoever he may be, we should like to have the
pumpernickel, shouldn't we ? 7 19. ^Whoever ^wishes
(to) 3 vote 2for-it,8 let-him-raise 9 his hand.

^mbd^te. ^no(^. ^mag. ^infinitive, ^atte. ^ber, ^ nirfjt
tna^r. ® bafiir, ^ subjunctive.

Vocabulary.

bic SOlittUte, minute. BtttCtt (um), ask {for).

In ) ♦ ♦ ♦ ^ttt ? where, whither frcKtti^, indeed, to be sure,

{go implied) WWitX^Xt^UX^ interrupt.
ittier^au^t, anyway, in general.

164 MODAL AUXILtARiES. [Les. XXI.

Conversation 20.

I. Tlo6)tm @te gern ein @ta^ 3Baffer ?
2. 3a, ic^ mod^te e§ fe^r gern.

I. aSoIIen @te nii^t Iteber eine Saffe ^affee ?

2. 3^ ^^^^^ ; irf) ^^K K^'^^^ SBaffer.
I. 9JJ6gen @ie benn biefen ^affee nxdjt ?

2. 3^ ^^^9 ben ^affee uberl^au^^t nic^t.
I. SBa^ ^aben ©ie t)or einer SKinute fagen tvolkn,

2. ^d^ ^abe nid^t^ 33efonbere§ fagen li:)oHen.
I. SSoHten @ie nt(^t urn me^r 93rot bitten ?

2. g^reilic^ \a, aber id^ moc^te nic^t unterbred^en.
I. SSoIIen tt)ir ntd^t glet^ ben 9^ac^tifc^ anftragen laffen ?

2. ^a, tt)Dl(en \m ba§ tun !
I. SBer mag benn ba^ fetn, bort am @nbe be^ Sttfd^e^ ?

2. @§ mag tt)of)I ein S3e!annter t>on mir fein.
I. SBill er mid) fennen?

2. 3a, mein §err, er ix)itt ©ie in ©nglanb gelannt

I. 3So tDoIIen @ie tbm I)tn?
2. 3^ tt)oIIte ^eimge^en.

Etc., etc.
Reading 21.

Departure
9laci^ ^crbinanb JRaim'unb.

So leb' benn Woljl, bn [titled §au^!
3^ jie^' betrixbt t)on bir Ijinan^:

go in grief

Les. XXII]. MODAL AUXILIARIES. t6$

©0 kV benn iDoIjI, benn ic^ mu§ fort,
9io(^ ntd)t 6e[ttmmt an iDcId^en Drt,

determined

©0 lebt benn tt)of)I, i^r grennbe, if)r!
Scf) 3ie[)e tranrig fort Hon I)ier;

sadly

llnb finb' id^ einft ein grof^'re^ ®(nc!,

sometime

@o bent' xdj gern an end) jnrnA

®o kV benn tooljl, bn 3}MbcI)en mein!
©oil td^ t)on bir gefdjieben fetn,

parted

©0 reic^e mir bie liebe ^anb,

give

S)ann fdjlie^en toir ba^ grennbfd)aft^banb.

form friendship's-tie

LESSON XXII.
Modal Auxiliaries: SOiiiffett, foHett.

I. SKiiffen expresses compulsion, necessity from
circumstances; foUen, moral obligation, constraint
from the will of others.

SJciiffen expresses : i . outward obligation ; 2. phy-
sical necessity ; 3 . logical necessity.

I. 3d) mn^ baran benfen, ''I have to think of it,"
** cannot help thinking of it."

1 66 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XXll.

2. §eute miij] bte ®loc!c tDerben, "To-day the bell
must come into being"; 3tlle 5D2enjd)en muff en fter^
6en, "All men must die." S)iefer 9)tann mu^, fterben,
"This man must die" (it cannot be prevented);
while, Stefer Ttann foil fterben means " This man is
to die " (is condemned to die).

3. Sr mu§ inel]r frifcfje Suft fdjopfen, tvmn er gefunb
bteiben Wxii, "He must breathe more fresh air if he
wants to remain well." Sa^ mufs fein, "That must
be."

Remark. — As the past tenses of '* must " are no longer used
in English, the past tenses of niiiffeil are to be translated by " had
to," "was obliged or compelled to," "could not but " or ''help."

3. Sofiett,

©oHen expresses : i. mtention (by some one
else than the subject) ; 2. futurity^ impending
action ; 3. moral obligation (in preterit and plu-
perfect Subjunctive forms only); 4. report ^ claim.

1. S)u foUft ®ott Itebeu, " Thou shalt love God " ;
5Ba^ foil ic^ Ijier tt)ol)t l)6ren ? " What am I (intended)
to hear here }

2. ©ollte er nod) fommen, fag^ it)m biefe^, " If he
should still come, tell him this." @^ foil batb ge^
fctjel)en, " It is to happen soon."

3. Sdj follte e^ tun, "I ought to do it;'' ®§
f)atte vS&)i fo fetn follen, " It ought not to have been
so."

Les. XXII.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. \6j

4. Ser ^aifer foil ^ier getDcfen fetn, " The emperor
is said to have been here."

4. Paradigm of miiffctt and fulleit*

Infinitives. Participles,

miiffctt, fottCtt. Present. Perfect.

(tttttffcttb, fottettb)* gcttttt^t, gcfuttt,
(tttuffett),(fottctt)*

Perfect Infinitives.

getttu^t iftaBctt, gcfoKt ^afictt.

Present Indicative.

Present Subjunctive.

S. I. tttttg

full

tttiiffe folic

2. ttttt^t

f^W

ttttlffcft foHcft

3. ttttti

fun

tttttffc f oHc

P. I. tttttjfctt

follett

tititffctt follctt

2. tttit^t

font

tttitffct foUct

3. tititffctt

ffjllCtt

tititffctt foUcn

Preterit Indicative.

Subjunctive.

ttttt^te,

, folltc

tttttgtc, foUte

Perfect Indicative.

t^ ^abc gcmugt (— miiffctt), gcfullt ( foHctt)
btt^aft " " " "

Perfect Subjunctive.

ir^ ^aBc gcmugt (— miiffctt), gcfollt (— foUctt)
bu^abc^ " " ** "

Pluperfect Indicative.

ir^ ^attc gcmugt (— miiffctt), gcfollt (— follctt)

Pluperfect Subjunctive.

ie^ ^atte gcmuftt (- mitffcu)^ gcfuHt (— foactt)

l68 MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XXIIo

Future Indicative. Subjunctive.

i^ ivcvt>t miiffett, foKen tDcrbc tniiffcn, foUcu

buttJirft " " ttietrbeft " "

Etc., etc.
Future Perfect Indicative.

t^ tticrbc gcmu^t, gcfottt ^aBeit
buttJtrft " " " etc.

Future Perfect Subjunctive.

i(i} ttjcrbc gemu^t, gefottt (jaBcii
bu tticrbeft " " " etc.

Conditional.

xtij tuiirbe miiffcti, fottcit, etc
(mu^tc) (foUtc)

Perfect Conditional.

t^ ttiitrbc geitttt^t, gcfottt ^aBcn
(^atte— miiffcn, — foUen) etc.

Vocabulary.

bcr dtoman'f novel, ^iltcu, >^^<;>, >^<?^/ to.

bcr 3ttJeifel, ^^«(5/. tuartett (auf), w^^v (/^r).

bic 3uJunft, future. tjerbtenCttp <?^r//, deserve.

blc 5(rBctt, w^r/^. B elicit, /^/«/«^.

ba)§ Strafgclb, fine. OCfuC^t, sought for.

aufprctt, <:^^j^. f^dtcftett)^, ^/ //^<? /cz/^j^/.

be^a^lctt, pay. luetttgftctt!^, ^/ /<?^zj/.

Begreifctt, comprehend. \^m bcja^lctt, /^JI^ ^^J/^.

?iUrUCftragett, return. gcrabe, precisely.

gefte^en, confess. noc^ bagu, b^^^djis.

Les. XXII.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. 169

Exercise XXIL

I. aSag foHen mx ijcnk S^ac^mtttag tun ? 2. 2BoIIen
toir mcf)t ben neuen 3toman lefen ? 3- SIcI) ja, benn tvxx
miiffen benfetben morgen • juriidtragen. 4- 2Bir fatten
ba^ fc^on geftern tun [ollen. 5. Sd) mufe gejteljen, tc^
!ann ha^ nid^t begreifen. 6. S)a^ Sucf) foil ]ef)r bdiebt
unb gefud^t fein. 7. Sc^ t)abe jiDci 9Bod)en barauf hearten
miiffen. 8. Wn^ man nic^t ein ©trafgelb kjatjlen, tt)enn
man ein S5uc^ ju tange bdjixlt ? 9. Of)ne S^^if^r ^^^
iDtr irerben auc^ 9Bort Ijalten miiffen. 10. 9^un, \v\x
follten e^ fpateften^ morgen friit) juriidtragen. n. 2Ber
foil f)eute t)orIefen? 12. 2)ie 5D?arie ()at e^ tun foUen,
aber fie mu^ ha^ 3^^^^^' yaitn. 13. ©ie foE boi^ red^t
franf fein. 14. @o mu^ ber nac^fte befte ' lefen. 15. S)er
neue ©c^iiler fjatte e^ tun miiffen, iDenn er f)ier mcire.
16. (£r mufe ba^ getoufet I)aben. 17. @r miifete in bie
3ufunft fet)en fonnen. 18. (£r foK toenigften^ morgen
lefen miiffen. 19. SBir tt)erben je^t fc^on auf^oren miiffen.

^ ' the most available person,' ' some one else.'

Exercise 22.

I. You will be obliged to copy your exercise this
afternoon. 2. ^Not^I; I would indeed have had
to do it, ,if J ghad jnot ^already gcopied ^mine
^this ^tnorning. 3. My comrade must work at-it
the whole afternoon. 4. At least, he must if he is
to finish his lesson. 5. I know, he is said to be a
very diligent pupil. 6. You ought to have heard

I/O MODAL AUXILIARIES. [Les. XXII

him to-day in the class. 7. He must have been
very diligent [in order] to earn such praise. 8. Shall
I help you with your copying ? 9. No, thank you,
we are to do all the work ourselves. 10. Many a
student has had to work at -it three whole hours.
II. You ought to be thankful that you do not have
to do it. 12. We are to begin a new book next
week. 13. Do you all have to buy the book ? 14. I
have mine already; J ^had-to ^pay ^cash (for) ^iVy
^however. 15. It was to cost precisely $2, but we
are obliged to pay ^2.25. 16. It must have cost
more than the merchant expected. 17. He ,is-said
(to) ^have ^lost jmoney ^on-them ^besides.

^ accusative without preposition.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bic ^cbttlb, patie7ice. baucrit, last.

Crfr^cittCtl, appear. aUctbtltg^, indeed, to he sure.

cittftcigCtt, get aboard. blp^, merely.

tiorbetgc^cn, /^jj. P S^fec, on foot.

^alteti, stop, ber XramttJagctt, street-car.

Conversation 21.— Dcr (Erammagcn.

I. 2Bie lange foUte mart I)ter tDarten muff en ?

2. "^(xw. fottte tt)o{)l gar nid^t tt)arten miiffen.
I. ^oS^txi @te geftern lange tDarten miiffen ?

2. ^a, tc^ mu^te geftern etne l^albe (Stunbe tparten*
I, 3)can mu^ alfo bto^^ ©ebulb f)a6en?

g, ^a§ mu^ man atterbing^,

Les. XXII.] MODAL AUXILIARIES. I /I

I. 3i5ie oft foil bcr SBagen "^ter l3ort)eigeI)en?

2. 3tl(e 15 S^inuten foil ein 2Sagen t)orbetge^en.
I. ©0 1:)atk ber SBagen feine Ijdbe ©tunbe fpiit fein
follen?
2. @en)i|3 nid)t ; ber 2Bagen !^dtte fc£)on toor 10 ^Qiinuten
l)ter fein follen.

I. G*^ loirb Uiof)I ettuai^ gefc^el^en fein, nieinen @ie nidjt?

2. 2ltterbing§, e§ mnfs etit)a§ gefrf)ef)en fein.
I. 3Bai§ follen tntr benn nmcljen ?

2. 28er e^ !ann, foH nur gu g^u^e geJien.

I. SBie tDeit ntiifste man jn gn^e gefjen?

2. Man mii^te tt)of)l anbertfjalb SKeiten laufen.
I . Unb tvkf wmn ein 9Bagen gteic^ fommen f oKte ?

2. 2)a mii^ten tt)ir nur ben 3Bagen ^alUn (affen unb
etnfteigen.

I. 9ii(^t tnaljr, t^ foUte nidjt me{)r lange banern?
2. Jlein ; eg fottte ein 2Bagen fogleic^ erfi^einen.

Etc., etc.

Reading 22.
^ic Huge Wlan§.

6ine SKau^ lam ' au^ i^rem Sod^e unb fa^ ^ eine ^atte.
„2lf?a/' fagte fie, „ba fte^t eine goalie ! ®ie flugen 9)Jenfc^en!
ba fteHen3 fie mit brei §o[3(f)en einen fc^tDeren 3i^9^^tein
aufrec^t,3 unb an eine^^ ber ^otjc^en ftecf en fie ein ©tu(f(f)en
Bpti. ®a§ nennen fie bann eine 5iJ{dufefaHe ! ^a, \io^nn
mir TOdu^c^en nid^t fliiger tt)dren ! SBir miffen iDO^I, \vznn
m^n i?^n @^erf freffen wiii,^ tlapif^ ! fftdt^ ber 3iegelftein

172 VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. [Les. XXIII.

i)erunter^ unb fc^Idgt^ ben 3?dfd^er tot, 7 3^ein, nein ! id^
fenne eure Sift !"

,Mbcx/' ful^r ba§ 5!Jldu§ci^en fort,^ „ried^en barf^ man
fd^on '° baran» 3Som blofeen 9liec£)en f ann bie g^aHe nid^t
juf alien, unb ic^ riec^e ben Qp^d bod^" fiir mein Seben
gern,'^ ©in bi^d^en ried^en mu^ id) bar an.''

6§ lief '3 unter bie g^aKe unb rodf) '^ an bem ©^)edfe. 2)ie
g^alfe aber tDar ganj lofe geftettt, unb faum beruf)rte ee
mit bem Jld^d^en '5 ben ©))edf, tlapp§> I fo fiel '^ fie jufam^
men/^ unb ba§ liifterne SDldu^d^en n)ar gerquetfc^t.

® r i m m.
^fottimen» ^fe^en. ^ aufred^t^tetlen, set-up. -^on eineg, on
one. Ms about to. ^ ^eruuter=fal(en. ^ tot'f(^(agen, kill, ^ful^r
fort, continued ; from fort'fal^ren. ^ biirfen* ^° at least. " I tell
you, you must know, surely. ^^ fiir meiu !t?e6en gem, as dearly as
I love my life, ^^jjiuf^^^ ^'♦riec^en. ^Mittlenose. ^<' jufam'men^
fatten.

LESSON XXIII.

Verbs. — Passive Voice.

1. In German the passive voice of a transitive
verb is formed by the union of the auxiUary tDcrben
with its past participle.

2. This is, properly speaking, no new conjuga-
tion, and the following paradigm will explain itself.
It will be noticed that the participle getDOrben loses
its prefix ge- in the compound tenses.

3« Conjugation of IteBett in the Passive Voice.
Present.

tri^ ttjcrbc gcIicBt, I am loved.

Preterit.

\i^ totttbe (tt»arb) gelicbt, / was loved.

Les. XXIII]. VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. 1/3

Perfect.
itil tin geUedt ttJOrben, / /lave been loved.

Pluperfect,
left tuar gelicBt ttJOrbett, / had been loved.

Future,
icift tt»etbC gcUcit ttJCrbeit, / shall be loved.

Future Perfect,
iljft tUCrbC gcHcfit ttJOrbCtt fcilt, / shall have been loved.

Imperative.
ttlCrbC i^tsVi) CJcUeBt, be {thou) loved.

ttjcrbct (iftr) gclicbt, ^^ (jj/^) /^^^.

Infinitives.

gdteBt wcrbctt, ^^ ^«? /^z/^^/.

geliebt morbcn feiu, ^^ /^«^<f been loved.

Participle.
gCliebt ttlCrbCttb, being loved.

4. In German, the passive of man baut 't)a^ §au^
is, ba^ >^au^ tt)irb gebaut, "the house is (in the pro-
cess of) being built." !5)a^ §au^ ijtgebaut, "the
house is built," i. q. finished, is not the true passive,
but indicates the condition resulting from the pro-
cess, the tft being a copula, and gebaut a participial
adjective in the predicate. The form with toerbett
always expresses or implies a state of being acted
upon by an agent in the tense indicated, but the
form with fettt never does.

5« The absence of a distinctive auxiliary for the
passive voice in English causes ambiguity which

174 VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. [Les. XXIII.

cannot arise in German. " The city was destroyed "
may mean "They destroyed the city" (5)te @tabt
tDitrbe jerftort) or **The city was already destroyed,"
i. e. "had been destroyed some time before" (5)ie
Stabt tvax jerftort). " Where is the book printed ? "
is true passive (3Bo tDtrb ba^ Suc^ gebrudt ?) " The
book is already printed" expresses merely a state
(3)a§ 95ud) ift fd^on gebrudt).

6. In German, therefore, the true passive is
always recognizable, and the only caution needed is,
to render it into unambiguous English. But in
rendering English into German, the student must
learn first to test and recognize the true passive.
The following are the tests : i. If the EngUsh is in
the progressive form, "The house is being built"
(or "is building"); 2. If the agent is expressed,
"The city was destroyed by the Romans"; 3. If
the sentence under scrutiny when turned into an
equivalent sentence in the active voice retains the
same tense, " The city was destroyed " = " They
destroyed the city," is true passive, S)ie ©tabt tDiirbe
jerftort; but "The city was destroyed" = "They
had destroyed the city " is quasi-passive, S)te ©tabt
tDar jerftort.

7- The passive voice of intransitive verbs is often
used impersonally in German where the English
uses an indefinite expression with the verbal noun,
llnb f)eute 9iac^t tnirb Ijod) gefc^ttjelgt ju ^iifenactit,

Les. XXIIl]. VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. I75

''There will be high revelling to-night at Kiiss-
nacht " ; §ier tvxxb ntdjt geraudjt, " No smoking here."

8. The passive voice is less frequently used in
German than in English. It is replaced, as in the
French, by other expressions, especially the two
following : —

1. Form with man: 9Wan i)at ben ©djliiffel gefnnben,
"They have found the key."

2. The reflexive form : ©er ©dCjIiiffet I)at fid) ge^
fnnben, "The key has been found."

9. For the English passive infinitive German
uses after fein, fid) laffen, 6lei(ien, [teljen and fdjeinen,
the form of the active infinitive, as 2Sa^ ift ju tun ?
" W/iat is to be done ? " ^a^^ Iti^t fid) ben!en, " That
can be imagined" (lit. "lets itself be thought").

Vocabulary.

bcr San, th^ ball. JtCfern, deliver.

bet ^^aftor, the pastor. crmartcti, expect.

bcr ©ciftUti^C (adj. subst.), the aclcibiot, offended,

clergy 7nan. tloU^ic^lCtt, perform.

ber Xcttor', />^-f tenor. tierictrtttct, /«^rr/V^.

bcr|)Ctr, the gentleman. tttt^roffCtt, omit.

bic ^ori^aett, ^>^^ wedding (fes- au^brurfcit, ^jr/r^jj-.

tivity). erft, «^/ . . . ////.

bic XraUttttg, the 7narriage f(j„^^ scarcely.

(ceremony). fufiletr^, r^;^/// ^7£/^^.

bic a3rattt, the bride (engaged attbct^, differently,

^^^i)' luftig, merry.

anne^men, assume.

176 VERBS. PASSIVE VOICE. [Les. XXIIL

Exercise XXIII.

1. 9Btr ftnb ju ber §otf)5eit eingdaben tDorben. 2. SSon
iDcm ttjurben ©ie bemt eingdaben? 3. 3)ie (Sinlabung
tvmbt un§ t)on ber Srant gefd)idt. 4. SBirb jebermann
eingetaben? 5- S)ci^ ftel)t' §n jtDeifeIn, benn mein
greunb ber nene S^enor t[t nicE)t dngelaben. 6. 3iun ja,
meine ©tnlabnng tDnrbe erft f)ente morgen geliefert.
7. SSieKeidjt tvxxh bte fetntge fjente nadjmittag geliefert
tt)erben. 8. S(^ glaube aber nidjt, ba^ er eingetaben
tuirb. 9. Sft benn etoa^ bariiber gefagt tDorben?

10. Wan l^at mir nnr gejagt, ba^ fei ^ nic^t jn erttjarten.

11. SBirb er nid)t beleibigt fein? 12. S)a^ la^t fid) ben^
!en, aber e^ ift nic^t^ jn tnn. 13. 9Son tDem iDirb bie
3;rannng t)oIIjogen (tDerbens)? 14. 3)ie @d)tt)efter ber
Srant tnnrbe iDon 5pa[tor 93raun getraut. 15. Sft fie
benn and) berljeiratet ? 16. 9Kan fagt, bie jiingere
@d)tt)efter mod^te gem t)on bemfetben ®eiftH(^en getrant
tperben. 17. 3Kir tDnrbe ba^ anc^ g^fcigt. 18. S^ tt)irb
alfo !anm baran jn jlneifeln fein.

^ or ift. ^ Subjunctive of indirect discourse. ' As the present
is often used for the future, this sentence has the same meaning
with or without the ' trerben/

Exercise 23.
I. Who will be invited to the ball } 2. That can-
not be' told yet. 3. The invitations are not yet all
written. 4. They must be written right away.

5. I think they must really be written already.

6. No, they ,are-being ^written ^right-now.^- 7. And
when will they be delivered ? 8. Some of them are

les. xxiil] verbs. — PAssive voice. lf*J

already delivered. 9. But [the] most (-of -them)
, will 2not gbe ^delivered ^until 3to-morrow. 10. Am
I to be invited? n. I (mir) was not told that, but
it is scarcely to be doubted. 12. Your old friend
Charles must be invited. 3 13. How is that to be
understood.? 14. I mean (intend)4 to say: the
gentleman cannot be omitted. 15, Might that not
be expressed differently .? 5 16. He should have
been invited. 17. Doubtless he is invited. 18. Will
(there) be singing at the ball .? ^ 19. I cannot say ;
by whom is the ball given } 20. It is given by
some merry friends of mine.7 21. Then (there) will
surely be singing.

^ active voice with inait. ^ focben. ^ transl. v^rith two meanings.
* tDottcn. ^active with man. ^ See ^[7, this lesson. ^ transl. ofine.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bic Sr^tiftftettcrin, the au- ticrfaffctt, compose.

thoress. ^Cttt^UtaOC, nozvadays.

'^a^ ^ubltfum, the public. \^^^h ^^ough (with reservation

CtflarClt, explain. or qualification).

Conversation 22. — Homane.

r. SSon tt)em tDurbe biefer 9ioman t)erfa^t?

2. @r h)urbe t)on einer g^rau berfa^t.
I. (Sio tDerben Ijcutjutage Dtele 9bmane t)on grauen ge-
f(i)rtet)en, ntc^t tt)af)r?
2. ^a, e§ tDerben mirflic^ fe!)r biele t)on g^rauen ge=
fc^rieben.
I. SSerben bie 9?omane btefer ©djriftfteHertn t)ie{ ge^
tefen ?
2. ©ie tt)erben nid^t fo t)iel gelefen tt)ie t)or 10 3at>ren.

178 VERBS.— PASSIVE VOICE. [Les. XXIIl.

I. SBie tft ha^^ ju ertldren?

2. Wan faun e§ md)t gan^ erfldren,
I. SSon ruem tpurbe ^^Sol^n |)a(tfai'^' gefd)rte6en ?

2. 2lu(f) biefe^ 93u(^ tDurbe t)on einer g^rau gefd^rieben.
I. SSerben auf beut[(^ t)tele SRomane Don ^rauen ge^
fdjrteben ?
2. 9Zetn, unb tf)re 2BerIe tt)erben nid^t fo i)iel gelefen.
I. Sinb nidjt 3BtIl)eImtne t). |)inent unb SBil^ehnine
|)eimbur9 in ©entfdjtanb beUebt?
2. 3lc^ ja, fie finb f(^on beliebt.
I. 5l6er fie t^erben nic^t fo l^od) gefdja^t tnie gretjtag,
S)a^n unb ©piel^agen ?
2. 3lein, bie gro^ten ©d^riftfteller lt)erben l^of^er ge^
fc^ci^t,
I. 9Ber tt)irb aU ber gro^te beutfc^e 9?omanfd}rei6er ge-
fd)a|t?
2. Sett ©oetf)e, iDtrb tt)of)( 3^re^tag t)on bem ^ublifum
am ^oc^ften gef(^d^t.

Etc., etc.

Reading 23.
2)ie gfatt un^ bic ©enne,

Sine grau i)atk einc §enne. ©iefe §enne legte jeben
Xag ein (Si. 2(ber bie gran toar nidjt bamit ^ jufrieben.
®ie njoKte^' jeben Stag jtDei (£ier l^aben, benn bie (£ier
tuaren fe^r teuer. ®ie mciftetes ba^er4 bie |)enne, in
ber §offnung met)r Sner jn be!ommen.5 SIber bie §enne
trurbe^ §u7 fett, unb kgte feine^ ©ier^ mel^r.^

* with that. ^wanted. ^ fattened. '♦accordingly,

^get. ^became. ^too. ® no more eggs.

Lks. XXIV.] REFLEXIVE VERBS. 1/9

@abt, ber tDcife ^erjer, ja^ eine^ 2l6enb§ bertieft^ 6et
bem ^oran. Slt^^ er auf(i(t(ite,3 waxtn l:)on jeinen bret
Soljiten jtDci eingeld^Iafen4; ber britte aba fagte fef)r
felbftpfrieben 5 : „@iel), SSater, me btea fd)Iafen; id)
a6er — id) bete!" — ,,9[)?ein ®o^n," entge9nete7 fanft
ber a>ater, ^beffer i[f^ bod) ti:)o^t ju fd^Iafen, aU ftotj^
ju fein auf ba^, tt)a§ man tut,''

* counsel. ^ looked up. * self-satisfied. 'rejoined,

'absorbed. * asleep. ^they. • proud.

LESSON XXIV.

Verbs. — Reflexive and Impersonal Forms.
Reflexive Verbs.

1. Verbs are said to be used reflexively when
they represent the action as exerted upon the sub-
ject, the object being a pronoun which refers back
to the subject ; as, 3c^ freue mid) (Ut. I rejoice my-
self), " I rejoice."

2. Any transitive verb may be used reflexively.
Proper reflexives are those which are used reflexively
only, or which, though not always so used, have a
different meaning in this use : as, fid) fc^dmen, " to
be ashamed ;" [ic^ pten, "to beware,'* from f)uten,
"to guard."

3. The use of reflexives is much more common
in German than in English, and they often occur
where the corresponding reflexive construction is

l80 REFLEXIVE VERBS. [Les. XXIV.

not admissible in English : as, S)er ©d^liiffel Ijat fic^
gcfuuben, "The key has been found"; ©^ tanjt ft(^
gut Ijier, " It is good dancing here/'

4. The reflexive pronoun of the first or second
persons is the same as the personal. For the third
person it is ftd^ (dative or accusative), and the same
for both numbers and all genders.

5. Although the verb proper presents no new
forms in the reflexive use, the combined phrase is so
un-English that the student should memorize and
recite the paradigm, of which a synopsis follows.

6. Conjugation of ftt^ freucit, *' to rejoice," in the
Indicative Mood.

PRINCIPAIi PARTS.

ficJj fteuen, freute fi^, fic^ geftcut*

Present.
idj f teuc mxd)f I rejoice, Xm freuCtt Utt)3, -we rejoice.

is)X frCUft bi^, thou rejoicest, x\c ftCUt t\\^, ye rejoice.

8iC frCUetl fic^, you rejoice. (5ic frCttCtt flc^, you rejoice.

cr frCttt fid), he rejoices. ftC ftCUCtt fi(i^, they rejoice.

Preterit.

\^ f rente mii^, / rejoiced.

Perfect,
trff ^aBe mi^ gefreut, I have rejoiced.

Pluperfect,
ic^ %^iit VXi^ gefrCttt, I had rejoiced.

Les. XXIV.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. l8l

Future.

x^ ttierbc mi^ frcucn, / s/iaii rejoice.

Future Perfect.
i(^ ttjerbC mit^ gcf rCUt ^a^ett, / shall have rejoiced.

Imperative.

frcttc (btt) birij, rejoice {thou) frcut (i^r) euti^, r^/'^/V^ (ji/^).

Infinitives.

PRESENT.

fir^ frCUCn, ^^ rejoice.

PERFECT.

fi^ gCfreut ^abeit, to have rejoiced.
Participles.

PRESENT.

fi(^ freUCttb, rejoicing.

PAST.

fi^ gefrCttt (only in compound tenses).

Impersonal Verbs.

7. An Impersonal Verb is one which represents
an action as taking place without reference to any
definite subject : as, e§ regnet, it rains.

8. Proper Impersonals are chiefly those which re-
present the operations of nature : as, e^ regnet, " it
rains"; e^ {)agelt, *'it hails"; e^ bli|t, "it lightens."

9- Those verbs are also called impersorials, which
are used in a manner resembling the oroper im-
personals: as, trie ge^t e^, "how goes it.? ' e^ biirftet
mid), *'I am thirsty"; c^3 gclingt mir, btcfe^ ju tun,

l82

REFLEXIVE VERBS.

[Les. XXIV.

''I am successful in doing this"; c^ fragt fid), "it
is a question."

10. The impersonal, like the reflexive verb, is
much more common in German than in English.

11. It is to be noted that, as with the reflexive so
with the impersonal verbs, there is no new mode
of inflection of the verb proper.

Vocabulary.

FEMININE.

btC D'icifc, the journey.

bte Sttfi^Wf^ ^^^ draught of air.

bic ^(einigfelt, the trijie.

S\^ fitrri^tett, be afraid {of)

ttltC gc^t t^f (how goes it),

how are you ?
pfammCtt, together,
tlOtig, previous.
beutUcft, clear.

mitfirittgen, bring with, along.
t§ ticrftel)t \id) (it understands

itself), of course.

wa^r^aftig, in fact.

ftar!, sever e{ly).
gcgcuiibcr, opposite (after its
object).

Note 32. — Many reflexives are followed by a genitive in
German, where the corresponding English construction has the
objective case. (Sr erinnert fid) jebeS 2Borte§, "He remembers
(is mindful of) every word." ^6) ei'bamie Hiic^ feine^ (Steuben,
" I pity his misery."

fiefottbcr)^, especially.

ttttt mctUCtnjiWeu, (on account

of me)/^r 7?iy sake.
um mCtttCtttJCgeU, on my ac-
count.

fici^ txVaiitXXf take cold.
ftC^ crtunern, remember.
S\^ ^cfinbeil (find one's

self), do, be.
ftC^ ficmu'^CU, (exert
one's self), take pains,
put one^s self out.
ftr^ fc^Ctl, take a seat.
fid) Ittttev^^al'tCtt, con-
verse.
fid) er^cBeu, recover.
fid) fii^leii, feel.
fif^ ^iitcn, take care.

(^

Les. XXIV.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1 83

Impersonal Verbs.
C^ baucrt, it lasts. t§ fr^nctt, it snows.

t§ Blrift, it blows. t§ frcut mid), I am glad.

c§ boniiert, it thufiders. t^ Uegt mx ntrfjt^ barau, /

C)^ 6U^t, it lightens. do not care for it.

t§ ttlttttbcrt mir^l, / wonder. (tcfi fcilt, pUase (impersonal).

t^ rcgnet, it rains.

e§ fri^abet ntr^t or \\\^i^ (it ^crrllti^, splendid.

harms not), it is no matter, UeB l^abeu^ like.

e^ gcf attt, it pleases.

Exercise XXIV.

I. 6^ regnet nid)t immer, \mmx e^ bli^t unb bonnert
2. (£«^ blt|t faft ntemafe, tt)erin e<?^ fc^neit. 3. Sc^ !ann
mid^ nic^t erinnern, (Sd}nee unb 93U^ jufammen gefe{)en
5U t)akn. 4. Srtnnern @ie fid) art ben gro^en ©djnee
t)om t)origen 3Binter? 5. Sd} erinnere mid) ganj beut^
lid^ baran. 6. 9Jcein 83ruber unb id) befanben un§ auf
ber ^ 9fJei[e. 7. ^JJ^ein Sruber bejonbetig befanb [id) nid)t
fe^r tt)o{)l 8. ®a erfiiltet man fid) t)iel Ieid)ter. 9. @r
^at ft(^ tt)a£)r^aftig ftarf erialtet. 10. ©^ bauerte jlDci
SJfonate, bi^ er [ic^ erl)oIt I)atte. n. @^ fd^abet nid)t^,
tt)enn man [id) n)oI)( fiil)lt. 12. (£§ ttjunbert mid) nid)t,
ba^ @ie [id) an bie 9iei[c erinnern. 13. 3Bie be[inben
(Sie [ic^ I)cutc ? 14. SBoden @ie [ic^ nid)t lieber ^ier oxx^
ber S^^fllwf^ [el3en? 15. Semii^en ®ie [id) nid)t um
meinetmegen. 16. @^ gefdllt mir be[[er tt)o id) bin, unb
ic^ be[inbe mid) jiemlid) \odi)t 17. @^ [rent mt(^, ha^
ju t)oren.

^ Tr. ' a.'

184 IMPERSONAL VERBS. [Les. XXIV.

Exercise 24.

1. It is no longer raining ; it is beginning to snow.
2. I am not surprised at all. 3. The wind has ^
been I blowing^ all^ day from the north. 4. We
must take care not to catch cold. 5. Do you catch
cold easily.? 6. Not when I am quite well. 7. Well,
how are you to-day.? 8. I am glad to say, I feel
quite well. 9. Then you have recovered from the
severe cold ? 10. In fact I had taken a severe cold.

11. How does it come that you remember that.?

12. I am pleased that you remember such a trifle.

13. You were on the train when you took cold.

14. I took-a-seat opposite you. 15. O yes, I re-
member you now very well .3 16. I recovered very
rapidly, of course. 17. May I close the window for
you.? 18. Please do not put yourself out on my
account. 19. Then will you not take a seat here
on this side .? 20. I do not care for it, thank you.

^ Present tense with fd^on. ^ ben gattjert 3 gut

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
htX 5(ttgettBltff, f/ie moment. letbcf, unfortunately^ I am

bic S95ct(C, the while, time. sorry to say.

frf|iJttCtt ^anl, many thanks IJcr^Ud), cordially, greatly.

(lit. ' fair thanks '). !^uffcntU(ift, I hope.

Conversation 23. — (Scfunbl^eit unb XOtiitx.

I. 28ie befinben @ie [tc^ f)eute inorgen ?

2. ©d^onen 5Dan!, ic^ befinbe micf) stemlid^ tt)oy.
I. §at e^ bei Sf)nen in ber 9?ad)t geregnet?

?. ®g l^at nid^t geregnet, aber ein bi^c|)en gebonnert.

Les. XXIV.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. l8S

. giirdjten @ie fid) Dor bem S5onner ?

2. ^i) nein, ic^ fiird^te mid^ gar nid^t bai:)or.
. SBie befinbet [ic^ Sf)r §err Skater?

2. ®er SSater befinbet fic^ leiber nid;! fe^r tDof^L
. ©rinnern ©ie fic^ an meine f (eine ©d)tx)efter ?

2. 3<^ erinnere tnid^ i()rer gan^ gut.
. aSiirbe e^ S^ren §errn SSater freiien, fie ju f e^en ?

2. 3^^^^^'/ ^^ tDiirbe il^n getDi^ ^er^lid^ freuen.
. SSenn e§ Si)nen gefaEt, fo will id) fie mitbringen.

2. 2)a§ tt)urbe mir fe^r lieb fein, aber ©ie biirfen \xi)
ntc^t ju fe{)r bemiif^en.
. 3^ meinte, er fonitte fic^ eine SBeile ntit il)r unter^
I)alten.

2. SlKerbingg, er unterf^dlt fid^ gem mit ^inbern.

. SBann tnirb er fic^ er^oten, meinen @ie ?

2. §offentltd^ tt)irb er fic^ balb er^olt \)ab^n.
. SBoIIen @ie fid) nid)t einen 91ugenblid fel^eit ?

2. S^ banfe, td^ barf mid^ je^t nic^t fe^en.
u. f. W.

Reading 24.

Enjoy
S3on gJlarttn Uftert.

greut eud) be^ Seben^, tDeil nod) ha§> flampd^en glii^t,

while lamp burns

^Pfliidet bte 9tofe, e|' [ie berblii^t.

pluck fades.

5D?an fd)afft fo gern fid) ©org' unb Tlixlf.

seeks (for) himself care pains

1 86 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXV

@ud^t Somen an^ unb finbet fie,

thorns

Unb Id^t ba§> 9?ei(d)en unbemerft,

violet unnoticed

^a^ un^ am 9Bcge biiiijt

(Repeat first two lines as chorus).

SBenn fi^eit bie ©d^opfung fid) t)erpEt

shyly creation hides

Unb lant ber Sonner ob nn^o (iriiUt,

above bellows

@o lad^t am Stbenb nadj bcm ©turm

S)te ©onne nn^ fo fdjiin.
grent end; be^ 2e6en^3, n. f. w,

SBer 9iebltd^feit nnb 2!reue ixbi,

honesty loyalty practices.

Unb gern bem armern 95rnber gibt,
Sei bem baut fic^ ^^f^'i^^^i^^^it

builds for herself content

@D gern tf)-r ^iittd^en an.

cottage

great trnS) be^ Seben^, u. f. to.

LESSON XXV.

Order of the German Sentence.
I. TAe question for the student to ask himself in
constructing a Gej^mafi sentence is not : Might I
noty or might not a German^ possibly say thus and
so ? but : What is the normal, average German way
of saying this ?

Les. XXV.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 8/

2. 2)ai§ t)on S^ncii bcftctttc SButi^ ift, cinigc £cfc*
Hiurctt au^gcttommcH, geftcrn in gutcr Orbnuitg auf
ber SBiBItot^cf angefommcn.

3. Learn this sentence ; observe the position of
participles relative to words modifying them, also of
the various elements of the predicate.

4. Every German sentence follows one of three
orders, depending on the position of the personal
verb, and accordingly designated as Normal, In-
verted, or Transposed.

5. The Normal order seems to English people
the natural one : the subject first, immediately fol-
lowed by the verb. (£r jdjidt mir ha^ 93uc^, "He
sends me the book.*'

6. In the Inverted order, the personal verb stands
before 'the subject : ©d^idt er mir \^0i^ 93uc^ ? " Does
he send me the book.'^"

7. In the Transposed order, the personal verb is
transposed to the end of the clause : 3Senn er mir
ba§ Su(^ fd^tdt, **If he sends me the book.'*

8. German and English do not differ greatly in
the first two cases if we regard only the position of
the personal verb. Only, in English, the progres-
sive and the emphatic forms, separating a verb into
auxiliary and participle or infinitive, make the differ-
ence seem greater at first sight.

1 88 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXV'

I. Normal Order.

9. The Normal order is that observed in the
principal clause of declarative sentences, the only
exceptions being cases i and 5 of the Inverted order.

10. The following is the order of the main
elements in the Normal sentence : —

1. The subject.

2. Simple predicate, or personal (inflected) verb.

3. Modifying adjuncts of the verb, if any.

4. Non-personal part of the verb, if any; and, if
both are present, in this order : participle, infinitive.

@r fc^icft inir ha^ ^nd)^ "He sends me the book.''
9Kein greunb tDirb mir ha§> Sud) bath nac^ ^^cuife

juriidgefcl)tcft ijobm, "My friend will soon have sent

the book back home to me."

11. The Normal order is observed after the gen-
eral connectives : unb, aber, alletn, fonbern, betfn, ober,
and sometimes enttreber.

II. Order of Minor Elements.

12. The arrangement of the elements of the Ger-
man sentence is based upon the feeling that t/ie
extremities of the clause are the important positions ^
receiving the natural emphasis^ with the balance in
favor of the latter end.

I. On this ground the verb-stem in compound
tenses takes its place at the end of the clause, while
the subject stands at the beginning.

Les. XXV.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 89

2. On the same principle any modifier of the
verb that is to receive especial emphasis is placed
at the beginning of the clause (Inverted order,
case I.)

A self-evident corollary of this rule is, that not
more than one element should be thus placed.

13. In general, word-modifiers of the subject
precede it even when themselves limited by phrases :
„®in Don SSorurteilen freier Ttann/' "A man free
from prejudices." Phrases and clauses follow, as
in English; „(Sin 'SJlann au^ bem 9Sol!e/' "A man
of the people." „®in Wann, ber tdg(id) arbeitet/' **A
man who works every day."

14. No true predicate elements may come be-
tween the subject and the personal verb in the
normal order. "I always ask," "He often waits,"
are: „^^ frage tmmer/' „@r Waxkt oft.'' However,
various adversative adverbial conjunctions may
occupy this forbidden position: „@r aber !ommt
nii^t,'' „@ie, jeboc^, ge^ert Ijetm.''

i5» The principle of emphasis toward the end
seems to determine the order of the elements of
the predicate.

1. A noun is more important than a personal
pronoun and accordingly always follows.

2. An indirect object usually follows a direct
object, perhaps because more important (the indirect
object is commonly a person) or because it has a

190 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXV

closer relation to the verb. This is especially true
if both objects are persons or both things.

It applies also to pronouns, so that: 3. A dis-
syllable follows a monosyllable, and e^^ and [tc^ pre-
cede all other forms. But e^, if abbreviated to ^^,
may follow.

4. However, the principle and not the rule deter-^
mines the position. Whichever of two objects is
to be emphasized will come last. Thus, if the
question be : To whom did he introduce my brother ?
the answer will be : ,,®r f)at Stjren Sruber bem 2lb^
t)o!aten t)orge[teIIt/' But if the question be: Whom
did he introduce to the lawyer.? the answer is
„@r i)at bem 5lbt)ofaten Sf)ren Sruber t)orgefteI(t.''

5. An adverb of place or manner seems more
important than one of time, hence the latter pre-
cedes : (£r ^at nitd^ geftern bort geje^en. @r ijat mid)
^eute freunbM) gegrii^t. The adverb of time usually
precedes a noun object while an adverb of place
follows.

6. A phrase follows a single word.

16. Any word when especially modifying another
stands next to it, usually before. ,,@r i)at metnen
93ruber nic^t gefe^en^' is a general negative of the
proposition ; „(gr i)at nic^t meinen Siruber ge[e{)en"
makes the „md)V* limit especially ^meinen fflruber,"
as though anticipating „|onbern ben Sfjtigen/' — **not
my brother hut j/ours,'*

Les. XXV.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. IQt

17. While the arrangement of the elements of
the predicate between personal verb and participle
or infinitive is often modified by other considerations,
as those of euphony and the personal equation of
the speaker, the above rules are sound and safe for
the student to follow.

18. At the end, when both are present, the in-
finitive follows the past participle.

In tl^is case in a subordinate clause the personal verb often
stands just before the two, and always \i there are two infinitive
forms at the end ; (Sr fragte, ob x6) ben Widxm tniirbc gefe^eii ^aben,
or „ . . . gefe^eti Ipben ti^iirbc." But „(gr fragte, ob tc^ nirf)t l)dtte
ge^cn foUen", never ,, . . . ge^en foUen ptte."

19. In independent participial constructions the
participle follows its own modifiers ; 95on 9Jeib er-
fitUt, "Filled with envy," biefe^ jugegeben, "this
being conceded," hm 2lrm gef)o6en, "lift your
arm.*'

20. In the matter of the involution of clauses the
best German follows the rule : Finish each clause
before beginning another. Of course this does not
apply to relative clauses. In this rule, an infinitive
phrase with „ju'' expressed is treated as a clause.

21. Some words have different meanings accord-
ing to their position, thus alletn mein ©ruber, " but
my brother "; mein 93ruber aHein, " my brother alone."
(Setbft, \i)dn, aud^, ail mean 'even' when they precede
another element, but following they mean respec-
tively * . . . self,' 'already,' 'also'.

192 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXV.

Vocabulary.
ber ^rafibent, president. etttne^mcit, take, derive (from,

blc 9)ZetWttttg, opinion. dative case in German).

bic 5ltt)§gabe, expense. brurf ett, print.

\At Uttfoften, expenses. UmfUttft, in vain.

'hXt Scfcf^Ur, (reading-trace), Ibcftanbtg, constantly.

mark of wear. futtbcttt, but.

5UrC(^tfummett, get alo7tg. iii^^Cr, hitherto.

tJprf d^icgCtt, le7td, advance. attC^ Jttf atttmettOCrCti^ttCt, reck-

iJCtfotgCtt, supply, oni7zg all together ^ taking all

in all.

Exercise XXV.

I. ©in neuer ©tubent ift geftern f)ter angefommen.
2. @r l^at ntc^t genug ®elb mitgebrac^t, urn ein Sa^r ju
bletben. 3. @r aber meint, er ^abe fel)r Did. 4. Slber
[eine be[ten greunbe tDcrben i^m gelDi^ ®elb Dorfdjie^en.

5. ®ein cilterer S3ruber Ijat it)n bi)§I)er mit ®elb Derforgt.

6. 3lIIein biefer altere 93ruber ti:)irb tf)m nidjt t)tel langer
^elfen !bnnen. 7. ©ie ^o^zxi iDotjt biefe 9Jfeinung ber
3eitung entnommen? 8. Seine mir befannte 3^i^i^^9
\)oX jemafe feinen 9?amen gebrncft. 9. ?(lfi/,^ @ie (jaben
f)enle nidu^o iiber il)n ^ in ber 3^it^tJ^9 gelefen ? 10. 3d)
I}abe bie B^^^^^S umfon[t nad) feinem Stamen gelefen.
II. Um anf nnferen ©tubenten jnrudjnfommen — er ift
nic^t nnr arm, fonbern (xVii) o^ne grennbe. 12. ©r n)irb
aber red)t balb grennbe gen)innen, benn er ift flei^ig unb
frennblid). 13. Sc| tnerbe ben ©tnbenten morgen friil)
bem ^raftbenten Dorftellen. 14. Unb ic^ JDerbe e^ tt)m
nod) 3 (jente abenb beim 9lbenfebrot fagen.

^ If alfo is followed by a pause, a comma, it has no effect on
the sentence order, but if the connection is close it causes inver-

Les. XXV.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 93

sion. 2 the phrase iu ber 3^ttling might quite as well precede
md)t8 iiber i^n. ^^ygt,' or, with ^eute, 'this very'.

Exercise 25.
I. These two ^ students have just come back from
their brother's house. 2. This brother is not very
rich, but he ^has ^often ^advanced ^them ^money.
3. He will not be able to do that much longer, for
he has bought a newspaper. 4. I hear, [the] one
of those boys has gained many friends in the city.
5. Even a man well-supplied-with-money ^ cannot
do everything. 6. You might introduce the younger
student to the president. 7. I shall be very glad
to introduce him to the president, as-well-as3 to
other friends of mine. 8. And you might have lent
the elder student some of your books. 9. I have
already lent them to him. 10. Reckoning every-
thing together, they will be able to remain here a
year more. n. Yes, they will have enough money
to pay all necessary expenses. 12. They both read
constantly the books recommended-to-them. 4 13. I
believe they will get along all right.

* S^^i/ ^^ bciben. ^ Tr. both as adjective phrase before Tlamx,
and as relative clause. ^fott)ie. '♦cf. note2.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
Ht ^Clegeit^ieit, opportunity. ttB^Olett, come for, go for,

bic S50Utfa^rt, boat-trip. Beftctten, order.

cine Sootfa^rt mat^en, go boat- rubcrn, rozv.

ing. tticit, far.

bic ^artic', trip. meinetluegen^ for all I care.

ciiic ^JSartie mac^eu, take a trip.

94 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXV.

Conversation. — Die Bootfal^rt.

. @te tvoUm Dielleidit einen ©pajiergmtg madjtn?

2. 3c^ tt)urbe fe^r gern einen ©^)a3tergang maiden.
. S)er SSeg nadj bem glu^e ift St)nen nidjt ju iDcit?

2. 2lci^ nein, ber 2Beg bort^tn ift mir gar nic^t tDeit.
. 2Sir fomiten bann eine !leine Sootfa^rt madjen.

2. Sine 33ootfa{)rt auf bem g^Iu^e tt)dre mir gerabe red^t.
. Qtvd greunbe t)on mir mi)djten bie ^artie mit un^
madjen.

2. SBarum nid^t ? S^re g^reunbe lonnen ba§ Soot rubern
f)elfen.
. ajceine greunbe !i3nnen aber ntc^t fef)r gut rubern.

2. ©ie {)aben f)ier eine ©elegenf)eit, rubern ju lernen.
. Slljo ic^ foil fie einlaben, mitjugefjen?

2. ©ie foHen meinettoegen, alle 3^^'^ g^reunbe einlaben.
. SBir tDoUen um funf U{)r bereit fein.

2. "^i) h:)erbe f(^on t)Dr fiinf Uf)r bereit fein lonnen.
. ®a^ fiir uuso befteKte Soot ift erft um fiinf Uf)r ju
f)aben.

2. ®a§ ift mir fd^on red^t ; alfo, um fiinf Vi\)x am 3^lu^e.
. Slber, id) ()oIe ®ie I)ier um f)a(b fiinf ak

2. ®ut, unb bann f^olen toir bie anbern ab.

Etc., etc.

Reading 25.
^er SiittJe mtb ber $afc»

(Sin 2ott)e toiirbigte' einen brotligten^ §afen feiner
nd^ern^ Sefanntf^aft. „2(ber ift e^ benn Wa^x/' fragte
i^n einft ber §afe, „ba^ eurf) £ott)en ein elenber, frd^enber

Les. XXVI.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 95

§a^n fo teid^t tjerjagen^ fann ?" „3lHerbing§ ^ i^t e§ h)al^r/'
anttDortete ber Sot^e, „unb e§ ift eine attgemeine 2lnmer!ung,
ba^ ti:)ir gro^en Stiere burd^gdngig^ eine gett)iffe Heine
(Bd)Wa(i)l}^xt an'^ vin§> i)ai>m. ©o iDirft bu, §um g^em^el/
t)on bem ©lef anten ge^ort f^aben,^ ba^ if)m '° ba§ ©runjen
eineg ©c^meine^ ©d^auber unb ©ntfe^en tx\vzdtJ' ,Mai)x^
^aftig ?^' " unterbrad^ '^ i^n ber §afe. „3a, nun begreif ' '^
id^ aud^, Waxnm tt)ir §afen un^'^ jo entfe^Iid^ tior ben
§unben furd^ten/' ''^ sefftng.

' deem worthy of, favor with. ^ droll, comical, ^nearer, inti-
mate. ■* chase away, put to flight. ^ to be sure, certainly. ^ in
general. ^ in ourselves. ^ more commonly, jnm ^eifpieL ^ @0
tDirft bu gel^ort l)aben, and you have probably heard. ^°in him.
"do you mean so? ^^ unterbre'c^en. "begretfe, comprehend.
** fid^ fiirc^ten, to be afraid.

LESSON XXVI.

Order of the German Sentence.
The Inverted Order.

1. The inverted 07'der diffei^s from English in
only one case, A relative pronoun is never omitted
in German,

2. 2)a^ SButi^^ \sst\^t^ \i) in ber ^anb ^a6e^ ttiiirbe
ttiir Beffcr gcfatten, pttc iri^ ben SSerfaffer nie gefe^cn.

3^ Learn this sentence; note the position of the
verb in each of its three clauses together with the
kind and pecuHarity of the clause.

4. The arrangement in the Inverted order differs
from that in the Normal order only in the inversion

196 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXVI.

of the subject and personal part of the verb. It is
necessary therefore to consider only when and for
zvJiat purpose such inversion takes place.

The inverted order belongs to principal clauses, except case 2
below.

5. There are five distinct cases where the In-
verted order is required : —

1. When any part or adjunct of the predicate,
comprising often a subordinate clause, begins the
sentence. Wvc t)at er ba^ 95u(^ gefi^tdt, "He has
sent the book to me.'*

2. Often in conditional clauses, to give the effect
of tt)enn when this word is omitted. @(f)idt er mir
\>^^ Sud), f 0 tut er tr)o{)I, " If he sends me the book,
he does well."

3. In Interrogative sentences. §at er mir ba^
93uc^ gefc^tdt ? " Has he sent me the book .? '*

4. In optative or imperative sentences ; that is,
when a command or desire is to be expressed,
©djiden ©ie mir ba^ S3u(^, " Send me the book!"

5 . For impressivefiess ; to express surprise,
usually with bo(^ or |a. §at er mir boc^ "^o.^ 33ud)
gefd^idt, "Why, he has sent me the book !"

6. The co-ordinating connectives do not require
inversion. Nor is there always inversion after the
adverbial conjunctions, as aud}, bod), baljer, alfo.

Les. XXVI.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 97

7. It will be noted that only cases i and 5 differ
from English usage, while even i has many paral-
lels, as in " Never did I see the like."

8. In the Inverted order an object pronoun
generally precedes a noun subject : ®eftern f)at x\)n
mein ©ruber gefel)en.

The Transposed Order.

9. The arrangement in the Transposed order
differs from that in the Normal order only in the
transposition of the personal verb to the end of the
clause. It is necessary, therefore, to consider only
w/ien such transposition is required.

10. The Transposed order is observed in de-
pe7ident clauses, introduced by the conjunctions
bamit, ba^^ 06, etc., or by relatives,

11. The following examples illustrate the Trans-
posed order : —

1 . Sd) iDetfe, ba^ er mtr ba^ 93ud) ge[rfjidt f)at, '" I
know that he has sent me the book."

2. 2lte er mir "^Oi^ 93uc| fdjidte, "When he sent me
the book."

3. J)a§ Sudj, tueldje^ er mir juriidgefc^idt ^(xi, *'The
book which he has sent back to me."

12. The conjunction baf], when its representative
is purely formal and dispensable in English, may be
omitted. In this case the dependent clause has the
Normal order; ,,@r fagt, \>o5^ er gemig (jak,'' but „Sr
fagt, er f)abe genug.''

198 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXVI

13 • The conjunction tDenn may be omitted ; in
this case the dependent clause has the Inverted order,
as in Enghsh: „aBare er ftarf," "Were he strong."

14. With these two sole exceptions the dependent
clause always has the Transposed order.

Vocabulary.

bcr ^ttftJ^iikr, fdlow-pupil. bebcnfctt, consider.

ber ^^U^f, pot. beffcrn, improve, better,

bte ^(affc, class, ticrttat^loffigeit, neglect.

bic SJurftcttuttg, introduction. ticrftfittbtg, sensible.

bic S3e!atttttfc^aft, acquain- iiBcl nc^meit, take amiss.

tance. ijffCtt, open.

"^^^ ^ttiftcrtt, crackliftg. gcrabc aVi^f point blank.

anberit, change^ alter, oBtQOl^l', although.

Exercise XXVI.

I. ^onnen ©te \\6) je^t erinnern, trie \>a^ SKabdjer
mil ber iDci^en 50?% ^ei^t? 2. S)a§ fann id} leibei
ni(^t, obtt)ol}I i^ fie oft gefdjen t)abe. 3- ^orgeftern fa^
fie neben mir in ber St'taffe. 4. S)a ^ fatten @te i^ren
?famen boi^ Don il)rem Suc^e lefen follen. 5. Ciefe fie
i^r 95ucf) bo(^ ^ gar ntd)t offen liegen ! 6. §atte id) ein^^
mat eine foldje ®elegent)eit, fo tDiirbe id) fie gerabe au^
urn i'^ren 91amen bitten. 7. @e|en @ie fid^ alfo f)eute
neben fie. 8. S(^ meine, ha^ ajfitfc^nter nnb 9Kitfd^n=^
terinnen bod^ !eine ^orfteUung brani^en. 9. Slber tnasB
foU ic^ mad)en, tDenn fie e^ iibel nimmt? 10. S)a^ toirb
fie fid)er nid^t, benn fie fd)eint rec^t Derftdnbig jn fein.
II. S^r ^ater, it)e(d)er t)or einigen Sagen I)ier toar, ()cttte

Les. XXVI.] ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. 1 99

fie bod) ben anbern Sdjiilern borftellen [oKeit. 12. ^at
fie tf)r 3?ater benn niemanb tiorgeftefit? 13. Scl) gtaube,
er ijat ia§> ganj Hernac^ldffigt. 14. |)atte ber $)?ann e^
bod^ ni(^t Dergeffen! 15. ©etinbert faun e^ boc^ je|t
m(f)t tDerben. 16. SBer 3 ttwa^^ fo lange kben!t, roirb am
@nbe nic^t^ tun. 17. 3c^ tvd^ ha^ ic^ e^ ntc^t ^atte
6effern !onnen.

^ Then. '^ ' Why,' or * well/ at beginning. ^ * Whoever,' or
* one who.*

Exercise 26.

I. Would you not like to make the acquaintance
of that girl? 2. Is she the girl who wears the blue
hat and laughs so loud ? 3. A blue hat she certainly
has, but whether she laughs loud I do not know.

4. Even if she does, you need not be afraid of her.

5. As I I came into the room this morning J. ^heard
3 a ^girl glaugh. 6. ^To-me 3it ^sounded like the
crackling of thorns under a pot. 7. That was cer-
tainly not this girl, although she laughs a-great-deal.^
8. Introduce me to the girl anyway. 3 9. Were I
only sure of her name ! 10. Why,4 he has actually
forgotten her name! n. No, that I certainly have
not, but pronounce it I cannot. 12. You say you
know her name, and yet you cannot speak it.?
13. One cannot always pronounce everything that
one can read. 14. Then 5 do not try to introduce
me to her.

^3(t« or tt)ie. ^Die(, rcd)t ttiel ^j^od^ or o]^nct)iu. -^Express
by inversion, with bod}. ^ Wo, after verb.

200 ORDER OF GERMAN SENTENCE. [Les. XXVI.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

ber <B^ahttt, harm. rateit, advise.

bcr 3^tttJCtluft, waste of time. tierlattgett, desire.

bcr 23a«b, volume. ift S^itett — geftiUig, would

"^Xt ^efc^ir^tC, history. you, like (salesman's phrase)?

bic ^OtC, ^^^^ (in music). c§ tft mtr rer^t, // suits me.

btC 9^0tCtt, w^/^J, music. ft^ribltd^, harmful.

'^^^ ©ebtti^t, poe7n. Cbeit niti^t, «^^ exactly.

aurici^ten, ^^^j ^«//j^. etttia, perchance.

Conversation 25. — Per £efeftoff»

I. SSa^ fiir em Su(^ t)eriangen @ie gu fef)en?

2. 3Bag fiir Su(i)er [)aben ©ie benn I^ier?
I. S[t S()nen t)te][Iei(^t ein Stoman gefalltg?

2. 9Kir iDdre ein guter 9{oman (^^^Xii red^t.
I. 8iat Sf)r §err SSater, ba^ @ie SRomane tefeit [oKen?

2. 3letn, ber 3Sater rdt, ba^ id^ gar leine 9?omane tefe.
I. ®tau6t S^r §err Skater, ba^ bie 9fiomane fd^ablid)
f eten ?

2. @r glaubt eben nic^t, ba^ fie t)iel ©c^aben anric^ten.
I. 3Ba§ ^at er benn gegen fie, ttjenn td^ fragen barf?

2. @r finbet, ba^ bag Sefen ber Slomane ein g^ituerluft
fei.

I. Sllfo iDoIIen ©te etoa ©ebtd^te ober ®ef(^i(i)te?

2. 3^ tt)oHte lieber ©ebid^te, it)e(cf)e man fingen !ann.
I. SBcire tc^ ^w 3t)rer ©tette, fo iDiirbe id) |)eine'^ „93uc^
ber Sieber'' faufen.
2. 9laten ©ie tpirflic^ baju, fo laufe id^ ben erften ^
a3anb.

Les. XXVII.] THE INFINITIVE. 20I

I. ©oil id) ntd)t and) @d)u6ert'^ Sieber fiirSie beftellen,
bamit @ie bie 9coten bajii t)aben ?
2. S^/ befteHen ©ie mir gefdiligft ©c^ubert'g Sieber.

Etc., etc.

Reading 26.
^cr (Star.

Ser alte ^ciger SRori^ f)atte in jeiner ©tube einen abge^
ric^teten ' ©tar, ber einige SBorte f^^rec^en fonnte. 2Benn
5. S."" ber S^S^^^i^f ♦ „©tdr(ein, Wo bift bu?'' jo fdfjrie ber
©tar attemal : ,,®a bin ic^."

®e§ 3Ja(^bar^ fleiner ^arl f)atte an bem SSogel eine ganj
befonbere g^reube unb mad)te bemfelben ofter^ einen 93eju(f).
211^ ^arl mieber einmal ^infam, tDar ber ^dger (^hm^
mi)t in ber ©tube, ^arl fing gefd^tuinb^ ben 33ogeI, fted'te
i^n in bie STafc^e unb toollte bamit fortfd^Ieid^en.^

Sllein in tbm^ bem^ 2lugenb[ic!e tarn ber ^dger ^ur
2^ur l^erein. @r ba(f)te bem ^naben eine g^reube gu mac^en
unb rief ime gett)obnUd^ : „©tdrlein, tx)o bift bu?''^unb
ber SSogel in ber Sraf(f)e be§ ^haben fd^rie, fo laut er
fonnte : „®a bin ic^ !'' e^r. b. sc^mib.

drained. ^ jum 33eif|)tet, for instance. ^ just then. * quickly.
^ slip away. ^ that very.

LESSON XXVII.

The Infinitive.

I. T/ie verbal infifiitive always stands after its
modifiers ; 511 is tcsed or not used almost precisely as
to in English,

202 THE INFINITIVE. [Les. XXVIL

2. aWeht 55rcunb luiinfri^t, ia^ ^nti) ju faufen^ urn
fcincm SBrubcr jutiorsufommen^ benn bicfcr f|3r^t anif)

anticipate.

ha\}on, t^ 5u faufcn.

3* Learn this sentence ; note the position of the
infinitives, the words on which they are dependent,
and the use of ju.

4« The infinitive is used more in German than in
Enghsh, since it corresponds to the entire scope of
the Enghsh infinitive and in part to that of the par-
ticiple.

Verbal Infinitive. I. With gu*

5« The infinitive is used with ju in German on
the whole where *to' is used in Enghsh, i. e., as
a. complement of most verbs (of those not specified
in the next section); d. of nouns; c. adjectives; d.
the adverbs ju, too, and genug ; and, e. of the prepo-
sitions 'oI)ne/ *um* and *an[tatt' : @r ^offte mtcJ) ju
fef)en; bie §offnung mic^ ju fe^cn; er tDar begierig
mic^ ju fe^en ; er font ju fpdt (urn) midj ju fe£)en ; er
gtng, oljiie mic^ ju fef)en. It will be noticed that the
English uses the participle in some of these cases.

6. After other prepositions than the three named
the German uses the infinitive phrase, but in appo-
sition with an anticipating pronoun (a ha- com-
pound), as (£r bac^te baran, m\6) einjulaben, "He
thought of inviting me" (lit. He thought thereof,

Les. XXVII.] THE INFINITIVE. 2O3

or, of it, to invite me), or, the ha- compound may be
followed by a clause as (Sr ^offtc babitrd) reicf) ju l^er^
ben, ba^ er ein 93uc^ [cf)rie6, " He hoped to become
rich by writing a book."

7. In all the preceding cases the infinitive may
have any variety of objects and adverbial modifiers,
but not a subject other than the subject of the
governing word, while the English may express such
a subject, usually as a genitive. All phrases of the
latter sort must in German be turned into clauses,
as "The hope of my coming," ®ie §offnung, baf3 id)
fommen tt)erbe; "He was eager for me to see you,"
@r iDar begiertg, ba^ id) ®ie fel)e ; " He thought of my
inviting you," ®r bad^te baran, ba^ tc^ ®te etnlaben
iDerbe (or fonnte) ; etc. However, if the verb be one
that takes a double accusative, or supplementary
objective, the infinitive may in this case have a sub-
ject, as (£r bat mid), ©ie einjulaben, " He asked me
to invite you."

8. The infinitive with ju, and generally preceded
by urn, *in order,' is used in adverbial phrases to
express purpose or result. (£r fam, urn ju fragcn, ob
id) gef)e, "He came ta ask whether I was going" ;
®r tarn, urn ju crfa^ren, bafs id) )d)on fort fei, " He
came, only to learn that I was already gone."

9. The infinitive with ju may also be used as sub-
ject of a sentence under the same limitations as in
7. W\d) je^t ju [ef)en, tt)dre iinmbglic^ for the more

204 THE INFINITIVE. [Les. XXVII.

common, S^ lt)are immoglidj, mid) je^t 511 fe^en. But
"For him to go now would be absurd," is to be
rendered baf^ er je^t gtnge, tt)are ladjerlid).

10. After Ijabert; 9Ba§ ^a[t bu ju tun; after fetn
with passive sense: SSa^ ift gu tun? "What is to be
done ? "

11. In syntax the infinitive phrase with ju is
treated as a clause and is set off by a comma, no
matter how close the connection in sense.

II. Without p,

12. As complement of iDcrben, the modal auxilia-
ries, and fef)en, Iioren, fii^ten, t)ei^en, mad)en, t)e(fen,
(affen, leljten and lerncn, the infinitive without ju is
used in German as in English without *to.' The
nine verbs named take an accusative object of the
person, which is at the same time the subject of the
infinitive. Sc^ l)6rte iijn ftngen, er te^rte mic^ [tngen,
etc. The use of the present participle of the gov-
erned verb in English, " I heard him singing," does
not change the meaning as a rule, and the German
represents it by the infinitive.

13. The infinitive without ju may be used as sub-
ject of a sentence under the same restrictions as
with ju. The form without ju is more suited to
poetry and proverbs. Thus, @etn, ober nidjt fetn,
"To be, or not to be" ; Seiern ift beffer aU feiern, "It
is better to fiddle than to be idle/'

Les. XXVIL] THE INFINITIVE. 205

14. After ge^en, with jagen, rciten, faf)ren, fpajieren,
fd^Iafen, etc., '*to go hunting, riding," etc., and after
bletben, finben, and rarely a few other verbs with
ftet)en, [t^en, etc., to express condition, where EngHsh
uses the present participle, 33(cit)en ©ic [ii^cn, ''Re-
main sitting," '' Keep your seat " ; Sd) fanb iljn fc{)Ia'
fen, '' I found him sleeping."

15- In exclamations, Setjt giirucfgel)en ! "Go back
now! " and as substitute for the imperative in signs
and official orders, Sfitdjt anritljreit, ''Do not touch"
("Hands off"). Stn[tetgen! Um[teigcn! 9(uioftetgen !
(Get in) "All aboard," (Get over) "Change cars,"
"Get out" (at end of trip).

16. After laffen frequently, and always after fid)
laffeit. the governed verb has passive sense, (£r Itef^
ben S!na6en rufen, " He had the boy called," S)a§ Iaf3t
fid) benfen (lit. That lets itself be thought), "That
can be imagined."

III. The Substantive Infinitive.

17. As substantive the infinitive is used much as
the present participle in English is used. It is
capitalized, is declined as a neuter noun and is
limited by adjectives and genitives of nouns. In
this way either a subject or an object may be ex-
pressed, but not both. 2)a§ ©ingen btefer Sieber,
ba^ fd)(ed}te Stngen bie[e^ SJfanne^o; but scarcely
©iefe^ 9Wannc^ ©ingen biefer £ieber, though thi^^ is

206 THE INFINITIVE. [Les. XXVII.

not impossible. Of course this substantive infini-
tive may occur in any relation : subject, object, or
object of a preposition. (£r fprad) t)oni ©ingen biejer
£teber, "He spoke of the singing of these songs."
This must not be confused with "He spoke of sing-
ing these songs," where the * singing' has true
verbal sense, and means (£r \\)vad) bat)on, bie[e Sieber
SU fingen.

Vocabulary.

btC SScifC, manner. fottntn ♦ ♦ ♦ tttttljitt, ^e/p, avoid,

ba!§ 25erfircr!^ett, crime. ^laubcrn, converse, chatter.

"^^^ 5(u§fe^eil, looks. em^fC^Ien, recommend.

"^^^ S5oIf§Ueb, popular song. (affCtt, have, cause.

tlOrteilftaft, advantageous. auf^ijrett, stop, cease.

tCt^Cltb, charming. ttbct^au^t, anyway, in any

ftctf, stiff. case.

Oett)0^nlt(i^, common. eittfjlti^, simply.

niitig, necessary. tierittUtliC^, / suppose, suppos-

auffattenb, noticeable. ably.

DtvUtttn, forbid. ttttgcfat)r, about.

tlOr^ic^Cn, prefer. Crttiartett, expect.

fijrcngett, burst. att^Ia^en, laugh at.

f (i^ttieigen, say nothijig, be silent. na(i^(auf CU, run after.

Exercise XXVII.

I. S)a^ ©tngen foId)er Steber follte t)erboten fein.
2. (£§ ift aber bod) !etn S^erbredjen, [oldje Sieber (311)
[tngen. 3- Sd) t)abe fie ja oft ftngen I)oren. 4. §i3ren'
®ie bod^ nur' etnmal' \^^^ fdjicdjte ©tngen bte[e<3
SJRanne^! 5. 9?cid) Sifdje fingen foil iibertjaupt nidjt

Les. XXVII. ] THE INFINITIVE. 20/

DorteiKjaft fein. 6. Sd) tDiirbe e§ Dorjte^en, nad) Sifc^e
fpajieren ju gel)en. 7. 3Sir JDiirben ben 2Kann gerne
anbere Sieber [ingen I)i3ren. 8. 34) ttJerbe bie Steber
[pater l)on jemanb Slnberm [ingen Ia[[en, 9. S)er arme
9J?ann tDiirbe [eI6er ntc^t baran benfen, bte 2ieber tDteber
5U [ingen. 10. 3Ba^ St)nen at[o nti[3[altt, i[t [eine aBei[e
bie Sieber jn [ingen? n. (£^ i[t genng, um einem bie
Dfjren jn [prengen, t)on [einem Sln)o[el)en jn [d^tneigen.
12. Sd) !ann nid)t nml}in jn lac^en, tnenn id) it)n an[angen
[et)e jn [ingen. 13. Se|t aber, nic^t mef)r |)lanbern!

* Just hear once.

Exercise 27.

I. The man hopes to sing for us after supper. »
2. But singing after meals ^ is not to be recom-
mended. 3. Well, let-US-have 3 him sing one song
anyway. 4. His singing of 4 popular-songs is-said to
be very charming. 5. I heard 5 him once sing
several songs. 6. He remained standing a whole
hour, and sang without stopping. 7. His manner
of singing such songs is a little too stiff [in order]
to please me. 8. Singing too loud is a common
fault of ^ young singers. 9. It is not necessary to
be stiff in order to sing simply. 10. He spoke of
singing 7 after supper, n. It is about time for him ^
to begin to sing. 12. He does not expect to sing all
the time. 13. He expects us to help him sing cer-
tain songs. 14. My father went walking when he

208 THE INFINITIVE. [Les. XXVII.

saw him coming. 15. I suppose he does not hke
singing. 16. He tried to sing, only to be laughed at.

17. For him 8 to go walking now is quite noticeable.

18. Well, what's to be done.? 19. Run after him.?

^ D^ad^ 2^if(^C, or more precisely, itad) bent ^Ibenbeffcit. ^ nad)
2;ifd^e, ^J^affen wit. ^non, or genitive alone. 5 pej-fect tense.
^ bei, or genitive alone, ^i. e. of intending to sing. ® See this
Lesson I, 9.

Vocabulary fop the Conversation.

bcr D^leifCttbc, ///^ tr-avehr. VX^^tW, act, play.

bet ^eamtC, the official. Xis\t\\ (of tickets), buy.

bcr 3«fifH^l*Cr, the conductor. aBfa^tClt, depart. .

ber @rf)Offncr, t/ie brakeman. fdltmctl, delay, fteglect.

bcr ^affagtCr', the passenger. Ctuf^CrrCU, shut in.

\s\t 23eqttcmltd)fett, comfort. crratctt, guess.

bte 5frt, majiner, fashion. trcffCtt, hit.

ba^ G^Ott^C, the compartment. aUc^, all, everybody.

lattger, considerable. braU^Ctt, abroad.

Conversation 26. — Pie Hctfe,

©rtDarteit @te jemate in S)eut)d)Ianb 511 retfen ?

2. %&) ^offe e§ tDemgften^ ju tun,

@ie miff en, ber Svetfenbe ^at bran^en ntdjt fo t)teL

Sequemlic^Mten afe Ijter jn Sanbe ?
2. 3^ erinnere mid^, ba§ gefjort ^u ^aben, aber it>te ift

ba§ §u Derftefjen?

@ie fennen alfo bie bentfdje 9trt ntd^t, langere Stetfen

jn madjen ?
2. 34> ^^^^^ bie beutfd^e 2lrt ^u reifen gar nii^t.

1.ES. XXVII.l THE INFINITIVE. 2O9

I. 3Bie [oil id) aufaugen, urn e^^ 3()nen 311 erflaren?
2. Mad)m 6ie ben Seamten, (affen ©ie micf) ben
3leifenben fein.

I. 9?un alfo, e§ tft 3^it abjufal^ren. @te tperben S^r
93tEetfd)oncseId[tI)akn?
2. 3att)o^I, id; tt)ei^ Qenug, urn ein billet ^u faufen.

I. SBenn alle^ fertig i[t, [0 ruft ber 3i^9fid)rer : Sltle^
einftetgen !
2. ®a tDerbe id^ nid^t fdumen einjufteigen,

I. S)er ©djaffner fperrt bie 9veifenben in ha§> Soupe

ein; balb Ijeifst e^: ®ie^en an^[teigen!

2. 2BoI(en ©ie bie (Siite I)aben, mir ba§ gu erfldren?

I. S[t e^ St)nen ju inel, ba^ jn erraten?

2. SKeint eg tr)ol)I, bie ^^affagiere nai) ©ie^en foden au^-
fteigen ?

I. ®etroffen ! Etc., etc.

Reading 27.

ajforgen mn§ id) fort t)on fjier
Unb niu^ 9l6fdjieb nel)men;

leave take

D bn aIter)(^on[te Qkx !

charmer

©djeiben, ba<3 bringt ©rdmen.

grief

210 THE PARTICIPLES. [Les. XXVIII.

S)a id) bic^ fo treu geliebt,

When

U6er aEe Tta'^tn,

measure

(SoU xdj bi(^ t)erlaffen,
©oU irf) bi(^ Derlaffen.

SBenn ^tDet gute greunbe fittb,

S)te einanber feitnen,
©onrt' unb 5Konb betDcgen [td^,

move (from their courses)

@^e fie [id^ trennen.
9?od) t)iel grower ift ber ©c^merj,

SBenn ein treu t)erliebte^ §erj
Sn bie grembe jie^et,

foreign lands

Sn bie grembe jie^et

LESSON XXVIII.

The Participles.

1 . T/ie participle is preceded by its modifiers ; the
chief concern is how to render English participles by
other constructions.

2. Sttbem cr ntcitte Stimnte prtc, tarn bet im

Hearing my voice ( ) the in-

S^attcn ftel^cnbe ^iingling )3lii^lid^ ^crtiorgclaufcn unb

the-shade-standing youth came suddenly running forth and

griff ben SRSuBer entfc^Ioffen an*

attacked the robber decidedly

Les. XXVIII.] THE PARTICIPLES. 211

3. Read this sentence carefully; note the posi-
tion and form of the German participles, also where
English might use other participles. The parti-
ciples are much less used in German than in English,
as is explained in detail below.

I. Present Participle.

4. The present participle may be used as an
attributive adjective, but as predicate adjective only
in a few cases, and these where the participle has
become more or less independent, such as retjenb,
'charming,' rafenb, * frantic,' etc. As has been
noted already, the so-called * progressive form ' of
the verb does not occur in German. Thus we may
say, bie aufge^enbe ©onne, *'the rising sun," but not
bie Sonne ift anfgef)enb. Unlike the English, the
German attributive adjective may even be limited
by a phrase, as bie Ijinter bem 93erge fintenbe Sonne,
lit. "the behind-the-mountain-sinking sun," or by
an object, as ber il)n 6e(etbtgenbe 3tebrnd, lit. '^the
him-off ending expression." In official and encyclo-
pedia style this condensation is often carried to great
lengths.

5« Of course this participial adjective can be used
substantively, a noun being understood, as ber $Rei=
'Imht, * the traveler,' ha^ Seletbigenbe, *the offensive'
(act or expression). But otherwise the participle
is not used substantively, being replaced as verbal
noun by the infinitive. See Lesson XXVII.

212 THE PARTICIPLES. [Les. XXVIIl.

6. A few present participles may be used as
adverbs, as auffallenb, 'strikingly,' au^neljmenb,
* exceptionally.'

7. The great majority of cases in which the
present participle in English takes the place of a
clause must in German be rendered by a clause.
Thus the adjective construction, ** A man carrying
a heavy load," must in German be turned into a
relative clause : Sin Wann, ipeld^er eine fd^tDcre Saft
tragi (or trug); and the many cases in which
the participial phrase is an adverbial element of
time, cause or manner, such as *' Meeting me this
morning, he asked me to dine," •* Not knowing what
else to do, I accepted," " Holding tight with both
hands, he kept from falling," should all be turned
into clauses with the proper conjunction introdu-
cing the finite verb. In classic poetry these con-
structions with the participle are not infrequent in
German, but modern prose avoids them.

8. Finally the absolute participial construction,
as ** My friend not liking the letter, I wrote another,"
must always be rendered as a clause, " Since my
friend did not like the letter," etc.

II. Past Participle.

9. The past participle finds its chief use in the
formation of the perfect tenses and of the passive
voice.

Les. XXVIII.] THE PARTICIPLES. 21 3

10. But it is also used freely as adjective, both as
attribute and as predicate, and, through the adjec-
tive, as substantive : (£r ift eingelabcn, bie ©ingela-
benert, etc. In the same way it is also used as an
adverb, and several past participles serve as con-
junctions and prepositions: gefe^t, 'granted,' a\\^-
genommen, * excepted' or * excepting,' etc.

11. Adjective and adverbial phrases with the
past participle are much more common than with
the present, but for most of these constructions in
English German prefers a clause. Thus "A man
beloved by everybody," may be rendered Sin tion
jebermann geltebter Tlann, but a relative clause is
much better. So in *' Offended by the expression,
I withdrew," while we may say S)urc^ ben Sln^brnrf
betetbigt, jog \iS) mid) juriicf, the clause S)a ic^ bnrc^
ben Sln^brnd beleibigt tvav, etc., is perhaps more
common. With the past participle even the abso-
lute construction is permitted, though less common.
®te Slrbett t)oIIenbet, begaben tDtr un^ jur 9inf)e, better
9lte bie Slrbett DoHenbet wax, etc.

12. After !ommen and geljen, the past participle
in German represents the mode of motion or the
gait, as @r tarn gelaufen, *'He came running."

13- The past participle alone is used as a substi-
tute for the imperative in military and other lordly
commands, as Stufgepafjt, *'Pay attention"; 9^tdjt
lang gefetert, "Do not rest long," etc.

214 THE PARTICIPLES. [Les. XXVIII.

III. Future Passive Participle.
14. The present participle with 511 constitutes a
future passive participle, as an attributive adjective
only, in such constructions as, Sine nicfjt ju Derjet()enbe
Sumniljeit, "A stupidity not to be pardoned."

Vocabulary.
bcr (Svfolg, success, 7'esulL tciuft^ett, disappoint.

bcr %\a\if plan. bur^tricbett, thorough.

bic (Srflarmtjl, explanation. erltiad)fett, grown up.

aufatmctt, take breath. bCtblitfft, dazed, co7ifused.

ttUi^marfieU, arra^tge. m\\\\\s\% laconically.

einfc^en, see, recognize. ttUUltterbrU^Ctt, uni7iterrupt-
evluaf|nCtt, mentiojt, refer to. edly.

fuu!c(lt, sparkle. JJCfcl^t, supposing, granted.

^or(i)cn, //>/^?;2. gefaffett, «r«/w, <ri?^/.

^ertJorbrtttcjeu, produce. nii^ltt^, 1 ^^j^/z//.

Idrf)cltt, j^wz/^. bc^iilfliri^, J helpful.
fc^Iic^teit, settle.

Exercise XXVIII.

I. SSor greiibe Ictd^elnb fam ^ ber junge 5Kann fetnem
grcunbc cntgegen.' 2. a}?it funfelnbcm 2luge erjdfilte er
Doit jeincm Srfolge. 3. S)er in einfadjert 9Borten Gr==
^^dl)Ienbe (jatte 6alb t)oIIenbet. 4. Slufatmenb {)or(ijte er
aitf bie 311 ertt)artenbe 9luttDort. 5. S)er greimb fal)
ctiua^ lierbtiifft aiu3. 6. i^on ber 9?adjricfjt getaufdjt,
antlportete er nur !urj iinb ein[tl6ig. 7. S)er Siingling
fing iDieber o.\\ uitb ).i(aiibertc^ ununter6rod)en fort.^
8. „®efel^t/^ fagte er, „ic^ Ijdtte e^ anber;^ gemadjt, it)a^

Les. XXVIII.] THE PARTICIPLES. 215

bann?'' 9. S)er (SrtDacI)[ene ging JDcg, aba balb !am er
juriidgelaufen. 10. „Setrogeit t)aft bit mic^, bu biirclj^^
triebener @c^dm!'' n. ,,yi\d)t fo (aut gefdjrieen!'' hat
ber ?tnbere. 12. 5)ann fing ber 9Utcre ettDQio ge(a[fener
mieber an. 13. Salb iDar bte Sadje au^gemadjt unb
gefd)Iid)tet

^ came to meet. ^ chattered on.

Exercise 28.

I. A young man smiling-with-joy ' came running
into the house. 2. Taking-breath ^he ^began to tell
of his plan. 3. The (man)-addressed looked calmly
at the narrator. 4. Dazed and disappointed the
younger-(man) ceased talking. 5. Why had his
narrative ^ not produced ^the ^result ^to-be-expected ?
6. The grown-up friend seemed to feel [himself]
cheated. 7. He exclaimed : " Supposing I were a
thorough rascal ; would I have done that .? " 8. The
younger man, seeing his error, began excusing him-
self. 9. He spoke of 3 wishing 3 to be useful to
others. 10. This he had hoped to do by 4 writing
jthe jbook 2referred-to. And thus he went on
talking incessantly, n. The explanation being 5
finished, the young man ceased talking. 12. " Spoken
like a man," exclaimed the other ; *'take a seat ! "

" Tr. both as adjective phrase before SJiauil and as relative
clause. 2 Tr. ' that narrated. ^ See Lesson XXVII, I, 6. * See
Lesson XXVII, I, 6. s See this lesson I, 8.

2l6 THE PARTICIPLES. [Les. XXVIII.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bcr S3rieftrager, postman. gefte^cn, confess.

bic 33ncfmarfe, postage-stamp. iJur^eigcM, show.

bic Uu^e, ounce. C^tHc^, hojiest.

bic (l$Cbu[)r, /^^, charge. franHett, postpaid.

ba^ ^OUdert, e^welope. umgcI)CUb, ^^ return mail.

nnf^cbetl, suspend. umftct|Cttb, ^/z //^^ reverse side,

nuffti^tebeu, postpone. reverse.

Ctttri^tCtt, pay. itberttiebett, exaggerated.

Conversation 27. — Der Brieftrdger.

I. |)aben ©ie ben ertDarteten 93rief empfangen?

2. SZein, ben erti:)arteten Srief ^abe id^ nic^t em))fangen.
I. Stant ber Srieftriiger geritten ober gefdjren ?

2. Sein^ t)on beiben ; er !am gegangen.
I. (£f)rltcl) geftanben, I)at er nidjtio gebrac£)t ?

2. 5Run ja, el^rlic^ geftanben, er l^at einen Srtef gebrarf)t.
I. 2Bar ber Srtef franfiert ober nic^t?

2. 2)er rnir iiberbrad^te 33rtef tDar franfiert.
I. SSorgejeigt; id) ntod)te ben Srief anfet)en.

2. SSor^eigen barf id^ if)n nic^t.
I. SSerben ©ie ben Srief nmgel)enb beantoorten ?

2. 5Ric^t umge^enb, aber ndd^ften^; aufgefd^oben ift
nic^t aufge!)oben.
I . SBato ift "^0^. nmftet)enb anf bem Sont)ert gefc^rieben ?

2. 3c^ ^abe bie umfte^enbe ©eite nid^t betra^tet.
I. 3ft ba!3 nid}t eine reijenbe Sriefmarf e ?

2. „3iei5enb" lommt mir ettt)a§ iibertrieben bor.
I. 3Ba§ ift bie jn entridjtenbe ©ebiifjr fiir einen getnuljn^
lichen Srief?

2. ®ie ©ebiibr auf einen Srief big ju einer ^alben Unje
ift jtt)ei 6ent. Etc., et?.

Les. XXVIII.] THE PARTICIPLES 2\^

Reading 28.

^o§ ^crftroi^ette 9fiing(citt.

93on Gtd^enborff.

Sn einem !u!)ten ®runbe

valley

2)a gefjt ein 9}?u^Ienrab.

millwheel

I : a)?ein' Stebfte t[t t)erf(^tt)unben,

vanished

S)ie bort getDotjnet ^at. : |

@te ^at nttr %xtv! Derjproc^en,
®a6 mtr etn'n Sting babei ;
j : @te I}at bie 2^reu' gebrocfjen,

SRein SRinglein fprang entjn^et. : |

broke in two

Sd) moc^t' ate ©ptelmann reifen

minstrel

SBeit in bie SSelt ^inau^,
I : llnb [ingen meine SBeijen,

lays

Unb ge£)n Don §au^ ju §au§. : |

^or' id) ba^ 2Knf){rab ge^en,
Sc^ ttJei^ ni(i)t tDa^ ic^ tt)iE;
(:Sc^ modjt' am liebften fterben,
^a tpar'^ auf einmal [till. : I

2l8 THE SUBJUNCTIVE. [Les. XXIX.

LESSON XXIX.

Details of the Subjunctive.

1. Since the Subjunctive in German has more
distinct forms than in English ^ it is necessary to
e^nploy m.ore care in learning its forms and its uses,

2. ^cr ^Priifibcnt mcmte, bcr junge 9Kann fe^e tiw^,
^\^ 06 cr tto^ .^offnung pttc, bag cr bie ©telle tx-^
^alten filnne.

3« Learn this sentence ; examine the subjunc-
tives, note on what each is dependent and the
nature of the uncertainty imphed.

4. As indicated in Lesson XIX, the governing
factor in the use of the Subjunctive Mood is the
intent of the speaker or writer. If he wishes
to express uncertainty, doubt or negation, the verb
in the subordinate clause is Subjunctive, but if he
wishes to treat the proposition in question as a fact,
the verb is Indicative.

5. However, a series of practical rules can be
given to aid the student in doubtful cases.

6. The Subjunctive Mood is used :

I. After certain verbs, adjectives or nouns with
the senses : affirmation, doubt, denial, question,
fear, hope, wish, command, belief, feeling, report.
After some of these words it is less easy to regard
a subordinate clause as implied fact, but it is pos-
sible after any of them, hence the final test is the

Les. XXIX.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 219

intent of the speaker. This makes it possible to
express in German many fine shades of meaning
that are not to be given in EngUsh with so few
words. Sc^ befiirdjte, bafe er franf jet expresses no
more than the fear ; ^d) befiirdjte, bafe er fran! ift im-
plies a conviction to this effect. ^6) t)erlancje, ba^
er f)eimget)t, expects the result much more confidently
than 3(^ Derlange, ha^ er t)etmgel)e. After words in-
dicating * report * the construction is commonly
called "indirect discourse," but is subject to the
same rule as after other governing words. Ttan \aQt,
ba^ er Iran! fet leaves the matter as report ; Wan
fagt, ba^ er frani ift assumes the report to be true.

Note that the governing word may be a noun or
an adjective quite as well as a verb. 2)ie ^^urdjt,
bafe er Iran! [ei ; Sc^ bin begierig, ha^ er gef)e.

The effect of one governing verb in the indirect discourse may
continue throughout a long paragraph, whereas in EngHsh it is
necessary to repeat the verb of report with almost every new
sentence. The governing verb may even be implied from the
beginning, as (Sr ^citte t)a^ getan ? i. e. " Do you say that he did
that ?"

2. After certain conjunctions : afe iDenn and afe
ob invariably ; bamit, um ba^ and ba^, ' in order
that', usually ; ob and tDenn, * whether', ' if ' usually
in past tenses, less frequently with present tenses.
SBenn introducing a pure (hypothetical) condition
is followed by the indicative,

220 THE SUBJUNCTIVE. [Les. XXIX.

3. As the Conditional, expressing the hypotheti-
cal conclusion after various sorts of conditions, both
the forms with tDiirbe and the shorter subjunctive
forms used as substitutes (see Lesson XIX).

4. As the optative Subjunctive, expressing a
wish, which may usually be interpreted as dependent
on some verb or conjunction understood. 3Sare ic^
nur reii^ ! (fo tDiirbe id^ gtiidltc^ fetn) ; Slc^ (tc^ tDoIIte),
ba^ ic^ reic^ tvaxt ! O tjcitte id) ha§> nid^t gejagt ! etc.

5. The Subjunctive is used for the Imperative.
®et)en tt)tr, "Let us go" ; (£r ge{)e, "Let him go."

Vocabulary.
bet Q^ianht, belief. tun, act.

bie 5lufga!ie, lesson, exercise, itBereinftimmen, agree.

bte SeftiOtt, lesson. Unmeife, unwise.

bie ^erien, holiday {s). ftrenge, severe.

^(i^ Stubium (pi. -ten), study, raf^, fast, swift.
Braut^en, ) ^^^^ tiurgeriirft, advanced.

biirfett, ) ^ fottft, otherwise, besides.

fotbettt, take, require.

Exercise XXIX.

I. ©c^reiben tt)ir fcf)neller, bamtt tr)tr nid^t bie le^ten
feien! 2. SBaren \o\x bod) fdjon mtt ber Slufgabe fertig !
3. SBenn \\kx e§ auc^ iDdren, fo !ommt gteic^ eine anbere
barauf. 4. SBtr mufeten aber bei ber itad)ften ntd)t fo
rafc^ arbeiten. 5- S)er 2ef)rer l)offte, bafs tt)ir eine Idn^
gere Slufgabe ne^men !6nnten ! 6. 5Da^ xohxt nur ^albe

Les. XXIX.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 221

2(r6eit, metnte ' er. 7. @t ()dtte gett)i3()nttc^ t)ie( t)orgc==
riicftere ©d^iiler ge^abt 8. ijaben @te iljit gefragt, o()
fie gelDofinUcf) Uier ©tubten f)aben ? 9. Sr tDeife fd)on,^
bafe bte[e Slufgabe lang genug tft, UJenn ber ©c^iiler [onft
brei ©tubien I)at 10. Xut er bodj,3 ate Ijatten iDir
fonft ntc[)t!3 ju fc^retben! n. S^ tt)oIIte, tvix fonnteit
einmal gerten ^aben. 12. 9Ketn SSater tuunjc^t, ba^ id^
ber erfte in ber Stlaffe jei. 13. ?Iber tomn bu e^ bift
{tvaxt\U), fo !ann (fonnte4) ic^ e^ nidE)t fein. 14. S)ein
Skater {)at tDot)t geljort, ba^ ber Sef)rer ftrenge i[t (fei)4.

15. @^ ift bod) tDO^I beffer, er bleibe bei biefem ©lauben.

16. Sd) tDerbe xtjU tDiffen laffen, ha^ er e^ nic^t ift.

* Lit. * thought,' but implying that the thought was expressed,
hence translate 'said.' ^ well enough. ^Why; see Lesson
XXVI, 2, 5. ** Translate a second time, using the verbs in paren-
theses.

Exercise 29.

I. The teacher asked whether anyone in the class
had written all the sentences. 2. Some of the
pupils thought that the exercise was too long.
3. All agreed that it was pretty difficult. 4. The
teacher demanded ^that 2they ^give ^two ^hours (to)
jthe ^work. 5. If this were not enough, he would ^
make the lesson shorter. 6. The pupils acted as
though they were really disappointed. 7. If they
had not been so 2- they would probably have said so 2-.
8. *^ If any one have not time," said the teacher, "he
need but 3 say so 2-." 9. "Even if we were more

222 THE SUBJUNCTIVE. [Les. XXIX.

advanced," said some, 2" we ^could ^scarcely ^do

that 4 .much." 10. The teacher feared that he had
4 5

been miwise. n. The pupils knew that he had been
so 2-. 12. If one lesson takes two hours ^ [then] 5 ^four
^will ^take ^eight ^hours. 13. I am sure that no one
can give that much time (to) his studies. 14. If
only the day had thirty hours ! 15. He needs at
least forty-eight hours in order that he finish his
work.

^Future subjunctive (indirect discourse dependent on *'he
said " implied). *e^. ^nur. ^fo. ^ jo.

Vocabulary for the Conversation.

bcr @l^trm, shade, sunshade ox rcbCtt, speak, talk.

umbrella. tlCtbCtbcU, spoil, ruin.

bcr DflcnCttfr^trm, umbrella. ftiiren, disturb.

ber SJlo^fi^tD (pi. -OJ), mos- BefOtflt, anxious.

quito. "^^XW^^, that way.

^(aubent, talk, chatter. fji^tUCtgCU, keep still.

Conversation 28. — Per 5pa3iergang.

I. ©agten ®ie, ba^ @te fertig feien ?
2. 5lein, id) fagte, ba^ id^ nic^t fertig fei.

I. ®e^en tDtr nac^ bem gfuffe [pajieren!
2. ©e^en tDtr bod^ Iteber \k(x&j bem 9Balbe !

I. ^iinfcljen @te, ba^ ber ©ruber mitgelje?
2. 6^ ift tDol^l beffer, er bleibe ^u §aufe.

I. SBirb er uivo ftoren, iDciin cr iii:ti]el]t?

2. ©r tt)irb un^ nid;t ftoren, tDenn er ru^ig bleibt.

Les. XXIX.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 22 3

I. Soil id) iljn fragen, oh er rul)tc] Wcibcn fann?
2. ^a, fragen ©ie i^n nur, ob er f(f)tt)eigen fann.

I. S^erlangen ®ie benn, baf] er gar nicf)t rebe?
2. ^c^ i)erlange iDemgften'o, ba^ er nid^t !plaubere.

I. @te!)t c^ ntdjt an^^, aU ob e^> regnen tDerbe?
2. 6^ fie^t freilic^ barna(^ au^, aber ge^en tvxx bod^ !

I. ^ragen @te bod) einen ©d)irm, bamit St)r |)ut ntc^t
tierborben iDerbe !
2. ®attttt ©ie ntd^t beforgt feien, ne^me id) einen 9{egen=
fc^irm mit,

I. §aben @ie get)ort, ba^ e^ im SBalbe SWo^fito^ gebe?
2. Qd^ ^abe e^ ^Wav ge^ort, aber ic^ glaube nic^t, ba^ e§
h:)a^r fei.

Etc., etc.

Reading 29.

(Silt Srief.

^ein lieber ©ro^fo^n!

^rf) banfe 2)ir fiir beinen Srief, Saburd^ ^aft 2)u mir
eine g^reube gemac^t. ^lod) lieber ni5rf)t' ' ic^ S)ic^ felbft
bier ^aben» Qd^ tt)o(Ite, ^u fonnteft fliegen unb Idmeft gu
nn^, tt)ie eine 2erd^e. 2Bir ti:)otIten ®irf) rec^t ^flegen^ unb
(ieb ^aben. 3<^ ^^b^ ^i<^ ^^^^ erfrfjredft/ ba^ ®u i;)oran
ft^eft in ber erften San! unb befommft immer 9^ummer 1.
^mn id) bin bange/ 3)u bift ^u flei^ig. — ®ie liebe ®ro^=
mutter moc^te and) gem nacb barmen fommen, unb jie fjat
2)td^ unb aKe fel^r lieb unb moi^te &nd) gem fe^en unb
fiiffen, i^x fleinen ©^iebogeL ©§ ift un§ fel^r leib,5 ba^

224 THE INDECLINABLES. [Les. XXX.

\mx ®uer £teb(f)en an 93ater§ ©eburt^tag mcf)t ^oren
fonnten. 2tber e§ ift ju tt)eit, unb bie STone finb tt)D^l
untertDegg erfroren ober Dom SBinbe i:)ertt)eE)t. ^rf) ii:)oHte,
ic^ fonnte einmal mit Qnd) jingen unb f^)te(en unb fod^en.
®ein ©ro^t)ater,

3^ i\ .^ r u m m a c^ e r.
^mogcn; id) ntbd^tc noc^ Ueber, I should like still better.
^ rec^t ^flegett, take good care of. ^ ^ ^^^g ^|^({^ ^.gf^t er[d)re(f t, I
was greatly startled. * id^ bin bangc, I am afraid. ^ ®§ ift un«
fc^r leib, we are very sorry.

LESSON XXX.

The Indeclinables.

1. T/ie hidecli7tables, especially ja, \^^^f "^^^f
rtiO^I and auc^, constitute fmich of the distinctive at-
mosphere of colloquial German. The student should
cultivate a feeling for them and use them on every
possible occasion.

2. tlnfct 9k(i^6ar ift bp^ mo^I fii^on angcf ontmcn ;

why ! surely

ItJir fc^ctt j[a bort ba<§ Sir^t au)^ feincm g^wp^^^ ^criiBcr*
fd^cinen.

3. Learn this sentence; note the meaning of
each particle and its place, comparing with the
English.

Under Indeclinables will be grouped such gen-
eral instructions as can be given regarding ad-
verbs, prepositions, conjunctions and interjections.

Les. XXX.] THE INDECLINABLES. 22$

I. Adverbs.

4. The adverb is indeclinable, but has forms of
comparison, which have been given, Lesson XVI.
There is no general ending, like the English -ly, to
form adverbs from adjectives. Every adjective in
its uninflected form may serve as adverb if the
sense permits.

5. A few adverbs may retain the final -e, which
was once the common termination of most adverbs :
feme, lange, friitje, but this -e is not required.

6. For ordinal adverbs the termination of a
strong genitive is used: erften^, jlDeiten^, firstly,
secondly, etc.

7. Adverbs of direction are formed with the
suffix -tDiirt^, -wards, as ^eimtDdrt^, * homewards,*
xMwaxi^f * backwards/

8. @et}r means * very * when limiting adjectives
and adverbs, but modifying verbs it means 'very
much.' "I love him very much" is not to be
translated Sc^ Hebe tt)n [e{)r Diel, but Sd) ttebe iljn fe(}r.

9« 3Bot)l is not the adverb 'weir = <in a satis-
factory manner (this is gut), nor is it the American
introductory * Well,' with its many shades of mean-
ing (this is German nun), but it represents * to be
sure,' 'indeed,' 'I suppose,' and other similar ex-
pressions, often implying an objection or a doubt
held in reserve. Sc^ fenne i^n tDO^t, " I do indeed
know him, — but — ." ©u fennft ifjn tt)oI)(? "I
suppose you know him ? '*

226 THE INDECLINABLES. Les. XXX.]

10. @(f)on has, aside from its precise sense,

* already,' shades Uke the EngUsh * all right,' *to be
sure,' indicating an unwilling concession. @r ift
jdjon ait genug, *'Oh yes, he is old enough," "He
is old enough, to be sure" (the whole falling inflec-
tion on the word alt). In such cases iX)olj( and jdjon
approach each other closely. Only frequent hear-
ing of these particles will give their fine shades,
but the student who wishes to talk like a German
must learn them.

11. 3ci is confirmatory with implied surprise at
another's ignorance or neglect. @ie finb [a fpat
(stress on jpat), "Why, you're late " ; or (stress on
finb), "Well, you are late (stress on a^r implying
" Don't deny it "). But again, @te finb aber fpat is
expressed by "Well, you are late " ; implying only
surprise. Sci may greatly strengthen an admonition,
%m ba^ la, " O do that " ; Xne ba§ la ntd^t (stress on
[a), " Don't do that for anything."

12. S)odj has, aside from its common sense,

* after all,' many nice shades, adding strength to an
appeal, or implying surprise. It may be substituted
in the sentences of the preceding paragraph, in the
first (stress on fpat) with scarcely appreciable change
of meaning; in the second (stress on bod)), "You're
late after all " ; in the third, with either of two
meanings, **Do it anyway," or "O come, do it";
in the fourth (stress on tuc), " Please don't do that."

Les. XXX.] THE INDECLINABLES. 22/

13. ?{uc^ means *also,' * too,' in which case it
usually follows the word it especially modifies,
though it may precede if this does not cause con-
fusion with the second meaning 'even,' which it
has usually at the beginning of a sentence, ©r l)at
c^o and] gejagt, " He said it too " ; but 91uclj er i)at e^
gefagt, "Even he said it." For * even if,' and) may
follow the subject of the clause, SSenn er e^ and) ge^
fagt i)at, " Even if he said it."

II. Prepositions.

In Lessons V to VII the common prepositions
have been given which govern the accusative, the
dative, and the accusative or dative.

14. A few common prepositions govern the
Genitive case. They are tnegerr, * on account of,'
iDa^renb, * during,' ftatt or anftatt, ' instead of,' and
urn . . . tDiHen, * for the sake of.' When toegen governs
a personal pronoun it occurs in combination, follow-
ing the stem of the pronoun with -et added : meinet^
Uiegen, feinettDegen, if)retti:)egen, unjerettDcgen. The
same treatment is observed with itm . . . tDttleri : um
metnettDtUen, etc.

15 • The prepositions afford innumerable idioms
and are among the most difficult features of German
to acquire because the difficulties cannot be classi-
fied and learned by rule. The pupil should learn
to look for many of these idioms in 'the dictionary

228 THE INDECLINABLES. [Les. XXX.

in connection with the verb with which they are
commonly used, if not found under the head of the
preposition itself. A few of the more familiar
words are discriminated in the Appendix, p. 249 ff.
Reference to these is needed in preparing the
Exercise of this Lesson.

III. Conjunctions.

16. The co-ordinating conjunctions unb, a6er,
enttDeber, ober, atlein, fonbern, benn, have no effect on
the construction in German. Pupils have difficulty
often in understanding why benn, 'for,' is in this
group, as it seems so closely related to * because/
tDetL Observation will show that the sentence is
always practically finished before a benn-clause ; the
benn-clause is supplementary or parenthetical. SIber
may stand wherever in English the word * however '
may be introduced. Free and discreet use of aber
is quite characteristic of a German style.

17. Subordinating conjunctions are many; the
commonest are discriminated in the Appendix,
p. 255. They indicate that the verb should be at
the end of the clause. They introduce mostly
adverbial elements of place, time, cause, manner
and degree, but also objective elements.

18. Adverbial conjunctions are very numerous.
They cause inversion in the clause to which they
belong, being more truly adverbs than conjunctions.

Les. XXX.] THE INDECLINABLES. 229

Yet they show a certain relation to the preceding
clause or sentence.

1. bann; bamate; baim is consecutive =; *next'
or ' thereupon.' S)amate is absolute * then,' ' at that
time.'

2. S)a: t)ier: bort; I)ier is 'here' when con-
trasted with there. Sort is 'there,' 'yonder.* S)a
is used for 'here,' when not contrasted, quite as
much as tjier. Srf) bin ba, " I am here." ©a has
also temporal sense = barauf, ' thereupon.' @r !am
XivS)i, ba cjing ic^ Ijetm, " He did not come, thereupon
(or so) I went home."

3. 9?un: je^t; nun is consecutive and logical,
'now,' 'next.' Sc|t is absolute 'now,' 'at this
time.' Thus we discriminate between bann and
bamate. But the phrase ' now and then ' =? . occa-
sionally, is bann unb tuann.

4. ©od^ : noc^ ; bod) is adversative and emphatic.
9loc^ is temporal and additive. Confusion is caused
here by the double meaning of English ' still ' and
* yet,' both of which render either bod) or noc^. But
the pupil must learn that ' yet ' and ' still ' at the
beginning of the English clause have one meaning,
= bod), and anywhere else another, = nodj, whereas
the German words are not restricted in position.
9^00^ ein means ' another,' i. e., ' one more,' %&j tDiH
nod) etn ®Ia^, " I want another (one more) glass,"
while ein anbere^ means 'an other,' i. e., 'a different.'

230 THE INDECLINABLES. [Les. XXX.

IV. Interjections.

19. 9lc^ corresponds to English * Ah ! ' and also
to * O ! ' It expresses many shades from joy to
grief. Sld^ja! "O yes indeed!" 9(cf), ba^ id) fort
tudre ! " O that I were away from here ! 2(dj ®ott,
'' O God! " or "O Lord! " (the latter shade an ex-
clamation of mere surprise or comical dismay).

Germans use the name of God with much more
freedom than is permitted in English, and yet with-
out irreverence. Thus the above exclamation, or
S)ii liedcr ®ott ! or the asseveration bd ®ott may be
heard without intended offence from ladies and
Christians.

20. To make a better call the words ^euer and
SKorb are prolonged into geuerjo ! and 9Worbio !

21. i^^ui! (pron. hwee) indicates an instantaneous
action. ^Pfut (pron. pfwee) means 'for shame!'
* shame 1 '

Vocabulary.

bcr ^iti^f industry, care ; mit bttig ^ttttomoBtC, automobile.

JJlCtf^, on purpose. \^ix^ 35or^aBcn, purpose.

ber ^a^bar, neighbor. "tS^^^^yxX^t^S^m^t^ school build-
bcr ^au^tle^rcr, head-master, ing.

principal. *^ti^ Ultgltitf, misfortune, ac-
btC 5(ttgft, anxiety. cident.

V\t ayiijglic^feit, possibility. ^a§ 9iatftatti§, courthouse.

bie (^efaljr, danger. errcidjCU, reach, get to.

bie ^Uitf cold. ttUgcllCU, begin, open.

bic ^435cifc, way, maimer. \itXV^\^t\\^ calm, compose.

Les. XXX.] THE INDECLINABLES. 23 1

gcfa^rU(i^y dangerous. it^erfalj'rcn, run over.

fc^it^eu, save, protect. tiCrmeibCtt, avoid.

forgCU fiit fltJ^, take care of ttlCtbCtt {'dXi^), become {of),

oneself tttttiorfid^tig, careless,

telC^Jonicrett, telephone.

Exercise XXX.

I. SntiDeber ba^ 9Kdbdjen muB jur ®(i)ule gegangen
fein ober e^ iDirb auf [einem dimmer feiu. 2. @te ift
aber t)or einer ©tunbe an bem genfter Uorbeigegangeu.

3. |)at fie benn nidjt^ t)on i()rem SSorf)aben gejagt?

4. @ie ^at nic^t nur ntd^t^ babon ge[agt, [onbern fie I)at
mic^ mit glei^ uermieben. 5. DbtDo^t fie oI)ne iinfer
aSiffen au^ bem §aufe ging, fo I)a6e ic^ bod^ if)rettt)egen
feine SIngft. 6. (Sie tuirb mit ben anbern ©d^itlern um
jtt)dlf U^r t)on ber ©d^ule fommen. 7. 9I(^, @ie fagen
ba^ nnr fo, bamit id) feine Slngft I)abe. 8. Sd) Derge^e
ja Dor SIngft ; liegt benn 't^^^ ©djnigebaube \o6i t)on
£)ier? 9- Sd) benfe an bie 9J?oglid)feit, ba^ fie t)on
einem Slutomobil iiberfa^ren tuorben tDare. 10. SSor
biefem Ungtiid \)0i e^ bod) I)ier feine ®efal)r! n. ®a^
mag fc^on fein, aber toenn e^ aud^ feine ®efa{)r \^^i, fo
tt)ill id) bo(^ fiir mid^ fel)en. 12. @ie tDolIen aber bod^
6ei biefer Sdlte nid^t in bie ©tabt ge^en? 13. Unb
ttjenn id^ nnr bei bem "Ro^^^^x fragen tDoKte, tDann
bie @dt)nle angef)t? 14. 2BaI)renb @ie fid) anf biefe
SBeife bern^igen, tt)ill i(^ nad^ ber @d)nte teIepf)onieren.
15. Stn ben ^;)auptief)rer natiirlid) ; tDer toeife, ob fie nii^t
\t%i bortift?

232 THE INDECLINABLES, [Les. XXX.

Exercise 30.

I. Oh dear', who knows what has "become of that
girl ? 2. Of what girl are you speaking then ?
3. As if you did not know ! 4. Why, my daughter
has either gone down town or to school. 5. To us,
however^, she said nothing about it. 6. Although
she had her old dog with her, yet we have great
fear 3 of some accident. 7. O pshaw 4! however
dangerous it may be in the city, she will take care
of herself all-right. 5 8. In order that you may be
saved from this anxiety, I will telephone to her
teacher. 9. But what if she has not yet gotten
to the school-building ? 10. When you telephone,
do^ ask the teacher when the school begins.
II. I will not only telephone, but I will go my-
self to the school. 12. She may be ever so care-
less, but she will surely? come safely home. 13. I
will telephone from the schoolhouse, whether she
has been there or is on the way home. 14. That
will relieve me very (much), even though there is
no real danger. 15. Well, 31-suppose ^you ^know
where the school is. 16. One must go past the
court-house. 17. Even if I did not know, yet I
could ask. 18. But a man, even the best of them,
likes to avoid questions. 19. How you talk!^

' m-) ®ott 1 ^ aber. ^ ^^q^i a ^^ ^^^8 ! ^ fc^on. ^ ya, after
verb, ^bod), ^Sag @ie fagenl

Les. XXX.] THE INDECLINABLES. 233

Vocabulary for the Conversation.
bcr BttJcrf, purpose. bcr ^ori^ft^ttttcl^terp high-

bcr ©(i^nftftcKCf, author. school teacher.

biC 9Wutterf^rar!^|C, native wxitxXtw Judge.

tongue. tJiti^tio, thorough.
bic UnibCtfitot', university.

Conversation 29. — Dom Stubtum ber 5prad?e.

I. SBarum ftubieren @ie benn iiberljaupt S)eut[(^?
2. ^c^ ftubiere ®eutfc£), bamit i^ e^ f^re^en lerne.

I. ©rtuarten @te e^ jemate tDte ein S)eutfd}er ^u fpred^en ?
2. 3)a§ nun tt)ot;l nic^t, allein \&j tt)itt e§ fj)recf)en, fo gut
\i) fann.

I. §aben @te benn gar feinen anbent 3^^d babei?
2. g^reilid^, id^ h)il( nid^t nur fj)re(^en, fonbern o.\x6:j tefen
lernen.

I. Unb ju tt)el(^em 3^^de moHen ®ie tefen fonnen?
2. ^d^ tDttt ja bie gro^en beutfd^en ©c^riftftetter in if^rer
SKutterf^rad^e tefen.

I. SBotten @ie auf einer beutfd^en Untoerfitat ftubieren ?
2. 3d^ mod^te auf einer beutfc^en Unit>erfitdt ftubieren,
ober bod^ tt)enigften^ in ®eutfd^lanb reifen.

I. SBei mem t)aben @ie bi^t)er 3)eutfct) ftubiert?

2. %ij tjabe e§ bei einem ^od^fc^uUe^rer au^ ^ari;)arb
ftubiert.

I. @r tDar tt)o^t ein tud)tiger Sel)rer?

2. So tt)eit id^ urteiten fann, ift er ein fet^r guter
Se^rer.

234 THE INDECLINABLES. [Les. XXX.

I. Unb @ie tDoUen tDciter ftubieren, tDaljrenb @ie l)ter
finb?
2. "^aWoU, id) f)abe bie ©^^rad^e lieber, je Idnger id) fie
ftubiere. Etc., etc.

Reading 30.

(SJuter monh, bu gei^ft fo ftitte

3n bie 2lbenbh)Dlfen l^in ;
Sift fo ru^ig unb id) fu^Ie,
®a^ ic^ olfjne 9luf)e bin.
3:raurig folgen meine Slide beiner ftiHen, beitern ' 93a{^n : ^
D tr)ie l^art ift mein ©efd)icf e, ba^ id) bir nid^t folgen fann !

©uter SKonb, bir tr>ill ic^'^ fagen,
2Ba^ mein banged ^erje frdnft,^
Unb an tt)en, mit bittern ^lagen,
35ie betriibte^ ©eele benft.
©uter SRonb, bu fannft e^ tt)iffen, tt)eiIbufo i;)erfc^tt)iegen5

bift,
SBarum nxeine 2^rdnen flie^en unb mein ^erj fo traurig ift.

Sort, in jenem fleinen Stale,

SBo bie bunfein Sdume ftel^n,
3Ja^' bei jenem 2Safferfatte,
SBirft bu eine §utte fel)n ;
©ef^^ burc^ SBdlber, md)' unb ffiiefen,^ blitfe fanft hnxd)'^

g^enfter ^in,
©0 erblitfeft7 bu glifen, aHer 3Kdbd;en ^onigin.

' cheerful. ^ path. ^ grieves. * troubled.

* discreet.

APPENDIX.

APPENDIX.

Rules for Gender.

1. Masculine are: Names of male living beings un-
less ending in -d)tn or -lein, including the noun agent
in -er : ^naht, boy, Setter, teacher ; names of seasons,
months and days, and most stones : ©ommer, 3[Rontag,
^iefel, flint, ^teg, gravel ; polysyllables in -tg, -ic^, and
-ing, ^ortig, king, ^ranic^, crane, §ering, herring.

2. Feminine are : names of female living beings un-
less ending in -c^en or -lein : %xavL, woman, <Qenne, hen ;
most names of trees and flowers, IXtme, elm, ©id^e, oak,
9telfe, pink ; most polysyllables ending in -e not names
of male living beings and not with the prefix ®e- ; all
polysyllables in -ei, -ie, -f^ett, -feit, -f(i)aft, -ulb, -nn^,
-in, -if, -ion, -tdt (most of which mark abstract nouns):
^artei, party, ^opk, copy, ©d^onfjeit, beauty, 3^ertig!eit,
skill, g^reunbfc^aft, friendship, ©ebulb, patience, ®ul=
bung, toleration, ©dngerin, singer, Sogif, logic, Seftion,
lesson, Jlaritdt, rarity.

3. Neuter are: all nouns ending in -cfjen and -lein,
regardless of the natural gender, names of metals and
of most materials, most names of countries and cities,
the infinitive when used as a substantive, words and
signs not properly nouns when used substantively.
Most nouns with the prefix @e- if not names of male

237

238 APPENDIX.

creatures, most nouns in -ni^, -turn, and -fal : 2Rdb($en^
girl, ^ndblein, boy, ©olb, gold, SCuc^, cloth, ®e^en,
going, 'i^a^ „2Benn/' the ' if.'

4. Compound nouns, with very few exceptions, have
the gender of the last element : ba^ Sanb, ba§ 3Sater[anb.

Double Gender, Double Declension Double
Meaning.

In many nouns, usually words of less frequent occur-
rence, the gender is not fully established. The author-
ity of any good dictionary may be accepted.
■^ I. But when meanings are differentiated along with
gender or declension, attention must be paid to the
latter also.

2)ie 2K^), a/p, ber 311^, nightmare,

®a§ 93anb, ribbon^ bond, ber 93anb, volume,

®a^ 33auer, bird-cage, ber Sauer, peasant,

®a§ Sunb, bundle, ber 33unb, tie, knot, league,

®a§ Sf)Or, choir (part of a church), ber 6^or, chorus,

®ag ®rbe, inheritance, ber @rbe, >^<f/r.

®a§ (also ber) ©ift, poison, bie ©ift, dowry,

SDa^ (also ber) ©e^alt, salary, ber ©ef^alt, contents,

®ie §eibe, >^^^//^, ber §eibe, heathen.

®te §ut, guard, ber §ut, >^^/.

Ste ^unbe, knowledge, ber ^uttbe, customer.

®a§ ?!Jlarf, marrow, bie SDtarl, boundary,

2)ie 3Jlaft,>^^^r, ber 3Raft, ^^^/.

S)a^ 3Keffer, ^/^^^, ber 3Keffer, measurer.

APPENDIX. 239

®a^ Slei^, twig, ber SfJei^, rice,

2)a^ Sd;ilb, sign, ber 6rf)i(b, j"///<?/^.

3)ie ©ee, i"^^, ^<:^^//, ber <See, lake.

®a^ Steuer, rudder, bie 6teuer, /<^.r.

®a^ ^i\\i, foundation, ber ©tift,/<^.

®a^ S^au, r^/^, ber %<x\x, dew.

Sa§ S'eil, J-z^^r^, ber %^\\, fraction, part,

2)a^ 3:^or, gate, ber %Qx,fool.

®a^ SSerbienft, /^j', ber SSerbienft, wm/.

®ag 2Be^r, //^/«, bie SSe^r, defense.

2. The declension of these words differs according
as their gender throws them into different classes, as
ba^ ©d^ilb, bie 6c^i(ber, ber ©c^ilb, bie ©c^ilbe.

3. A considerable number of nouns have two plurals,
but without difference of meaning. In the following
the difference in the plurals coincides with a difference
of meaning :

2)ag Sanb, tie, pi. 33anbe ; ribbon, pi. 93dnber.

2)a^ ®ing, pi. ®inge, general sense ; pi. SDinger, in
pity or contempt.

®a§ ®eft(^t, vision, pi. ©efi^te, face, pi. ©efid^ter.

®a§ Sanb, estate, pi. Sanbe ; country, pi. Sdnber.

Sag Sic^t, candle, pi. Sic^te ; light, pi. Sic^ter.

Sag 2Bort, connected speech, pi. SBorte, vocables, pi.
Sorter.

®er SKann, z^^^i-^^/, soldier, pi. 3Kannen; w^«, pi.
9Jldnner.

2)er g^rift. Christian, pi. g^riften ; ef)rift(ug), C/^r/>/,
has no pi., but the singular is generally given with full
Latin forms : g^riftug, S^rifti, g^rifto, S^riftum.

240 APPENDIX.

Uses of the Article.

1. The definite article is used in German and not in
Eriglish : With abstract nouns and with names of mate-
rials in general assertions : 3)te Siige ift ^ci^Ud^, False-
hood is odious ; ®ie Sutter ift teuer, Butter is dear — but
not in proverbs, as $Rot brid^t ©fen. Need breaks iron
(i. e. necessity knows no law) ; so also with class nouns
in the plural : (£r Itebt bie SSogel, He loves birds ; with
3Sater, 5!)iutter, and Christian names used in the family :
5Der aSater ift ba. Father is here; 2Bo ift bet ^arl?
Where is Charles ? with proper names when preceded

by an adjective, but not in apostrophe : ber Heine ^arl,
little Charles, ber alte 93lu(^er, old BlUcher ; with names
of seasons, months and days : ber ©ommer ift l^ier,
summer is here, ber ^uli ift £)et^, July is hot — but not
when the month is preceded by a date, as ber i;)ierte
3uli, the Fourth of July, and note here also the absence
of preposition or genitive ; with feminine names of
countries : bie ©d^h)ei§, Switzerland ; in many idiomatic
phrases, as in ber ©d^ule, in school, im §tmmel, in
heaven,

2. The definite article serves often instead of a pos-
sessive adjective with names of parts of the body, the
clothing and the kindred of the subject, because the
possession is clearly implied ; @r \jOX ben §ut, ba^ 93ein,
bie 5!Jlutter tierloren, he has lost his hat, his leg, his mother.
Sometimes the article is accompanied by a dative of
possession : ^fjm ift bie ^Btutter geftorben. His mother
(lit., the mother to him) has died.

APPENDIX. 241

3. The definite article takes the place of the indef-
inite article in the distributive expression = per : ^^i)n
pfennig ba§ $funb, ^en pence a pound, einmal bte 2BDcf)e,
once a week,

4. The indefinite article is omitted, though used in
English, before the names of occupations and ranks
when used to characterize in the predicate a person
already identified : SiJlein SSruber ift ^aufmann, my brother
is a merchant.

Exceptions to Class i, First Declension.

1. The following nouns have the nominative either
-e or -en, but belong now to this class. However,
those marked ^ have also a genitive without -§, which
gives them thus a possible weak declension throughout :

g^rieben, peace, ^gunfen, spark, ©ebanfe(n), thought,
©lauben, belief, §aufen, heap, 5iame(n), name, ©amen,
seed, 6rf)aben, injury, 3Bi((e(n), will, SBtHe, 9Jame,
®eban!e very rarely have the nominative n.

2. The following add n throughout the plural :
93auer, peasant, ©ei:)atter, 'cousin,' ?Ku§!el, muscle,

Starf)el, sting, 3Setter, cousin, and colloquially ^antojfel,
slipper, ©tiefel, boot,

3. Latin derivatives in -or, take -§ in the singular
and may be placed in this class, but take -en in the
plural; ber ®o!tor, be§ ®oftor^, bte ®o!toren.

4. 33a^er, Bavarian, and ^ommer, Pomeranian, are
weak throughout.

^4^ Al>l>ENmX.

Exceptions to Class 2, I. Declension.

1. The following masculine monosyllables have their
plural in -er, with Umlaut, according to class 3 :

9Kann, man, ©ott, God, Seib, body, ©eift, spirit,
i'Surm, worm, aStc^t, wight (okixd^y in SofetDiifit, villain),
ffialb^/^r^^j"/, ©traud^, /^//j-/^, ©trau^, bouquet, "Oxi, place,
9(anb, r//;/. The first six can be remembered by sim-
ilarity and contrast in meaning.

2. The following masculine monosyllables belong to
the weak declension ; they are grouped so as to make
memorizing easier: g^iirft, prince, %x\Xii, prince, ©raf,
count, §elb, hero, §err, lord, sir, 30lenf^, man, ©brift.
Christian, SRo^r, Moor, 9larr, fool, %^x, fool, Sum^),
vagabond, ©ec!, y^/, ^^/JF, ^fau, peacock, ©!pa^, sparrow,
33dr, bear, §trt, shepherd, ©cfjenf, cupbearer,

3. The following masculine monosyllables are strong
in the singular but weak in the plural: ®orn, thorn,
SWaft, ^//^i-/, Jlert), nerve, '^\c\Sm, psalm, ©ee, /(35>^<?, ©^orn,
spur, ©taat, state, ©tra^l, beam, ray, 3in§, rent, interest.

Exceptions to Class 3, I. Declension.'

1 . The following monosyllabic neuters take -e instead
of -er in the plural : %<x^x, year, §aar, hair, %<xox, pair,
SfJo^r, reed, 6()or, choir, %\^x, animal, §eer, army,
SJteer, ocean, 2Bef)r, dam, 93oot, boat. It will be noted
that they have nearly all a long vowel followed by -r.

2. The following are weak in the plural : 93ett, bed,
§er§, heart, D^r, ear. §er^, has the irregular singular,
§er§, §er§eng, ^er^en, ^er;^.

APPENDIX. 243

Uses of the Genitive Case.
The Genitive Case indicates i. possession, kinship,
authorship, general relationship, verbal object or sub-
ject, partitive relation, etc., mostly relations expressed
by the possessive or by *of ' in English. 2. It is the
object direct or indirect of certain verbs, mostly reflexive,
as frf)onen, to spare, ftc^ erinnern, to remember, bebiirfen,
to need, fid^ fc^dmen, to be ashamed of, berauben, to de-
prive of, 3. The object of certain adjectives, as be=
it)U^t, conscious, fdfjig, capable, geben!, mindful, i;)ott, full,
tt)urbig, worthy. 4. The object of a few prepositions,
as tt)egen, on account of, tt)df)renb, during, ftatt, instead
of, 5. The Genitive sometimes expresses manner or
time, as abenb§, or be§ 2lbenb§, in the evening (custom-
ary or repeated), meine^ SBiffen^, within my knowledge^
leine^tDeg^, by no means.

Uses of the Dative Case.

The Dative Case represents: i. the indirect object
of most transitive verbs, the one to or for or against
whom the action is done : ®er 3Jlann o^ob ber ^^od^ter ba§
Sud^, The man gave his daughter the book; 2. the prin-
cipal object of many verbs that in English are re-
garded as transitive and govern some with and some
without a preposition, the chief meanings being ap-
proach, favor, gratitude, resemblance and their oppo-
sites, as %i>i banfe bem SKanne, / thank the man, 3lnt=
tDorten ©ie bem SSater, Answer your father, 2)a§ 33ud^
ge^ort ber 2^od^ter, The book belongs to the daughter ;

244 APPENDIX.

3. a relation of interest more remote than that com-
monly ascribed to the indirect object, especially with
impersonal verbs and phrases, @§ ge^t bem SSater gut.
The father is prospering, ®ag bric^t ber 50tutter bag §er§.
That is breaking mother's heart (dative of possession),
5!)ia(f)' mir feine ©ummf^eit. Commit no stupidity (ethical
dative) ; 4. the complement of many adjectives with
the meanings given in 2 : 5Da§ ift mir angene^tn. That is
agreeable to me, ©r ift mir lieb, I am fond of him ; 5. the
object of certain prepositions, as mit, au^, nac^, i:)on, ^u,
and of certain others when indicating a state of rest,
as in, t)or, an, etc., ®er SSogel fa^ auf bem Saume, The
bird was sitting on the tree.

Uses of the Accusative Case.

The Accusative Case represents : i. the direct object
of a transitive verb, @r {)at ben §ut. He has the hat ;
and also, 2. the supplementary object of certain tran-
sitive verbs, as Ief)ren, nennen, fragen, @r lel^rte ben
©driller bie 3Kufif, or @r leljrte ben Srf)uler fingen. He
taught the pupil music, or taught him to sing ; "^(xXi
nennt ben 9Jlann ben Sufttgmac£)er, They call the man the
merrymaker ; 3. the cognate object of certain verbs,
(gr f^ielt ein gett)agte§ ©))iel. He is playing a bold
game ; 4. the complement of certain adjectives, which
may also take the Genitive, @g ift einen Scaler h)ert,
// is worth a dollar; 5. the object of certain pre-
positions, as fiir and burd^, and of certain others
when indicating motion toward, as in, auf : ©a^ auf

APPENDIX. 245

ben 33aum, seated itself upon the tree; 6. specific time,
in dates, as ben Iften %vX\, July first (date of a
letter); 7. definite measure of time, space, etc., ©^
bauert etne ©tunbe, // lasts an hour, (£r gebt etne 3[ReiIe,
He is going a mile ; 8. absolute construction, "ti^w, 2^ee
t)orbei, tea (being) past.

Note to 3. — Not every verb that takes a double object in
English does so in German. 'They chose him captain' is in
German @ic tDd^Iten i^n pm §au^ttnann.

Verbs Governing the Genitive Case.

1. With Genitive only : bebiirfen, need, ertDd^nen, men-
tion, gebraud^en, make use, gebenfen, recall, mention, ents
beaten, dispense with, fatten, wait for, la(f)en, laugh,
fd)onen, spare, f^otten, mock, i;)ergeffen, forget. All of
these but f()otten, Iacf)en unb fatten may take the Ac-
cusative instead. (3))otten and (a(f)en take the Accusa-
tive after iiber, and bcirren the Accusative after auf .

2. With Genitive as indirect object: anflagen, accuse,
berauben, rob, entlaffen, dimiss, entfe^en, remove, dis-
possess, uberfuf)ren, convict, iiber^eugen, convince, t)ers
fic^em, assure, tx)urbtgen, think deserving, and the
following reflexives, in which the reflexive pronoun is
the direct object : anne^men, adopt, take up with, be^
bienen, make use, bemdc^ttgen, get possession, ent^ alien,
abstain, erbarmen, take pity, freuen, enjoy, erinnern,
remember, fd^dmen, be ashamed, g^reuen and fcl)dmen
may also take the second object in the Accusative after
liber, erinnern the Accusative after an.

246 APPENDIX.

Verbs Governing the Dative Case.

1. Certain verbs which in English are regarded as
transitive take in German the Dative Case only : antti:)ors
ten, answer^ begegnen, meet, banlen, thank, bienen, serve,
fel^Ien, lack, ail, folgen, follow, gef affen, please, gel^ord^en,
obey, ge^oren, belong, gefrf)e^en, happen, glaubett, believe,
gleid^en, resemble, ^elfen, help, leib tun, grieve (as in @§
tut mir leib, I am sorry), nil^en, serve, be of use, red^t
fein, suit, fd^aben, harm, trauen, trust, tt)iberfteE)en,
resist, tDo^l tun, do good, benefit, and many more with
similar or opposite meanings.

2. The Dative Case as indirect object represents the
person to or for whom the action is done, with verbs
meaning : give, bring, communicate, command, send,
show, advise, and their opposites.

Adjectives Governing the Genitive Case:
33ar, bare, lacking, bett)U^t, conscious, eingeben!, mind-
ful, frei, free, rid, gett)i^, sure, lebig, rid, md(i;ttg, master
of, in control, miibe, tired, fatt, tired, satiated, fd^ulbig,
guilty, fidget, certain, sure, )o^^,full, tr)ert, worth, h)urbt0,
worthy.

Adjectives Governing the Dative Case:
aifjnlid^, similar, angene{)m, agreeable, 6e!annt, familiar,
known, banlbar, grateful, feinb(ltd^), hostile, fremb,
strange, unknown, freunblid^, friendly, folgfam, docile,
ge^orfam, obedient, geit^ad^fen, equal, able, a match for,
gut (only in predicate), kindly disposed, l^olb, gracious,

APPENDIX. 247

favorable^ Ieicf)t, easy, Ite6, dear, na^e, near, fd^lDer,
difficult, teuer, dear, treu, /-r^^^/, iiberlegen, superior,
Derbunben, obliged, borteil^aft, advantageous, ttjert, ^^^r,
precious, tuittfommen, welcome, and many other less
common adjectives with the general sense of approach,
appurtenance, helpfulness, suitability, friendliness, re-
semblance and their opposites.

Adjectives Governing the Accusative:
©etDai^r, aware, getDO^nt, accustomed, Io§, rid, fatt,
sick, tired, tt)ert, worth, may take an accusative instead
of a genitive.

Some adjectives with prepositions unlike those con-
necting the same adjectives in English : ad^tfam (auf)
(ace), attentive to, arm an (dat.), poor in, aufmerffam
auf (ace), watchful of, attentive to, bange t>or (dat.),
afraid of, befd^dmt iiber (ace), ashamed of, beforgt
um (ace), anxious about, bUnb an, or auf (dat.), blind
in (an eye), bofe auf (ace), angry with, eiferfiid^tig
auf (ace), jealous of, em^finblic^ 9^9^tt (ace), sensitive
toward, fd^ig ju (dat.), fit for, franf q,xk (dat.), sick of
(a disease), neibifc^ auf (ace), envious of , reid^ o:(\. (dat.),
rich in, ftd)er i)or (dat.), secure against, ftolj auf (ace),
proud of, t>erliebt in (ace), in love with.

Prepositions Governing the Genitive Case.

3lnftatt, also ftatt, instead of, au^er^alb, outside of,
bie^feit^, on this side of, ^alber (with personal pronouns
-^alben, as beinet^alben or -^alb, with be^^alb) for the

248 APPENDIX.

sake of, innerf^alb, inside of, jenfeit^, on that side of
fraft, by virtue ^(authority given), laut, according to
(a document or command), Idng^, alongside of, mttte(§,
luittelft, by means of (an instrument), oberl^alb, above
(on a stream, road or slope), feiten^, 071 the part of, tro^,
in spite of, rarely in rivalry with (in this sense with
dative), "^ ungearf)tet, despite, notwithstanding, unit)eit,
not far f7'07n, unter^alb, below, i)ermoge, by virtue of,
tDd^renb, during, ^tt)egen, on account of, "^ii^illen, or
^ um . . . iDiCIen, for the sake of Those marked ^ follow
their object.

Prepositions Governing the Dative Case.
2lu^, out of, from, au^er, outside of, aside from, bei,
by, near, at the house of, \imx[.vc\., within (limits of time),
entgegen, toward, against, gegeniiber, fci^cing, opposite,
gemd^, according to, in accordance with, mit, with, to-
gether with, \K(X&j, to, toward (not with persons), after
(sequence), according to, nd(f)ft, near to, nebft, along
with, i7i addition to, famt, together with, fett, since, for
(length of time), i)on, from^ of by (agent in passive
voice), i\x, to (with persons), at, ^utoiber, in opposition to.

Prepositions Governing the Accusative Case.
33i§, until, as far as (in the latter sense more com-
monly bi§ x\.(xi), bi§ auf, 6i§ an, bi^ %\x), burdE), through,
by 77ieans of, fiir, for (a person), gegen, against, of^ne,
without (= not having), um, aroimd, at (time of day),
for (price), ii;)iber, against (opposed to).

APPENDIX. 249

Prepositions with either Dative or Accusative.
When physical motion is expressed or implied the
following prepositions take the accusative, otherwise
the dative. Sometimes an emotion, a purpose, or a
tendency has the same effect as a verb of physical mo-
tion : an, to, at, o?i, auf, 07t, upon, to, toward, for (time
ahead), ^inter, behind, in, in, into, \Kht\i, beside, iiber,
over, above, about (^cause of action), unter, under, among,
i)or, before, against (protection), ^tt)tf d^en, between.

Some Prepositions Discriminated.

1. Sin: am 93ette, at, by, or beside the bed (yet betm
Sette is much the same, and neben bem 93ette, beside
or alongside the bed) ; am g^ieber fterben, to die of

fever (yet we say i;)or ^dlte, or t)or ©ram fterben, and
§unger§ fterben, to die of cold, grief, hunger); an
einem ^ieber leiben, to be ill of or with a fever (but
oca ber ^dlte or t)or Kdlte leiben) ; an ba^ g^enfter ge^en,
to go to the window (but also gum J^enfter ge^en,
not quite the same assurance of getting there ; narf)
bem g^enfter gefjen, to go to or toward the' window ; bi^
(xn ba^ ^enfter ge^ea, to go as far as the window ; t)or
ba§ g^enfter ge^en, to go to, i. e. to a- place just in front
of, the window,

2. At : if on the other hand we take English at,
which is the commonest equivalent of an, we may
note these common cases in which some other pre-
position must be used to render it : at three 0^ clock;
um 3 U^r ; at home, ju §aufe ; at these words, bei

250 APPENDIX.

btefen SSorten ; at the post-office^ auf ber ^oft ; at the
mark, nac^ bem 3^^^^ (fcf)te^en) ; at school, in ber
©d^ule ; to laugh at one, iiber jemanb lad^en ; etc.

3. Set ; mit : bei is ' at the house of,' mit ' in company
with.' Thus, (gr tDar mit mir bei ^f^nen. He was with
me at your house. Note well : bei is seldom English
^by' (by means of = burd^ ; by, through the agency
of = Don) and never the ' by ' with the agent in the
passive voice.

4. 2ltt§ ; tJOtt : au^ indicates source, reason, material ;
Don, starting-point, distance, composition. Thus, (Sr
ift o^x^ $ari§ unb fommt foeben Don ^otn. He is from
Paris (i. e. his home is there) and has just come from
Cologne; 2)a§ ift Don §oI^ unb ift au§ einem alten 6tu^I
gemad^t. That is of wood and is made out of an old
chair (yet au§ might be used for Don in this sentence) ;
6§ ift jtoei 5Keilen Don bier, // is two miles from here;
6r fagt ba§ Don mir au§ Srger, He says thatofmefrom
vexation.

5. Son ; iibcr after f^red^en : Don is more superficial,
liber indicates more time and attention, iiber also in-
troduces the theme of conversation. Thus, ©ie
fjjrec^en Don 3^^^^/ "^^^y ^^^ speaking of you, ©ie
f^red^en iiber ©ie. They are discussing you, ^(x(^vc\.
©ie nidE)tg Don mir may mean Say 7iothing of me, or
Say nothifig from me.

6. Slug; burc^; tion: au§, the motive, burrf;, the means,
Don, the deliberate agent. Thus, 2)a§ n^urbe Don bem
jungen 5!Jlanneau^ ©iferfud^t, unb }tt)ar burd^.eine jtoeitc

APPENDIX. 251

§anb gefd^rieBen, That was written by the young man
from jealousy^ and through the hand of another,

. To, with verbs of motion : To go to the window
(any destination in or about the building), (xxi ba§ ^en=
fter (but see also an in paragraphs preceding) gefeen;
to a neighbor^ s^ ^u bem S^ad^bar ; to the river (or any
point in town) jur 93ru(f e, etc. ; to the post-office^ court-
house, castle, university, auf bie ^oft, auf ba§ 3ftatf)aug,
etc. ; to town (from without in the country) jur ©tabt,
to town, * down town ' (to the business-part from any
other part) in bie ©tabt ; to Boston, to Germany (any
destination larger than the town) nad^ 93ofton, nad^
Seutfd^knb.

•. A sort of compound preposition is afforded by the
addition of an adverb with related sense after the
object of the simple preposition. Thus, in§ §au§ l^in^
ein, into the house, axx^ bem §au§ f)inau§, out of the
house, jum g^enfter therein, in at the window, etc. The
latter word is really a separable prefix with a verb of
motion expressed or understood. ®er SSogel flog ^um
3^enfter ^inau§. The bird few out of the window (lit. at
the window out), ^d^ laffe i^n x(\6)i in§ §au§ herein,
/ shall 7iot let him [come) into the house. In the first
case we may say also flog au§ bem g^enfter, and in
the second we may omit ^erein, but the sentences as
given are peculiarly German, and the idiom should
be learned and cultivated.

». 9tac^ or auf before the object with ju following
give a more distinct notion of motion approaching.

252 APPENDIX.

©egen . . . JU means ' facing/ ' in the direction of ' with-
out implying motion towards. SSon . . . au§ indicates
a source of motion or base of action. 6r ift 'oon §au§
an^ Iatf)oli)d;, Ife is Catholic by birth. 3Son ^ter au^
fann man e^ fe^en. One can see it from here. 3Son . . .
an, from . . . on, tXber ba^ ®ad^ If^inau^ or l^inh)eg. Out
above the roof. S)er §unb f^rang an i^m t)inauf. The dog
jumped up on him. §tnter un§ f)er. Along behind us.
In many cases there is a choice of prepositions, as in English,
but by employing what would appear to be the very same option
in another case the learner might fall into a ludicrous error.
Only careful observation and continued practice will bring a
measure of correctness and confidence in this field.

Separable Prefixes.

The separable prefixes are adverbs with a peculiarly
close relation to the verb. They are chiefly adverbs of
place, direction and relation, corresponding to prepo-
sitions with similar meanings. Some of the most com-
mon are :

316, off, (XXK, at, to, on, auf, up, upon, au^, out, away,
bet, to, beside, bai;)on, away, ba^in, thence, along, baf)er,
he7ice, along, bar, there, out, ein, in, into, ^X[X<^|^<^|^XK, toward,
fort, forth, away, ^er, hither, \jm, thither, along, lo§,
loose, free, mit, with, along, nad^, after, along after,
nteber, down, Dor, before, forth, Dorbet, past, tt)eg, off,
away, tt)eiter, on, farther, ^u, to, toward, ^uriicf, backy
gufammen, together.

Most of these may further be compounded with the
adverbial particles of direction, l^in?, away from the

APPENDIX. 253

speaker, and ^er=, toward the speaker, as l^ina6fef)en, to
look down from where the speaker is, l)erabfe^en, to
look down to where the speaker is. When so com^
pounded the resultant verb has usually a literal sense,
while the simple compounds with the above words
often have peculiar idiomatic meanings.

Verbs both Separable and Inseparable.

The particles burcf), urn, iiber, unter, Winter, Wihtx,
tDteber, are compounded with a large number of verbs,
especially verbs of motion.

2)ttr(i^ in the separable compounds means through =
past, as through a membrane, a barrier, past a point ;
the inseparable burd^ means through, from e?id to end,
all over, thoroughly. ®er ^onig reifte burrf). The king
passed through (i. e. the village), but ®er ^ontc^ burd;=
reifte ba§ Sanb, The king traveled over, or entirely across
the country.

Urn in separables means about, circuitously , or, in
transitive verbs, over, over again, upside down; the
inseparable um makes transitives with the meaning
round about , or to surround with. "^(xxK ging tDeit um.
They went far around ; ©d^reibe ba§ um, re-write that ;
2)er ^agen iDurbe um'gefe^rt. The wagon was upset.
SKanumging' ben 33efe^(, They evaded the order ; ©ie um=
ftellten ben 3Bagen, They surrounded the wagon; ®a§
©efic^t, t>on ^e((en §aaren umleuc^' tet. The face sur-
rounded by the light of her bright hair.

254 APPENDIX.

ilBer, separable, means across^ over (remaining), and
over (the edge) ; inseparable it means out- (excess, sur-
passing), over (again), and over (all over). SOBir fuf^ren
ben 3Kann iiber, we took the man across ; but 28ir uber=
fu^'ren ben "^o^xv^, we overran the man. U'bergie^en,
spill, iibergie'^en, suffuse, douse, flood; ii'berge^en, go
over or across, iiberge^'en, omit, neglect.

Uttter, separable, means under, on the under side ;
inseparable it means i7i between, separating, lXn'ter=
fd^Iagen, turn under y fold (the arms), unterfd^la' gen,
intercept, embezzle; un' terJ^ alien, hold under, \xx\XtxS)<:!Xi^XK,
entertain.

Winter and Intber occur as separables only once or
twice each. 2Bteber occurs as inseparable only once ;
iDte'ber^oIen,/?/^/^ again ; tt)teber^o'Ien, repeat.

Coordinating Connectives,
Followed by the normal or direct order :

abet, but= however, nevertheless, may have any place
that may be taken by 'however ' : Qc^ bleibe l^ier, aber
er ge^t fjeim, or er aber gefjt l^eim, I remain here, but
he is going home.

aHettt, but{^=^only)^ same as aber, introduces after-
thought or obstacle ; may stand, with this meaning,
only at beginning of clause ; elsewhere it means alone.

"htXiViffor, expressing an added or parenthetic reason.

entttieber, either, only correlative with ober, or ; not to
be used as adverb, as He is not going either (6r ge(;t

APPENDIX. 255

and) nid^t), nor as pronoun, as He is not either (i. e.
neither of two) (@r ift f eine§ t)on beiben) ; sometimes
followed by inversion.

ober, or^ correlative to enth)eber, sometimes otherwise
(= fottft), as Do this, or I go (2^ue ba^, ober id^ gel^e).

fottbcrtl, ^/^/ (<?;^ //^<f contrary), especially when cor-
relative in ni^t nur . . . fonbern aud^ ; always preceded
by a negative, as 9iid^t td^, fonbern mein Sruber tt)ar
e§, // o/^i* «^/ /, but my brother ; @r ^at ba§ ntd^t
gefagt, fonbern ba§ ©egenteil, ZT^ ^/^ ;/^/ say that, but
the opposite.

ttttb, and. When the subject of a preceding clause is
resumed in the shape of a pronoun, inversion may
follow u n b : 2)er 5iJlann ift ba gett)efen, unb ^at berfelbe
nad^ bit gefragt. The man was here and asked after
you.

ttiebcr, neither, negative of enttt)eber. After nod^, nor,
the correlative to tt)eber, inversion is customary, as
aSeber \&) \o(xx (or it)ar ic^) ba, nod^ \joX er nttd^ einge*
laben, neither was I there, nor did he invite me.

Subordinating Conjunctions.

The following are the commonest subordinating con-
junctions, requiring the transposed order :

ate, when with past tenses, sometimes as (see tt)enn);
as after comparisons of equality (better \d\^) ; than after
comparatives ; ate ob, as if ate tt)enn, as if or as when,
ate h)ie, as when ; ate followed by inversion, the same,
ate l^dtte er gefagt, as if he had said.

256 APPENDIX.

bx^f until; sometimes bi§ ba^.

ba (distinguish from ba meaning there by position
of the verb) where^ when^ since (inasmuch as); ber Drt,
ba \i) i^n fa^, the place where I saw him ; ber ^ag, ba
id^ if)n fa^, the day when I saw him ; 2)a icf) i^n fa^, fo
tDei^ id^, bajs er ba toar, i"/;^^^ I saiv him^ I know he was
there.

bantit (distinguish from bamit meaning therewith by-
position of the verb), in order that ; with the same
meaning though less frequent, ba^, fo ba^, auf ba^, yxm
ba^.

ba§, ihat^ introducing indirect statements, may be
omitted, whereupon the dependent clause has the nor-
mal order ; see also bamit ; "^o!^ or bamit . . . rtic^t is
often the rendering of lest,

cl^C (note that this is neither preposition nor adverb)
before.

ittbem, while, just as, since (causal) (distinguish from
inbem meaning^/ that point), often, especially in stage
directions, to be suppressed in favor of the mere present
participle : 3Ka£ (inbem er i^n gro^ anfief^t). Max {look-
ing at him with wide open eyes).

tttbc^, tttbeffett, sanie as inbem, but less frequent.

jc . . . , befto, the . . . , the . . . , with comparatives ; ^e
me^r ©ie gegen if)n fagen/ befto fefter i)alte xij mi) an i^n.
The more you say against him the closer I will hold to
him. Note that the transposed order comes after je
only, the inverted after befto.

APPENDIX. 257

nai^t^tnif after (distinguish from nad^bem meaning
afterward by the position of the verb).

06, whether^ introduces indirect and implied ques-
tions (do not use tt)enn for this purpose). D6 id^ i^n
fenne ? ( You ask) whether I know him ? OhtOts\)\f 06=
fc^Ott, otglc^p or 06 . ♦ ♦ fd^on, 06 ♦ ♦ ♦ gl^^r although,
d6 ♦ ♦ ♦ avii), even though, ob \&j if^n aud^ ^affe, ^2^^;^
though I hate him. Also with about same meaning:
Xotwxi gleid^, toenn . . . fc^on, tt)enn . . . o<\xi), and tt)te'

fcitp fettbem, i'///<r<? (temporal). @eit is also a preposi-
tion, and feitbem an adverb; distinguish by construc-
tion.

fo . . . ^Vii^^ however . . . / fo gro^ er auc^ tft, however
great he is, or great as he is,

foBalb, fotnie^ fo oft (without following tt)te), as soon
as ; ©obalb mein ©of)n herein ift. As soon as my son has
entered.

tro^bem^ notwithstanding {the fact that) ; often tro|=
bem, ba^.

Itid^rcttb, while (temporal) ; n)d^renb xi) ba fa^, during
the time I was sitting there ; tDte x&j ba fa^, at some
moment while I was sitting there ; al§ id^ mtd^ f^^te, as
I took my seat.

toann^ when, introduces indirect questions only ; 3Kan
fragte, tt)ann h)ir gef^en, 7%o^ asked when we were going ;
?^ragen ©ie, tt)enn ©ie ge^en. Ask when you go ; g^ragen
©ie, 06 fie get^en. Ask whether they are going.

258 APPENDIX.

totnrtf when^ with present and future tenses (compare
aB and tt)ann), whenever, with any tense, 2Bir Iplauberten
it) enn tt)ir fufjren. We talked when{ever) we drove ; if,
with any tense, usually subjunctive mode if the tense
is past; 2Bir gef^en, lt)enn tx)ir fonnen, either We shall go
if we can, or We go whenever we can ; @r ginge, it) enn
er fonnte. He would go if he could. 2Benn fd^on, etc.,
see ob.

mcil, because (the meaning while is archaic, and the
student should be cautioned against employing it).

mic^ how in indirect questions, as after comparisons
of equality, ©r fingt eben fo gut, tt)te ic^ j^iele. He sings
as well as I play ; than (not good usage : see al§) ; as,
while (temporal) see tt)d^renb ; tDie . , . au(^, however . . .
'(vk gut er and) ftngt, however well he sings.

UiO, where in indirect questions, tDO . . . aud^, where-
ever, in case that (colloquial) ; ti:)ol^in, whither^ tPOl^er,
whence, in indirect questions.

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Forms not given go according to the New Conjugation. In general, those
verbs are omitted vvhich only occasionally have forms of the Old Conjugation.
Principal parts are in full-faced type. The definition, if etyraologically re-
lated, is in Italics. A hyphen prefixed indicates that the verb only occurs with
a prefix. In the Present, the two forms given are the second and third persons
singular of the Indicative. In the Preterit, the upper form is the Indicative, the
lower the Subjunctive. Forms in parenthesis are less common, or poetical.
Compounds are to be sought under the simple verb.

Infinitive.

Present.
2. 3. p. sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

haden

bake
-bdren 1

beifein

bite
bergen

hide
htvUtn

burst
bicQen

bend
bieten

bid, offer
binben

bind
bitten

beg
blafcii

blow
bleiben

remain
hUidyen

bleach
hvaten

roast

birgft

tXXQt

tntfleft
birft

felafeft
blafi

bratft
brot

but

bufe
-bar

-bare

m

biffc
havQ

(bdr^e), biirgc
barfl, hovil

(barfte), b5rfte
bog

bbgc
bat

UU
banb

bdnbe
bat

tixte
blk$

bliefe
blicb

bliebc
bltd)

brfet

briete

bier

birg
birft

gebacfen

-boreit

gebiffen

QcbovQen

geborflett

gebogeit

geboten

Qtbunten

Qtbettn

geblafen

gebUeben

9ebl{d)eit

gebraten

I Only in gebdrett, "bear," "bring forth."

259

26o

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Infinitive.

Present.

2. 3. p. Sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

bred)ett

break

-bcrbctt ^

tingen

hire
trefd)en

thresh

bringen

crowd
efTen

eat
fabrett

go
fallen

fall
fattgen

catch, seize
fed)ten

fight
-fe^Uti *

finbett

find
fled)ten

braid
flei^en

be diligent
fliegen

fly

fltef)cn
flee

hum

-birbft
-birbt

brijc^eft
brifd^t

brad)

br(i(^e
-bieb

-bielie
-barb

-bttrbe
bung (bang)

biinge
(brafd)), brofd)

(brajc^e), brofd^e
-bro#

-brbffc
brang

brangc
afl

fubr

ftcl

flele
ftng (fteng)

flnge (fienge)
fod)t

fod^tc
faftl

(-fa^ic), -fo^ic

fanb

fanbe
flo d)t

flbd^tc

ftiffe
fiog

fiob

brid&

-birb

brifd^

9ebrod)en

-btebcn

-borben

gebungen

gebrofd)en

-brofTen

gebrungen

gcgeffett

gefabren

gefaden

gefangeit

gefod)tett

-foblen

gefunben

gefiod)ten

gefiifTen

geflogrn

gcflobett

' Only in gebeibcn, "thrive." 2 Only in oerberben, "perish."

3 Only in oerbrie^en, "vex."

4 Only in befcbUlt^ '"command," and empfcli^Uttf "commend."

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

261

Present.
2. 3. p. sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

flieflen

flew
fragen

ask
frefFen

eat
frferen

freeze
9areu

ferment
geben

give
gebeti

go
gdtett

have value

-gefFctt '

pour
-gfntieti2

be tike
glelten

glide
gitmmen

glimmer
grabctt

dig

seize
balten

liold
bangen

hang
hauen

cut, chop

(fragft)

(frdgt)
ftiffe[t

filbt(giebft)
gibt (giebt)

giltfl
gilt
-giffeft

grab ft
grabt

^altft
pit

pngft
pngt

fibfjc
(frug)
(frugc)

fraBe
fror
frbrc

QOV

gijre
gab

gdbe
ging (gteng)

gingc (gienge)
gait

(gdlte), gBlte

-gd§c

goffe
-gann

(-ganneX -gonne
BUdy
glitfie

gittt

glitte
glomm

glbmme
grub

griibe
flHff

griffc
bielt

^icltc
bing (bleng)

^ingc (gienge)
bieb

t)tcbe

fri§

gib (gicb)

gilt

geflofTen

gcfragt

gefreffen

gefroren

gegoren

gegeben

gegangcn

gegolten

-gefTrtt

gcgoffen

-gonnen

gegHd)en

geglftten

grglommen

gegraben

gegrlffen

gebaltett

gebangrn

gebauen

» Only in oergefTen, "forget."

a Only in bcginnen, " begin."

262

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Infinitive.

Present.
2. 3. p. sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

bebeit

heave, raise

be called
^clfctt

help
felfen

chide

choose
lUeben

cleave
tlimmen

climb
tlitiQen

sound
fneifen

pinch
tncipen

pinch
{omnten

come
tviedycn

creep
{ixvtn

choose
laten

load, invite
laffeit

let, cause
laufen

run
Uihen

suffer
leil^en

lend
lefen

read

lie

(fo'.nmft)
(fbmmt)

(tabft)
(labt)
laiieft

im

lauffi

Iftuft

liejcft
lieft

hob, huh

l)obe, t)Ut)e

balf

fiffe
toi

lofe
(lob

flobe
ftomm

flommc
{Icing

flange.
fniff

Iniffc
tnipp

fam

Idntc
(rod)

tv'66)e
(or

fbre
lub

lUbe
Hefl

licfec
Ifef

liefe
iitt

littc
Ueb

Itcl)e
(ad

la]e
lag

Ifige

i^ilf

Iie§

Qcl)ohen

geljei^cn

gebolfett

gefiffen

ge(ofen

gedoben

gedommen

gedungen

gc(niffrit

gedtippen

gelommen

ge(rocl)(n

ge(oren

gelaben

gelaffen

gelaufen

gelitten

geliefien

gelefen

gelegen

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

263

Present.
2. 3. p. sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

-lieven '
-Ungen^

Iofd)en

go out (of a fire)
lugen

iie
maf)len

grind
mtiten

avoid
me If en

milk
mefTctt

mete, measure
nef)mtn

take
-ncfen 3

pitifen

whistle, pipe
Pdegen

nurse, be accus-
tomed
preifeit

praise
queUen

flow forth
rdcl)en

avenge
tattn

advise
reiben

rub

lifc^cft

tnat)lt

(millfl)
(miltt)

mlffcft
tnifet

nimmft
nimmt

quittft
qutUt

ratft
rat

-lor

-I5re
-lang

-laugc
lofd)

imt

log

iht

mubl

mii^lc
mieb

miebc
molt

m5lfe

ma^c
nabm

na^me
-nad

-niifc
-nofi

ttbffe
Pftff

Pfiffe
(fflaQ) pfliog

pflagc
pried

pdcfe
quod

qubUe
(rod))

(rbc^O
riet

rietc
rieb

riebc

li|c^

(mill)

mife

nimm

quia

-loren

-lutiQtn

9eIofd)en

aelogcn

gemablen

gemieben

gemoKen

ecmefTett

Qcnommtn

-nefeti

-nofFen

gcpftffett

aepflogen

gepriefen

Qcquotltn

gerod)en

Qttattn

gerieben

* Only in oerlteren, " lose."

2 Only in geltngen, "succeed," and mi^Ungett, "fail."

3 Only in genefen, "get well." 4 Only in gettieflcn, "enjoy.*

264

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Infinitive.

Present.
2. 3- p. sg.

Preterit,
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

veifien

tear
rcltcii

ride
viedycn

smell
ringcit

wring, wrestle
rinncn

run
rufeii

call
faufeti

swill, drink
faugen

suck
fd)affen

create

resound

fd)eiben

separate
id)tinen

appear
fd)f(ten

scold
fd)crcn

shear
fd).cben

shoue
fd)te^eit

shoot
fd) in be It

flay
fd)lafen

sleep

fttufft
jauft

-fdjicljt

|d)iltft

|d)ierft
jdjiert

fc^lafft
fd)lQft

via

tifje
vitt

ritte
rod)

rang

rttnge
ranit

ranne, ronne
rtcf

riefc
(off

foffe
fog

fd)uff

fd)on

jd^oUe
-fdjab

fd)icb

fd)tcn

fd^iene
fd)alt

ici^blte
fd)or

Wove
fdjob ]

fd)0«

fct)offe
fd)unb

j(i)Unbc
fd)Iief

fd)liefe

fd}ilt
|d)ier

gcriffcn
geritten
gerod)en
gerungett
geronnen
gerufen
gcfoffen
gefogen
0efd)affen
gefd)onen
-fd)cf)en
gefd)teben
gefd)tenen
gefd)0lten
gefd)oren
gefd)oben
gefdjofTcn
gefd)unben
gefd)lafen

X Only in Q^id)ii)cn, "happen."

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

265

Infinitive.

Present.
2. 3. p. sg

Preterit.
Indie Subjunc.

Impera
tive.

Past
Participle.

strike
idyltidycn

slink, sneak
fd)lctfcn

whet
fcl)lei#en

slit, split
fcl)ltefen

slip, creep
fcl)lief|en

shut
idyXxtiQtn

entwine, swal-
low, sling
fd)meij|en

smite
fd)mel)en

melt
fd)naubeti

snuffy snort
fd)neitett

cut
idyvanhtn

screw
fd)redPen

be frightened
fd)reiben

write
fd)rctcti

cry out
fd)reiten

stride
fd)n>dirMt

ulcerate

fcbwefgen

be silent
idyvotWtn

fd^mtljeft
fc^milat

fdiricfft

fc^tDittft

fd)lug

fdilUge
fd)Iid)

fcC)«ff
fcl)loff

wm

fd)Io#
fcl)Iang

fc^Iange
fd)mi^

fd^miffc
fd)moI|

fc^molgc
fd)nob

fd)nitt

fd^nitte
fdjrob

yc^robe
fd)raf

fc^rafe
fd)r<cb

fd^riebe
fd)rle

fd^rice
fd)rftt

fd^ritte
fd)n>or
(fdjTOMr)

(fd^tDorc)

jd^ttjUrc
fd)n>{e()

jd^toiege
fd)won

jc^mila

fd^rtd

fc^tt)iU

gcfdjiaacn
0efd)lid)en
OCfd)Iiflfcn
gefd)Uf7en
gefd)loffcn
0cfd)loffcn
gefd)lun9en

9cfd)m<ffen

9efd)moI|en

9efd)noben

9efd)nUten

gefdirobett

9efd)ro(fen

9efd)r{eben

9efd)rieen

9efd)rhten

9efd)n>iegen
9efd)n>onett

266

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Present.
2. 3. p. sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participle.

idytoimmen

swim

idyminten
disappear

idyroitiQcn
swing

idytobten
swear

see
fctit

be
ficfccn

seethe, boil
fingen

sing
UtiUn

sinft
ftnnen

think
ft^ett

sit
fpeiett

spew
fpintten

spin
fplciflcn

split)
fpred)en

speafi
fpricflci*

sprout
fpringen

spring, jump
fted)en

prick
flecfen

stick

fiel)ft
1iet)t

fpridift
tpri(!^t

Mm

fticft

(fd^ioamme),

fd)n)anb

fdjroaubc
fd)n>attc)

idyxoov,
idywnt

(f(3^tt)Brc),
fd^toitre
fal)

roar

fott

flebetc
fang

fange
fanf

fdttle
fann

(^anne), j5nne
fa«

tpicc
fpann

(fpanne), jpbnne
fpUJi

fpliffe
fpr ad)

fprad^e
fpro#

tprSffe
(prang

jprcinge
ftad)

ftSd^e
flaf

fJMe

fei

fprid)

fticf

gefd)n>ommen

gefd)n>unben
gefd)n)ungen
gefd)ti>oren

gcfeften

getoefcn

gefotten

gcfungeti

gefunfen

gefonnen

gefcffcn

gefpfccn

gefponnen

gcfplfffen

gefprod)en

gefproffcn

gefprungen

gef}od)en

geflocfen

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

267

Present
2. 3. p. sg

Preterit
Indie Subjunc.

Impera-

Past
Participle.

stand
fleblcn

steal
f^etgen

ascend
^erben

die
flieben

fly, scatter
iiinten

stink

push
flretd)en

stroke, graze
fire iten

dispute, strive

bear, carry
treffett

hit
tretben

drive
treten

tread
triefen

drip
itinUn

drink
tvUQtn

deceive

txm

do
toad)fen

wax, grow

weigh

toaidyen

wash

ftie^lfi
ftie^It

fttrbfl
ftirbt

ftbfeefl

mt

trdflfi
tragt

triffft
trifft

trittft
tritt

tuft
tut

toac^fi

toafc^eft
toam

flattb

flanbe(ftiinbe)

flieg

ftiege
flarb

(ftarbe), ftUrbe
flob

ftfibc
ftanl

flanfe

men

flteBc
firid)

ftrit^e
Hvitt

flritte
trug

trUgc
tvai

trSfe
trieb

triebe
trat

irate
trof?

trSffe
tvant

tranle
trog

trdge
iai

tate

toud)d

miid^fe
tt>og

toiigc
toufd)

tt)uj(!^e

ftie^l

ftirb

trift

tritt

9ef)ant)en

gefloblen

getlUgen

gefiorben

gefloben

geflunfen

gefiofjcn

geflrid)en

geflritten

getragen

getrofFcn

getriebett

getreten

getroffett

getrunfen

getrogen

getan

getoac^fett

getoogett

getDafc^en

268

VERBS OF THE OLD CONJUGATION.

Infinitive.

Present.

2. 3. p. Sg.

Preterit.
Indie. Subjunc.

Impera-
tive.

Past
Participlr.

toeben

weave
-toegett '

n»eid)en

yield
tocifcn

point out
toerben

woo
toerben

become
werfen

throw
totegen

weigh
xointcn

wind
-mtnnen *

geibett

accuse
gicbcn

move, draw
gwingeti

force

toirbft
toirbt

totrft
tt)irb

toirfft
tolrft

n>ob

tt)obe

-WOQ

-tuogc
tDtd)

loic^c
toted

toicfe
waxh

tDurbc
wavt, tourbe

tourbe
warf

UJiirfc

toogc
wanb

ttjanbe
toann

(todnneX-roonne
Jicb

83gc
jtoattg

atDonge

h)irb

loirf

fiewoben

-mogen

getotc^en

oen>iefen

0en>orben

getDorben

getoorfen

getDogen

getounben

-wonnen

gejieben

gejogen

gestoungen

* Only in bctoegett, "induce " 2 Only in getoinnetl, "win.'

VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION. 269

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE NEW CONJUGATION.

Forms not given are regular.

Infinitive.

Present.

Preterit.

Impera-

Past

2. 3 p. sg.

Indie. Subjunc.

tive.

Participle.

brettnen

braiinte

(jebrantit

burn

brenntc

brtngen

brad)t6

Qthxadyi

bring

bra(t)tc

benten

bacl)te

9ebaci)t

thmk

bdc^te

burfen

barf ft

burftc

wanting

gcburft *

be permitted

barf I

burfte

babcti

^afl

I)atte

gebabt

have

^at

l)attc

(ennen

(annte

gefannt

know

tenntc

(pitnen

f anil ft

(onnte

wanting

gcfonnt^

can

fonn I

!5nntc

ntogen

magft

mocl)tc

wanting

gcmodjt*

may, like

magi

mbd^te

tniiffen

mufet

mu^tc

wanting

ecmufft 2

must

mufei

miifete

ttentien

naniite

genannt

natne

nenntc

reimen

raitnte

-^

(jerannt

run
fcnbrn

send

rennete
fanbte

fenbete

/ gefanbt
{ gcfcnbet

foneii

foUft

fontc

wanting

9cfc»nt2

shall
toenben

turn

foHi

foflte
wanbte

rocubete

rgemanbt
( getoenbet

IDiffCIl

tceifet

rou^tc

getou^t

know

tDeifei

roiifetc

tooHen

roinft

iDOtlte

toolle

gemont

will

toiUi

woflte

I Also, ist person singular. 2 Instead of the participle, the infinitive is
used to form the compound tenses of the " modal auxiliaries," when an infinitive
depends upon the verb.

ALPHABET IN GERMAN SCRIPT.

The same written character we use is taught in the Ger-
man schools, and it is generally used by foreigners when they
write German.

CAPITAL. SMALL. CAPITAL. SMALL. CAPITAL. SMALL.

final

a .^ ^ / r / ^

M / a^ J ^ /

^ / / / /^

TJm.lau.ts.

GERMAN SCRIPT.

1.

7. CJ^-tA^iT^^^^^. 8. ^^-^ 9. ^^^^f^,

II. ^^c^-fJ-^^^f^, 12. c^^V^^S^.

13. V^/C^^a^^^. 14- ^C<Ai''f;/^^'-t^t^^C^. 15. 6^

16. y^tt'-i^/^^ , I7« cj^-f^^^ii^* 18.

19. ^-^Z^^^. 20. 5^^-^^. 21. 'C^n^*

22. y€4j^^i!f^, 23. (Zi^^AC'^'/^f^, 24. C^^:^^^'.

25. ^^^. 26. ^^/^^

OC/ii'-»^, (/-C^. C^-u^f^*

GERMAN SCRIPT.

2.

2. y:^^^^ f^^'^ {/A/^f^

L/C^^^-fff^^tJ^'CV^ii'- ^^^^'-f^^, ^C¥^-^^^^ '6 «=»^^J

'■/^^ ^^i^-f/ Cf^^tJt'Oj x'^sf>?^^^ 'O^'C^/^

GERMAN SCRIPT.

3.

^^^^ ^^:>^~

/^y^^f^ ^-t/^-O ^-Cif^/^^ ^^ ^'^^^^^^»^ aft^r^.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

1. When a separable or inseparable verb is indicated as belonging to the Old

Conjugation, or as an irregular verb of the New Conjugation, the prefix
must be thrown off before looking for the verb in the list at the end. Sepa-
rable verbs are indicated by a hyphen between the prefix and the simple
verb. Compounds with obvious meanings, as juvitcf^gcl^cn, are not always
given a place in the Vocabulary.

2. The genitive singular and nominative plural of nouns are indicated thus :

(fatten, ~§, -avtctt, i. e., the genitive singular is &avtCM§, and nominative
plural &avtcn ; <Btt\nitV, -§, -, genitive singular (Sd^iiler^, nominative
plural same as nominative singular. The genitive singular of feminine
nouns is not indicated.

3. The gender and declension of nouns in ci)en and teilt are not indicated.

4. Adjectives used as adverbs or nouns, or when in the comparative or super-

lative, excepting those of irregular comparison, are not inserted separately.

5. Definitions in Italics {evening) are English words historically related.

6. Abbreviations

C). = Old Conjugation,

irreg. N. = irregular verb of the
New Conjugation,
impers. = impersonal verb,
refl. = reflexive verb.

h. or s. = auxiliary ^abcn or feirt.
s. = auxiliary ieitt.

■m.

= masculine.

/.

= feminine.

«.

= neuter.

gen

= genitive.

dat.

= dative.

ace.

= accusative.

adj.

= adjective.

5t

a0, off, away, down, from,

at.
W^tf w. a b c, alphabet.
3lBcnb, m. -^, -t, evening.
5t0Cttb5rotr n. -(e) §, -e,

evening bread, supper,

tea.

2(BcttbUcbr n. -(e) §, -er,
evening song.

5l6enbrotr n. -(e) §, eve-
ning glow.

5(6enbfonncnWetttrm.-(e)§,
evening sunshine, sunset
glow.

5lBenbttnj(fer f. evening cloud.

tkbtx, but, however.

277

278

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

aft=fofiren, O. s. go off, start

a6=I)angen, O. hang off or
down, depend upon, tion
(with dat).

ttB4)0(enr call for.

a6=^t(fettr pick off.

aB=retfett, s. travel off, de-
part.

a^'Xid}ttnr set right, train.

SlbWiebr m. -(e)§, -e, de-
parture, farewell, dis-
charge, leave.

a:6=frf)reiBen, O. write off,
copy.

aB=ftctgen, O. s. descend,
get out.

al6=tt)efcnbr absent.

5l5ttJefenI)ett, f. -en, absence.

ad)f ah! oh ! alas ! ; a^ @ott,
oh dear !

OJ^tr eight, eighth

^^if f. attention, heed, care.

ai^tgeftn, eighteen.

ar^tatgr eighty.

5(bref'fc, /. -n, address, di-
rection.

abicu' (abe')/ ac/tVw, good-
by.

5(biecttti', n. -§, -e, adjective.

5lb(er, 77i. -§, -, eagle.

Whotf, m. -^, Adolphus.

3lbtier'Bium, n. -§, -ten, ad-
verb.

1lih\)otaVf m. -en, -en, law-
yer.

(iftnlii^, like.

aWf all.

ttUein, alone, only; but, yet.

anerbinn^f by all means, to
be sure, undoubtedly.

afierlei', all kinds of, of all
kinds.

anoemetUf common to all,
general.

afinta()(t(^, gradually.

5U^f)a5et', n. -§, -c, al-
phabet.

al^f as, than, when; al§
ob, al§ tuenn, a.? though,
as if.

alfo, accordingly, conse-
quently.

am = an bent.

3l'nten, amen.

3(merifa, w. -§, America.

an (dat. or ace), on, in, by,
to; onwards, farther.

anber, 3.nother, other, dif-
ferent.

cinbernr alter.

anber^r otherwise, differ-
ently.

anhtx^tvo, elsewhere.

anhtxif^alh, one and a /la//.

5lttefbo'tC, /. -n, anecdote.

5(nfangr ^^. -^/ -ange, be-
ginning.

an^fanrjeur O. begin.

att=ne6ctt, O. s. go on, begin;
approach, concern.

ttncjenefjtttr pleasant.

an-QXtifcnf O. attack.

5ln9ftr f. ?ingfte, anxiety,
fear.

an''i)aUtnf O. hold on, stop.

an^fommtnf O. s. com^ on,
arrive.

^tttmerFuncif /. -en, re-
mark, observation, com-
ment, note.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

279

ttlt'ltefttnettr O. accept; as-
sume.
att=rtdfttett, do, cause.
ttn=f(^auenr gaze at.
an=feften, O. look on or at.

claim; in — ne^tnen, claim.

anftatt, (gen.), mstead of.

3lntttJ0rtr f. -en, word in re-
turn, answer.

antttJOtten, answer (dat. of
person).

anttiefenb, present.

an=3ie5cnr O. draw on, put
on

5ftjfe(r m. -§, 3XpfeL apple.

5(^ifc(^attmr m. -(e) §, -ctume,
apple-tree.

5(^rU', w. -§, -e, April.

3lr6ettr /. -en, work.

axhtiitrif work

argetltti^, angry, vexed.

5lrttftme'tif, f. -en, arith-
metic.

5(rm, m. -(e) §, -e, arm.

arm, poor.

5lrt, f. -en, kind, species,
manner.

arttfir of good kind, well-
behaved.

5lrtt'fe(r f;L -§, -, article.

5lrat, w. -e§, mgte, phy-
sician.

9(tem, 7;i. -§, breath.

Q«(^, also, too, even.

aitf (dat. or ace), upon, at;
up, on !

auf^atmcUr take breath.

auf=^ftrfen, look up.

nuf b'ttf?, in order ^/za/.

attf=brujfettr impress.

auffaUenb, noticeable, strik-
ing.

5(uf9a6e, f. -n, lesson, task.

auf=Ge^cn, O. g^W u/?.

auf=gel)enr O. s. ^0 w/>, rise.

auf^e^en, O. heave or lift
up, suspend.

aitf=prett, stop, end, cease.

auf=ma(^en, open.

ttuf=|jaffett, pay attention.

auf rc((it=fteUcn, place upright.

auf^ — auf bag.

auf=f<^teBett, O. postpone.

auf=fte5en, O. s. stand up,
get w/j, rise.

auf^fuj^en, hunt w/>.

5luftrag, 7^. -eg, -age, com-
mission, errand.

auf=tra9enr O. serve (at
table).

auf=tun, O. open.

aufttiartg, upwards.

5lunCr n. -g, -n, ^3;^.

2itt9(c)(etnr little ^3;^.

5lu0cn5Urf, m. -(e)§, -e,
moment, instant.

aitcjen^ltrfltrftr instantly.

5lu9uft'r m. -g, -e, August.

tiVi^ (dat), out, out of.

$(ugbrurf, m. -g, -iidfe, ex-
pression.

a«g=brurfen, express.

augetnan'ber, apart, asunder.

augeinanber=geften, O. s.
separate.

5(uggaBc, /. -n, expense.

^(u^gangr m. -(e) §, -ange,
owdet, exit.

(in^^^t\)txit O. s. ^6> out.

28o

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

nuSgenommen, excepting,
excepted.

au§4ajftcn, laugh at.

3luManb, n. -(c) §, foreign
country.

au§4affcn, O. omit.

au^=jna(^cn, arrange.

au§-neftmen, O. take out,
except; au^ne^menb, ex-
ceptional.

auS^rufen, O. cry out.

5(u§rufuu9§ttiortr n. -e§,
— orter, exclamation word,
interjection.

ou§=ruften, rest out, repose.

au^^fcftctt, O. look, appear.

ouf?en, oM^side, withowf.

au^er (dat), on the ow^side
of, withow^, besides.

aufjerbentr apart from that,
besides, moreover.

an^txi}aih (gen. or dat.), on
the outsme of, withowf^
beyond.

nnfmoxhcniiid), extraordi-
nary, remarkable ; ex-
tremely.

an^-^pxtdjctif O. pronounce.

au^=ftetncn, O. s. dismount,
get out.

au^ttienbtg, owfside, out-
ward, withow^ book, by
heart.

ftr m. -e§, -ad)e, brook.
SSarfer, m. -§, -, baker.
^adtottl, n. -{e)§, -c, ba-
kers' wares.

^ahf n. -t^, -ctber, hath.

babcu, hathe.

S3abc5immer, n. -§, - bath-
room.

S3aSn, /. -en, path, road.

S3a^tt6of, w. -(e)§, -ofe,
station.

i^alh, soon ; balb — balb — ,
now — now — .

^a% m. -e§, -a\lt, ball

S5anbr n. -e§, -anber, &and,
ribbon ; m. -e§, — cinbe,
volume.

SSanbe, f. -n, bond, fetter.

han^(t), anxious, fearful.

S3anf, f. -dn!e, bank,
bench.

f>aVf in cash.

SSarmen, n. -§, name of a
German city.

^afc(, w. -§, name of a
Swiss city.

6aucn, build; labor on the
land, till.

^ttuer, in. -n, (-§), -n,
peasant; S3auer§mann, m.
the same.

SSautitr w. -e§, -ctume, tree,
beam.

^antnUati, n. -(e)§, -after,
leaf of a tree.

S3dutn(5cnr little tree.

be-p inseparable prefix,
strengthening the mean-
ing of verbs, and forming
new ones; prefix forming
adjectives.

S3camtc, m. w. official.

^eantmortcttr answer (a
question).

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

281

fiebaucrn, regret.

Bebcrfen, cover, overcast.

hthcnUn, irreg. N. consider.

]&ebculen, signify.

hthcnicxxhf important.

^ebeutwng, /. -en, impor-
tance, significance.

23cbtnguncj, f. -en, condition.

fiebitrfen, irreg. N. need, re-
quire.

S3efeftl, m. -e§, -e, mandate,
order.

l^cfeftlen, O. command.

l^cfinbcn, O. refl. find one's
self, do, be.

l^cfrcicn, make free, liber-
ate.

6cftt6(ctt, feel of.

^efiiri^ten, fear.

hcQCQmn, (dat), s. run
against, meet.

5c9Ctfterttr inspire.

Begierig, eager for.

beginnen, O. begin.

beg(citen, accompany.

begreifcn, O. comprehend.

SSegriffr m. -(e)§, -e, idea;
tm S3egriffe fetn, be on the
point of.

fftf^alttn, O. hold, keep.

beftitlflii^r helpful, useful.

l^ci (dat.), by the side of, by,
near ; at the house or store
of.

Bctbe, both.

S3ctfoll, m. -§, applause.

S5etn, n. -e§, -e, bone, leg.

bcina()C, nearly, almost.

SSetf^tcI, n. -(e)§, -t, in-
stance, example.

^tx^tUf O. bite.

^tlanni, known, acquainted.

^ef aunt Waft, f. -en, ac-
quaintance.

befommen, O. get, receive.

i>t\t\>if lively, animated.

bclcgcn, lay on, secure, en-
gage; belay.

beleibtgen, affront, insult.

be(euc^ten, light up.

'^tUVi6)iVimf f. lighting, il-
lumination.

^elgicn, n. -§, Belgium.

beUcbt, popular.

^tlif m. -e§, the ''Belt'' (in
Denmark).

bemuften, refl. take pains,
endeavor.

bctjuem, convenient, comfor-
table.

^t(\ntmlx6)Uxif f. -en, com-
fort.

^txtxif ready.

berettctt, prepare.

iitxtxi^f already.

S3crg, m. -c§, -e, mountain.

^erlin'r n. -§, Berlin.

berubitjcn, calm, compose.

betitftmt, famous.

beritftren, touch.

bcfcfitiftigt, adj. occupied,
busy.

befell (if ttgettr occupy, busy.

ht^ti)tvtn, give, bestow.

befdftmu^enr soil.

bcfj^ii^ettr guard.

befi^eitr O. sit upon, pos-
sess.

bcfonber, particular, especial.

befonbcr^, especially.

282

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

l^eforgt, anxious.

l^effcr, better.

l^effcrn, improve.

l^eftttubifi, constantly.

Ibefteften, O. stand firm; —
au§ (with dat), consist
of.

Ibeftefien, put in place, or-
der.

]6efttmmen, direct, determine.

S5cfu(^r w. -(e) g, -e, visit.

^efuc^cn, seek for, visit.

^efui^aitnmer, n. -§, - vis-
it-room, reception-room.

Beten, pray.

SBetunungr /• accent.

htixnht, sad.

S3ett (S3ette), n. -(e)§, -en,

JeunruStgcttr make uneasy.

htt)OX, before.

hmaf)tmf preserve.

ftettJegettr move; refl. move,
be removed.

^ctocgung, f. -en, motion.

BettJoSnettf dwell in, occupy.

S3ettioI)ner, m. -§, -, in-
habitant.

]6ctt)unbcrn, wonder at, ad-
mire.

6caaf)(ctt, pay.

^tBHotSef, f. -en, library
(public).

^'M\t>i^tiax' f m. -§, -e, li-
brarian.

^t^notljefatmmcr, n. -§, -,
library-room, library.

hiehtVf upright.

Bicgctt, O. bend.

SBienc, /. -n, bee.

S3tcr, n. -eg, -z, beer.
S3Ub, n. -e§, -er, picture.
SBittet'r n. -(e) §, -e, ticket,

billet.
ftlHig, adj. cheap; just.
iDtnben, O. bind.
S3tnbettJort, w. -(e)g, -Mer,

binding word, conjugation.
i>X^ (ace), to, until, as far

as.
S5lt(^ett {h\')^^tn), bit, little,

trifle.
i>x^))tXf as far as /i^r^;

hitherto.
^Xiitxif O. beg, ask for.
hxiitXf bitter.
Ua^txXf O. blow.
maiif n.-(e)§, -atter, leafj
hlaitU^f Itdiiless.
hlaUf blue.
^hx, n. -e§, lead.
hhxhtxif O. s. be left, remain..
S3(ctftift, m. -(e)§, -e, lead-
pencil.
6(irfen, look.

^Vxd, w. -(e) §, -e, glance.
hVxnhxXf gleam.
S3(ti?, w. -eg, -e, lightning.
Mi^ettr lighten, glisten, flash.
Mofh bare; merely, simply,

only.
Mitftettr blossom, flourish ;

blow.
^hxmt, f. -n, flower ; bloom.
S3Iunt(e)(cttt, flowret.
S3(ut, -eg, &/00C?; health.
^(utettr bleed.
S3oben, m. -g, -i3ben, garret;

bottom.
fBoot, n. -eg, -e or -ote, &oa/.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

283

SBootfa^rt, f. -en, boat-trip,

f>H{t), bad, angry.
■ fSvaUn, m. -^, - roast.

6rau(ftctt, need, want.

S3rauttf(ftttJei9r n. -§, Bruns-
wick.

SBraut, f. -dute, betrothed
wife ; bride.

SSrauttgamr w. -§, -e, be-
trothed husband ; bride-
groom.

drati, good, brave.

6rc(fiettr O. break.

hxtxit broad.

S3remcn, n. -^, Bremen.

l^rcnncttr irreg. N. burn.

SSrennga^r w. -eg, illumina-
ting gas.

S3riefr w. -e§, -e, letter;
brief.

23rtef(^enr little letter, note.

S5rief!aftcttr w. -§, - letter-
box.

SSricfmatfc, /. -n, postage-
stamp.

SBneftragcr, m. -§, -, letter-
carrier.

hxXMtn, irreg. N. &nwg.

SBrot, n. -e§, -z, bread.

S3t3t(^|Cttr little bread, roll.

a3tuber, m. -§, -iiber,
brother.

Britbcrltj^, brotherly, in a
fraternal manner.

]6ruficnr roar, bellow, bray.

S3ruffe(r w. -^, Brussels.

S3tuft, f. -iifte, breast.

'^M^f n. -e§, -iid^er, book.

seller.

SSutS^fta^c, 7^i. -n, -n, letter

of the alphabet.
Buj^ftaMe'ren, spell.
bureau', n. -^, -§, bureau;

office.
SSurg, f. ~en, fortress, castle.
^xtX^tXf m. -§, -, citizen,

burgher.
SSuraermctftet, m. -§, - &wr-

gomaster, mayor.

Gljataftcr, m. -§, -e, c/iar-

Afternic', f. chemistry.
©ftina, w. -§, China.
(Sljut, m. and n. -e§, -ore,

chorus, choir.
(i\)XxSit m. -en, -en, CAm-
G^tceru, m. Cicero. [tian.
(^olumhn^, m. Columbus.
Gou^e'r n. -§, compartment

of a car ; coupe.
(^out)txt\ n. -§, -e, envelope.

2)

ha, there, then; as, since.
ballet, thereby, at the same

time.
^ad)f n. -e§, -etcher, roof.
hahnxdf, therethrough, there-

by.
bafitt, therefor, for that; id)

!ann nid)t§ bafiir, I cannot

help it.

284

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

bagegen, against that, on the

contrary.
baftcr'r thence; for that rea-
son, consequently; along.
baljin'r thither, so far, along,

away.
ba5ttt=faftrctt, O. s. go away,

off.
bamolg, at that time, then.
^amt, f. -n, lady.
batntt'r therewith, with it ; in

order that.
banar^' (barnad)), there-

after, after that.
"^anCf m. -n, -n, Dane.
bonc'Ben, beside it, close

by.
^dntmaxff n. -§, Denmark.
bonifd^r Danish.
%ax\tf m. -e§, thanks.
banf^ar, thankful.
banfen (dat.), thank.
hann, then.
bar (=ha), there.
bar an', thereon, on that or

it.
barauf (brauf), thereupon,

upon that
^satan'^tn (brau^en), out-

side, out there, out of

doors, abroad.
barttt'r therein, in that.
barin'nen, therein, wside,

within.
barnar^i'r that way; there-

after.
baru'Bcr, thereover, above it,

at it.
\saxvim\ on account of that,

thereior^.

ha^f that, so that, in order

that.
batie'rcn, date.
battel, /. -n, date (fruit).
Saturn, n. -§, -a, date.
bauern, endure, last.
bauern, move to pity.
^aumettr w. -§, - thumb.
batiOtt'f thereof or from, of

it or them.
batJor'r before or for that.
bagu'r in addition.
^crfc, /. -n, covering, ceil-

ing.
befltnte'rcn, decline.
betn, thy, thine.
hcxnnad)% according to that,

accordingly.
hmUxif irreg. N. think, be of

opinion.
benn, then, in that case, now ;

for.
bcnnOJ^, nevertheless.
bcr, the; that; which.
bcrjcntgc, the one, that one.
bcrfcIBc, the selfsame, the

same.
be^ftalJ, on that account,

therefore.
bc^mcoettr on that account.
htnilidj, clear.
htnt^^, German.
^eutfrfie, m. -n, -n, (the)

German.
^CUtWlanbr n. -§, Germany.
^csem^cr, m. -§, Decem-
ber.

btencn (dat.), serve.
Wiener, m. -§, - servant.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

285

^icn^tag, m. -§, -t, Tues-
day.

bic§ (biefer), this, the lat-
ter.

btcnJcUr while.

^ing, n. -e§, -t, thing.

bor^, though, yet, neverthe-
less, however, I am sure,
you know, but, I hope,
why yes.

^099Cr /. -n, hnW-dog.

^onaUr f. Danube.

^onncr^an, m. -^, thunder-
call.

bonnerttr thunder.

^onner^tag, m. -§, -e,

^ounerttiettcr! by thunder!
^orfr w. -eg, -orfer, village.
^iirftfien, little village.
^orn, w. -t^, -en, -e or

-orner, thorn.
bort (borten), yonder, there.
bortfitn, thither.
brauf?ett, see barauften.
brci, three.
breimol, three times.
brei^trjr thirty.
brct5el)nr thirteen.
brctaeftntr thirteenth.
^rc^bcttr w. -§, Dresden.
brtngenb, urgent.
brinnctt, see bartnnen.
brttt, ^/tfrd
britten^r thirdly.
broftcUr threaten.
brottt9(t)r rfro//, comical.
^rofrftfc, f. -x\, hack ; drosky.
briibcn (bariiben), oz'^r

brurfcn, print.

briirf en, press ; squeeze.

bruntettr see barunten.

bu, ^/zoM, you.

buntttt, stupid, foolish.

^utnmfiett, /. -en, folly, stu-
pidity.

\>\xnltlf dark.

bUttfeltt, grow dark.

burt^i (ace), through.

btttdftau^, throughout, abso-
lutely; quite.

butj^gangtg, pervading, gen-
eral, in general.

burri&4cfctt, O. read through.

burcfttrtcben, thorough.

biirfeitr irreg. N. be per-
mitted, may; need.

^ilrrc, /. -n, drowth.

^\xx\i, m. -e^, thirst.

burftctt (biirj^en), thirsty be
thirsty.

cbcttf even, just, precisely.

t6)if genuine.

(Srfc, /. -n, corner.

ebcl, noble, precious.

(gbuarb, m. -§, Edward.

zt)tf ere, before.

ci)t\>tm, before this time, for-
merly.

eftet, previously, sooner,
rather.

ttjven, honor.

e()tU(^, honest.

(&x, n. -c§, -ex, egg.

i^id}C, f. -n, oak.

eigen, ozvn; proper; peculiar.

286

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

-iirter, q^xdiXity-word, ad-
jective.

etgentlit^i, real, really.

cin, a, an, one.

ettt=, separable prefix, into,
in.

einan'bct, one a.nother, each
other.

etnerret, one and the same,
all the same, of one kind.

ctnfar^, simple.

©tnflut, m. -e§/ -iiff^/ m-
fluXj influence.

etnigr on^^ anj;; pi. etntge,
some.

etn=Iabett, O. mvite.

©MabunSr f. -en, mvitation.

einma(, one time, owce, just,
only.

Gtnma(ein§, n. -e§, -e, one
time one; multiplication-
table.

ettt=ne6ntenr O. take m, cap-
tivate.

Cttt^r one, one thing.

ctn=W(afen, O. s. go to sleep.

(gtttficbler, m. -§, -, hermit.

einfUBtg, monosyllabic, la-
conic.

cttt=f<>errctt, shut in.

einft, once, once on a time,
some time.

ein=fktnen, O. s. step or
climb in, get in, or aboard.

etnftntal^r once.

Ctn=tCt(ett, divide.

etn=tretettr O. s. enter.

(?inltJof)ner, m. -§, -, inha-
bitant.

(gttt5af)(r f. singular.

eitt^elttf single, individual.

@i§, n. —e§, ice.

@tfen, n. -§, iron.

©ifenbaftttr f. -en, railroad.

(gleftri^ttat', /. electricity.

chnh, wretched, miserable.

©lefant'r m. -en, -en, ele-
phant.

elfr eleven.

elft, eleventh.

©U'fCf fern. prop, noun,
Eliza.

(SItern (pi.), parents.

em^jfangen, O. receive, v^el-
come.

©m^fang^Stmtnct, n. -§, ~,
reception-room.

cm^feftlen, O. recommend,
commend, give regards to ;
take leave.

Sm^fefilung, f. -en, com-
mendation, compliments.

cm^finbcn, O. perceive, feel.

^ttbc, n. -§, -n, end.

mhlid}, finally, at last.

©ngel, m. -§, -, angel.

(^n^lanh, n. -§, England.

©nglanber, m. -§, -, Eng-
lishman.

enolifi^, English.

tnU (emp=), inseparable
prefix, earlier ant ; against ;
forth, from, out, away.

entbcrfettr discover.

enteljrcttr dishonor.

entfltcl)cn, O. s. fly away, es-
cape.

entjjegcn (dat.), against.

etttgegnen, object, rejoin.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

287

tntfjalUn, O. contain, with-
hold.

entlaufen, O. s. run away.

entncfitnen, O. derive (from,
dat.).

entrtrftten, pay.

entfcftctben, O. decide.

cntfr^loffettr decided, coura-
geous.

cntfr^ulbtgen, excuse.

(^ntfc^en, n. -§, -, terror.

cntfe^Uc^, terrible.

entf^jrittoen, O. s. rise; run
away.

enlttJcber, either; enttoeber —
obex, either — or.

Cttt^ttiet, in two, asunder,
apart.

ent3ttiei=f^nttgcn, O. s. or h.
spring in two, burst apart.

er, he.

er-r insep. prefix, same with
ur=, adding to verbs the
idea of beginning, en-
deavor, acquisition.

txUidtn, perceive.

er^linbettr s. grow or get
blind.

(&xhc, f. -n, earth.

©rbgeWof?, n. -e§, -offe,
ground-floor, first story.

erctgnettr refl. happen.

erfaftren, O. learn, find
out.

(Stfafirung, /. -en, expe-
rience.

(Srfo(gr w. -e§, -t, result,
success.

erfrtercn, O. s. freeze.

crfittten, i\x\fil, fill.

crgretfettr O. seize, lay hold
of.

cr^alten, O. receive, come in
possession of; sustain.

erjebettf O. raise ; refl. rise.

erinnern (gen.), refl. re-
member.

etfa(tettr refl. catch cold.

erfennen, irreg. N. recognize.

erfltttettf make clear, de-
clare; state.

(Srfldrungr /. -en, explana-
tion.

exlanhcnf permit, (pers.
dat).

(^xlanffni^, f., permission.

^xUf f. -n, alder.

txhihm, O. suffer, sustain.

cxqnidtn, quicken, refresh.

cxxattn, O. guess out.

erretr^en, attain, get to.

crft^attcitr echo, resound.

erWetnettf O. s. shine forth,
appear.

crWrcrfen, O. (N.) s. (also
refl.) be frightened or
startled.

erft, first, only ; not until.

erftatttten, s. be amazed.

crftcn^r firstly, in the first
place.

txtxinUn, O. s. be drowned.

erttJat^fcn, grown up.

ertudljnen, mention.

erttJartcn, expect.

ernjeifett, awake.

txtotxhtrtf O. acquire, gain.

^x^f n. -eg, —e, ore.

eratifiten, relate, tell.

©rsajhtng, /. -en, narrative.

288

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

crateftettr O. bring up, edu-
cate.

er^iekn, aim at, attain.

e§, it, there; e§ ftnb, there
are.

©fc(, m. —§, —, ass, donkey.

cffen, O. eat; (Sffen, n. food.

(gt^tmmer, n. -§, - eat'mg-
room, dining-room.

Ctltcftc, some.

©tfdfl, /. name of a river,
Adige.

ettua, nearly, about, indeed.

elttia^, some, something,
somewhat.

eucr, your, yours.

©ttto^ja, n. -§, Europe.

(Stti* (old form iuwer, for
euer), ^'owr.

etntg, eternal.

^em^cl, w. -^, - example.

SaBetr f. -n, fable.
ga^nc, f. -n, flag, vane.
fasten, O. s. drive, go (in a

wagon or boat), fare.
gaftroelb, n. -(e) g, -er,

gaftr^IaUr m. -(e)§, -e or
— dne, time-table.

Stlftrtr /. -en, passage, jour-
ney.

gallc, /. -n, pit-fall, trap.

fanettr O. s. /a//; seem.

falW, false.

galfr^fiett, /. falseness,
treachery.

gatnt'Itc, /. -n, family.

fangen, O. catch, seize.

j^axHf f. -n, color.

faffCJtf hold, contain; lay
hold of, seize.

faftr almost.

gauft, f. -ctuyte, fist.

^thtnax'f m. -§, -t, Febru-
ary.

gebcr, f. -n, feather, pen.

feber(o§, featherless.

gcbettncffer, w. -g, -, pen-
knife.

Ut^Un (dat), fail, be want-
ing to, the matter with.

f etern, celebrate ; be idle.

geiertag, m. -(e)§, -e, holi-
day.

getttb, m. -e§, -e, foe.

getnfi^mcrfer, m. -§, -,
gourmand.

ge(b, n. -e§, -er, /zV/(i,
country.

gclfenrtff, w. -(e) §, -e,
rocky r^^/ or ledge.

Scttftcr, n. -§, -, window.

gcrtcn (pL), vacation, holi-
days.

fern, far.

fcttig, ready.

gerttglett, /. dexterity.

fcft, fast, firm, mighty.

geft, n. -e§, -e, festival, fete,
feast.

fett, fat.

geuer, 7z. -§, -, fire.

geucrjo! ffr^/

ftnben, O. find, think.

Singer, 7;z. -§, -, finger.

finftcr, dark.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

289

StWf m. -e§, -e, fish.

ffottetn, flatter.

gletfr^r n. -eg, -e, //^^/z,
meat.

gfetf?, m. -e§, industry; mtt
glei^, on purpose.

ffct^tg, industrious.

gltegc, /. -TT, /^/3;.

flteQCn, O. s. or h. fly.

flicten, O. s. or h. flow.

Slitgcl, m. -§, -, wing.

Slugcltittr f. -en, folding-
door.

%lVL^f m. -eg, -iiffe, river.

fofgctt (dat), s. follow.

forbcritf take, require.

Sorft, m. —eg, — e, forest.

fort, /or//?, away! begone!
be off !

fort^faftren, O. s. keep on,
make a further remark,
continue.

fort^teitctt, O. snatch or
drag forth or away.

fort=fr^|(ct(Sctt, O. s. slink
away, slip away.

Stage, f. -n, question.

frajjen, N. (O.), ask.

gragcaetri^Ctt, n. -g, -, ques-
tion-mark.

franfictt, postpaid.

5tanfret(^, w., -g, France.

grango'fc, w. -en, -en,
Frenchm2in.

fronsfl'ftfr^r French.

%xavif f. -en, woman, wife.

graulcitt, young lady, Miss.

fret, free, open; \)a^ grete,
the open air, out-of-doors.

greifteit, /. -en, freedom.

^XtllX^t truly, indeed, for-
sooth.

grettag, m. -g, -e, Friday.

fremb, strange, foreign.

gtembc, /. foreign country.

freffen, O. eat (of animals)

greubc, /. -n, joy.

freuen, make glad; refl. re-
joice.

grcuttb, m. -eg, -e, friend.

greunbln, /. -nen, lady
friend.

freunbUj^, friendly, kind.

greitttbfr^aft, /. -en, friend^
ship.

grtebe, m. -ng, -n, peace.

Srtebrtdft, m. -g, Frederick.

grtebrt(iflftta#c, f. -n, Frede-
rick street.

frtfd^, /r^j/j.

fro5, glad, joyous, happy.

ftotnm, worthy, good, de-
vout.

gruriftt, /. -iid^te, frw/f (of
the earth or field).

fritf), early.

ftiiftet, sooner, earlier.

gritftHng, m. -g, -e, spring.

grit^ftitrf, n. -(e) g, -e, ear-
ly piece, breakfast.

friiftftitrfen, take breakfast.

fiigen, fit, unite, do; refl.
submit.

fuf)(en, feel.

fitftrcn, lead, conduct, carry
on.

gutter, m. -g, - guide.

fitHen, fill.

fitnf, five.

fiittft. fifth.

290

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

fiinfaefttt (funfael^n), fif-
teen.

funfetg (fxtnfato), fifty.

fnnUin, sparkle.

fitr (ace), for,

}^nxd}ir f. fear.

fiitt^iten, fear; refl. be
afraid.

fitrc^terUcft, frightivX.

giirttujrt, n. -(e) §, -i3rter,
for-word, pronoun.

gutr m. -e§, -iif^e, foot.

guPobcn, m. -§, -oben,
floor.

gttf^ttieg, m. -(e) §, -e, foot-
way, side-walk.

©aBc, f. -w, gift.

QJaBel, Z'. -n, fork.

^^an^f whole, wholly, quite,
entirely.

gar, very, altogether, quite,
absolutely; well-done; in-
deed ; gar m^i, not at all ;
gar !etn, none at all.

(Garten, w. -§, -arten, gar-
den,

%axiXitXf m, -^, —, gardener.

Q5a^, n. ~c§, -t, gas.

(^a^Ucftt, n. -(e)§, -er or
— e, gaslight.

©aft, m. —eg, -dfte, guest.

9C=r inseparable prefix ;
with, together ; prefix for-
ming adjectives and col-
lective nouns.

&cbad, n. —§, baker's wares.

ge^tttcn, O. bear, bring
forth; geboren, born.

&thmhe, n. -eg, -, building,
edifice.

geBen, O. give.

Q^cUf, n. -(c)g, -e,
prayer.

(^eBitge, n. -g, -, mountain
range or region.

geJorctt, 'born; see gebdren.

geBrauj^en, use.

C^eBitftr, /. -en, fee, charge.

(^e^urt^tag, m. -(e) §, -e,
birthday.

Q^thid)if n. -(e)g, -e, poem.

©efajr, f. -en, danger.

gefti^rltri^, dangerous.

gefotten (dat.), O. please.

gef aUtji^ pleasing, courteous ;
tft ^^nen ettnag gefdHtg?
do you wish anything?

gefatttgft, if you please.

gegettf gen (ace), toward,
against.

gCQCttuftcr (dat), over
against, opposite.

(^tQtntoaxi, f. presence, pres-
ent time.

gcften, O. 8. go.

^d)OX^tn, (dat.), listen to
(with submission), obey.

QJctge, f. -n, fiddle, violin.

(55etft(td&C, m. (deck as adj.),
clergyman.

gcJaffctt, calm, cool.

OCltittftOr fluently.

^Mf yellow.

&tlhf n. —eg, — er, money.

&cltfitnimt, f. -en, oppor-
tunity.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

291

geUttOen, O. s. impers., be
successful.

gcltCtt, be valid, aimed at,
pass for.

Q5emtt(bc, n. -§, -, painting,
picture.

gemetn, common.

©entitfc, n. -§, vegetables.

Q^cmvii(e), n. -§, -(e)r,
spirit.

(^tntxaV, m. -e§, -alt, gen-
eral.

gcnug'r enough.

Q5eugra^:^te', /. -fen, geo-
graphy.

^tXcCiStf straight, precisely,
directly, exactly, just.

gerabe au§, point blank.

^tx\m\ slight.

(iJerma'tttar /. Germany.

gem (gerne), gladly.

gem ^afictt, like.

QJcfangr m. ~§, -dnge, song.

QJcfangfiurift, n. -(e)§, -iid^er,
hymn-&oo^.

gcfi^cjcn, O. s. impers. hap-
pen.

^cW^^i^f /. — n, story, his-
tory.

Q5ef(^ijf(e), n. -§, -, lot,
fate.

OJeWrcdftt^ttJort, n. -(e) ^,
-orter, article.

Okfr^fintarf, m. -(e)§/ taste.

QJefii^ntarf^faj^e, /. matter of
taste.

QJeWmeibc, n. -§, jewelry.

gcfj^ttitnb, quick.

gcfcgnct, blessed.

nefctlcn, associate.

OJefeUfcJaft, f. -en, company,
society.

Q5efe^r n. -e§, -e, law.

gefe^t, granted, supposing.

©eftj^t, n. -(e)§, -e or -ex,
sight; /ace.

gefteften, O. confess.

geftcrttf yesterday.

gefut^t, popular, sought
for.

gefUttb, healthy, well.

C^iefuttb^ett, /. -en, health,
"toast."

getxitnnettr O. win, gain.

gettii#, certain; surely.

gettiUJultJ^i, usual.

(^t|jfc(, m. —§, —, top, peak.

(^(anSf m. -e§, splendor.

(^la^, n. -e§, -dfer, glass.

glaferttr of glass.

WanU(n)f m. -n^, -n, be-
lief.

gfauBen, believe , think, sup-
pose.

glcicj, like, immediately, all
the same, although.

mode, f. -n, bell.

(^(iicf, n. -e^, happiness.

gliiif Itd^, happy ; lucky,

g(u()ett, glow.

Q5oIb, n. -e^, gold.

golbettf golden.

QJiJtfie, m. -§, Goethe.

Q^Mf m. -e^, -fitter, God;
bet ©ott, by heaven !

Q5ra5, n. -e§, -dber, grave.

(^xaff m. -en, -en, count.

Q^raftn, f. -ncn, countess.

(^tam, m. -^, grief.

gtnmcn, grieve.

2C}2

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

Q5ramnta'tif, /. -en, gram-
mar.

(^ra§, n. -e§, -dfer, grass.

nxaUf gray.

&xit^tnlanhf n. -§, Greece.

fitcfir great, big.

grogarttg, grand, big.

Q5ro#tttutterr f. -iitter,
grandmother.

QJro^fofttt, m. -(e)§, -o^ne,
grandson.

(^ru^tjater, m. -§, -ater,
gv2indfather.

griin, green.

Q^xnnhf m. -e§, -iinbe, low
ground, valley.

grunenr grow green.

grttttaen, grwnL

QJrutr w. -e§, -iifee, gr^^^
ing, salutation, regards.

gruten, greet, salute.

gut, good, well, kind.

Q5ut, w. -(e)§, -liter, prop-
erty.

(SJiitCr f. goodness.

fiitttgr ^o^c?^ kind.

§aat, n. -e§, -e, hair.
f)ahtn, irreg. N. /laz/^.

§aftn, w. -e§, -ct^ne, cock.
f)alf), half.

^al^, m. -e§, -alfe, neck.
ftaltettr O. hold, keep ; stop.
^atnlDurg, w. -§, Hamburg.
^anb, /. -ctnbc, /tanfi.
janbedt, handle, treat of.

^anbWrift, /. -en, manu-
script.

§anbfcftu6f m. -(e) g, -e,
glove.

^anbtuii&p w. -^, -iid^er,
towel, napkin.

^anbtticrfr w. -(e) §, -e,
handwork, trade.

l^angen, O. hang.

§anno'tier, w. -g, name of a
city.

^an^r m. -en§, Jack; (^o^
I}an'ne§).

§on§(^ienr little Jack, Jacky.

^arfe, /. -n, harp.

^CLtif hard, severe.

§ttfc, mi. -n, -n, hare.

^a|?, ;w. -fjeg, /zaf^.

r)a^(t(i^, hateiuX, homely.

^(i\x)(^if n. -c§, -auptet, head,
chief.

^^axt\)iUi)UX, m. -§, -, prin-
cipal (teacher).

^au^tntann, m. -(e) §,
-anner or -lente, captain.

^anpt^ahtf f. -abte, head
city, capital.

§au^ttt)erf, n. -(e)§, -e,
main work.

^anpitooxi, w. -(e)§, -otter,
head-zvord, noun.

§au§, n. -e§, -dufer, house.

^an^tnXf f. -en, housedoor.

^ani, f. -ante, hide, skin.

ftcJctt, O. lift.

§C(^t, m. -e§, -e, pike
(fish).

§etbcl5crgr w. -§. Heidel-
berg.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

293

^ettttr homewsLvd, home. i

^cimatf f. -en, home.

I)ctm=9c6enr O. s. go home.

))txmix6)t home-like, com-
fortable; secret.

i)txmtoaxi^f homeward.

getnttr^, m. -§, Henry.

Sctfiettr O. be called or
named, mean, signify.

i)txitv, cheerful.

Ijctsen, heat.

^cihf m. -en, -en, hero.

ficlfen (dat.), O. help.

Jefi, clear, bright.

§ennc, f. -n, hen.

f)eVf hither, ago, since.

ficraB'r down hither, down.

ftcrauf, up here.

§cr^ftr m. -e§, -e, autumn.

§erbc, f. -n, /t^rc/, flock.

Ijcretn'r m /i<?f^, iw; come
in!

f}txtxn Uxtxmtxx, O. s. eome
in.

fternar^', heresiiter, after-
wards.

^ettr w. -n, -en, master,
lord, gentleman, Mr., Sir ;
ber §err, the Lord.

ftcrrltd), lordly, splendid.

Jcr=fa9en, ^03; over, recite.

i)txn'htv=id}dntxXr O. shine
across.

^ttnn'itXf down /t^r^.

ftcrutttcr=faficn, O. s. fall
down.

Scrtior'=^rtn9Ctt, irreg. N.
produce.

§crtJor4aufcnp O. run forth.

^era, w. -en§, -en, heart.

ftcr^nri^, heartily.

Scute, to-Ja^;.

fteut^utagc, nowadays.

I)tcr, /j^r^.

ftierfter, to /i^r^, hither.

^imtnelr m. -§, -, heaven,
sky.

fttmm(tf(^, heavenly.

f}XXX, hence, that way, away;
(opposite of ^er).

5tttttb'=rufenr O. shout down.

fttnauf, up hither, up there.

ftinau^'r out hence, forth,
away.

ftinettt', in thither, into.

Stttge^en, O. s. go along,
pass.

I)tn=!otntnenr O. s. come
there.

f)tnten, behind.

Sinter, hinder, behind.

I)tnun'tcr, downward.

Sinuntet'ttJerfen, O. throw
down.

Sittttieg', Siway, off.

Stn=3tel)en, O. s. go forth or
away.

SorS, ^bl)ev, am :^od}ften, high.

gocSbeutfdft, high German.

§0(^frf)u(e, f. -n, higher-
school (University).

©ocSWuUeSrer, m. -§, -,
highschool teacher.

Pi^ften^, at the highest, at
most.

^ocfisett, f. -en, high or fes-
tive time, wedding.

§of, m. -eg, -ofe, courtyard,
court.

Ijoffen, hope.

294

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

Joffentltrft (adv.), it is to be

hoped, as I hope.
^offnungr /. -en, hope.
^Bl^c, f. -n, height, altitude ;

in bie §o^e, up.
^Vi^tf f. -n, hole, cave.
:^oIb, gracious, charming.
5o(ett, fetch, bring.
h^lh n. -e§, -e or -olaer,

wood.
§ii(5<^en, little piece of wood.
^oUfotjhf f. -n, wood-coal,

charcoa/.
l^ort^en, hearken, listen.
Pren, /i^ar.

5ul6fcti, pretty, fine, nice.
^n\f im $Ut, in no time.
^itlfe^ f. -n, help; gu §iilfe,

help!
^Uttb, m. -eg, -e, dog,

hound.
^Uttbctt, w. -§, -e, hundred.
^nn^tXf m. -§, hunger.
ftungern, hunger.
Ijttn^ng, hungry.
^nif m. -e§, -iite, /la/.
fjittCttr keep, keep to; refl.

take care, beware.
fitter, m. -^, —, guardian.
^ittti^Ctt, n. -§, -, cottage.
^nitt, f. -w, hut.

\i)Xf her, their ; ^"^x, your.
xi)XX^, hers, theirs; ^^rtg

yours.
tm = in bem.
immct^ always, constantly.

in (dat. or ace), in, into, at

Axif suffix forming feminine
nouns from masculines. .

tnbem' in that, meanwhile,
while, since.

tttbet (-ffen), in that, mean-
while, nevertheless, while.

inner Jalfi (gen. or dat.),
withm.

innifi, warm, ardent.

in^^cfonberc, in particular,
especially.

Snterjeftion', f. -en, inter-
jection.

Snfdfirift, /. -en, ascription.

inmenbigp mward, mside,
within.

irgcnbttiOf 2inywhere.

irrcn, be in error; refl. be
mistaken.

Sfel^erg, m. a mountain
near Innsbruck.

Sta'Iien, n. -§, Italy.

Stalie'ner, m. -§, - (the)
Italian.

itaUc'nifr^ (adj.), Italian.

\(if yes, indeed, you know, of
course, why ; yea.

jagenr hunt, chase.

Sdgcr, m. -§, -, hunter.

Safttr, n. -e§, -e, year.

Safttc^scitr f. -en, season of
the year.

Safttftnnbertr n. -§, -e, hun-
dred years, century.

3cinnar', m. -§, -e, January.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

295

jttttioljrf yes, indeed.

jc, ever, according as, the

(with compar.).
jcb (jeber), each, every;

either.
iebenfttH^r at all events.
icbetmanttf every man, every

one.
jeboii^'r nevertheless, yet.
jegltdfl^ every, each.
itmal^f at any time, ever.
jemanbr somebody, some

one, any one.
jcn- (jener), yonder one,

that.
ienfctt(§) (gen.), on that

side, htyond.
Scfu^r m. -n, -It, -nm,

Jesus.
U^tf now.

Soljann^ m. -§, John.
3ttbCr m. —n, —XI, Jew.
Sutjenbr f. youth.
Stt'tt, m. July.
ittttHr young.
Sltttfifctr /. -n, young girl,

virgin, maiden.
Suttgfraitr /. -en, young

woman, maiden.
^unglingf m. —^, -c, young

man.
Sunif m. June.

^affcCr m. -§, coffee.
^a()n, m. -c§, -a^m, boat.
Slaifcr, in. -^, -, emperor.
tali, cold.

Sidlitr f. cold, coldness.
SlanuV, n. —§, — e, camel.
Siatnerab'r m. -§ or -en, -en,

comrade, companion.
S!amttt'r m. -(e) §, -t, chim-
ney, fireplace; fireside.
^amntf m. -e§, -amme,

comb.
famtnen, comb.
fom^feitr fight.
fann§ = !ann \)a^.
^axif m. -§, Charles.
^iaxld)tn, Charley.
WdUf w. -§, -, cheese.
Ua^tf f. -n, cat.
fanftxif buy.
^aufmann, m. -(e)g, -dnncr

or -leute, merchant.
fauntf hardly, scarcely.
ttin, not one, no one; gar

fetn, now^ at all.
!ctttC^ttiC9§, by no means.
better, m. -^, -, cellar^
^ettttcr, m. -^, -, butler,

waiter, servant.
fennettr irreg. N. know.
tenner, m. -^, -, expert,

judge.
Slerfcr flitter, n. prison-bar,

grating.
^iefetbaumr w. -(e) ^/ -^'^-

tne, pine tree.
Slteferl)0(5f w. -e§, pine wood.
Sltnbr n. -e§, -or, child.
riinberstmtner, n. -§, -,

children's room, nursery.
UxnUf n. -(e) §, -t, chin.
2xx6)tt f- -n, church.
Stivd)txiluhf n. -(e)§, -er,

church-song, hymn.

296

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

^trf(^C, /. -n, cherry.
^(ttgc, /. -n, complaint.
flagen, complain.
Ulamr yn. -e§, -cinge, sound,

clang.
tlat>p^r clap! clack.
ftaVf clear, bright
Sllaffe, /. -n, class.
^(eib, n. -z§>, -tx, garment,

article of clothing, dress.
lUxUt little, small.
SiXetnigfcit, f. -en, trifle.
^letngclb, n. -§, change,

small coin.
Hinrjen, O. sound ring.
Ko^fcUr knock.
flug, shrewd.
^nabCr m. -n, -n, boy.
Sitntc, n. -eg, -e, knee.
fntftcrttr crackle.
Slo^r m. -e§, -od^e, cook.
ixs^m, cook.
Coffer, m. -g, -, cof/^r,

trunk.
^iJftler, m. -^, man's name.
fommetir O. s. come.
iioubuftcur'r m. -§, -e,

^idntg, wi. -g, -e, ^m^.

iiontgtttr /. -nen, queen.

Sifinigretrf), w. -eg, -e, ^/w^-
dom.

^onjunflton'r /. -en, con-
junction, [can.

f^nnZMf irreg. N. be able,

Slonscrt'r n. -e§, -e, concert.

Sto:pf, w. -eg, -o|)fe, head.

^oratt, m. -g, Koran.

iliir^cr, m. -g^ -, body;

forrigicrenr correct.

foftfiar, <:o^^/3;.

foften, co.y^.

ixa^tUf crack.

^raft, /. -dfte, strength.

IxaMtxif crow.

Ixaxd, ill, sick.

frdttfen, pain, grieve.

^rcibCr f. -n, chalk; crayon.

^rctg, w. -eg, -e, set, circle,

band.
^rtcg, m. -eg, -e, war.
^rone, /^. -n, crown.
^xn^t fn. -eg, -iige, pitcher,

jug.
^iii^ie, f. -n, kitchen.
Um^h f' -n, ball, sphere.
fni}l, cool.

^unft, f. -iinfte, art.
^u^jfcr, n. -g, copper.
Jura, short ; cwrf.
fiirgUr^r recently, lately.
fiiffettr kiss.
^utfcftctr m. -g, - coac/i-

man, driver.

laBettf refresh, quicken.

lad}tn, laugh.

Id^tlrXf smile.

Idr^erUj^r absurd.

labctir load.

Saben, w. -g, -dben, shop,

store.
(of)mr lame.
!ildmp^tn, n. -g, -, little

lamp.
2ampt, f. -n, lamp.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

297

2anb, n. -c§, -e and -dnber,
land, country; ^ter gu
Sanbe, in this country.

fittttbe^morf, /. -en, bound-
ary.

Sanbrnanttr w. -(e) §, -(in-
ner or -leute, farmer.

iianb^manur m. -(e) §, -an-
ner or -leute, fellow-
countryman^ citizen of the
same country.

lan^(c), long, a long while.

lanjjc f}tx, long ago or
since.

longer, considerable.

Idngftr long since.

(affctt, O. let, cause, leave.

£aft, /. -en, load.

fiafter, n. -§, vice.

(atei'nifr^, Latin.

Saufr 7«. -g, -ctufc, course.

Jaufcn, O. s. or h. run.

fattfenbr running, current,
present.

2ant, m. -§, -e, sound.

lani (gen.), according to.

lani, loud, aloud.

lantcn, sound, run, go.

ianitXf pure; mere, nothing
but.

(el6en, have life, live.

Sebettr n. -§, -, life.

2ci>tn^ianf, m. -e§, -ctufe,
life's course, way of liv-
ing.

Uf>tti>dfil, farewell!

hhtvn, of leather, leathern.

(egettf lay; cause to lie.

Sejne, f. -n, back or arm
(of a chair),

leftren, teach.
iicfirer, m. -§, - teacher.
iti^tf light, easy, fickle.
^tihf n. ~c§, pain, harm; e§

tl)ut (or ift) mtr letb, I

am sorry.
(etber, alas ! unfortunately, I

am sorry to say.
leterttr play the lyre.
(ei^ettr O. lend.
Sefttott'r /. lesson.
(cnfen, guide.
^cv^t, f. -n, lark.
lernen, learn.
(efen, O. read.
^efef^ur, f. -en, marks of

wear (in reading).
Scfcftitrfr n. -(e)§, -e, read-
ing-piece.
(e^t, last, latest.
kur^tCtt, give light, shine.
Se«te (pi.), people, men,

folks.
fitt^t, n. -e§, -er, light,

candle.
Ite^, lovely, dear; — ^abtn,

like, love.
Stefirften, Ste6, n. little love,

sweetheart.
fite^Cr /. love.
lithtn, love.
lithctf rather ; mtr ift Heber,

I prefer.
UeBItj^, lovely.
fitefinttgr w. -§, -e, darling,

favorite.
fitcbr n. -c§, -er, song.
fitcbj^eur little song.
(iefcrn, ddiver^ give (a

battle).

298

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

licgenr O. h. or s. lie; e§
Itegt nttr nidjt§ hatan, I
care nothing for it.

fiindftettr Carrie.

linf^, left, to the left.

Qippt, f. -n, lip.

fitft, f. cunning, deceit, craft.

fittcratur, f. -en, literature.

Su6, n. — e§, praise.

(ol^Cttr praise.

2od}, n. -c§, -bdjcx, hole.

£fiffel, m. -§, -, spoon.

Sonbon, n. -§, London.

^OXdtV, f. Lurley.

(o§= (separable prefix),
loose.

XflfeUr solve, (of tickets)
buy.

Sbttic, m. -n, -n, lion.

SfittJenljautr f. -ante, lion's
skin.

Suft, f. -iifte, air.

fittft, -iifte, pleasure; Suft
^aben, be inclined.

(iiftcrn, greedy.

(ufttg, merry, jovial, cheer-
ful ; amusing.

fittftf^tclr n. -§, -z, pleasure-
play, comedy.

^yxWitX^ m. -^, Luther.

Waa^^t f' name of a river,

Meuse.
ntarifiettr make, do, act, play.
ntar^ttg, mighty.
SJlttbdjCtt, girl ; maiden.
^iD'laBbcIcin, n. -§, -, maiden.

M^l)imif f. -en, meal-time,

meal.
9Jlai, m. -(e)g, -e or -en,

May.
9WaIr n. -(e) §, -e, time,

turn, bout.
maUxif paint.
man, one, people, they. ^
mandi(er), many, many a.
tnanj^mal, many a time,

sometimes.
SJlantt, m. -c§, -dnner, 7/jaw,

husband.
SJlotttUttr an Italian city.
SJldrdfienr story, tale, leg-
end.
SJlatf, /. -en, mark, a coin

= 100 ^fenntge = about

25 cents.
9}lar!t, wi. -c§, -axliz, mar-
ket, mart.
9Jlarft^(a^, m. -e§, -d^e,

market place or square.
matfdfltc'rcnr march.
SJliirSr ^/z. -eg, -e, March.
ajlafdji'nc, f. -n, machine.
9Kaff, n. -eg, -e, measure.
3Jlaf?ett (pi.), bounds; iiber

al(c 3)^af3en, exceedingly.
maften, feed with mast,

fatten.
ayiau(, n. -eg, -duler, mouth

(of beasts).
'MdM^f f. -dufe, mouse.
9JlQǤd)cn, little mouse.
SJltiufcfttfie, /. -n, mouse-

trap.
aJlcer, w. -e§, -e, sea.
mcfir, more; tne^rere (pi.),

several.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

299

aWcJrfiett, /. -en, plural, plu-
rality.

Tltf)tS(ti)l, f. plural (num-
ber).

SWcUc, f. -n, mile; the Ger-
man mile equals about
five English miles.

meitt, my, mine.

ntctnctt, think, mean.

mciner, mein (gen. sg. of
id]), of me, my; um met-
net iDtEcn, for my sake;
metnettDegen, on my ac-
count; for all I care.

SJletttung, f. -en, meaning,
opinion.

metftp most; (superl. of
\)id).

mciften^r mostly, at most.

Tlti^itVf m. -^, -, master.

Tlclohit'f (-eV), f. -Ven,
melody, air.

SPZemel, f. name of a river.

ajlenbcl^foljn, m. -^, Men-
delssohn, [human being.

SUcttf^, m. -en, -en, man,

mcrlUiurtJtg, remarkable.

S^cffcr, n. ^, -, knife.

'^lttaU\ n. -e^, -e, metal.

mm, f. milk.

milbr mild.

TliUion', f. -en, million.

SJltnu'te, /. -n, minute.

mif^faUtn, O. displease.

mit (dat.), with; too, also.

mii=hnMtn, irreg. N. bring
along.

tnit^gcjettr O. s. go along,
go (with).

SDIttfeib, n. -§, sympathy.

mit =retfcn, s. travel along
(with).

SJlttfc^uletr m. -§, -, fellow-
pupil. :

SJlittao, m. —§, -c, mid-day,
noon.

SJltttag^effcn, w. -§, -, m«(i-
(ia3; eating, noon-meal,
dinner.

SJlittc, /. wic^dle, midst

'Mxiiclf n. -§, -, middle,
medium, means.

3)ltttc(fittgcr, in. -§, -, mj(/-
dle-finger.

mtttcl^ (gen.), by means of.

3Jlttttt)orf)r m. -§, -e, mJc/-
week, Wednesday.

ntUgen, irreg. N. like; be
possible, may.

mfi^nj^, possible.

OTgUdEifeit, f. -en, possi-
bility.

9Jlo'nat, w. -§, -e, month.

9Jlonbr m. -e§, -e, moon.

ajlontag, w. -§, -e, Monday.

ajlorb, m. -(e)§; arjorbto!
murder !

9Jlotnett, m. -§, morning.

morgen, to-worrow; mor-
gen friil), to-morrow early,
to-morrow morning ; ntor-
gen abenb, to-morrow
evening.

aWotrriettlicbr w. -(e)§, -er,
morning hymn.

aJlorgenrot, «. -(e)§, dawn.

aWorgenftunbCr f. -n, mor-
nmg hour.

"M^^tiiti, m. -§, -g, wo.?-
quito.

300

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

mnhtf tired.

Mnf}tf f. trouble, pains.

5mW(cn)rab, n. -(e)§,

— aber, wz7/-wheel.
W^UtXf m. -§, man's

name.
tttu(tt|j(t3tc'ren, multiply.
SJlund^en, n. -§, Munich.
aWunb, m. -e§, -e, -iinber,

mouth.
muttb(0§, mouthless.
9Kufc'itnt, n. -g, -e'en, ww-

aWufif, /. music.

SWufifkljrcr, m. -§, -, mu-
sic-tea.cher.

mitffett, irreg. N. be obliged
to, must.

TlWxmftnq, m. -^, idle-
ness.

9Jlttt, m. -e§, mood, courage ;
spirits.

aWuttcr, f. -litter, mother.

Sffl\xiitx\^xa^tf f. -n, mother-
tongue.

Wlni^t, f. -u, cap.

9J

nadft (dat), after, to.

9Zad&^ar, w. -§ or -n, -n,
neighbor.

nar^beiUr after //za/, after,
according as.

nati6=5c'r, afterwards.

nar^^aitfettf O. s. chase
after.

9la(^mtttag, w. -?, -e, after-
noon,

^ItL^i, f. ~a&^it, night.

^a^ix^aUf f. -en, nightin-
gale.

'^a^ix^6)f m. -e§, -e, des-
sert.

9Za(^t5Ugr m. -(e) §, -iige,
night-\.v3.m.

nttft(c)r n^ar^ w/^/i.

9^dfte, /. nearness, neighbor-
hood, vicinity.

ttojcr, nearer, intimate.

9lame, i/j. -en§, -en, waw^.

^arr, m. -en, -en, fool.

'^'d^'^tn, little nose.

S^iifrfier, m. -§, -, dainty fel-
low.

^ainx\ f. -en, nature.

naiuxTxdif naturally, of
course.

nc^Ctt (dat. or ace), beside,
by, with.

9k5cnf(u#r m. -e§, -iiffe,
tributary river, branch.

9leBentt)ort, n. -(e)§, -brter,
beside zuord, adverb.

nth^t (dat.), along with, be-
sides.

Slcffe, m. -n, -n, nephew.

neljmettr O. take.

9^etbr m. -e§, envy, jeal-
ousy.

neitt, no.

nennen, irreg. N. name.

9left, w. -e§, -er, nest.

neUr w^'w.

9^eujajtr n. -§, -e, A^^w-

neuliciftr newly, recently,
neuttr wm(?.
neuntf nin^/}.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

301

neunsefjttr nineteen.

neunaigf ninety.

ni^if not.

nid}i^, naught, nothing.

nte, at no time, never.

ttteber, down, downward.

nlcber^Iaffettr O. let down;
refl. alight.

tttema(§, at no time, never.

ntemanb, nobody.

ntmmcr, no more, never.

tttmmcrmeftr, never inore,
never.

ntroenb^r nowhere.

nit, dial. = nt(^t.

nod), still, besides, moreover,
as yet.

nojft niditf not yet ; nocf) eixi,
one more.

9Zotbamertfa, n. -§, North
America.

9'lorben, m. -en§, north.

9Jot, f. need, distress.

9Zote, f. note, musical char-
acter.

nSttn, needinl, necessary.

^lot'x^'hn^, n. -§, -iic^er,
note-book.

notttJCnbtg, necessary.

^Ut)tVh, f. -n, tale, short
story; (distinguished from
D^omari/ longer story or
Romance).

9^iJtJcm5er, m. -§, -, Novem-
ber.

^umvxtXf f. -n, number,

nun, now, now that ; Yfell,

nnXf only.

^\x% f. -iiffe, nut,

X^W^^f useful.

D

D, 0!

o^f whether; (archaic)

above, over.
06 — au^f although.
ofieitr ?ihove, on high.
DberflQj^c, /. -n, surface.
O^crft, m. -eg or -en, -c or

-en, colonel.
oBcrft, uppermost.
oBg(ct((|, although.
obWon, although.
D^ft, n. -c§, fruit.
of)tt)of}lf although.
ober, or.
Cfen, m. -§, cfen, stove,

oven.
offcn, o/>^w.
offentHd^, public.
£)fft5tc'r, m. -g, -e, officer.
liffnen, open.
oUf oft, often.
lifter^, often.
o()! oh!

O'ftetm, m. -§, -e, uncle.
oI)nc (ace), without.
ojttcbent, besides.
O^r, n. -(e) §, -e, ^or.
OftoBcr, m. -g, -, Oc^o-

iblf n. -§, -e, 0//.
Dnfe(, m. -§, -, uncle.
€)t>tXf f. -n, o/>^ra.
Orbnung, f. -en, ordinance,

rule ; order.
Crtr m. -(e) g, -e, or tixtcx,

place.
Dften, w. -§, east.
^itxxu^f n, -§, Austria,

302

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

^aav, n. -c§, -c, pair; etn
paav, a few,

padcn, pack, seize, lay hold
of.

^apitt'r n. -§, -e, paper.

^axi^\ n. Paris.

^axff m. -e§, -t, park.

5[5artte', f. -en, trip, party.

SJSaffanicr'r m. -§>, -e, passen-
ger.

Jjaff ettf pass muster, fit, apply.

^aftor, m. -§, -en, pastor.

^aul, ni. -^, Paul.

^erle, /. -n, pearl.

^erfcr, m. -^, -, Persian.

^erfo'nensug, m. -(e)§, -ii^
ge, accommodation train.

pfennig, m. -c§, -e, penny,
a coin = i/ioo of a Ttaxi
= about 2^ mills.

^fcrb, w. -c§, -z, horse.

^i^ferbeftafjn, A -en, horse-
railroad.

^fcrbcBaftttttiagcnr m. -§, -
horse-car.

^flan^e, f. -n, plant.

%^^^^f f- care, attendance.

:|jf(egen, wait upon, care for.

mWf /. -en, duty.

^ffiirfettr pluck.

^fut, /i(?.' foh ! for shame !

556i(ofo^I)te', /. -i'cn, philo-
sophy.

%x\^tXf m. -§, -, pilgrim.

Wo'le, f. -n, pistol.

Won, m. -(e) §, -cine, />/an.

?i5la^, m. -e§, -ct^e, />./oc^,
seat.

^laubcrn, converse, chatter.

|jlo^li(^, suddenly.

^oxticx\ m. -§, -§, />or^£?r.

^oft, /. -en, post, post-oi-
fice, mail.

^rofibent'r m. -en, -en, pres-
ident.

^rcbigeitr preach.

^retfettr O. praise.

^re^ofitiott', f. -en, prepo-
sition.

^xm^tn, n, -§, Prussia.

'^xono'mtxtf n. -§, -ina, pro-
noun.

^U^Ufum, n. -§, public.

^xiii, m. -(e)§, -e, desk.

^um^erntrfclr w. -§, /^w/it-
pernickel.

^untt, m. -e§, -e, />om^
period.

^JunftUr^, prompt.

quolen, torment.
ixntUc, f. -n, or OueH, m.
— §, -en, spring.

m

Sflab, «. -e§, -aber, wheel.

raft^i, fast, swift.

rafenb, frantic.

fftai, m. -e§, -die, advice, de-
cree.

raten, O. advise, counsel,
guess.

9fiatl)att§, w. -e^f -ciufer.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

303

council-house, city-hall,
court-house.

OJat^au^fcKer, m. -§, -, city-
hall cellar.

IRatljatt^turm, m. -(e) §,
-iirmc, city-hall tower.

ratfant, advisable.

Oiotfet, n. -^, -, riddle.

rauiCtt, steal, deprive.

9iou6er, m. -§, -, robber.

xand)tn, smoke.

JRaum, m. -e§, -auxm, room,
place. [away.

rautnen, make room, clear

raufr^ctir move with a noise,
rustle, rush, roar.

Oicr^nung, /. -en, reckoning,
bill.

9^e(^t, w. — e§, -e, n'^/t^^ jus-
tice ; red^t ^abett, be right.

xcd}i, right, straight; very,
well.

rer^t§, right, to the right.

rebeur talk, speak.

9flebctcil, m. -(e) §, -e, part
of speech.

Sficblit^fctt, /. honesty.

9ficgcl, f. -n, rule.

tReocitr m. -^, —, rain.

Oficgenfr^trnt, m. -(e) §, -e,
umbrella.

refite'ren, reign over, rule.

regncttr ram.

9^et(ft, n. -c§, -e, realm.

xti^f rich.

xtx^tUf reach, hand, pass.

tcif, W/7^.

rctitr clear, pure.

tetn(id), neat, clean.

O^eifc, f. -w, journey.

reifeitr h. or s. journey,
travel.

iReifettbCr m. w. traveler.

reifjen, O. tear, snatch away,
drag.

xtxitxif O. h. or s. ride (on
horseback).

iReiter, m. -§>, -, rider,
horseman.

Oletter^mann, m. -(e) §,
-(inner, dragoon.

tRettljferbr 71. -(e) §, -e, WJ-
m^ horse, saddle horse.

tclgenbf charming.

fReftourattott'r A -en, restau-
rant.

fRetour'Mttet', n. -(e)§, -e,
return-ticket.

Xttitn, rescue, save.

Oflftcttt, m. -e§, Rhine.

ttd^tt0f right, correct.

rter^ien, O. smell.

Oflterje(r m. -§, - bolt.

diin^f m. —c§, -e, ring.

CltngfingCtr m. -§, -, ring-
finger.

Dfltttglcin, little ring.

xim^nm, round about, all
around.

rtnnen, O. run, flow.

dtod, m. -t§>, -Mz, coat.

Xd\)f rude, raw^ rough.

Dfiomon'r m. -(e)§, -e, novel,
romance.

iHo man Wreificr, m. -^, -,
novelist.

9fiiimer, m. -§, -, (the) Ro-
man.

Siits\tf f. -n, rose.

9lof?, n. -eg, -e, steed.

304

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

diot, m. -§, proper name.

XOif red.

dlMtxtf m. -§, -, ridge,
back.

ritrfttiart^, hsickwards.

ruberitr row.

^nff m. -§, -c, call.

r«fen, O. call out, cry out,
shout; call to, summon.

Ofiuftc, f. rest, quiet.

rul)en, rest.

rul)tg, quiet, at rest, uncon-
cerned.

ruttb, round.

fHnnhtdU^iUci, n. -t^, -t,
roundtrip ticket.

9flu ffc, m. -n, -n, (the) Rus-
sian.

ruffiW (adj.), Russian.

fHnf^lanh, n. -§, Russia.

(Baal, m. -e§, -ale, hall,

saloon, parlor.
Ba^tf f. -x\, thing, affair.
Soci^fen, n. -§, Saxony.
Badf m. -c§, -Me, sack,

bag.
fagcn, say, tell.
BaU, n. -c§, -c, salt.
famt (dat.), together with.
Bam^ia^f m. -^, -z, Satur-

day.
Sanb, m. —c§, sand.
fanftr soft, gentle.
(Sanoct, m. -^, —, singer.
Batttlf m. -§, —, saddle.
@a^, m, H^, -ci^e, sentence.

fauer, sour, disagreeable,

hard.
fnumcnr delay.
®cftabe(tt)r m. -§, -aben,

harm, damage ; e§ tft fd^a^

be, it is a pity.
friftaben (dat), harm, injure;

scathe.
Wablid^, harmful.
©J^af, n. -e§, -t, sheep.
fcfiaffen, O. create, produce,

be busy about, work;

shape.
Scftaffnetr m. -§, - porter,

brakeman.
Wavxtn, refl. be a.y/iawed.
B6)ax, f. -en, troop, host.
(Scfiatten, m. —§, —, shadow.
©(^aubcr, m. -§, -, shudder-
ing, horror.
Waueitr look, behold; see.
e*ttuMftttf)(, m. -(e)g,

—Vi^le, rocking-chair.
S(^auttt, m. -eg, -durne,

foam, froth ; scum.
Sr^awf^ief, n. -(e) §, -e,

spectacle; play.
(B^anW^tU)an^, n. -e§, -au^

fer, play/zoM.y^, theatre.
fdjeiben, O. s. part; ha^

©d)etben, parting.
B^txn, m. — e§, — e, sheen,

light.
fcftctnen, O. .y/im^, seem, ap-
pear.
Sd^emel, m. -§, -, footstool.

fi^irfen, send, refl. prepare,
be fitting.

fcj^ie^citf 0. shoot

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

305

Sifttff, 11. -C§, -C, ship.

Sr^iffriienr little ship.
Srfjiffer, m. -§, - boatman ;

skipper.
^d)xUctf m. -§, Schiller.
(Bd)ixm, m. -§, -e, shade,

shield.
^Bdfladiir f. -en, battle.
fdftlafcn, O. sleep, be 2isleep.
(Bd)laU^mnuVf n. -§, -

sleeping-voom.
(5(ft(ag, m. -c§, -age, blow ;

warble (of a bird).
Wlooen, O. strike, beat.
f«(cc^t, bad.
frfilctr^icnr O. s. move softly,

creep, slink.
^d}Vt^ttn, settle, pacify.
fr^Uef^cttr O. close, shut, lock

up; form.
(B^lo^,, n. -e§, -offer, lock;

castle, palace.
(5(^(uffcl, m. -§, -, key.
^d^mtdtxtf taste, savor,

smack.
Sj^mers, m. -e§ or -en§,

-en, pain, smart.
(ScJ^micb, m. -e§, -e, .ymiV/z,

black^mz7/j.
ftftmitrfcn, adorn.
Sdiincc, m. -e§, snow.
fd)nctbenr O. cut.
Srfinctbetr m. -§, -, tailor.
fi^neten, .ywozc;.
fi^neK, fast, quick.
©dftttcfisu^r >n. -(e) §, -iige,

fast train, express train.
ff^Ottr already, betimes, at

least, surely, doubtless,

even ; fd^on red^t, all right.

Won, handsome, fair, beau-
tiful.

fc^ii^fettf draw, draw in, in-
hale.

Srf)ii^futtg, f. -en, creation.

Sr^ornftetn, m. -(e)g, -e,
chimney.

<S(tiottranbr n. -§, Scotland.

Sc^ranfe, /. -n, barrier.

Stftrerfettr m. -^, -, terror,
fright.

fj^recfcn, O. N. to be afraid ;
frighten.

8cfirctfibu(^, n. -(e) §, -u=
djer, writing ^oo/e.

fj^rctBcttr O. write.

Sj^ret^feber, f. pen.

<S(firtft, /. -en, writing.

3j^riftftctter, 77^. -§, -
writer ; ©(^rtftfteHertn,
woman writer.

S(^rttt, m. -(e) g, -e, pace.

Sr^uftr ^^. -^^/ -e. ^/^o^.

Srf)U^ma(^er, w. -§, -, shoe-
maker.

©rfiulb, /. -en, fault, debt.

fc^ulbt^r guilty, to blame.

8(^u(c, f. n. school.

8fftu(er, w. -§, -, scholar,
pupil.

'Bd)uiQchmhCf n. -§, -,
.yc/?oo/-building.

(Sc^u^r w. -eg, protection,
defence.

fc^it^en, save, protect.

Sr^ttiari^fjett, f. -en, weak-
ness.

(8rfttt)a9Ctr m. -§, -ctger, bro-
ther-in-law.

(Bditoalhe, f. -n, swallow.

3o6

GERMAN -ENGLISH VOCABULARY

^d)toan, m. -§, -am, swan.
jd^toax^f black, swarthy,

szvart.
^^toax^hxoif n. -§, black-

bread.
fj^ttieBcn, float, hover.
©dftttJebc, m. -n, -n, Szvede.
Scfttneben, n. S, Sweden.
fi^tticbiW (adj.), Swedish.
^d)ti)^if<^n, s. or h. roam,

rove.
friftttietgcn, O. be silent.
Si^ttietn, n. —c^, —e, swine,

hog.
<Bd)tom, f. Switsevlsind.
Sc^ttieiser, m. —^, -, Swiss.
fj^ttielgen, revel.
ft^ttJCtf grievous, sore,

heavy.
<Bd)totxi, n. -e§, -ev, sword.
8cf)ttJertge!(irr, n. -§, sword-

clash.
Si^mcftcr, /. -rt, sister.
f(^mimtnett, O. h. or s. swim.
^d^toiixtxif O. swear, vow.
Sr^ttJUtr m. -§, -me, oath.

fcrfjft, .yt>fA.

fetftatg, sixty.

See, f. -en, sea.

See, w. -(e) §, -en, lake.

Seele, /. -n, soul.

fegnen, bless.

feften, O. see.

U^Xf very, very much.

fetttr his, its.

fetn, O. s. be.

fett (dat.), since.

fettbetttr since that, since.

(BciUf f. -n, side, page.

fe(0 (after ber), .y^//same,
same.

fe(l6er, self.

felJft, self; even.

fef^ftsufrteben, .y^//-satisfied.

felten, rare; seldom.

fenben, irreg. N. send.

©e^Jtem^er, m. -§, - Sep-
tember.

fe^en, .y^/, place; refl. seat
one's self, sit down.

ft(^, himself, herself, itself,
themselves, one another.

ytd)tXf sure, secure, certain.

fie, she, they.

Ste, you.

fieBen, seven.

fieftent, seventh.

fieft ( en ) seftn, seventeen.

fie5(en)5t0, seventy.

Steg, w. -e§, -e, victory.

Stegel, m. -§, -, seal.

ftegen, conquer.

8i(6e, /. -n, syllable.

ftngen, O. sing.

3tn9en, n. -§, singing.

Singer, m. —^, —, singer.

finfen, O. sink.

Sinn, m. -e§, —c, sense,
meaning; mind, spirit.

<Si^, m. -c§, -c, seat.

fi^en, O. sit.

fo, so, thus, then, if; so!
indeed !

foBalb, as soon as; imme-
diately.

foeften, just, now.

fofort, forthwith, immedi-
ately.

fogar, even.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

307

fotjictdfl, immediately.

Softn, m. -c§, -b^ne, son.

W^ (fold^er), such, such a.

<Bolhaf, m. -en, -en, soldier.

futten, irrcg. N. shall,
should; be obliged to; be
said to.

(Bommtx, m. —§, —, summer.

3ommcr3Ctt, /. -en, summer-
time.

fottbcrJar, peculiar, strange.

fottbern, but (after a nega-
tive).

(Bonnahtnh, m. -§, -e, eve-
ning before Sunda.y, Sat-
urday.

(Sonne, /. -rt, sun.

8onnenMitntr m. -(e)§, -e,
sun screen, jwn-umbrella.

©onntag, m. -§, -e, Sunday.

fonft, else, otherwise; for-
merly.

Sorge, f. -n, care.

foroen, take care.

3ortc, f. -n, sort, kind.

fotooftl — al^, both — and.

(Bpankn, n. -§, Spain.

(BpanicXf m. —§, —, Spaniard.

ipanx^d) (adj.), Spanish.

W^if late.

f^oteften^r at the latest.

flJa^ie'rcn, h. or s. go out for
exercise or pleasure; fpa^
gieren qe^en, go out walk-
ing; fpagieren \a^ven, go
out driving ; [pagieren veU
ten, go out nding.

©^asiergangr m.-(e)§, -an-
qe, walk, promenade.

®^C(f, m. -e§, bacon.

S^jcife, f. -n, food.

eueifefartc, /. -n, bill of
fare.

f^jcifen, take food, dine.

Spiegel, m. —§, -, mirror.

^pitif n. —^, -e, play.

f^telen, play.

^pitlmann, m. -(e) §, -ctn^
ner or -leute, player, mu-
sician, fiddler.

(S^ieltjogel, m. -§, -bqel,
playing bird.

(S^telatmmcr, n. -§, - play-
room.

flJt^en, sharpen (pencils).

'Bpxadit, f. -n, speech, lan-
guage.

f^rerfjen, O. speak.

f^jrengen, burst.

®|)tt(iflttiort, n. -(e)§, -bt^
iet, saying, maxim.

f^rtngen, O. s. or h. spring,
jump.

©Ipruc^r m. -e§, -ixd^e, pro-
verb.

^iaht, f. -cibte, city.

^ia\>ixaif m. -(e)§, -ate,
city council.

<Btahinf}x, f. -en, city clock.

©taftlfeber, /. -n, steel pen.

^iCL% m. -e§, -dUe, stall,
stable.

©tanb, m. -e§, ante, condi-
tion; tm ftanbe fetn, be
able.

©tar, m. -(e)§, -e, .yearling.

ftarf, strong, severe, heavy.

<BtdxU, f. strength.

©tortetn, little .yearling.

fStation'r /. en, station.

3o8

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

^iait (gen.), instead of.
fterfctt, stick, remain fast,

fix, put.
ftcften, O. stand, be.
fte()(en, O. steal.
fteif, stiff.

ftetoen, O. s. ascend, rise.
Stein, m. -e§, -e, stone.
<Bitinioi}lt, f. -n, stone-coal,,

hard coal.
(BUUc, f. -Xi, place, posi-
tion.
ftcttcn, put, place, set.
ftetr^en, O. s. die.
©tern, m. -e§, -z, star.
ftet^, steadily, constantly.
©ttefet, m. -§, - boot.
ftttt(e), still, quiet.
Stitte, /. -n, stillness, quiet.
Stintme, f. -n, voice.
fttmmen, vote.
©ttrn, /. -en, forehead,

broM^.
<Btod, m. -e§, -Me, stick;

story (of a house).
etorfttier!, n. -(e)g, -e,

floor, story.
ftots, proud.

'Btoxd), in. -e§, -brd^e, stork.
ftijren, disturb.
©trafgelb, n. -§, -ex, fine.
8traf?e, /. -n, street,
ftrerfen, stretch.
^ixdd)l)f)Uf n. -e§, -olger,

strike wood, match.
©trett, m. -e§, -e, dispute,

strife, quarrel.
ftretten, O. strive, fight.
ftreng, severe, strict.
^ixof), n. -e§, straw.

(Strul)6ut, m. -(e)§, -uie,
straw-hat.

Strom, m. -(e)§, -bme#
stream.

ftrijnten, stream.

^iuhtf f. -n, sitting room.

Stitrf, n. —§, -e, piece ; play.

Sturfdfien, little piece.

Stubent', -en, -en, m. stu-
dent.

ftttbte'ren, study.

^in\>xvimt n. -§, ©tubien,
study.

^tnf)l, m. -e§, -ii^Ie, stool,
chair.

Stunbe, f. -xi, hour, lesson,
hour's walk (league).

Sturm, m. -eg, -iirme,
storm.

SuBftantb', n. -e§, -e, sub-
stantive.

fut^en, seek, search for.

Suben, m. -§, south.

fiibttr^, southward.

Su^^c, f. -xx, soup.

fii^, sweet.

Xa^, m, -e§, -e, day.

i'a^lx6), daily.

%Cilt n. -e§, -alex, valley,

dale.
XahXf m. -§, -, (German)

dollar, about 72> cents.
XdiXiXitxibaviVXf m. -(e)§,

-durne, fir-tree.
^ante, f. -n, aunt.
tanaen, dance.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

309

to^fct, excellent, brave.

Xafd)C, /. -n, pocket, satchel.

Xa^Uf f. -n, cup.

%aif f. -en, deed.

XanhCf f. -n, dove.

tciufdjen, deceive, disappoint.

^aufenb, n. -§, -e, thousand.

Xee, m. -§, -, tea.

%tx\f m. n. -e§, -e, part ;
deal.

tcirttietfe, part wise, partly.

UUpf^onkxtn, telephone.

XtUn, m. -§, -, plate.

^^cnot', m. -§, -e or -ore,
tenor (singer).

^e^^it^, m. —§, -z, carpet.

itmXf dear, precious, be-
loved.

^fiea'ter, n. -§, - theatre.

Xi]eohoXf m. -§, Theodore.

ttef, deep.

'^hVf n. -e§, -e, animal.

S^lerrjarten, m. -§, -arten,
2inim2i\- gar den, zoological
garden, park.

^tnte, /. -n, ink ; tint.

Xi^d), m. -c§, -e, table.

%i^d}qtM% n. -§, -e, prayer
at table, blessing.

%i^d)hx, m. -§, -, cabinet-
maker, joiner.

2:tWtu(^, n. -e§, -n^ex,
table-cloth.

%\telf m. -§, -, title.

^odjter, f. -i3d}ter, daughter.

^iirfltcrd&cn, little daughter.

^Ob, m. -C§, (-e), death.

Xoxtf m. ~t^, -one, tone,
sound. [sel.

%r>^if m. ~e§, -opfe, pot, ves-

Xox, n. -(e) §, -e, gate.

tiJten, kill.

tiit=fdf)(ttrjen^ O. strike dead,
kill.

Zxd^if f. -en, dress, load,
volley.

ixa^txif O. bear, carry.

^rantttiagett, m. -§, -, street-
car.

trand^teren, carve.

^rane, /. -n, tear.

^ranfr m. -e§, -ctnfe, drink.

tronJcn, give to drink, soak,
drench.

fraueur trust

%xanm, m. -e§, -outnc,
dream.

traatrtg, sad.

trcffcn, O. hit, fall upon,
meet.

tretfieur O. drive.

trenncn, separate, divide ;
refl. part.

Xrc^J^C, f. -n, staircase;
etne ^reppe l^od^, second
story.

trcten, O. s. tread, step.

treUr true, faithful.

^reuc, /. truth, honor.

trinfen, O. drink:

Xxxiif m. -e§, -e, tread, step.

Xrommefr f- -n, drum.

triJftcUr comfort.

tro^ (gen. or dat), in spite
of.

2;ro^ (3:!ru^), m. -e§, de-
fiance.

troljbctttr nevertheless.

Xudfir n. -e§, -itd^er, cloth,
canvas, duck; shawl.

310

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

tiiiJjttg, sound, heavy, thor-
ough.
inn, O. do, act.
^itr, /. -en, door.
Xt^xoV, n. -§, Tyrol

n

u* f, tt>., itnb fo loetter, and so
farther, etc., &c.

hM, evil, ill, bad ; ubel ne^-
men, take amiss.

nhtn, practice.

it^cr (dat. or ace), over.

n^ttaU, all over, every-
where.

u5cretn'=fttmmen, agree.

ii^crfaft'rcn, O. run over.

it^erffwt, w. -e§, overflow,
profusion.

iifierge'^ettr O. deliver.

iiBer^au^t', in general, on
the whole, anyway.

u6et(affen, O. turn over,
leave.

it^crmurgcn, over to-mor-
row, day after to-mor-
row.

uBcrncft'mCtt, O. undertake.

nhtxxodf m. -(e)g, -Me,
overcodX.

itl^cr^^fe^cn, set over,

ubcrfe^'ejir translate.

it^erfc^'ungr f. -en, transla-
tion.

Ubet5tcf)cr, m. -§, -, over-
coat.

it^ungf f. -en, practice, exer-
cise.

Ur)Ianb^ m. -§, name of an
author.

Vif)Xf f. -en, hour; watch,
clock ; tvk t)iel Vif)x ift eg,
what time is it?

urn (ace), around, at, for.

nm ha^, in order that.

urn — ttJlKen (gen.), on ac-
count of.

umaeftenb, by return mail.

umfter'^trrenr wander about.

umljin'^fiittnett, irreg. N. to
help, forbear (used with
a negative).

itm^cOtet^en, O. rewrite, re-
model.

umf(^itet'5cn, O. circum-
scribe.

UtttfOttft'r in vain.

umftcftenb, reverse, on the
reverse side.

attn^ftetgenr O. change cars.

Utt'-f prefix of negation, cor-
responding to Eng. un-,
in-; it generally has the
accent.

wnartig, ill-behaved,
naughty.

nnhc^xdYix^f inconceivable.

unhtmtxtif i^nnoticed.

unftcfttmmt, indefinite.

unb, and.

ungefttjr, about, nearly.

ungern, wwwillingly, reluc-
tantly.

tlnglurfr n. -(e)g, -e, ill-
luck, misfortune.

Itnttjerfital', f. -en, univer-
sity.

Unf often (pl.)> expenses.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

311

Unrei^t, n. -§, -c, wrong;
uurcd^t ^ahcn, be wrong.

Unfci)U(b, /. innocence.

itnfet, our, ours.

ttltten, below, beneath, down.

tttttct (dat. or ace), un-
der.

unterBre'r^Cttr O. interrupt.

unterbcffcttr meanwhile.

unter-geften, O. s. go under,
set.

nnitxf^alh (gen. or dat.), be-
neath, under.

untetftaCtCttr O. refl. con-
verse, entertain one's self.

untcrttieQ^, under way, on
the way.

ununtctbtorSftctt, wwinter-
rupted.

untjorfidftttg, careless.

unttieife, unwise.

unmctt (gen. or dat.), not
far from.

«nttio()(, unwell.

Un^t, f. -n, ounce,

uxUihnf judge.

Urfac^Cr /. -n, cause.

\), z= t)on.

^aitVf m. -§, -(iter, fa-
ther.

^aitvlanh, n. -§, father-
land, one's own or native
country.

35aterranb§ncb, n. -c§, -ev,
patriotic song.

35ci(r^en, n. -§, -, violet.

tJer=r inseparable prefix, add-
ing to verbs the. idea of
loss, reversal, complete or •
intense action ; and of
change of condition.

t)cxad}icn, despise.

Uer^effern, make better, im-
prove.

tierBteten, O. forbid.

tJcrBtnben, O. bind up,
oblige.

tierblufft, dazed.

tietB(uf)ett, fade, die.

35erBrecften, n. -^, -, crime.

tierBrennen, irreg. N. burn
up.

S5er6um, n. -§, -a or -en,
verb.

tjerbcrBen, O. spoil, ruin.

tierbtcnen, earn, merit.

'^txhxnih m. -t§>, -\i\\t, vexa-
tion.

Uerebertt, ennoble.

35erfaffcrr m. -^, -, compo-
ser, author.

Uerfaffen, compose.

tJcrgannen, gone by, past,
last.

tJerge^en^r in vain.

tJetgcffettr O. forget.

S^ergifmtcfttmettt (S^ergife-
memnic^t), n. -§, -, for-
get-me-not.

i)CVQhidfCn, O. compare.

^Beronugettr n. -^, - satis-
faction, pleasure.

UCtljet'ratet, married.

tjerirrcttr refl. lose one's way.

tJcrjagettr chase, or drive
away.

312

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

licrfaatfctt, sell.

Dcrflinoen, O. die away.

tJCrlanoen, require, demand.

^txlamcxif n. -§, -, longmg,
desire.

Uerlaffen, O. leave, aban-
don.

Uerletften, O. lend, bestow,
confer.

UerlteBtr loving, in love.

tJerlieren, O. lose; berloren,
lost, forlorn, ruined.

tietmctben, O. avoid.

Uermiigcn, irreg. N. be able.

ticrmittltti, presumably,
probably.

tiernai^Iaffigett, neglect.

S5ernunft, /. reason.

ticrniinftigr sensible.

ijcrrateur O betray.

S5er§r m. —e§, — e, verse.

SBerfamtttlttttg, f. en, as-
sembly, gathering, meet-
ing.

tJerfaumen, miss, neglect.

tJetfr^teben, different, vari-
ous.

tierfd^Itegenr O. close, shut.

t)tx\d)limtn, O. swallow up.

tJcrfjfittitcgctt, discreet.

tierMttJtnbenr O. s. disap-
pear.

tytvU^trtf transfer, remove ;
rejoin.

ticrfinfen, O. fade, die.

tierforgcn, supply.

Uetf|jrcd)cn, O. promise.

SSerftanbr m. -e§, under-
standing, sense.

tierftanbigr sensible.

Uerftel)cn, O. understand ;
refl. c§ ber]tel)t m, it is
a matter of course, of
course.

tJerfur^en, attempt, try, en-
deavor.

ticrttcft, deeply engaged in,
absorbed.

tJerttJcftettr blow away.

berttJcrfen, O. throw away,
re j ect.

ticraetfiettr O. pardon.

35ctter, m. -§, -n, cousin.

t)itlf much.

titeHettfttr perhaps.

\)UXf four.

tJterntal, four times.

Uteri, fourth.

^Xtxitl, n. -§, -, fourth part,
quarter.

tJterten^r fourthly.

tJier^clfttt, fourteen.

fterstg, forty.

SSogclr m. -§, -bqel, bird.

3539 (e) (cm, little bird.

^oU, n. -(e) §, -olUt,
people.

SSori^Buj^, n. -e§, -M)er,
folksbook.

^olUiuhf n. -e§, -ex, popu-
lar ballad.

^otU^a^tf f. -n, popular
tradition.

tfoUf full.

^tioUf suffix forming adjec-
tives.

tjottenbcttf end in full, finish.

tioll5tel)cn, O. perform,

tjom = t)on bem.

Uon (dat.), from, of; by.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

313

t)OX (dat. or ace), before,
on account of; bor tJter:^
ge^n ^agcn, a /orfnight
ago.

tjoran'r on before, in front,
at the head.

tiorau^'^fcfiettr O. foresee.

tiorfiei-fajrcttr O. s. go ^3; or
past.

t)Oxf>tUQtl)mf O. s. pass.

Uorgctiirft, advanced.

tjorgeftcrnr before yesterday,
day before yesterday.

^oxf^ahtn, n. ^§, -, purpose.

tJorfter, before, previously,
first.

^OXX^f former, preceding,
last, next before.

i)OX-UUttf O. read aloud.

tJorrc^t, before the last, last
but one.

2?ormttta9, m. -^, -t, before
midday, forenoon.

tiotr^^fc^licgctt, O. lend, ad-
vance.

95orfiI6c, /. -n, prefix.

S^orftobtr f. -ahiz, suburb.

bot^ftettctt, place before, in-
troduce.

35orftcfiun9, f. -en, introduc-
tion.

tJortcU^oft, advantageous.

tjortrcff'ltj^, excellent, ad-
mirable.

tioru'^cr^gcljen, O. s. go by
or past.

S5oturtct(, n. -§, -z, preju-
dice.

tiottodrt^f forwards; for-
wards!

S^ormortr w. -(e) §, -i3rter,

before word, preposition.
tior-seioen, show, display.
tJor^Stclftenr O. prefer.

aSariftt, f. -en, watch, guard.

hJarfcr, valiant.

2Baffen5ruber, m. -§, -iiber,
brother in arms.

SSagen, m. -^, -, wagon, car.

ttiaftr, true; ntc^t itial^r, is it
not true, or so?

ttJoftrenb (gen.), during;
while.

ttJaftrfjaf'tig, true, truly, in
fact.

ttiaStMetttltdft, having the
appearance of truth, prob-
able.

SSalb, m. -c§, -diber, forest,
wood, grove.

SSanb, f. -ctnbe, wall (of a
room).

njanbern, s. or h. wander.

SSangc, f. -n, cheek.

toann, when?

ttJartttr warm.

SBcirmCr f. worwth, heat.

ttiarten, wait for, auf (ace).

^ttiart^, -ward, adverbial
ending.

ttiatunt', on account of what,
why?

ttia§, what, that which, what-
ever) tuag fiir, what for,
zvhat kind of?

Staffer, n. -§, -, water.

314

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

SSaffetgru^c, /. -n, water-
pit or tank, cistern.

SBaffetfali, m. -(e)g, -aHe,
waterfall.

tuerfen, wake up, awa^^.

ttJcber, neither; toeber —
nod), neither — nor.

tticg, awaj;, forth.

2Bcg, w. -G§, -e, way^ road ;
toeg, make way! iDcg ba,
out of the way !

tt)e0en (gen.), on account of.

ttJCfi^geftettr O. s. go away.

tt»e9?rct#en, snatch away.

SSef), n. -e§, — e, woe, pain.

ttJe^Cf W(9^/ alas !

SSeftmutr /. sadness.

2BeiI)nad^tr f. -en, Christ-
mas.

aBeiftnatSftt^Bautttr m. -(e) §,
-dume, Chrismas-tree.

aBctftnat^t^tag, m. -(e)§, -e,
Christmas-Jaj;.

tticU, because, since.

SSeile, f. while, space of
time, leisure.

SBcin, m. -e§, —z, wine.

meinen, weep.

SScifc, /. —n, manner, wise;
melody, air.

ttietfc, wise.

mctf?, white.

ttJett, zvide, far, distant.

totXti) (ii:)el(^er), which,
what, that, who.

SSScHe, /. -n, wave, billow.

2Be(t, /. -en, world.

menig, little.

ttJcnigftcn^r at least.

ttjcnn, wA^w, if.

ttJCtttt — an^f although.

menngleic^, although.

tticr, who, he w/io, whoQver;
irer ba, who's there!

ttJcrben, O. s. become,
grow.

$Ber!, n. -e§, -e, wor^.

SSerftag, m. -e§, -e, word-
ing day.

totttf worthy, worth; dear.

ttic^ftal^, on account of w/ia^^
wherefore?

SSeftcn, m. -g, w^.yf.

SSetter, ii. -§, -, weather,
storm, tempest.

ItJti^ttg, weighty, important.

ttJiber (ace), against.

ttite, how, in what way;
as.

ttiteber, again.

ttJtcbet-fotnmenr O. s. come
again.

nJtebcr^^feftettr see again ;
SBteberfe^en, n. meeting.

SSieUr n. -§, Vienna.

SBiefe, /. -n, meadow.

ttJtcnJOfilr although.

ttitlb, wild.

aStlfternt, m. -§, William.

2Bt(8crtnftraf?e, f. William
Street.

SSttten, m. -§, -, will, de-
sign, purpose ; utn tneinet-
iDtllen, on my account.

ttJtttfommcnr zvelcome.

SBinb, m. -c§, -e, wind.

SStntet, m. -§, -, winter,

toixtiid), actually, really.

ttitffcn, irreg. N. know,
know how to, be able.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

315

SSiffenWaft, /. -en, science,
knowledge.

tDO, where, in which; when,
if.

c, f. -en, week.
ge, f. -n, wave.

SBogenlprall, m. -§, wave-
dash.

tOOf)tXf whence?

tUOfttUr whither, what way?

tt)Of)tf well.

tt)Of}l, to be sure, indeed,
probably, I presume ; \a
tDoP, yes indeed, why cer-
tainly.

ttiol^ran, well then ! come on!

^oWdtcxixtf f. -en, benefac-
tress.

hJOIincnr dwell, reside.

"^t^^n^an^t n. -c§, -dufer,
dwelling-house.

^of^nnnq, f. -en, dwelling,
lodging, apartment.

SBolfr m. -e§, -olfe, wolf.

SSolfc, f. -n, cloud.

mpfiettr irreg. N. will, be
willing, wish, desire.

ttiottett, woolen.

tDOmiif wherewith, with
what or which.

tt}f>tan^, whereout, out of
what or which.

ttjortn, wherein, in what or
which.

aSort, n. -e§, -e, otiev,
word; SSorte = words
connectedly, as language ;
SBorter = words discon-
nectedly, as parts of
speech.

^btUxWdi, n. -(e)§, -u^
c^et/ word-hook, diction-
ary.

aSiJrtletnr n. -§, -, little
word.

ttioru!6erf wheres-t, whereof,
over what or which.

ttiotiottr whereof, of or con-
cerning what or which.

ttJPSWf whereto, for what
purpose ?

njunbcr^ot, wonderful.

ttJunberttr refl. and impers.
zvonder.

ttiunberfam, wonderful.

tonnhtxWon, wonderfully
beautiful.

ttiunWett, wish.

Uiitrbtgettr deem worthy of,
honor with (pers. ace,
thing gen.).

SBitftCr /. -n, waste, wilder-
ness, desert.

Bdfirr f. -en, number; tale.

aa^Cettr count.

Sa^lttfoxt, n. -(e)§, -bvtex,

number-?x'orJ, numeral.
^af^mf tame.

Scifiitf fit. -e^, -Ci^ne, tooth.
^axif tender, delicate.
Se^ttr ten.

Seftnmaf, ten times.
aefint, tenth.
3etgefinger, m. -§, -, index

finger.
5eigen, show, point out.

3i6

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

3ei(er f. -n, line.

3eit, /. -en, time ; tide.

Seitalterr n. -§, - age, pe-
riod.

3eitticr(uft, m. -§, -, loss
of time.

3cttun0r A -^ti, newspaper.

Settttiott, n. -(e)§, -orter,
time-worJ, verb.

ger-f inseparable prefix, add-
ing the idea of apart,
asunder, in pieces.

aerfirer^Cttr O. break to
pieces.

Serquetfj^Cttr crush, quash.

5Crtet#en, O. tear in pieces.

^erftiiren, destroy.

Stegelftetttr m. -(e)§, -e,
brick.

ateften, O. draw, tug; s.
march, go.

Stcfr ?^. -e§, -e, aim, goal.

jtCtttltdft, suitable, proper,
seemly, tolerably, pretty.

3tcr, /. ornament, charmer.

3terbc, f. -n, ornament.

SimmtX, n. -§, - timber;
structure; room.

Stmmetmann, ?n. -(e) §,
-dnner or -leute, carpen-
ter.

Btfte'rne, f. -n, cistern.

Bttro'ne, /. -n, lemon.

Stttcrn, tremble.

5U (dat), to; too.

au^Brtngen, irreg. N. bring
to, spend.

SUrfcttr dart, flash.

SndtXtt)txff n. -(e)§, con-
fectionery, candy.

aucrft'r at first.

5tt=fattett, O. s. fall to or
in.

gufaUtgr by chance.

3ttfrie'bett> at peace, satis-
fied.

3«ftte'benSett, /. content-
ment.

3«9f m. -e§, -iige, tug;
draught; train,

au^rjefien, O. concede.

Sugfuftrer, m. -§, - train
leader, conductor.

3ug(etcft', at the same time.

Smlnft, f. draught of air.

3u()orer, m. -§, -, auditor.

SnfxtnU, f. future.

BUhi^Vf at last, .finally.

^nm = gu hem.

m-tnad)tn, shut, close,
fasten.

3«n9e, f. -n, tongue.

5ur = gu ber.

mtt^t'-lommtn, O. s. get
along.

Suriirf', back, backwards.

aururf^gefien, O. give back.

^uxM^^tf}tn, O. s. back out,
desert.

guritrf^Wtrfen, send back.

aufam'men, together.

aufammen^faKen, O. s. fall
down, fall in ruins.

Sttfanttnen-l^altenr O. hold
together.

aufammcn-tcriftnett, take or
reckon together.

axttior'r before.

autJor^Jomtnen, O. s. antici-
pate.

GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY

317

gatttiei'lettr at times, some-
times.

3tt»anatgf twenty.

Btoanm% twentieth.

gttiar, indeed, to be sure.

Sttierf, m. -(e)§, -e, pur-
pose, aim.

gttiei, two.

5ttJeicr(et, of two kinds.

3tt>eifel, m, -^, -, doubt.

3ttJet0r ^» -^^/ -^' bough;

twig.
5ttictma(f two times, twice.
5tt)eit, second.
SttieitCtt^, in the second place,

secondly.
5ttJifci^ett (dat. or ace), be-

tween.
5ttiijlfr twelve.
Sttiiilftf twelfth.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

i'tber

1. German words or parts of words spaced ( 5( b C Tl b ) are those historically
related to the English (or a part of it) at the head of the article.

2. For abbreviations and further explanations, see the German-English
vocabulary.

address, anreben.
address, E b r e f f e, /. -n.
adjective, (Stgenfc^aft^tDort,

n. -(e)§, -iirter, ^rbje!^

1 1 b, n. -§>, -e.
admire, belDunbern.
advance (lend), t?orf(^te^

J3en, O.
advanced, borgeriidt.
adverb, S^eBentDort, n. -(e) §,

-orter, 51 b t) e r' 16 (mm) ,

n. -§, -bten.
advise, raten (dat.).
afraid (be — ) , f iircfjten, refl.
after, xxatS) (dat.).
afternoon, "^adjmittac^, m,

-§, -e.
again, tDtcber, no^mdi§.
against, g e g e n, iDtber

(ace),
age (a fortnight — ), bor

btergel^n ^aqtn.
ago (an hour — ), bor etner

©timbe.
agree, iiberetnftimmen.
agreeable, angenel^m.

a, an, ettt.

able (be — ), !onnen.

about, concerning,

(ace),
about, nearly, ungefa^r.
about, (be — to), tm S3e-

griffe fetn.
above, iiber, ober^alb (gen.),
accept, anne^men, O.
accident, Unglixc!, n. -§, Un-

gtii(fgfall, m. -(c)g, -dUe.
accompany, begletten.
account (on), (itm) — ine^

gen ; on my account, (um)

meinettnegen.
accusative, ?lccxtfattb, in.

-e§, -e.
acquaintance, S3e!anntf(^aft,

f. -en.
acquainted (be — with),

fennen, irreg. N.
act (as if), tun, O. (al§ ob).
actually, iDtrflic^, Voa^z^

l^aftig.

319

320

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

ah, a (^.

alive (be — ), live, leben.

all, all, gana; all right,

fd^on (red^t).
almost, faft.
alone, a it e t n ; let alone,

bleiBen (or ftel^en) Iaf=

fen.
aloud, I ant; read aloud,

borlefen, O.
alphabet, mc, n, %l^

pl)ahti\ n. -§, -e.
already, fd^on.
also, an^, mit
although, obtDO^I.
always, immer.
America, ?l tn e r i ! a, n. -§.
an, a, e i n.
and, u n b.
and so forth, u n b f 0 tvextcv,

u. f. tv.
angry, drgerltd^.
animal, ^ier, n. -e§, -e.
another, eirtanber; nod^ etn.
answer, ^Inttvovt, f. -en.
answer, ant tvotten, ht^

ant iDorten, ertuibern.
anxiety, 5Ingft, f.
anyway, benn, iibcr^au|3t,

bod§.
anywhere, irgenblDO ; not

anywhere, nirgenbttjo, nir^

0enb§.
apiece, ha§ (Stiidf.
appear, erfd^einen, O.
apple, 51 p f e I, m. -§, ^(pf el.
apple-tree, 51 p f e I baum, w.

-(e)§, -aume.
April, 51 p r i r, m. -§, -e.
arise, auf^ftcj^en, O. s.

arm, 51 r m, m. -e§, -e.
arrive, an^fommen, O. s.
article, @ef(f)Ie(^tgtt)ort, n.

-(e)g, -brter; STrtt'lel,

w. -§/ -.
as, al§; as though, a I §

ob.
as, like, itJte.
as, since, ba.
as yet, nod^.
ask, fragen, N. (O.).
ask for, bitten, O. (with

um).
at, um (ace), 3U (dat), in.
at (the store or house of),

bet (dat.).
attention, ^(^t, f. pay — , —

geben.
aunt, 3:!ante, /. -n.
author, S[^erfaffer, m. -§, -.
autumn, §erbft, m. -e§, -e.
avoid, bermetben/ O.

B

back, guriidf, ti^ieber ha.
bad, fd^Ied^t.

baker, 33 d d e r, m. -§, -.
ball (dance), S3 a 11, m. -§,

-ctHe.
band, ^reig, m. -e§, -e.
bath-room, S3 a b e aimmer,

11. —§, —.
bathe, b a b e n.
be, fein, O. s.
beautiful, fdC)bn.
beautiful (wonderfully — ),

it) u n b e r fd)bn.
because, toeil.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

321

become, Irerben, O. s. (of,

au§).
bed (go to — ), gu S3 e tie

g c ^ en.
before, t) 0 r (dat. or ace).
begin, an^fanqen, O. ; he^

g in nen, O.
beginning, 5lnfang, m. -§,

-dnge.
Belgium, 93 e I g t e n, n. -§.
believe, g I a u b e n.
belong, gepren (dat).
below, beneath, unten.
Berlin, Berlin', n. -§.
beside, neben.
besides, aufeerbem', noc^

(baau).
between, 3 tn t f (^ e n ( dat.

or ace).
bill, 9ied)nung, f. -en.
bill of fare, ©peifefarte,

f.-n.
bind, b i n b e n, O.
bird, 9^ogel, m. -§, -ogel.
black, fc^tnars.
blackbread, (Sd^lnarabrot,
blind, b It n b. [n. -§.

blow, b I a f e n, O.
blue, b I a It.
bold, !ii5n.

book, 93n(^, n. -e§, -iid^er.
bookseller, 93 u d^ pnbler, m.

-§, -.
boot, ©ttefel, m. -§, -.
born, g e b 0 r e n.
both, b e t b e.
bottle, g I a f (^ e, f. -IX.
boy, ^nabe, m. -n, -n.
branch, Hft, m. -e§, n^ie,
bread, 93 r 0 t, n. -c§, -e.

break ( — to pieces), (ger)^

b r e d^ e n, O.
breakfast, grii^ftiid, n.

-(e)§, -e.
breakfast, frii5ftii(fen.
breath (take — ), aufatmen,

5ltem l^olen.
bridge, 93 r ii (f e, /. -n.
bright, ^eH, !Iar.
bring, b r t n g e n, irreg. N.
bring with or along, niit=

b r i n g e n, irreg. N.
broad, b r e i t. [-iiber.

brother, 93 r u b e r, m. -§,
brother-in-law, ©(^Inager,

m. -§, -ctger.
Brussels, 93 r ii f f e I, n. -§.
build, bauen.

building, ©ebdube, n. -§, -.
bum, b r e n n e n, irreg. N.
busy, befd^afttgt.
but, aber; nur.
butter, 93utter, f.
buy, faufen.
by, by means of, mit (dat.),

bet (dat.), mittelg (gen.),

bon (dat.), burd} (ace).
^y (go —), for b e i^fa^fyren,

O. s.
by the side of, neben (dat).

call, name, n e n n e n,

irreg. N.
call, summon, ritfen, O.
called (be — ), ^eifeen, O. ;

what is that called, inie

Z22

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

calm, gclaffcn.

can, ! 0 n n e n, irreg. N.

cap, WiX^t, f, -n.

capital, ^aupi\iat)i, f. -ahit.

captain, ^aupimanw, m.

-(e) §, -dnner or -leute.
car, SBagen, m. -§, -.
car (railway — ), (Sifen-

ba^ntoagen, m. -§, -.
care for (desire), iDiinfdjen,

tvoUcn, mogen.
careless, unborfic^ttg.
carpenter, 3^ii'^"ic^tnann, m.

-(e) §, -(inner or -leute.
carpet, ^cpptd), m. -§, -e.
carrier (letter — ), S3rief^

trctger, m. -§, -.
carry, tragen, O.
carve, trancfiieren (pr. tran^

fd^te'ren).
case, gaU, m. -§, -aHe.
case (in grammar), (^af u§,

m. —, -.
cash, 6are§ @elb, n. -c§ ; pay

cash, Bar bega^len.
castle, ©cr}Iofe, n. -fje§,

-offer.
cease, stop, anf-I)oren.
ceiling, ©ec!e, /. -n.
cellar, teller, m. -^, -.
century, ^al)rl)unbert, n.

-§r -e.
certain, geiuife.
certainly, inol^L geiuife; why
. certainly, \a tuol)!.
chair, ©tul}!, m. -eg, -ii^Ie.
change, !Ieine§ @elb.
Charles, .^ a r L m. -§.
charming, rcigenb.
cheat, bctriigcn, O., tduftficn.

cherry, ^trfdje, f. -n.
child, ^inb, n. -eg, -er.
choose, U)dI)Ien.
church, ^ i r d) e, /. -n.
citizen,- S3iirger, m. -§, -.
city, ©tabt, f. -ctbte.
city hall, diat^au^, n. -eg,

-ctufer.
claim to, tnoHen.
class, ^ I a f f e, Z'. -n.
clean, rein.
clear, flax.
clock, H^r, f. -en; at what

o'clock, urn iniebtel IT^r?
close, 5U==ntadCjen.
coachman, ^ u t f d^ e r, m.

-g, -.
coal, ^ 0 1^ I e, f. -n ; char-
coal, §ol3 ! 0 ^ I e ; hard

coal, (Stein ! o ^ I e.
coat, diod, m. -eg, -Mt,
coffee, ^ a f f e e, in. -g.
cold, tali.
cold (catch — ), er ! d 1 1 en,

refl.
cold, (£r!dltung, f. -en.
Cologne, ^ d I n, n. -g.
colonel, OBerft, m. -eg or

-en, -e or -en.
color, garbe, f. -n.
come, ! 0 m m e n, O. s.
come back, tnieber ! o m m en.
come in, ■^cr e t n - ! o m ==

m e n, O. s. ; come in, ^er^

etn!
commence, an-fangen, O. bc=

ginncn, O.
commend, empfeliten, O.
common, gclndl]nltd), gcmcin.
company, ®efeEfd)aft, f. -en.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

323

concert, ^ 0 n 5 e r t', w.
-e§, -e.

conductor, gugfiil^rer, m. -§,
-, ^ 0 rt b u ! t e H r', m.
-^, -e.

conjunction, ^inbeiriort, n.
-(e)§, -orter, ^on:=
junltton', f. -en.

consist of, bejte^en, O. (of
au§) (dat).

constant, beftdnbtg.

contain, entf)alten, O.

contrary to, gegen (ace).

copper, ^ u I? f e r, n. -g, -.

copy, ab-fd^retben, O.

corner, ©dEe, f. -n.

correct, !orrigte'ren.

cost, ! 0 ft en.

count, @raf, m. -en, -en.

count, gct^Ien.

country, Sanb, w. -e§, -e or
-dnber; in the country,
auf bent Sanbe; in this
country, l^ter gu Sanbe.

country (one's own or na-
tive), ^aterlanb, n. -§.

countryman, citizen of the
same country, Canb§^
mann, m. -(e)§, -dn==
ner or -leute.

countryman, farmer, peasant,
Sanbmann, m. -(c)§,
-dnner or -leute.

coupe, (S^onpe', n. -§.

course (of — ), c§ tjerfte^t
fic^, natitrltd^, jalno^I.

court, §of, m. -e§, -i3fe.

court-house, diatl)an§, n. e§,
-dnfer.

cousin, 53etter, m. -^, -n.

cover, bebedfen.
crackle, !niftern.
cup, %a\\t, f. -n.
cut, fc^neiben, O.

Dane, ® d n e, m. -n, -n.
dangerous, gefdl^rltd^.
Danish, b d n i f c^.
dare, b ii r f en, irreg. N.

Inagen.
dark (obscure), bimM.
dark (without light), ftnfter.
date, Saturn, n. -§, -a.
daughter, '^0(^tct, f.

-odC)ter.
daughter (little), ^od§^

t e r d^en.
day, Xaq, -c§, -e.
day after to-morrow, iiber==

mo r gen.
day before yesterday, \) ox^

geftern; one of these

days, biefer 3:^age.
dazed, t)erbliifft.
deal (a great — ), bid, redC)t

btel.
dear, beloved, 1 1 e b ; O dear !

a(^ ©otti
death, ^ 0 b, m. —c§.
December, ^ e ,5 e m b e r, m.

-^, -.
decline, be!Itnte'ren.
deliver, iiberretdften, Itefern.
demand, berlangen, erfor==

bern.
Denmark, ^dnemar!,

n. -§,

3^4

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

depart, ab^reifen, s.
deprive, rauben (pers. dat.,

thing ace).
descend, ftctgen, O. s.
dictionary, 28i3rterbu(^, n.

-(e)§, -iic^er.
die, fterben, O. s.
different, berfi^ieben, anber;

differently, anberg.
difficult, fd^toer.
diligent, fleifeig.
dine, gu TlittaQ effen or

fpetfen.
dining-room, ©petfefaal, m.

-^, -fctle, (£^3tntmer, n.

-^. -.
dinner, 3}^tttageffen, n. -§, -.
disappoint, taufd^en.
do, t u n, O. (in interrog. and

emphat. forms involved in

the simple verb).
do, how do you do, tt)ie he-

ftnben ©te ftd^ ? iuie ge^t eg

S^nen?
dog, ^itnb, m. -c§, -e.
door, 3:^ ii r, f. -en.
door-bell, Mingel, /. -n; the

door-bell rings, e§ fitngelt.
doubt, 3ti:)etfeln.
doubtless, o^ne 3^stfel.
draw (pull), 3ter)en, O.
dress, Mcib, n. -t^, -er.
drink, t r i n ! e n, O.
drive, fal^ren, O. s. ; go out

driving, fpagieren fa^ren.
during, rDaI)renb (gen.).
duty, ^fltc^t, f. -ett.
dwell, tDor)tien.
dwelling-house, SSolftn^

))a\\^, n. -e§, -ciiifer.

£

each, jeber, -c, -eg.

each other, etn a n b c r.

ear, €)^x, n. -e§, -en.

early, friil^.

earn, herbienen.

earth, (£ r b e, /. -n.

easy, leid^t.

east, O f t en, m. -§.

eat, e f f e n, O. f r e f f e n, O.

fpetfen.
Edward, (Bbnaxh, m. -§>.
egg, ^ i/ n. -eg, -er.
eight, a^i.
eighteen, a d^ 1 3 e ^ n.
eighth, a^i.
eighty, a c^ 1 3 i g.
either, entlneber; aud^.
eleven, elf.
eleventh, e I f t.
else, fonft, anberg.
England, @ n g I a n b, n. -g.
English, e n g 1 1 f dC).
Englishman, ©nglctnber,

m. -g, — .
enough, g e n u g.
entire, entirely, wholly, gang,
error, ^rrtnm, m. -g, -ii*

mer.
especially, befonberg.
Europe, ^uxopa, n. -g.
even, au^, felbft, fogar; even

though, menn — anij.
evening, 51 b e n b, w. -g, -e.
evening (last — ), geftcrn

a h e n b ; Dortgen ?l h e n b.
ever, je, jemalg; ever so — ,

nodi f 0 — .
every, jcb(-er, -e, -eg).

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

325

every five minutes, aHe

fiinf SP^tnuten.
every one, jebermann.
everything, aUe§.
example, S3etfptel, n. -§, -e;

for example, gum ^etfpiel.
exceedingly, au^erorbentlid}.
exclaim, au^rufen, O.
excuse, entfc^itlbtgcn.
exercise, Slufgabe, /. -n.
expect, ertuarten.
expense, 5lu§gabe, /. -n.
explanation, (Srflarung, /.

-en.
express, au^bvMen.
express train, (Sd^neHgUQ, m.

-(e) §, -iige.
extraordinarily, extremely,

anfeer 0 r b e n Hid).
eye, 51 u g e, w. -§, -n.

fact (in — ), tt)tr!It(^, tpa^r-

Iiaftig.
fail, f e ^ I c rt.
faithful, treu.
fall, fallen, O. s.
far, fern, tvdt.
fare, ga^rgelb, n. -(e) g,

-er.
farmer, £anbmann, m.

-(e) §, -(inner or -leitte.
fast, f(^nell.
father, SS a t e r, m. -^, -a-

ter.
fault, getter, m. -§, -.
favor, miirbigen (ace. pers.

gen. thing).

fear, SIngft, f. gurd^t, f.
February, g e B r it a r', m.

-§, -e.
feel, em|)ftnben, O. ; f ii ^ -

I e n, ref 1.
fifteen, f it n f 3 e 1^ n,

(funfael^n).
fifth, f it n f t.
fifty, fiinfaig (funf =

fight, ^ampf, m. -e§, -ctm^

pfe.
fight, fdmpfcn.
finally, enblid^, gule^t.
find, f i n b en, O.
fine, handsome, fd)on.
finger, ginger, m. -§, -.
finish, tiollen'ben.
fire, g e u e r, n. -§, -.
first, e r ft.

first, previously, border.
first (at — ), gu erft.
fish, g i f dC), m. -e§, -e.
fit, paffen.
five, f it n f .
floor, gufebobcn, m. -§, -0*=

ben.
flower, 33Intne, /. -n.
fluently, geldnfig.
fly, f I i e g e n, O.
follow, folgen (dat.), O.
fond of, IteBen, mogcn, gem

with appropriate verb.
foot, g H fe, m. -e§, -itfee.
footstool, ©djemel, m. -§, -.
for, fitr (ace.), urn (ace.),

anf (ace).
forbid, b e r b i e t en, O.
forenoon, ^ ox mittag, m.

-§, -e.

326

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

foresee, t)orau§ f e ^cn, O.
forest, g 0 r ft, m. -e§, -e.
forget, bergeffen, O.
forget-me-not, ^ e r g i fe =^

m e t n n t (^ t, n.
fork, ©abel, /. -n.
formerly, once, e t n ft, frii^

fortnight (a — ago), bor

t) i e r 3 e I n ^agen.
fortunate, gliidlid^.
forty-eight, a(^i unb \)xex^

four, t) i e r.

fourth, b t e r t.

France, granfreic^, n. -§.

free, fret.

French, f r a n g o'ftfd^.

Frenchman, g r a n g o'fe, m.

-n, -n.
fresh, f rtf (^.
Friday, g ret tag, m. -§,

-e.
friend, g r e it n b, m. -e§,

-e.
friend (lady), g r e u n b in,

/. -nen.
friendly, freunbltd^.
from, t)on (dat.), au§ (dat.).
fruit (of trees), Obft, n.

-e§,

full, t) or I. '

gain, getDtnttert, O.

garden, @ a r t e tt, m. -§,

-arten.
gardener, © d r t n e r, m.

gas, @ a §, S3rcttn g a §, n.

-eg, -e.
gaslight, @ a g 1 1 d^ t, n,

-(e)§, -er (or -e).
gay, iHftig.
gardener, @ d r t tt e r, m.

generally, getDO'^ttltd^.
gentleman, @err, m. -n,

-en; gentlemen! metne

^errenl
German, beutfd^.
German (the), ^eutfc^e, m.

-n, -n.
Germany, ©eutfd^Ianb, n.

-§; @ e r tn a' n t a, f.
get, befotnmen, O.
get along, 3urec^t=!otntnen,

O. s.
get in, etn-ftetgen, O. s.
get to, erretc^en (ace),
get up, rise, a u f^ftel^en,

O. s.
girl, Mahdjen, n. -§, -.
give, geben, O. fd^enfen.
glad (be — ), freuen, refl.
glass, @ I a §, n. -e§, -dfer.
glove, ^anbfd)u5, m. -(e) §,

-e.
go (in a wagon or boat),

fa^ren, O. s.
go, walk, g e 5 en, O. s.
go away, it) e g ^ g e ^ en, O.
go in, l^tnein^g e ^ ett, O.
go out, a u § ^ g e 1^ en, O. s.
go out walking, f|:)a5teren

g e 5 en.
God, @ott, m. -c§, -otter,
gold, @ 0 I b, n. -e§.
gone (all — ), a lie.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

327

good, gut.

good-bye, Sebcn @te to^II

aiif SBieberfe^enl
grammar, © r a m m a' t i !,

f. -en.
grandfather, ©rofe t) a t e r,

m. -g, -dter.
gray, g r a u.
great, big, g r 0 fe.
Greece, @ r t e (^ enlanb, w.

-§.
green, g r it n.

grow, become, ttJcrbcn, O. s.
grown up, eritjad^fen.
guest, © a ft, m. -e§, -ctfte.
guide, gutter, m. -^, -.
gymnasium, @ t) m n a *

fium, n. -§, -en.

hack, ^rofcfjfe, f. -n.

hail (it — s), e§ I)agelt,

impers.
half, ^ a 1 6.
Hamburg, § a m b n r g, n.

-§.
hand, ^ anh, f. -anbe.
hand, pass, reach, r e t (^ en.
handsome, fd[)on.
Hanover, § a n n 0' b e r, n.

-§.
happen, gefd^e^en, O. s. ev^
etgnen, refl.
happy, glii(flt(^.
hard, ftar!, ^axt, fd^iner.
hardly, !aum.
Hartz mountains, § a r 5 ^

gebirge, w. -§, -.

hat, $ u t, m. -e§, -iite ; hats

off, §ut abl
hate, ^ a f f e n.
have, 5 a b e n, irreg. N.
he, er.

head, ^opf, m. -e§, -o^^fe.
health, (^efunb^ett, /. -en.
hear, 1^ 0 r en.
heart (learn by — ), au§^

Inenbtg I e r a en.
heat, ^ e i 3 en.
heaven, ^tntntet, m. -^, -.
heavy, fc^tner. •
help, ^ e I f en, O. ; neg.

nic^tg bafur (tnn) fonnen,

ntc^t nm^in fi3nnen.
Henry, § e i n r t clj, m. -§.
her (poss.), t^r.
here, ^ i e r.
hereafter, nad^^er.
hero, §elb, m. -en, -en.
high, ^ 0(^. [decl.

himself (adj.) , f e I b ft, in-
himself (refL pron.), fi(^.
his, fetn.

hither, ^xex^ex.
Hohenzollern, .§ 0 ^ e n ^

poller n.
hold, 5 a 1 1 e n, O.
home, § e i m a t, f. -en.
home (at — ), ba^ etm, gu
honest, e^rlid^. §aufe.

hope, 5 b f f en.
hope (as I — ), it is to be

hoped, ^ 0 f f entlic^

(adv.).
horse, ^ferb, n, -e§, -e.
horse-car, ^ferbebal^ntnagen,

m. -§, -, ^^ramtDagen, m.

-^, -.

328

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

hotel, ©aftr^aug, n. -c§, -du==

fer ; §oteI, n. -§, -§.
hour, ©tunbe, /. -n.
hour (an — ago), t)or e t n er

©tunbe.
house, § a u §, n. -e§, -aufer.
house (at the — of), hex

(dat).
house (to our), 311 un§.
house-door, § a u § t ii r, /.

-en.
how, lt)te?

however, aber, tt)ie. . .auc^.
how much, intet)tel? how

many, it)ie t)iele?
hundred, § u n b e r t, w.

-§, -e.
hunger, ,§ u n g e r, m. -§.
hungry, | u n g r i g.
hunter, gctger, m. -§, -.
hurry, hasten, etien, s. or h.
husband, Tlann, m. -eg,

-dnner.
hymn-book, ©efang hu^, n.

-(e)g, -iid^er.

I,i4

if, roenn.

ill, !ranf.

immediately, fofort, fogleii^.

important, Jt)tdC)ttg.

impossible, itnmiigltc^.

improve, tjerbeffern.

in, into, in (dat. or ace.)-

incessant, beftdnbtg, unun==

terbro(^en.
inclined (be — ), miigen,

irree:. N., ^-Vi\i ^aben.

indeed, \a, aber bod), gtrar;

yes indeed, \ a iDo|L
index-finger, geige finger,

m. -§, —.
industrious, flet^ig.
inhabit, hetvo^mn.
inhabitant, (Bintvo^nex, m.
injure, fd§aben, O. [-§, -.
ink, ^tnte, f. -n.
instead, ft a 1 1, an\iaii

(gen.).
interjection, SluSrufungg-

t)ooxi, n. -(e)§, -orter,

^ n t e r i e ! t i 0 n', f. -en.
into, in, t n (dat. or ace).
introduce, l:)or^fteIIen, e t n ^

fiiljren.
invite, e t n - lab en, O.
invitation, ^ t n laburtg, f,

-en.
iron, ^ i f e n, n. -§, -.
it, e§.

Italian, 1 1 a It e' n ifc^.
Italian (the), ^ t a It e' n er,

m. —§, -.
Italy, ^ t a' I i e n, n. -§.
its, fein.

James, ^a'foh, m. -§.
January, g ^ mi ^ ^'^ wi.

-§, -e.
John, ^ 0 ^ a n n', ni. -§.
journey, D^leife, /. -n.
joy, grcube, /. -tt.
July, S u' I i, m.
June, ^u'ni, m.
just, just so, precisely, eben.
just now, fo eben (foebcn).

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

329

keep, he^alten, O.
key, (Sd^Iiiffel, w. -§, -.
kind, 5irt, /. -en, ©orte,

f.-n.
kind, gut, frciinblicC) ; to be

so kind, bic @iite ^abcn.
kind (of every), aHerlef.
kind (what — of), tva^

fiir?
king, Monxq, m. -§, -e.
kitchen, ^ ii (^ e, /^. -n.
knife, 2)^effer, w. -§, -.
knock, flopfen.
know, tDtffen, irreg. N.
know, be acquainted with,

!ennen, irreg. N.

lady, ^ame, f. -n.

lady (young), gmuletn.

lamp, kamp e, f. -n.

lamplight, 2amp enlxii)t,
n. -e§, -er.

land, S a n b, n. -e§, -e or
-ctnber.

language, (Sprac^e, f. -n.

large, grofe.

last, le^t; at last, cnblidC).

last, continue, baucrn.

last but one, bor I e ^ t.

last evening, gcftern

late, fpctt. [a b e n b.

Latin, I a t e t n tf(^ ; in Lat-
in, auf I a t e t n ifc^.

laugh, I a (^ en ; laugh at,
au§ I a (^ e n.

lay, I e g en.
lead, 93Ici, n. -c§.
lead-pencil, 93Ieifttft, m.

-(e)§, -c.
leaf, S3Iatt, n. -c§, -after.
learn, I c r n en.
learn by heart, au^luenbig

fern en.
least, at least, toenigften^,

minbcftcng.
leave, depart, start, ah^

fa^^ren, O. s. ; ab^ge^en, O.

s. ; ab-rcifen.
leave, forsake, berlaffen, O.
leave (take — ), ?lbf(^teb

ne^men, O. ; empf e^Ien, O.

refl.
leg, S3etn, n. -e§, -e.
Leipzig, S e t b 3 1 g, n. -§.
lend, I e i 5 en, O.
lesson, 5luf gabe, /. -n ; ©tun^

be, f. -n.
let, laffen, O. ; let us go, ge=

^en intr, tnoHen inir ge^en.
letter, ^rtef, m. -e§, -e.
letter (of the alphabet),

S3u(^ftabe, m. -n, -n.
letter-carrier, S3rteftrager,

in. -§, -.
Lewis, 2 u b n) i g, m. -§.
librarian, S3tbItot^e!ar', m.

-§>, -.
library, SSibltot^ef, /.; S3t=

bliotljcf'gimmer, n. -§, -.
lie, I i e g en, O. h. or s.
light, 2x6:^1, n. -e§, -er

(or-e).
lighting, 93e I e u (^ t u n g, /.
lighten (it — s), eg bli^t,

impers.

330

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

like, g I e t d^.

like, lieben, mogen, irreg. N.

like (I should —),id) mod)-

te gem.
like (be pleased with), ge-

fallen (impers. dat).
little, !Ietn.

little (a — ), (ein) iDcntg.
live, I e 6 e n, tno^nen.
lock, ©d^Iofe, n. -ffe§, -offer.
locomotive, S o c o m o 1 1'*

b e, /. -n.
long, I a n g, adv. I a n g e ;

no longer, ntcl^t me^r.
look at, an'fe!)en, O.
lose, ber H e r en, O.
lose one's way, bertrren, refl.
lost, berloren; from t)er=

Iteren.
loud, laut
love, n e b en.

M

make, m a (^ en.

man, Tlann, m. -e§, -an-

ner.
man, human being, Tt en fd^,

m. -en, -en.
manage, madden.
manner, SBeife, f. -, -n.
many, tJtele (pi.)-
many, many a, man(^(er).
March, Max^, m. -e^, -e.
market, S^ a r ! t, m. -e^,

-attie.
mathematics, "iSflai^exna^

matter, ^a^e, f. -n.

matter (it is no — ), e§

fdjabet ntd^t.
matter (what is the —

with), tva§ feljlt? (dat.).
may, biirfen, irreg. N.
May, SO^ai, m. -(e)§, -e

or -en* [^ett, /. -en.

meal, meal-time, ^ a ^ t =*
mean to, intend, n)Oflen*
mean, m e t n en.
meat, gletfd), n. -e§, -e.
meet, begegnen (dat.) s. ;

treffen, O.
merchant, ^aufmann, m.

-(e) §, -dnner or -leute.
merry, Iitftig.
metal, TtetalV, n. -(e)§,

-e.
middle, Tlitte, f.
middle-finger, SP^ 1 1 1 e I ^^

finger, m. -§, -.
mile. Tie He, f. -n.
milk, mild), f.

million, S)? ill ton', f. -en.
mind, ©inn, m. -e§, -e.
mine, my, m e i n.
minute, SJ^ t n u' t e, f. -n.
minute (a — ago), t)or einer

S[)^tnute.
Miss, grdulein.
miss, fail of, berfdumen.
mistake, by — , au§ ^erfel^en.
mistaken, to be — , fid^ irren.
moderately, atemltc^.
Monday, S?^ o n t a g, m,

-§, -e.
money, @elb, n. —e§, -er.
month, Tto'nat, m. -§,

-e.
moon, Tlonh, m. -e§, -e.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

331

moonlight, Tlonb cnlid)t,

n. -e§, — .
more, m e ^ r ; noc^ (t)on — ) .
morning, TIotcqcxx, m.

-§, -.
morning (this — ), ^eute

friil); (to-morrow — ),

m 0 r g e n frii^.
most, m e t ft.

mother, Wuiitt, f. -iitter.
mountain, S3erg, m. -c§, -e.
Mr., §err, m. -n, -en.
Mrs., gran, f. -en.
much, tfiei, fe^r; how much,

it)tet)tcl? how many, tnie

btele?
multiplication table, ^in^

maletng, n. -c§, -e.
Munich, TluxK^^en, n. -§.
must, m ii f f e n, irreg. N.
my, mine, m e t n.

N

nail, 5^ a g e t, m. -§, -agel.
name, 9^ a m e, w. -n§, -n.
name, n e n n e n, irreg. N.
name (what is the name of),

tnte ^eifet?
narrate, erga^Ien; narrator

= the narrating (one) ;

narrative = the narrated

(thing).
naughty, iinarttg.
near, by the side of, neben
. (dat.).
near, nigh, na^e.
nearly, about, ungefct^r.
necessary, ni3tiQ, nottDenbig.

need, bebiirfen (gen.), irreg.

N. ; braiid)en.
neither, ineber; neither —

nor, toeber — nod^.
nephew, 5^ e f f e, m. -n, -n.
never, nte, ntemal§.
nevertheless, bod).
new, n c u.

newspaper, Qettung, /. -en.
next, n d d) ft.
next, coming, following,

!omm e nb.
night, ^ad^t, f. -ad)te.
nine, n e u n.
nineteen, neunge^n.
nineteenth, neungel^nt.
ninth, n e u n t.
no, n e t n.
no, none, !etn.
none at all, gar fetn.
north, 5^ 0 r b e n, m. -§.
northeast, 5^ 0 r b 0 ft, m.

-eng.
not, n t (^ t.
not at all, gar n t d^ t.
not yet, nod^ n t d^ t.
note, S3rtefd^en.
note (musical), 5^ote, f.

-n.
note-book, 5^ 0 tia' b it d^, n.

-§, -iidier.
nothing, ntd)t§.
noticeable, auffaHenb.
noun, §au|:)ttnort, 11. -(e)§,

-brter; ©nbftanttb', n.

~c§r -e.
novel, D^loman', in. -(e)§, -e.
November, 9^obember, m.

-^, -.
now, je^t, nun.

332

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

now (just — ), fo eben (foe^

ben).
numeral, ^(^^^'i^ott, n. -(e)§,

-orter; ^nmeta'le, n.

-§, -xa.

0! 0, a^.

obey, gel^or($en (dat.).

obliged, berbunbcn (dat.) ;

be obliged to, mitffcn.
occupy, dwell in, beh^o^ncn.
October, O ! t o b e r, m.

-^, -•
o'clock, UI}r; at what o'clock,

nm tnictJtel U^r?
of, bon (dat).
of, t)on (dat.) ; often ex-
pressed by genitiye case

alone,
of it or them, bai)on.
officer, D f f t g t e r', m. -§,

-c.
often, oft.
oil, D I, n. -§.
old, alt.

omit, au^^Iaffen, O.
on, an (dat. or ace), auf

(dat. or ace).
once, formerly, once on a

time, etnft; at once, fo^

Qleicfj.
once, one time, e t n mat.
one, c t n; the one, berientoc.
one, people, they, man.
one and a half, anbcrtl) alb.
one another, c i n a n b c r.
only, nur.
onwards, on, an.

open, auf ^mad}en, ii f f n en.
open, 0 f f e n.
opera, O ^ e r, f. -n.
opinion, S)2etnung, /. -en.
opinion (to be of), benfen,

irreg. N.
opposite, gegeniiber (dat).
or, 0 b e r.
order, beftellen.
order (in — that), bamtt.
order (in — to), um gu.
other, a n b e r.
ought (to), foUen (pret and

plup.).
our, u n f e r.
ourselves, adj. felbft.
out, a H §.

over, ii b e r (dat. or ace),
overcoat, ilhtttod, m. -(e) §,

-ode.
owe, fdjulbtg fetn (dat)

page, (Sette, /. -n.
pair, ^ a a r, w. -e§, -e.
palace, ^ a I a ft', m. -e§,

-afte.
paper, 'papier', it. -c§, -e.
paper, newspaper, Qettuncj,

/. -en.
parents, (SItern (pi.).
Paris, ^ a r i §/ n.
park, ^arf, m. -(e)§, -e;

3:^tergarten, m. -^, -drtcn.
parlor, ^aal, m. -(e)§,

-die.
part, %zxl, m. (n.), -(e)§,

-e; in part, gum ^etle.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

333

part of speech, dithttexl, m.

-(c)§, -e.
particularly, befonberg.
pass (hand), rcidien.
pass (an evening), gubrtn-

gen, irreg. N.
past, last, tjergangcn.
past (go — ), borbet-ge^^etn

O. s. ; drive past, borbet^

fa^ren, O. s.
patriotic song, S^aterlanb^-

^ith, n. -(e) §, -er.
pay, beaal^Ien; beftreiten.
pen, geber, f. -n.
pen-knife, gebermeffer, n.

-§, -.
penny, pfennig, m.

-e§, -e.
people, Seute (pi.), ^^^tn.
perhaps, tJteHeic^t.
permit, eriauben, (pers.

dat).
permitted (be — ), biirfcn,

irreg. N.
person, ^ e r f o n', /. -en;

SP^enfc^, m. -en, -en.
picture, S3tlb, n. -e§, -er.
piece, ©turf, n. -§>, -e;

apiece, 'iia^ ©tiid.
piece for reading, Sefejtiicf,

n. -(e)§, -e.
place, seat, ^lai}, m. -c§,

place (in your — ), an ^^rer

©telle.
place (take — ), happen, ge==

fcfie^en, O. s.
plan, ^ I a n, m. -§, -due.
plate, 3^eIIer, m. -§, -.
play, fpielen.

play (at the theatre), ©c^au^

fptel, n. -§, -e, ©tiicf, n.

e§, -e.
pleasant, angene^m.
please, gefaEen, O. (im-

pers.) ; tuollen.
please (if you — ), gefdHtgft,

bttte. [-.

pleasure, 55ergniigen, n. -§,
plural, Tle^t^df)!, f., Wl^^t-

\)^\i, f. -en.
pocket, %a\d^t, f. -n.
poem, ®ebt(f)t, n. -(e)§, -e.
point (be on the — of), im

S3egrtffe fetn.
popular song, ^oIMieb, n.

-(e)§, -er.
possible, mdgltd^.
possibly, btelletd^t.
postage-stamp, ^ o f t marfe,

f. -n.
post-office, ^ 0 ft, f. -en.
pot, %op^, m. -e§, -opfe.
pound, ^ f u n b, n. -e^, -e.
practice, iiben.
praise, loben.
praise, Sob, n. -(e) §.
precious, noble, ebel.
precisely, gerabe.
prefer, bor^gte^en, O. ; id)

ginge Iteber, I should pre-
fer to go.
prepare, beretten.
preposition, SSortnort, «.

-(e)§, -orter, ^rebo^

f 1 1 i 0 n, f. -en.
present, antrefenb.
prese'nt, give, fdjenfen.
prese'nt, introduce, bor^

ftellen.

334

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

president, ^ r d f t b e n t', m.

-en, -en.
pretty, pbfd^.
pretty, tolerably, gtemltd).
probably, it)al^rf(^etnlt(^,

produce, ^ertJor^brtngen, ir-

reg. N.
promenade, walk, ©pagier^

gang, in. -(e)§, -dnge.
promise, fc»erfprecC)en, O.
promise, ^^erfprec^en, w. -§.
prompt, pUn!tIt(^.
pronoun, giirit)ort, w. -(e) §,

-orter, ^rono'tnen, w.

-§, -nomina.
pronounce, au§-^pud)en, O.
Prussia, ^ re u f f e n, w. -§.
pshaw! O pshaw! ad) tva^l

ha^l
public, offentltd).
pumpernickel, ^ u m p e r =

nidel, m. -§.
pupil, (Bd)nlex, m. -§, -.
put, place, fteGen, fe^en.
put on (of a hat), auf^fe^en.
put on (of clothes), an^

sicken, O.
put oneself out, bemii^en,

refl.

quarter, SSiertel, n. -§, -.
question, gragc, f. -n.
quick, fc^neH.
quicksilver, Ouedftl?

hex, n. -§.
quite, gana; (tolerably)

gicmlid^.

R

railroad, (Stfenba^n, /. -en.
rain, D^l e g e n, m. -§.
rains (it), e§ regnet,
raise, er^eben, O. [impers.
rapidly, rafc^, fd^neH.
rascal, ©d)elm, m. -§, -e.
rather, I should rather, id)

modjte lieber.
reach, r e t d) en.
read, lefen, O.
ready, be r e i t, ferttg.
real, lt)tr!It(^.
receive, come in possession

of, er^alten, O.
receive, get, befommen, O.
receive, welcome, emp\an^

gen, O.
reception room, 93efn(^3tm==

met, n. -§, - ©mpfangg^

gtmmer, n. -§, -.
recite, l^er^fagen.
reckon together, gufammen^^

xed)nex\.
recommend, empfe^Ien, O.
recover, er^olen, refl.
red, rot.

refer to, ertnct^nen.
regret, bebaiiern.
relate, eract^Ien.
relieve, beru^igen, erletd^-

tern.
remain, bletben, O. s.
remember, ertnnern, refl.

(gen. or an with ace), fi(^

cntfinnen (gen.), nid^t

bergeffen.
report, (is reported to), fcl^

len.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

335

repose, diii^c, f.
require, (er^)forbern.
reside, toofinen.
restaurant, Dleftaura^

1 1 0 n', f. -en.
result, iSrfoIg, m. -(e)g,

-e.
retain, Be^alten, O.
return, guriid^fommen.
reward, BeIoI)nen.
rich, r e t d}.
rid (be — of), Io§ fctn (gen.

or ace).
ride (on horseback), ret-

ten, O. h. or s.
right, r e (^ t.

right (be — ), r e d} t ^aBen.
right away, gletd^, fogleic^.
right now, foeben.
ring, 91 i n 0, m. -e§, -e.
ring-finger, diinqfinqex,

m. —§, —.
ripe, r e t f .
rise, get up, a H f fte^en,

O.s.
rise (of sun and moon), auf-

ge^en, O. s.
river, glnfe, m. -e§, -iiffe.
roast, S3 r a t e n, m. -§, -.
rocking-chair, ©diaufelftul)!,

m. -(e) §, -n^lc.
roll, S3rotd)en.
Roman (the), Dtomer, m.

-g, -.
roof, ®ad), n. -c§, -dd^er.
room, 3tmmer, w. -^, -.
rose, 9i 0 f e, /. -n.
round-trip ticket, 9^1 u n b ^

retfebtHet, n. -§, -e or -§.
route, Sinie, /. -n.

run, laufen, O. s. ; ten nen,
irreg. N. ; run after, nai^^
laufen (dat.).

Russia, 91 u § lanb, n. -§.

Russian, rufftfc^.

Russian (the), 9luffe, m.
-n, -n.

safe, fid)er.

sake (for my — ), itm met*

netintllen.
same (the — ), berfelbe.
same (all the — ), gletd^, eU

nerlet.
satisfied, gnfriebcn.
Saturday, (Sonnahenb, m.

-§, -c, (Bam^taq, m. -^,

-e.
save, fdjii^en,. retten.
Saxony, © a d^ f e n, n. -§.
say, tell, f a g en.
saying, proverb, 'Bpxif^tvoit,

n. -(e)§, -iirter.
scarcely, !aum.
scholar, pupil, © (^ ii I e r, m.

-§, -.
school, (5 (^ H I e, /. -n.
school building, © (^ u I ge*

bdube, n. -^, -.
Scotland, (Sd)ottIanb, n.

-§.
search, fndjen.
season-of-the-year, ^ a ^ *

reggett, /. -en.
seat, (S t ^, w. -e§, -e, ^la^,

m. -e§, -d^e.
seat (take a — ), ^la^ ne5==

men, fe^en, refl.

33^

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

second, ^tvcit.

see, f e ^ en, O.

seem, fc^einen, O.

seldom, f e 1 1 e n.

sell, t)er!aufen.

send, fd^tden, f e n b e n, ir-

reg. N.
sense (good — ), ^Serftanb,

m. —c§.
sentence, ©a^, m. -eg, -d^e.
September, (September,

m. — §, — .
serve, bienen; (of meals)

auf-tragen, O.
set (of sun and moon), un^

ter^ge^en, O. s.
seven, f t e b e n.
seventeen, fteb (en) =

seventh, f t e b e n t.
seventy, f t e b (e n) g t g.
several, mel^rere (pi.)-
shade (shield), (5(^trm, m.
she, fie. [-§, -c.

shine, f c§ e i n e n, O.
ship, (5 (^ t f f, w. -eg, -e.
shoe, (B d)Vi^, m. -e§, -e.
shoemaker, © (^ u 1^ m a =

(^ e r, w. -§, -.
shop, store, Saben, m. -§, -

or -ctbcn.
short, furg, !Ietn.
should, foUen (in pret. and

plup.).
show, geigen.
shut, gu-mad^en.
sick, !ran!.
side, ©ette, /. -n; this

side, biegfettg (gen.) ; that

side, jenfeitg (gen.).

sidewalk, gufelneg, m. -(e)g,

-e.
silver, (S 1 1 b e r, n. -§.
simple, etnfad^.
simply, (merely), nur.
since, f e 1 1 (dat.).
since, as, 't>a.
sing, f t n g e n, O.
single, etngeln.
singular (number), (Stn^ett,
sir, metn §err. [/.

sister, (S (^ In e ft e r, f. -n.
sit, f t ^ en ; sit down, ftc^

f e ^ en.
sitting-room, ©tube, /. -n.
six, f e (^ §.
sixth, f e c^ ft.
sixty, f e (^ 3 X g.
sky, §tmmel, m. -§, -.
sleep, to be asleep, f (^ I a ^

fen, O.
sleeping room, (S (^ I a f gtm*

mer, n. -§, -.
slow, langfam.
small, !Ietn.
smith, © d} m i e b, m. -e§,

-e.
smoke, raucC}en.
smoking, ^and^cn, n. -§.
snow, © d} n e e, m. -§.
snow (it — s), e § f d) n e i t,

impers.
so, thus, f 0.
so (is it not — ), ntd^t

tna:^r?
soft, milb.
soldier, © o I b a t', m. -en.

-en.
some, eintge (pi.).
some, somewhat, ettv a§.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

337

somebody, some one, jcmanb.

something, ct\va§, \va§.

sometimes, gutueilen.

son, ^ o^n, m. -e§, -b^m.

song, 2xeb, n. —e§, -er.

soon, balb.

sorry (I am — ), e§ titt mtr

letb.
sorry (I am — to say), un-
fortunately, leiber.
sort, kind, © o r t e, f. -n;

what sort of, to a § fiir.
sound, run, go, lauten.
soup, (Bupp e, f. -n.
sour, f a u e r.
south, (S ii b e n, m. -§.
Spain, (Bp aniexi, n. -§.
Spaniard, Bp anicv, in.

-§, -.
Spanish, f p a n t f c^.
speak, f p r e (^ e n, O.
speech (part of), dieheteil,

m. — (e)§, — e.
spell, bud^ftabte'ren.
spend, pass, gu-brirtgen, ir-

reg. N.
splendid, prad^tboH, ^errlid^.
spread, belegen.
spring, ^riil^Iing, m. -§, -e.
square, ^la^, m. -e§, -d^e.
stand, ft e ^ e n, O.
start, ab-^aijxcn, O. s., ab-

ge^en, O. s.
station, © t a 1 1 o n', /. -en.
stay, remain, hleibcxi, O. s.
steal, ft e ^ I en, O.
steel pen, (S t a ^ I f eber, /.

-n.
step, treten, O. s.
stiff, fteif.

still, yet (of time), nod^;

(adversative) bod).
stop, an^^alten, O.
stop, cease, anf-^oren.
store, shop, Saben, m. -§, -

or -ctben.
store (at the — of), bet

(dat).
story, S^ctrd^en, n. -§, -

§lnc!bo'te, f. -n.
story (of a house), ^tod^

tvext, n. -(e) §, -e.
story (first), (£rbgefd}ofe, n.

-ffe§, -offe.
story (second), etne ^repl^e

stove, Ofcn, m. -§, ofen.

straight, gerabe.

straw hat, Btxo^^ut, m.

-(e)§, -iite.
street, Btva^e, f. -n.
strike, fc^Iagen, O.
strong, ftar!.
student, © t it b e n t', m.

-en, -en.
study, ft u b t e' r e n.
study, © t n b i u m, n. -§,

(S tnb ten.
such, such a, foI(5 (fol^

d) er).
summer, © o m m e r, m.

-^, -.
sun, (Sonne, f. -n.
sun shade, sun umbrel-
la, <3 0 n n e n fd)trm, m.

-(e)§, -e.
Sunday, © o n n t a g, m.

-§, -e.
supper, STbenbbrob, n. -(e)§,

^Ibenbeffen, w. -g.

338

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

supply, berforgcn.

suppose, glauben ; I suppose,

tiermutltd^; tDO^I.
supposing, gefe^t.
sure, secure, f i (f) e r, G^^^fe-
surely, getotfe.
sure (to be — ), fretltdi,

surprised (I am — ), e§
tDunbert mt(^.

Swede (the), ^d)tvehe,
m. -n, -n.

Sweden, © (^ it) e b e n, w. -§.

Swedish, f d^ tD e b i f (^.

sweet, f ii fe.

Swiss, native of Switzer-
land, © (^ li:) e 1 5 e r, m.
-^, -.

Switzerland, © (^ h? e i 3, /.

syllable, ^xlhe, f. -n.

table, 5^tf(^, m. -c§, -e.
tailor, (5d)nciber, m. -§, -.
take, ne^men ; (require) for==

bern, erforbern.
take care, ft(f) ^iitcn.
talk, f^redjen, reben.
tall, grofe.
staste, fd^medfen.
taste, ©efd^madf, nt. -§;

matter of taste, @e^

fd^mad^gfad)e, f.
tea, Xee, m. -^, ^Ibenb-

brob, n. -(e)§, -e.
tea (take — ), 5lbenbbrob

effen or ne^men.
teach, le^ren.

teacher, Secret, m. -§, -.

telephone, ttlepl)on teren.

tell, fagen ; eraa^Ien.

ten, 3 e ^ n.

tenth, 3 e ^ n t.

than, al§.

thank, ban!en (dat.) ;

thank you, b a n ! e fd^on.
thankful, ban! bar.
thanks, gratitude, S) a n !,

m. — e§.
that, h a^.

that, ien^ (jener), ba§.
the, b e r, b i e, bag.
theatre, '^^ea'iex, n. -§,

-, ©d^aufptell^aug, n. -e§.

-aufer.
their, i^r.

then (following a condi-
tion), fo.
then, at that time, b a n n.
then, in that case, b e n n ;

alfo.
there, b a, bort ; over there,

ha brii b e n.
there are, c§ ftnb, e§ gibt;

there is, eg i ft, eg gibt.
therefore, ba^er, barum,

beg^alb.
therein, in that, b a r i n.
thereon, on that, b a r a n.
thereupon, upon that, b a r^

ait f.
they, fie.

they, people, one, man.
think, glauben, meincn,

b e n ! en, irreg. N.
think (I — ), nevertheless,

dodC).
third, b r i 1 1.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCxVBULARY

339

thirsty (I am — ), eg b iix^

ftet mid}, impers.
thirteen, b r e i a e 1^ n.
thirty, b r e i fe t g.
this, b te§ (b i ef er).
thorn, ^ 0 r n, m. -§, -en.
thorough, burd^trte'ben.
thou, b u.
though, bod}, abet ; as

though, al§ oh.
thousand, ^ a u f e n b, n.

-§, -e.
three, b r e i.
through, b It r d) (ace),
through or done with, \ev^

tig.
thumb, ^ a u m e n, m. -§, -.
Thuringia, 3:^f)iiringen,

n. —§.
Thursday, ^onner^tag,

m. -g, -e.
thus, so, f 0.
thy, b e i n.
ticket, mUcr, n. -(e)g,

-e.
ticket office, SSilletbureau,

n. -§, -§.
ticket there and back, 'Sie-

tourbiHet, n. -(e) g, -e.
time, ^eii, f. -en, S)^al, n.

-eg, -e.
time (that — ), bamalg.
time (at the same — ), also,

mit.
time-table, %a^xplax\, m.

-(e) §, -e or -cine.
tired, miibe.
to, big (ace), na'$ (dat.),

an (dat).
to-day, ]§en t e.

together with, mit, mit-
tolerably, giemlid). [famt.
to-morrow, m o r g e n.
to-morrow evening, m o r =

gen abenb.
to-morrow morning, m o r -

gen friii).
tongue, gunge, f. -n.
too, and) (also), gn, mit^.
town, ^ia\)i, f. -abic ; (go)

down town, in bie ^ia\>i.
trade, ^anbiner!, n.

-(e)g, -e.
train, Qng, w. -eg, -iige.
train ( accommodation ) ,

^erfonengug, m. -(e) g,

-iige.
train (fast or express),

©d^neHgug.
transitive, tranfitifc).
translate, iiberfe':^en.
treat of, ^anbeln Don.
tree, S3anm, m. -eg, -ai\^

me.
tree (little), S3dnmd)en.
trifle, S3ifed)en (bifed^en) ;

Meinigfeit, /. -en.
true (is it not — or so),

nid^t tna^r?
trunk, Coffer, m. -g, -.
try, tjerfnc^en.
Tuesday, ^iengtag, m,

-g, -e.
twelfth, aii^iJIft.
twelve, a tn 0 1 f .
twentieth, a in a n a i g ft.
twenty, a it) ct n a i g.
twenty-one, e i n u n b *

atnanaig.
two, ^totx.

340

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

umbrella, Dflegeufd^irm, m.

-(e)g, -e.
uncle, £)^exm, m. -§, -z,

O n ! e I, m. -^, -.
under, unter (dat. or

ace).
understand, t)cx: ft e ^ en, O.
undertake, unter ne^^

men, O.
uneasy, u n ru^tg.
unfortunately, letber.
United States, bie ^ereiuxG^

ten (Btaaten.
until (conj.), bt§.
until (prep.), hi^ (ace.) ;

not until, erft.
unwell, n n in 0 ^ I.
unwise, u n tn e i f e.
up, a u f ; up stairs, oben.
upon, au f (dat. or ace),
use, ftc^ bebienen (gen.),

brand^en.
useful, nii^ltc^.
usual, ublid).
usually, getno^nltd^.

vain (in — ), t»ergeben§.
valley, '^al, n. -e§, -dier.
vegetables, ©emiife, n. -^, -.
verb, Qetttnort, n. -(e)§,

-i3rter, 53 e r b (n m) , n.

-§, -a or-en.
very, very much, fel^r.
Vienna, 28 t e n, n. -§.
village, ^orf, n. -c§, -i)rfer.

visit, ^efudC^, m. -e§, -e.
visit, befud}en.
voice, ©timme, /. -n.
vote, ftimmen.

W

wagon, carriage, SB a g e n,

m. —§, — .
wait, marten, for, auf

(ace).
waiter, ^eUner, m. -§, -.
waiting-room, SBartefaal, m.

-(e)§, -die.
walk, ge^en, O. s.
walk, promenade, ©pagier^

gang, m. -(e)§, -dnge.
walking (to go out — ), fpa^

gte'ren g e ^ en, s.
wall (of a room), SSanb, f.

-dnbe.
want, JnoHen, irreg. N., iniin^

f(^en, braud^en.
warm. In a r m.
watch, time-keeper, IT^r,

/. -en.
watch, guard, ^ ad)t, f.,

-en.
water, 28 a f f e r, n. -§, -.
way (road), 28eg, in. -(e)^,

-e.
way (manner), 28eij'c, /. -n.
wear, tragen, O.
weary, ntiibe.
weather, 28 e 1 1 e r, w. -§.
Wednesday, Wiii'voo^, m.

-§, -e.
week, 28 0 (^ e, f. -n.
well, gut, tn 0 ]^ I.

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

341

well, I suppose, It) 0 5 I.
well (introductory), nurt.
well-done, gar.
west, SB eft en, m. -§.
what (of — number), iDte=

t)iclft? what day of the

month have we to-day?

ben ti^tebtelften b e § Tlo ^

nat§^ahentvix ^eute.
what, that which, whatever,

tt)a§.
what kind of, tva§ f iir ?
when, al§, inannPtrenrt.
where, U) 0 ?
wherein, in what or which,

h)ortn.
whereof, of what or which,

tv 0 i:)cin.
whereout, out of what or

which, Wotan§.
wherewith, with what or

which, tv 0 mxt.
whether, ob.
which, (ttjeld^), tDeld^er;

rel. ber or treld^er.
while, tva^icenh, tnbem.
white, tD e i fe.

whitebread, SSetfehrot, n. -§.
who, whoever, he who, tt) e r.
whole, gang,
why, tuarum.
why (exclamation), abet,

bod> \a.
wife, grau, f. -en, @ema^==

Itn, f. -nen.
will, SBtlle (n), m. -§.
will, tt) 0 n e n, irreg. N.
William, SB 1 1 5 e I m, m. -^.
William street, ^xl^elxn^

ft r a 6 e, A -n.

willing (be — ), tnollen.
wind, SB t n b, m. -t^, -c.
window, genfter, n. -§, -.
wine, SBetn, m. -(e)§, -e.
winter, SB i n t e r, m. -§, -.
wise, in no wise, auf fetne

SB e t f c, Mne§WeQ§.
wish, 2B u n f (^, m. -c§,

-iinfcCje.
with, mtt (dat.).
with, at the house of, bet

(dat).
without, o^ne (ace).
woman, gran, /. -en.
wonder (I — ), e§ tnnn^

b e r t mt(^, impers.
wood, ^olg, n. -ti, -e or -61^

aer.
wood, grove, SBalb, m. -c§,

-alber.
woolen, in 0 n e n.
word, SBort, n. -(e)§, -e

or -otter.
work,.?][rbett, f. -en.
work, arbetten.
world, SB e 1 1, f. -en.
write, fd^reiben, O.
write over, nm^fd^retben, O.
wrong, nnredjt.
wrong (be — ), unred^t ^a^

ben.

year, '^a^v, n. -c§, -e.

yellow, gelb.

yes, i a; o yes, bod^.

yesterday, g e ft e r n.

yet, nod^ ; yet, however, bod§.

342

ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY

yet (not — ), nod^ n t d^ t.
yonder, bort.
you, b u, (5ie.

young, lung.
young lady, grctuletn.
your, betn, ^^r.

INDEX

The references are to Pages, and {in smaller figures above the
line to) sections.

^btaut, 35, ^ 50, \
ACCENT 10, ^^; in inseparable
and separable verbs, 126,

^ Note 28.

ACCUSATIVE CASE, office of,

15, ^ 244; nominative and
accusative have the same
form in feminine and neu-
ter, 16, ^; prepositions
governing dat. or ace, 53,
Note 12 ; in expressions of
time " when ? " and " how
long? " 86, Note 19; place
of dat. and ace. depending
upon the same verb, 91,
Note 21, 189, ^^; preposi-
tions governing, 39, Note
10, 248; after verbs of
measure, 245, ^; absolute,
245, '.

ADDRESS, pronouns in, 19,
Note I ; 70, Note 14.

ADJECTIVES, of nationality
not written with capital
initial, 3, ^ \ attributive,
103, '; predicate, 103, ^; as
adverb, 104, ®; as noun.

103,

113, ; comparison

of, 1 19 f f . ; when declined,
104, ^; declension of, 104,
^"^^; first declension of,
104, *; irregular compari-
son of, 121, Note 26; sec-
ond declension of, iii, ^*;
second declension, class I
(after ber^words), iii,
^~^" ; second declension,
class II, after ein- words),

113,

governing the

genitive, 246, the dative,
246, the accusative, 247.

ADJUNCTS OF THE VERB, Order

of, in the sentence, 188,
"-'°; nouns, 189, ''' '' ';
personal and reflexive
pronouns, 190, ^^' ^ ; ad-
verbs, 190, ^^* ^ ; preposi-
tions, 191, ^^ 251, ^ ^
ADVERB, 225, '*~^^; compound
adverb instead of preposi-
tion with demonstrative,
22, ^°, or relative pronoun,
84, Note 18; adjective
used as, 104, ®; comparison
of, 119, ^ *; order of in
the sentence, 190, ^^" ^

343

344

INDEX

ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS,
228, '\

ALPHABET, German, i ; use
of capitals, 3, ^; 19, Note
I, 112, ^ 103, °; in German
script, 271.

al§ (when), Appendix 255.

am, with superlative of ad-
jective, 119, ^

ARRANGEMENT, of the Sen-
tence, 61, Note 13; 70,
Note 15; 78, Note 16;
Lessons XXV and XXVL

ARTICLE (definite), serves to
introduce German declen-
sion, 15; declension of,

16, ^; to be prefixed in
naming German nouns,

17, Remark; abbreviated
and appended to preced-
ing v^ord, 17, Remark; for
English possessive, 23,
Note 4 ; used when we do
not have it in English,
Appendix 240; separated
by intervening words
from its noun, 189, ",
211, *.

ARTICLE (indefinite), declen-
sion of, 28, *; omitted in
German, 241.

ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE, 103, ^

auf§, with superlative of

adverb, 120, ^
AUXILIARIES, of tcusc, 57, *~'^ ;

fetn instead of ^aben, 58,^ ;
^ of mood see " modal

AUXILIARIES " ; of passive,

172,

' causative " aux-

iliary, 151,

BRACKETS, how uscd in the
Exercises, 19, Remark.

CAPITAL LETTERS, USC of, 3, ^

103, ^ 112, ^; in pronouns
of address, 19, Note i.

CARDINAL NUMERALS, SS,

Note 8, 41.
CASES, 16, ^; table of case
endings in first noun-de-
clension, 76, ^^; different
cases in German and
English after a verb, 94,
Note 22; in second noun-
declension, 96, ^; table of
noun-declensions, 98 ; in
class IL of second adjec-
tive-declension, 113, ".

" CAUSATIVE AUXILIARY,"

isi, ".

CHARACTER, German printed,
I ; written, 271.

-f^cn, -letn, declension of
nouns in, 76, ^^; significa-
tion of, 78, Note 17; gen-
der and declension of, not
indicated in the vocabu-
laries, 2yy, ^

CLASSES, in first declension
of nouns, 75, " ; in second
declension of adjectives,
III, ^ ^ ".

COMMAND OR WISH, USC of

the subjunctive to ex-
press, 218, ^ 220, ^

COMPARISON, of adjectives
and adverbs, Lesson XVI,
diminishing, 121, ^

COMPOUND ADVERBS, uscd in-
stead of preposition with

INDEX

345

relative or demonstrative
pronoun, 84, Note 18.
COMPOUND NOUNS, declcn-
sion and gender of, 75, ^\
91, Note 20; in -mann
have -leute in plural, 129,
Note 2^,

COMPOUND RELATIVES, 9O, ^

COMPOUND TENSES, formation
of, 57, *~* ; paradigm of, 59,
^°; position of, in the sen-
tence, 61, Note 13, 188, '',
191, ^^; of ^aben, fein,
iDerben, 66-69; in sub-
junctive, 142, ^

COMPOUND VERBS, SCC INSEP-
ARABLE and SEPARABLE
VERBS.

CONDITION, expressed by in-
version of subject and
verb, 70, Note 15, 144,
Note 30, 196, ^\ sub-
junctive of, 141, ^

CONDITIONAL MOOD, I4I, ^
CONDITIONAL SENTENCE, the

clause following intro-
duced by fo, 220, Remark.

CONJUGATION OF VERBS, Ncw

and Old, 35, *~^; New, 36,
'-^^ Old, 43, '"'". See also

VERBS.

CONJUNCTIONS, 228-9; gene-
ral connectives, 196, ^ Ap-
pendix, 254 ; adverbial, 78,
Remark, 228, ^^; subor-
dinating, 197, ^^^^ Appen-
dix, 255.

CONSONANT SOUNDS, English
equivalents, 4-9; exercise
on, 12.

CONTRACTIONS, Scarcity of in
German, 24, Footnote 2.

bamit (m order that) intro-
duces transposed sen-
tences, 78, Note 16, 197,
^"; followed by the sub-
junctive, 219, ^

ha§, referring to plural num-
ber and different genders,
22, I

ba^, introduces transposed
sentences, 78, Note 16, 197,
^^ ; when expressing a pur-
pose followed by the sub-
junctive, 219, ^; omission
of, causes change from
transposed to normal or-
der, 197, 'I

DATIVE CASE, officc of, i6, ®;
Appendix 243 ; always
ends in n in plural, 16, ^;
as indirect object after a
verb, 16, ®; prepositions
governing, 45, Note 11;
prepositions governing
dat. or ace, 53, Note 12;
e (in parenthesis) may be
dropped, 76, ^^ ; order of
dat. and ace. depending
upon the same verb, 91,
Note 21, 188, ''; after a
verb where an objective
case is used in English,
94, Note 22 ; of possession,
85, Footnote 2 ; with verbs.
Appendix 246; with adj.
and adv.. Appendix 246;
prepositions, Appendix
248.

346

INDEX

DAY, time of, 136, Note 29;
I39> Conversation 17.

DAY OF THE MONTH, 8i, Vo-
cabulary.

DAYS OF THE WEEK, ']2, Vo-
cabulary.

DECLENSION, general intro-
duction to, 15-16; of
nouns, a table of, 98;
see nouns; of compound
nouns, 91, Note 20; of ad-
jectives, see adjectives.

DEFINITE ARTICLE, SCC \itX.

bein (possessive adjective),
declension of, 28, ^

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS,

97, ^

bcnn ( for) , does not require
transposed order of sen-
tence, 188, ".

DEPENDENT SENTENCE, ar-
rangement of, 197, ^".

ber and ireld^er, may
both introduce a relative
clause, 90, \

ber (definite article), de-
clension of, 16, ^; "ber"
ap-

words, 21, ^ ^, III,

pended in abbreviated
form to preceding word,
17, Remark; for English
possessive, 23, Note 4;
where we do not have it
in English, Appendix 240 ;
declension of adjective
after, iii, ^

ber (demonstrative pro-
noun), declension of, 97/.

ber (relative pronoun), de-
clension of, 90, ^

" ber " WORDS, 21, ^, III, ^"^;
declension of adjective
after, iii, *~^.

'bxt^ (biefer), declension of,
21, ^

biefe^ referring to plural
number and different
genders, 22, ^

DIMINUTIVES, in -d)en and
-letn, 76, '', 78, Note
17-

DIPHTHONGS, table of Eng-
lish equivalents of, 4-9;
Exercise on, 12.

DIRECT OBJECT, of a trausitivc
verb, 16, ®; in English not
always so in German, 94,
Note 22.

bo(^, f(^on, etc., how used
and importance of, 78, Re-
mark.

bu, how used, 19, Note i ;
yi, ^^ 70. Note 14 ; declen-
sion of, 69.

biirfen, signification of, 151,
^^; conjugation of, 153, ^*;
uses, 149, ^"^l

t, in personal endings of the
verb, 36, ""^%- when in-
serted before preterit end-
ing, 2>7, ^^ \ in gen. and dat.
of nouns,. 76, ^*.

ein (indefinite article), de-
clension of, 28, *; (num-
eral), declension and uses
of, 33, Note 8.

" ein " WORDS, 28, ^^ ; declen-
sion of adjective after,

113, "-"•

INDEX

347

etntge (some), 23, Note 3;
III, \

-el, nouns in, 76, ^l

EMPHASIS, inversion to ex-
press, 196, ^

-en, nouns in, 76, ^^

ENDINGS, of nouns and ad-
jectives, see CASES.

ENDINGS, of verbs, see per-
sonal ENDINGS.

ENGLISH AND GERMAN, Com-
parison between, with ref-
erence to the pronuncia-
tion, 3, ®"^"; periphrastic
forms of the verb, 19, Note
2, 39, Note 9 ; order of the
sentence, 187, ^ ^ 195, ',
I97j ^; preposition with
case and compound ad-
verb, 84, Note 18; differ-
ent cases after a verb, 94,
Note 22; use of the defi-
nite article, 23, Note 4 ; use
of the passive voice, 173,
^^; use of reflexive verbs,
I79> *; genitive after re-
flexives, 182, Note 40;
use of impersonal verbs,
182, ^"; use of the present
and perfect tenses, 66, °;
use of the subjunctive,
218, ^'®; tenses in indirect
statement, 219, Note; use
of the perfect and preterit
tenses, 66, ^; words his-
torically related, see the
Vocabularies.

entlDcber, does not require
transposed order of sen-
tence, 188, '\

er, declension of, 78.

-ex, nouns in, 76, ".

e§, declension of, 78; mean-
ing " there," 27, Footnote
I, 30, Note 7; in imper-
sonal verbs, 181, ^""; sub-
stitute for adjectives and
nouns, 18, Footnote i.

e§ gibt, e§ ift, (there is, there
are), distinction between,
30, Note 7.

ettva§, translates some when,
23, Note 3.

euer (gen. plural of bu), 69.

euer (possessive adjective),
declension of, 28, ^"®.

FEMININE NOUNS, rulcS for,

237 ; do not change for de-
clension in the singular,
75, ®; in first declension,
74, \ 76, ", 83, ' ; in sec-
ond declension, 97, *, ^;
in -in, 99, Note 24. See

also GENDER.
FIRST DECLENSION, of UOUUS,

74, *~^^; of adjectives, 103,
1-12

FOREIGN WORDS, pronuncia-
tion of, 10, ".

FRENCH AND GERMAN, Com-
parison between, with ref-
erence to the pronuncia-
tion, ox 7, ii 8; use of the
passive voice, 175, ^; in-
definite pronoun in, 25,
Note 5.

fiir, in tva^ fiir (what kind
of), 63, 84, Vocabulary.

FUTURE TENSE, how formed,

348

INDEX

58, ®; of conjecture, 92,
footnote 7.

qe^, used to form past par-
ticiple, 36, ^; omitted in
inseparable verbs, 128, ^^;
omitted in geiDorben as
auxiliary of passive, 172, ^

geben, inflection of the
simple tenses indicative,
44, ^°; of the subjunctive,
144, .

GENDER^ general remarks on,

15, ^ °; of infinitives used
as nouns, 205, " ; of nouns
in d)en and letn, 78, " ; of
nouns in el, en, ex, 76, ^^ ;
of nouns in !unft, n\§, and
fal, 83, '*; of compound
nouns, 75, ^\ 91, Note 20;
of nouns in -in, 99, Note
24; See Appendix, 237,

238 ; also MASCULINE,
FEMININE, and NEUTER.
GENITIVE CASE, officC of,

16, ^ 243 ; ending in
nouns, 75, '^, 96, '^; must
be known in order to de-
cline a noun, 75, ";
whether -e§, or-g, 75//*;
after reflexive verbs, 182,
Note 32; mode of indica-
tion of in the vocabula-
ries, 277, ^; with prepo-
sitions. Appendix 243 ;
verbs, Appendix 245 ; adj.,
Appendix 246; adverbial,
Appendix 243, ^

GERMAN PRINTED CHARAC-
TER, I ; written, 287.

^abcn, inflection of present
indicative of, 23; of pre-
terit indicative of, 29, ';
used as tense auxiliary,
57, *, ^ ; distinguished from
fein, 58, ^; inflection of
compound tenses indica-
tive of, 67; simple tenses
subjunctive of, 142, ^

have (let, cause), 151, ^

HOUR, of the day, mode of
expressing, 136, Note 29,
Conversation, 17.

how long? when? expres-
sions of time in answer
to, 86, Note 19.

HYPHEN, indicates separable
verbs in the vocabularies,
277, '.

\^, not written with a capi-
tal, 3, ^; declension of, 61.

if, expressed by inverted
order of sentence, 70,
Note 15, 196, ^

IMPERATIVE MOOD, formation
of> Z7i ^^; place supplied
by the subjunctive, 220, ^

IMPERFECT TENSE, SCC PRE-
TERIT.

IMPERSONAL VERBS, defini-
tion of, 181, ^; proper im-
personals, 181, ^; verbs
used like proper imper-
sonals, 181, ®; more com-
mon in German than in
English, 182, ^^] no new
mode of inflection, 182, ".

-in, feminine nouns in, 99,
Note 24.

INDEX

349

in order that, expressed by
'tia'^, batnit, with the sub-
junctive, 78, Note 16,
219, '.

INDEFINITE ARTICLE, SeC AR-
TICLE (indefinite).

INDICATIVE MOOD, nature of,
2j8, *. See also verbs.

INDIRECT OBJECT, dative the
case of, 16, ^; order in
sentence, 91, Note 21,
189, ''.

INDIRECT STATEMENT, SUb-

junctive of, 219.
INFINITIVE MOOD, ending of,
36, * ; place of, in the sen-
tence, 39, Footnote, 61,
Note 13, 188, '\ 191, '')
gender of, when used as
noun, 205, "; omission
after the "modal auxil-
iaries," 149, *; active
translated by passive, 205,
^^; not preceded by gu
after what verbs, 149, ^
204, ^^ ^*; two at the end
of a transposed sentence,
191, ^®; omission of sub-
ject, 201, ^; used instead
of the past participle in
"modal auxiliaries," I50,l

INSEPARABLE PREFIXES, 125,

*-*^ ; separable prefixes
used as, 136, Note 28,
meaning, 126, ^^ See also
in German-English Vo-
cabulary.

INSEPARABLE VERBS, 125, ^"^^ ;

inflection of, 128, ^^

INTERJECTIONS, 23O, ^®.

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN,

89, \
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCE,

order of, 70, Note 15,
106, ^

INTRANSITIVE VERBS, fettl aS

auxiliary in compound
tenses, 58, I

INVERTED SENTENCE, Ordcr

of, 31, Footnote i ; 46,
Footnote 4, 70, Note 15,
187, ^; in what cases re-
quired, 196, ^; to express
a condition, 70, Note 15,
144, Note 30, 196, ^; not
required after general
connectives or adverbial
conjunctions, 188, ^\

IRREGULAR COMPARISON, of

adjectives, 121, Note 26.

ITALICS, signification of, in

the vocabularies, 277, ^

jjen- (jener), declension of,
21, ^; contrasted with,
btefer, 22, ^ 97, I

feirt, declension of, 28, ^
fonnen, signification of, 152,
Note 13; dependent verb
often not expressed, 149/,
does not take 3U before a
following infinitive, 204,
"; conjugation of, 153,
^*; infinitive used for
participle, 150, **; further
uses of, 151, ^\

laffen, "causative auxilia-
ry," 151, ®; does not take

350

INDEX

5U before a following in-
finitive, 204, '', 205, ^^;
further uses, 175, ^
let (have, cause), see laffen.

LETTERS OF THE ALPHABET,

printed, i, written, 171.
See also alphabet.

matt, meaning of, 25, Note
5 ; difference between
man and fte in translating
they, 30, Note 6; oblique
cases of, 25, Note 5.

tnand^- (man(^er), declen-
sion of, 21, ®.

S)^ann, distinguished from
Wen^d), 99, Note 23 ; form
of plural of, in com-
pounds, 129, Note 37.

MANNER (adverbs of), posi-
tion of, in the sentence,
190, ^

MASCULINE NOUNS, rulcS

for, 237 ; of the first de-
clension, 83, ^; in el, en,
ev, 76, ^", 89, ^; of second
declension, 96, *. See also

GENDER.

MEASURE, case of the noun
after words of, 39, Foot-
note 2, 99, Note 25.

tnein (possessive adjective),
declension of, 28, *.

" MODAL auxiliaries/' LcS-

sons XX-XXII ; defective
in English, 149, ^; substi-
tutes for, 150, *; verb de-
pending upon them often
not expressed, 149, *; do
not take gu before a fol-

lowing infinitive, 149, ^
204, ^^; inflection of,
153-4, 160-1, 167-8; infini-
tive used for participle,
150, ^; peculiar uses, 149-
167 ; signification of, see
biirfen, etc., in this index.

MODIFIED vowels, SCC Um^

laid.

mi3gen, signification of,
158, ^; dependent verb
often not expressed, 149,
*; does not take gn before
a following infinitive,
204, "; conjugation of,
160-1 ; infinitive used for
participle 150, ^; further
uses, 159.

MONOSYLLABIC NOUNS, re-
tain e (in parenthesis) in
gen. and dat., 76, ^*.

MONTHS, names of, 81, Vo-
cabulary.

MOODS, comparison between
indicative and subjunc-
tive, 141, ^"^ 218, *. See

also IMPERATIVE, INDICA-
TIVE, INFINITIVE, and SUB-
JUNCTIVE MOODS.

miiffen, signification of,
165, ^•^; dependent verb
often not expressed, 149,
*; does not take 3U before
a following infinitive,
204, ^^; conjugation of,
167, * ; infinitive used for
participle, 150, ^

NEGATIVES, modify the per-
sonal verb, 150, ^; posi-

INDEX

351

tion of in the sentence,
190, ''•
NEUTER NOUNS^ rules for,
237; in first declension,

74, °- ® ; in -(^en and -lein,
76, ^^ 78, Note 17; in class
III of first declension,
89, *. See also gender.

NEW CONJUGATION, charac-
teristics of, 35, °*; forma-
tion of, 36, *"'°; inflection
of a verb of, 37, "*"; list of
irregular verbs of. Ap-
pendix 269.

NEW SOUNDS, in German,

4-8.

nid^t, position of, in the sen-
tence, 40, Footnote 2.

NOMINATIVE CASE, officC of,

16, ^; nominative and ac-
cusative the same in fem-
inine and neuter, 16, ^;
plural, ending of, 75, ^^
96, ^; must be known in
order to decline a noun,

75, ^®; plural, mode of in-
dication in the vocabula-
ries, 277, ^

NORMAL ORDER OF SENTENCE,

187, ', 188, '-''; not af-
fected by the general con-
nectives, 188, ^^; instead
of transposed order when
ha^ is omitted, 197, ^l
NOUNS, declension of, 74,
*""; first declension of,

75,

^; first declension.

class I, 76, '^"; excep-
tions, 241 ; class II, 83, ^'^,

exceptions, 242; class III,
89, ^ ^ exceptions, 242 ; de-
clension and gender of
compound, 75, ^\ 91, Note
21 ; second declension of,
96, *^; a table of, 98; ad-
jectives used as, 103, ^;
order of, in the sentence,
with double gender, 238,
189, '^

NUMERALS, Cardinal, 33, 41 ;
ordinal, 72, Vocabulary.

NUMERALS, meaning of, be-
fore words in the Exer-
cises, 40, Footnote.

OBJECT, indirect, 16, ®; di-
rect, of a transitive verb,
16, '.

OLD CONJUGATION, character-
istics of, 35, ^; formation
of, 43, ^~^^ ; classes and ir-
regularities, 50, '^'®; in-
flection of a verb of, see
gehen; list of verbs of,
Appendix 259.

OPTATIVE OR IMPERATIVE SEN-
TENCE, arrangement of,
196, ^

OPTATIVE USE OF THE SUB-
JUNCTIVE, 220, *.
ORDER OF THE SENTENCE,

Lessons XXV and XXVI.

PARENTHESIS, meaning of,
in the Exercises, 18, Foot-
note; 25, Footnote 3.

PARTICIPLE, formation of
past, 36, ^ 44,^ ; of present,
36, ^, 44, ^; position of, in

352

INDEX

the sentence, 6i, Note 13,

188, '', 191, ''"''; Lesson
XXVIII; declension of,
104, \

PARTITIVE CONSTRUCTION, 99,

Note 25.

PARTS OF SPEECH, names of,
in German, 64; Vocabula-
ry.

PASSIVE VOICE, nature and
formation of, 172, ^^ ; con-
jugation of a verb in the,
172, ^; distinction between
passive and form with
fein, 173, *'^; more fre-
quent in English than
German, 175, ^; passive
use of active infinite,

175, °.

PERFECT TENSE, formation

of, 58, '■'■'; use of, 66,
5. 7

PERIPHRASTIC FORMS OF THE

VERB, (/ do, I am, I have
been, etc.), 19, Note 2,
39, Note 9, 47, Footnotes.
PERSONAL ENDINGS, of pres-
ent, 36, ^°; of preterit, 37,

12. 13

PERSONAL PART OF THE VERB,

position of in the sen-
tence, 187, \ 188, '\ 19s, ',
197, '.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS, USC of,

in address, 19, Note i, 37,
^*, 70, Note 14; declension
of, 61, 69, 78; place of in
the sentence, 90, Note 21,

189, ^^; reflexive use of,
180, ^

PLACE (adverbs of), position
of in the sentence, 189, ^^
190, \

PLUPERFECT TENSE, forma-
tion of, 58, '.

PLURAL, of nouns, 76, ";
dative always ends in -n;
ending determines class
in first declension of
nouns, 75, ^^; ending in
second declension, 75, ^
96, °; nouns with double,
239.

POSITIVE DEGREE OF ADJEC-
TIVES, 104, *®.

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES, def-
inite article used for, 23,
Note 4; declension of,
28, ^; pronouns, 29, ^

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS, 97, " ;
agreement of, 99, ^".

PREDICATE ADJECTIVE, IO3, **

'; its form in the super-
lative, 119, ^

PREFIXES, separable used in-
separably, 136, Note 28,
253. See also inseparable
and separable prefixes.

prepositions, contracted
with definite article, 17,
Remark ; governing dat.
or ace, 53, Note 12 and
Appendix 249 ; com-
pounded with an adverb
instead of a following
case, 84, Note 18 ; govern-
ing ace, 39, Note 10, and
Appendix 248 ; general
uses, 227, Appendix 249,
with inf. 202, *; with gen.,

INDEX

353

22^, ^*, and Appendix
247; dat., 45, Note 11, and
Appendix 248; ace, 244,
248.
PRESENT TENSE, formation
of, in the indicative, 36, ^° ;
used for English future,

65, *; for English perfect,

66, "; formation of, in the
subjunctive, 14T, ^

PRETERIT TENSE, distin-
guishes between New and
Old Conjugations, 35, ^;
formation of, in New
Conjugation, y7y ^^; i^i
Old, 43, ' and ^' '' ; in sub-
junctive, 141, *.

PRINCIPAL PARTS OF A VERB,

36, '.

PRONOUNS, possessive, 29,
^ 97, ^; agreement of, 99,
'"• personal, 61, 69, 78;

relative, 90,

mterrog-

ative, 89, ', 84, Note 18;
demonstrative, 22, ^ 97, *;
order of in the sentence,
189, '^; reflexive, 180, ^
PRONUNCIATION, remarks
on, 3, « ff. II, '\

QUANTITY^ 9, ^^l

REFLEXIVE PRONOUN, pOsitioU

of, in the sentence, 189,
" ; form of, 180, \
REFLEXIVE VERBS, definition
of, 179, ^"^; proper reflex-
ives, 179, ^; more frequent
in German than English,
179, ^; conjugation, 180,

^; followed by the geni-
tive, 182, Note 32.

REGULAR OR NORMAL ORDER

OF SENTENCE, 1 88, ^~^^.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS, declcU-

sion and use of, 90, ^"^^;
never omitted, 90, ^^; re-
quire transposed order of
sentence, 91, ^^ 197, ^^.

ROMAN, printed character,
I ; written, 271.

ROOT, of a verb, 36, ^

SCRIPT, German, 271.
SEASONS, names of, 86, Vo-
cabulary.

SECOND DECLENSION, of

nouns, 96, ^"^i of adjec-
tives, III, '^

fctn (verb), inflection of
present indicative of, 17 ;
of preterit indicative of,
29, ^; use as tense aux-
iliary, 57, ^•^•■^; distin-
guished from l)ahex\, 58,
**; inflection of compound
tenses indicative of, 67 ;
not auxihary of the pas-
sive, 173, ^; inflection cf
simple tenses subjunctive
of, 142, I

SENTENCE, ordcr of, has
three forms, 187, * ; normal
order of, 187, \ 188, ^-
^''; inverted order of, 187,
^ 195, ^"^; transposed or-
der of, 187, \ 197, ^"" ; or-
der of the verbal adjuncts
in the, 188, ''- '"'".

SEPARABLE PREFIXES, I34,

354

INDEX

^■^, 252 ; separable prefixes
used inseparably, 136,
Note 28, Appendix 253.

SEPARABLE VERBS, Conjuga-
tion of, 134, ^; separable
used inseparably, 136,
Note 28; Appendix, 253.
See also verbs.

fie, declension of, 69; both
singular and plural, 19,
Note I.

foldj- (folc^er) , declension
of, 22, ^

foUen, signification of, 165,
^~^; dependent verb often
not expressed, 149, ^ ; does
not take gu before a fol-
lowing infinitive, 204, ^^;
conjugation of, 167, ^; in-
finitive used for parti-
ciple, 150, ^

some, translation of, 23,
Note 3.

sounds, nev^, in German,

4-8.

STEM, of a verb, 36, ^
strong verbs, see old con-
jugation.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, forma-
tion of, 141, ^"®; inflection
of, 143, ''''''; nature of, 141,
^ 218, ^~^; in conditions,
220, ^; in indirect state-
ment, 219, ®; to express a
wish or command, 218, ^
220, \

SUBORDINATING CONJUNC-

TIONS, 146, Note 31, 255.

SUBSTANTIVE, SCC NOUN.
SUPBRIvATIVE DEGREE OF AD-

JECTIVES, 119, *-'^; forma-
tion of, 119, *; declension
of, 119, ^

TENSES, formation of the
compound, 57, *~^; corres-
pondence of, 65, ^~^; pres-
ent for English perfect, 66,
^; in subjunctive of indi-
rect statement, 219; per-
fect for English preterit,
66, \

there is, there are, how to
translate, 30, Note 7.

TIME (adverbs of), position
of, in the sentence, 190, ^.

TIME, expressions of, in an-
swer to "when?" "how
long?", 86, Note 19; of
day, mode of expressing,
136, Note 29 ; and Conver-
sation 17.

TRANSITIVE VERB, CaU be

turned into passive, can be
used reflexively, 175, ^
179, '.

TRANSPOSED ORDER OF SEN-
TENCE, 187, \ 197, *"'*; 47,
Footnote 4, 146, Note 31 ;
when required, 197, ^^ ;
changed to normal order
when baJ3 is omitted, 197,
" ; changed to inverted or-
der when iDCnn is omitted,
198, "; position of per-
sonal part of verb when
there are two infinitives
at end of, 191, ^l

Um'laul, nature of, 2, ^

INDEX

355

0 7, ii 8; in conjugation of
the verb, 52, ^ 141, ^ in
plural of nouns, 76, ^°; in
nouns in d^en and letn, 78,
Note 17; in feminines
with ending ^tn, 99, Note
24; in comparison of ad-
jectives, 119, ^
unfer (possessive adjec-
tive), declension of, 28,

5. 6

VARIATION, of radical vowel
in verbs of the Old Con-
jugation, 43, \ 50, \

VERBS, emphatic and pro-
gressive forms, 19, Note
2; conjugation of, 35,
'"'^ stem of, 36, "; prin-
cipal parts of, 36, '^; New
Conjugation, s^, ®~^''; per-
sonal endings of present
and preterit, 36, ''"'' ; Old
Conjugation, 43, ^~^^ ; com-
pound tenses of, 57, '''
(^ahen, fetn, ii^erbcn), 66.
^ff; inseparable and sep
arable, 125, "; inseparable.

125,

separable, 134,

*~^; separable used insep-
arably, 136, Note 28; in
the passive voice, 172,
" causative auxiliary,''
151, *; omission of gu be-
fore the infinitive of, 204,
^^; position of, in the sen-
tence. Lessons XXV and
XXVI ; order in the sen-
tence of adjuncts of, 188,
"^; reflexive, 179,'^; re-
flexive with genitive, 182,

Note 32; impersonal, 181,
^^^; conjugation of in the
subjunctive, 143, ^'^^ ; na-
ture and uses of the sub-
junctive, 218, '"'; of Old
and Irregular Conjuga-
tion, list of, 259; gov-
erning the genitive, 245 ;
the dative, 246.

VOCABULARY, Germau-Eng-
lish, 277 ; English-Ger-
man, 319.

VOICE, passive, 172, ^'^; act-
ive translated by English
passive, 175, ^' *.

VOWELS, modified, 7, 8;
quantity of, 9, ®"^^; Eng-
lish equivalents, 3, ® ff;
pronunciation of, 3, ^"^;
exercise on, 11 ; change
of, in the Old Conjuga-
tion, 52, ^ 141, \

tr)a§, declension of, 89, ^

tva§ fiir, signification of, 63,
84, Vocabulary.

WEAK VERBS, marks of, 50, ^

tt)eld)- (hjeMjcr), declension
of, 21,^; use of, 90, ^^.

tvcnn, signification of, 258.

ir»cr, declension of, 89, ^ ; sig-
nification of, 90, ^

it>crbcn, inflection of pres-
ent and preterit indicative
of, 29; use as tense aux-
iliary, 58, ®; inflection of
compound tenses of, 68,
use as auxiliary of pas-

sive, 173,

; does not take

^U before a following in-

356

INDEX

f initive, 204/^ ; forms con-
ditional mood, 141, *"'.

what kind of? what sort
of? how to translate, 6:^,
84, Vocabulary.

when, how to translate, 255,
257, 258.

when? how long? expres-
sions of time in answer
to, 86, Note 19.

WISH OR COMMAND, SUbjunC-

tive to express, 218, ^
220, \
tDoKen, conjugation of, 160,
^\ signification of, 158, \
^; principal verb often
not expressed, 149, "*; does
not take gu before a fol-

lowing infinitive, 204, ^^;
infinitive used for parti-
ciple, 150, ^; further uses,

159, ^

iDorben, instead of getr)or^
ben, in conjugation of
passive, 172, ^

WRITTEN CHARACTER, Ger-
man, Appendix 271.

YEAR, months of the, 81 ;

seasons of the, 88.
you, how to translate, 19,

Note I, 2>7, ".

gu, when omitted before a
following infinitive, 204,

THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THF, LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW

AN INITIAL PINE OF 25 CENTS

WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO il.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
. OVERDLPE.

^t^ 7 -JQO-,

' * <>^o7

. g 1S38

JUN 8 1939

OCT 141941 W

AUG 5 -QA-l

OCT 7 i5^

-M

ISMarOoCiD

APR 2 3 1956 Lli

■

YB 55150

926706

y

THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY